Home

Tektronix DPO4000 User's Manual

1. 2 3 Constructed ebenso P toe hen 2 5 Arg ment PT 2 7 Command Groups iab 2 11 Acquisition Command 2 2 2 11 Alias Command d Vae de 2 12 Bus Command Group ER eed tete oet e ced qua pru E Gt doe ie 2 13 Calibration and Diagnostic Command 2 eme emen 2 17 Cursor Command Group erc or vaane cates Ne ES EE oaa p DUREI T 2 17 Display Command ee sme ee eee rese 2 19 Ethernet Command Group blended pases it 2 20 File System Command 2 2 eee sme see heres 2 21 Hard Copy Command 22 2 22 Horizontal Command Group 2 24 Mark Command Groupie ER wens cad Ie Pu E Ve RES De Rcg Mos 2 24 Math Command see se e e ne ene EEE ES 2 26 Measurement Command 2 2 27 Miscellaneous Command 2 30 PictBridge Command 2 enn EE een EEE een EES 2 32 Power Command Group 2 32
2. VALUE 11001101 sets the FLEXRAY data value for triggering to 11001101 TRIGGER 1 FLEXRAY DATA VALUE might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX indicating the FLEXRAY data value is don t care TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray EOFTYPE Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the end of file type used for FLEXRAY trigger Trigger TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray EOFTYPE STATic DYNAMic ANY TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray EOFTYPE STATIc specifies triggering the STATIC end of file type DYNAM c specifies triggering on the DYNAMIC end of file type ANY specifies triggering on a STATIC or DYNAMIC end of file type TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY EOFTYPE ANY sets the FLEXRAY end of file type to ANY TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY EOFTYPE might return TRIGGER A BUS Bl FLEXRAY EOFTYPE STATIC indicating the FLEXRAY end of file type is STATIC TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray ERRTYPE Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the error type be used for FLEXRAY trigger Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray ERRTYPE icRCHeader CRCTrailer SYNCFrame STARTUupnosync NULLFRStatic NULLFRDynami cj TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray ERRTYPE CRCHeader sets the FLEXRAY error type for a trigger to CRCHeader CRCTrai ler sets the FLEXRAY error type for a trigger to CRCTrailer 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 407 Commands Listed Alpha
3. Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Table 2 40 Advanced Math expression elements cont Expression Description FFT INTG DIFF Executes a Fast Fourier Transform integration or differentiation operation on the expression that follows The FFT operator must be the first left most operator in an expression All these operations must end with a right parenthesis AMPlitude AREa BURst CARea CMEan CRMs DELay FALL FREQuenoy HIGH LOW MAXimum MEAN MINImum NDUty NOVershoot NWidth PDUTy PERIod PHAse PK2pk POVershoot PWidth RISe RMS Executes the selected measurement operation on the waveform active or reference that follows All these operations must end with a right parenthesis LOG EXP SQRT SINE COSINE TANGENT Executes trigonometric and other functions All these operations must end with a right parenthesis VAR1 VAR2 Adds the user defined variable to the expression Refer to the MATHVAR lt x gt command Executes an addition subtraction multiplication or division operation on the following expression and are also unary use to negate the expression that follows lt gt lt gt FL 58 Executes relational and logical operations Parentheses provide a way to control evaluation order in an expression The comma is used to separate the from and to wavefor
4. Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Table 2 39 FPAnel TURN arguments cont Argument Description HORZScale Horizontal Scale knob 1 TRIGLevel Trigger Level knob VERTPOS lt n gt Vertical Position knob VERTSCALE lt n gt Vertical Scale knob ZOOM Inner zoom knob FPANEL TURN TRIGLEVEL 10 duplicates turning the front panel Trigger Level knob clockwise by 10 units GPIBUsb ADDress Query Only Group Syntax Returns the current GPIB address setting for a connected TEK USB 488 adaptor module Miscellaneous GPIBUsb ADDress GPIBUsb ID Query Only Returns the identification string of the connected TEK USB 488 adaptor module and firmware version If a TEK USB 488 2 module is not connected the system returns Not detected Group X Miscellaneous Syntax GPIBUsb ID HARDCopy No Query Form Sends a hard copy of the screen display to the currently active printer using the current palette and layout settings Group Hard Copy 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 181 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples HARDCopy START HARDCopy WAI CLS START sends a block of data representing the current screen image to the requested port The data sent is in the image format specified by the SAVe IMAGe FILEFormat command and the compression level is controlled by the selected format BM
5. SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY FRAMEID QUALIFIER EQUAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY FRAMEID VALUE XXXXXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY FRAMETYPE NORMAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY HEADER CRC 804000 DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Appendix Factory Defaults Table C 1 Default values cont Command Default value SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY HEADER CYCLECOUNT XXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY HEADER FRAMEID XXXXXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY HEADER INDBITS XXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY HEADER PAYLENGTH XXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 12C ADDRESS MODE ADDR7 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 I2C ADDRESS TYPE USER SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 I2C ADDRESS VALUE XXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 12C CONDITION START SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 I2C DATA DIRECTION NOCARE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 12C DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 12C DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 LIN CONDITION SYNCFIELD SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 LIN DATA HIVALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 LIN DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 LIN DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 LIN DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 LI
6. 6 351123E 6 VERT2 3 179753E 6 VERT3 6 40943E 6 VERT4 6 403E 6 MEASUrement INDICators HORZ lt x gt Query Only Returns the position of the specified horizontal measurement indicator lt x gt where lt x gt can be 1 2 3 or 4 2 214 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Measurement MEASUrement INDICators HORZ lt x gt MEASUREMENT INDICATORS HORZ1 might return MEASUREMENT INDICATORS HORZ1 2 0E 3 indicating that horizontal indicatorl has a value of 2mV MEASUrement INDICators NUMHORZ Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the number of horizontal measurement indicators currently being displayed Measurement MEASUrement INDICators NUMHORZ MEASUREMENT INDICATORS NUMHORZ might return MEASUREMENT INDICATORS NUMHORZ 2 indicating there are currently 2 horizontal lines drawn on the graticule The indicators show where the measurement specified by MEASUrement INDICators STATE is being performed MEASUrement INDICators NUMVERT Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the number of vertical measurement indicators currently being displayed Measurement MEASUrement INDICators NUMVERT MEASUREMENT INDICATORS NUMVERT might return MEASUREMENT INDICATORS NUMVERT 2 indicating there are currently 2 vertical lines drawn on the graticule The indicators show where the measurement
7. EQUal UNEQual LESSEQual MOREEQual INrange OUTrange TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray CYCLECount QUAL i fier Arguments LESSThan sets the FLEXRAY cycle count qualifier to less than MOREThan sets the FLEXRAY cycle count qualifier to more than EQUal sets the FLEXRAY cycle count qualifier to equal UNEQual sets the FLEXRAY cycle count qualifier to not equal LESSEQual sets the FLEXRAY cycle count qualifier to less than or equal sets the FLEXRAY cycle count qualifier to greater than or equal INrange sets the FLEXRAY cycle count qualifier to in range OUTrange sets the FLEXRAY cycle count qualifier to out of range Examples TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT QUALIFTER LESSTHAN sets the cycle count qualifier to LESSTHAN TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT QUALIFIER might return TRIGGER A BUS Bl FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT QUALIFIER EQUAL indicating that the cycle count qualifier is set to EQUAL TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CYCLEcount VALue Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for FLEXRAY cycle count low value Group Trigger 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 403 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments Examples TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray CYCLECount VALue lt QString gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CYCLEcount lt QString gt is a quoted string that is the FLEXRAY binary data string that is the cycle count low value TRIGGE
8. PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC 6 5 4 2 1 Jo PON URQ EXE DDE QYE OPC Event Event Event 7 6 5 4 2 1 Jo PON URQ EXE DDE QYE OPC Bye ESB ESB Figure 3 6 Status and Event Handling Process 3 6 Event Queue Output Queue When an event occurs a signal is sent to the DESER 1 If that type of event is enabled in the DESER that is if the bit for that event type is set to 1 the appropriate bit in the SESR is set to one and the event is recorded in the Event Queue 2 If the corresponding bit in the ESER is also enabled 3 then the ESB bit in the SBR is set to one 4 When output is sent to the Output Queue the MAV bit in the SBR is set to one 5 When a bit in the SBR is set to one and the corresponding bit in the SRER is enabled 6 the MSS bit in the SBR is set to one and a service request is generated 7 804000 DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Status and Events Synchronization Methods Overview Although most commands are completed almost immediately after being received by the oscilloscope some commands start a process that requires time For example once a single seque
9. Nr Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMOutpre BYT_Or Group Syntax Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order WFMOUTPRE BN FMT RP specifies that outgoing waveform data will be in positive integer format WFMOUTPRE BN FMT might return WFMOUTPRE BN FMT RI indicating that the outgoing waveform data is currently in signed integer format Sets or returns the data width for the outgoing waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command Changing WFMOutpre BYT Nr also changes WFMoOutpre BIT Nr Waveform Transfer WFMOutpre BYT Nr lt NR1 gt WFMOutpre BYT Nr DATa SOUrce WFMOutpre BIT Nr lt NR1 gt is the number of bytes per data point and can be 1 or 2 WFMOUTPRE BYT NR 1 sets the number of bytes per outgoing waveform data point to 1 which is the default setting WFMOUTPRE BYT NR might return WFMOUTPRE BYT NR 2 indicating that there are 2 bytes per outgoing waveform data point Sets or returns which byte of binary waveform data is transmitted first during a waveform data transfer when data points require than one byte This specification only has meaning when WFMOutpre ENCdg is set to BIN and WFMoOutpre BYT Nr is 2 Changing WFMOutpre BYT Or also changes DATa ENCdg if DATa ENCdg is not ASCIi Waveform Transfer WFMOutpre BYT Or LSB MSB WFMOutpre BYT Or 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 489 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Relate
10. 0X 2 lt OK OK DX OK OK OK OK OK lt OK OK lt OK OK PX PX PX PX OK OK PX PX OK OOK lt OK x 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual C 19 Appendix Factory Defaults Table C 1 Default values cont Command Default value SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT D5 X SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT D6 X SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT D7 X SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT D8 X SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT D9 X SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT MATH X SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT REF 1 X SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT REF2 X SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN TRUE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN LESSLIMIT 8 00E 09 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN MORELIMIT 8 00E 09 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD CH1 0 00E 00 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD CH2 0 00E 00 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD MATH 0 00E 00 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD REF1 0 00E 00 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD REF2 0 00E 00 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD CH1 0 00E 00 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD CH2 0 00E 00 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD MATH 0 00E 00 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD REF1 0 00E 00
11. MOST OUT VALue bin is the data in binary format SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa SiZe Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the length of the data string for an SPI trigger search if the search condition is MISO MOSI or MISOMOSI SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B x SPI DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B x SPI DATa SIZe NRI is the data string length in bytes SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS SOUrce Conditions Group Syntax Sets or returns a bus serial search lt x gt is the search number This command requires a DPO4AUTO or DPO4EMBD application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS SOUrce B1 B2 B3 B4 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS SOUrce 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 361 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Arguments B1 specifies the Bus 1 source B2 specifies the Bus 2 source B3 specifies the Bus 3 source B4 specifies the Bus 4 source SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A EDGE SLOpe Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the slope for an edge trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A EDGE SLOpe RISe FALL SE
12. Vertical CH lt x gt OFFSet lt NR3 gt CH x OFFSet CH lt x gt POSition lt NR3 gt is the offset value for the specified channel x CH3 OFFSet 2 0E 3 sets the offset for channel 3 to 2 mV CH4 OFFSet might return CH4 OFFSET 1 0000E 03 indicating that the offset for channel 4 is set to 1 mV Sets or returns the vertical position of channel lt x gt where x is the channel number The position value is applied to the signal before it is digitized Increasing the position value of a waveform causes the waveform to move up Decreasing the position value causes the waveform to move down The position value determines the vertical graticule coordinate at which input signal values minus the present offset setting for that channel are displayed For example if the position for Channel 3 is set to 2 0 and the offset is set to 3 0 then input signals equal to 3 0 units are displayed 2 0 divisions above the center of the screen at 1 V div Vertical 804000 DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax CH lt x gt POSition lt NR3 gt CH lt x gt POSition Related Commands CH lt x gt OFFSet REF lt x gt VERTical POSition MATH 1 VERTical POSition Arguments lt NR3 gt is the position value for channel lt x gt in divisions from the center graticule The range is 8 to 8 divisions Examples CH2 POSition 1 3 positions the Channel 2 input signal 1 3 divisions above
13. 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold DATa SOUrce Sets or returns the data source setting for an setup hold trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number You cannot specify the same source for both clock and data Group Search Syntax DPO Models SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold DATa SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 MSO Models SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A SETHOld DATa SOUrce lt wfm gt lt wfm gt lt wfm gt lt wfm gt lt wfm gt lt wfm gt lt wfm gt lt wfm gt lt wfm gt lt wfm gt lt wfm gt lt wfm gt lt wfm gt lt wfm gt lt wfm gt lt wfm gt lt wfm gt lt wfm gt SEARCH SEARCH X TRIGger A SETHold DATa SOUrce Related Commands SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A SETHold CLOCKk SOUrce Arguments Models CH1 CH4 specifies an input channel as the search source MATH specifies the math waveform as the search source REF specifies the reference waveform as the search source MSO Models lt wfm gt be any combination of the channel math reference and digital waveforms SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold DATa THReshold Sets or returns the data threshold setting for an setup hold trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Group Search Synta
14. Command Description DATa SOUrce Sets or returns the location of waveform data transferred from the oscilloscope DATa STARt Sets or returns the starting point in waveform transfer DATa STOP Sets or returns the ending data point in waveform transfer WAVFrm Returns a branch query containing waveform data in either binary or ASCII format waveform formatting data and the location of the waveform data source WFMInpre Returns the waveform formatting specification to be applied to the next incoming CURVE command data Nr Sets or returns the number of bits per binary waveform point for the incoming waveform WFMInpre BN_Fmt WFMInpre BYT_Nr Sets or returns the format of binary data for the incoming waveform Sets or returns the data width for the incoming waveform WFMInpre BYT_Or Sets or returns the byte order of waveform points for the incoming waveform WFMinpre ENCdg WFMInpre NR_Pt Sets or returns the type of encoding for incoming waveform data Sets or returns the number of points in the incoming waveform record WFMInpre PT_Fmt Sets or returns the point format of incoming waveform data WFMInpre PT_Off This query always returns a 0 WFMInpre XINer Sets or returns the horizontal sampling interval between incoming waveform points WFMInpre XUNit Sets or returns the horizontal units of the incoming waveform WFMInpre XZEro Sets or returns the time
15. IDANDDATA WAKEup SLEEP ERROR SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN CONDition SYNCField specifies to search on the sync field IDentifier specifies to search on the identifier DATA specifies to search on the data IDANDDATA specifies to search on the identifier and the data WAKEup specifies to search on wake up 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 353 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Examples SLEEP specifies to search on sleep ERROR specifies to search on errors SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN CONDITION might return SEARCH 1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN CONDITION SYNCFIELD indicating a search on the sync field SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa HIVALue Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for LIN searches if the search condition is ID or IDANDDATA Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa HIVALue Qstring SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS lt gt LIN DATa HIVALue lt QString gt is a quoted string of 15 05 or Xs representing the binary data string to be used for LIN searches if the search condition is ID or IDANDDATA SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA HIVALUE might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS Bl LIN DATA HIVALUE O9000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000X XXXXXXXXXXXX indicating the high valu
16. BUS THReshold CH x TRIGger A LEVel CH lt x gt ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TTL specifies a TTL preset high level of 1 4V lt NR3 gt specifies the threshold level in volts Sets or returns the threshold for digital channel x where x is the digital channel number This will apply to all Search and Trigger Types that use the channel This command requires a DPO4COMP application module or RS 232C Bus BUS THReshold D x lt NR3 gt ECL TTL BUS THReshold D lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel D lt x gt ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4V lt NR3 gt specifies the threshold level in volts 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order BUS UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Examples BUSY Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Returns Sets the upper threshold for each channel This applies to all search and trigger types that use the channel Bus BUS UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt lt NR3 gt ECL TTL BUS UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt lt NR3 gt specifies the threshold in volts ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4V BUS UPPERTHRESHOLD CH1 800 0000E 3 sets upper threshold to 800 mV BUS UPPERTHRESHOLD CH1 might return BUS UPPERTHRESHOLD CH1 800 0000 3 indicating that the CH1
17. CHA DESKew 5 0E 9 sets the deskew time for channel 4 to 5 ns CH2 DESKew might return CH2 DESKEW 2 0000E 09 indicating that the deskew time for channel 2 is set to 2 ns Sets or returns the invert function for channel x where is the channel number When on the invert function inverts the waveform for the specified channel NOTE This command inverts the waveform for display purposes only The oscilloscope does not use an inverted waveform for triggers or trigger logic inputs Vertical CH x INVert CH lt x gt INVert OFF sets the invert function for channel lt x gt to off ON sets the invert function for channel lt x gt to on 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual CH lt x gt LABel Group Syntax Arguments CH lt x gt OFFSet Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CH4 INVert ON inverts the waveform on channel 4 CH2 INVert might return CH2 INVERT 0 indicating that channel 2 is not inverted Sets or returns the waveform label for channel lt x gt where x is the channel number Vertical CH lt x gt LABel lt Qstring gt CH lt x gt LABel Qstring is an alphanumeric string of text enclosed in quotes that contains the text label information for the channel x waveform The text string is limited to 30 characters Sets or returns the vertical offset for channel x where x is the channel number This command offsets the vertic
18. CSV format Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module 2 266 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Power Syntax POWer HARMonics RESults SAVe String POWer HARMonics RESults THDF Query Only Returns the Total Harmonic Distortion THD in percentage measured as a ratio to the RMS value of the fundamental component of the source waveform Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Group Power Syntax POwer HARMonics RESults THDF Examples POWER HARMONICS RESULTS THDF might return POWER HARMONICS RESULTS THDF 40 indicating that the THDF is set to 40 POWer HARMonics RESults THDR Query Only Returns the Total Harmonic Distortion THD in percentage measured as a ratio to the RMS value of the source waveform Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Group Power Syntax X POWer HARMonics RESults THDR Examples POWER HARMONICS RESULTS THDR might return POWER HARMONICS RESULTS THDR 40 indicating that the THDR is set to 40 POWer HARMonics SOURce Sets or returns the source waveform for harmonics tests The voltage source waveform is specified using the POWer VOLTAGESOurce command and the current waveform is specified using the POWer CURRENTSOurce command 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 267 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Conditions Group Syntax Arg
19. Command Default value SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 CAN DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 CAN DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 CAN DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 CAN FRAMETYPE DATA SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 CAN IDENTIFIER MODE STANDARD SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 CAN IDENTIFIER VALUE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY CONDITION SOF SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT HIVALUE XXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT QUALIFIER EQUAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT VALUE XXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY DATA HIVALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY DATA OFFSET 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY EOFTYPE STATIC SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY ERRTYPE CRCHEADER SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY FRAMEID HIVALUE XXXXXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY FRAMEID QUALIFIER EQUAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY FRAMEID VALUE XXXXXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY FRAMETYPE NORMAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY HEADER CRC SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY HEADER CYCLECOUNT XXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY HEADER
20. SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER CRC Sets or returns the frame type Sets or returns the CRC portion of the binary header string SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER CYCLEcount Sets or returns the cycle count portion of the binary header string SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER FRAMEID SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray HEADER INDBits Sets or returns the frame id portion of the binary header string Sets or returns the indicator bits portion of the binary header string SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER PAYLength Sets or returns the payload length portion of the binary header string SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C ADDRess MODe SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess TYPe Sets or returns the I2C address mode to 7 or 10 Bit Sets or returns the I2C address type to 12 special addresses SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess VALue Sets or returns the binary address string to be used for 12 search SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C CONDition Sets or returns the search condition for 12C search SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa DIRection Sets or returns the 2 search condition to be valid on a READ WRITE or either SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger
21. Sets the reference levels to the default percentage values POWer REFLevel PERCent HIGH Sets or returns the top reference percent level for rise time POWer REFLevel PERCent LOW Sets or returns the low reference percent level for rise time POWer REFLevel PERCent MID lt 1 3 gt Sets or returns the mid reference percent level for waveform measurements POWer RIPPle Sets the vertical offset of the source waveform POWer RIPPle RESults AMPLitude Returns the peak to peak ripple measurement 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Table 2 28 Power Commands cont Command Command Groups Description POWer RIPPle RESults MAX Returns the maximum of the peak to peak ripple measurements POWer RIPPle RESults MEAN Returns the mean of the peak to peak ripple measurements POWer RIPPle RESults MIN Returns the minimum of the peak to peak ripple measurement POWer RIPPle RESults STDdev Returns the standard deviation of the peak to peak ripple measurements POWer RIPPle SOUrce Sets or returns the source waveform for ripple tests POWer SOA LINear XMAX Sets or returns the user XMAX value for use in linear SOA calculations POWer SOA LINear XMIN Sets or returns the user XMIN value for use in linear SOA calculations POWer SOA LINear YMAX Sets or returns the user YMAX value for use in linear SOA calculations POWer SOA LINear YMIN Sets or retu
22. Syntax Examples Returns the display intensity settings Display DISplay INTENSITy DISPLAY INTENSITY might return DISPLAY INTENSITY WAVEFORM 30 GRATICULE 75 BACKLIGHT HIGH DISplay INTENSITy BACKLight Group Syntax Examples Sets and returns the waveform backlight intensity settings Display DISplay INTENSITy BACKLight LOW MEDium HIGH DISplay INTENSITy BACKLight DISPLAY INTENSITY BACKLIGHT might return DISPLAY INTEnSITY BACKLIGHT HIGH DISplay INTENSITy GRAticule 2 160 Sets and returns the display graticule intensity settings 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Display DISplay INTENSITy GRAticule lt NR1 gt DISplay INTENSITy GRAticule NR1 is the graticule intensity and ranges from 0 to 100 percent DISPLAY INTENSITY GRATICULE might return DISPLAY INTEnSITY GRATICULE 30 DISplay INTENSITy WAVEform Group Syntax Arguments Examples DISplay PERSistence Group Sets and returns the display waveform intensity settings Display DISplay INTENSITy WAVEform lt NR1 gt DISplay INTENSITy WAVEform lt NR1 gt is the waveform intensity and ranges from 1 to 100 percent DISPLAY INTENSITY WAVEFORM might return DISPLAY INTEnSITY WAVEFORM 60 as the intensity of the waveforms Sets or returns the display persistence This affects the display only NOTE When Persisten
23. Syntax Related Commands Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order This value is in units of WFMOutpre XUNit The query command will time out and an error will be generated if the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce is not turned on Waveform Transfer WFMOutpre XZEro DATa SOUrce WFMOutpre XUNit WFMOUTPRE XZERO might return WFMOUTPRE XZERO 5 6300E 9 indicating that the trigger occurred 5 63 ns before the first sample in the waveform record WFMOutpre YMUIt Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Returns the vertical scale factor per digitizing level in units specified by WFMoOutpre YUNIt for the waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command The query command will time out and an error is generated if the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce is not turned on See the description of WFMInpre Y MUIt to see how this scale factor 15 used to convert waveform sample values to volts Waveform Transfer wFMOutpre YMU1t DATa SOUrce WFMInpre Y MUIt WFMOUTPRE YMULT might return WFMOUTPRE YMULT 4 0000E 3 indicating that the vertical scale for the corresponding waveform is 100 mV div for 8 bit waveform data WFMOutpre YOFf Query Only Returns the vertical position in digitizing levels for the waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command The query command will time out and an error will be generated if the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce is not turned on 504000 and DPO4000
24. TRIGger A BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDi0 DATa QUALi fier LESSThan MOREThan EQUal UNEQual LESSEQual MOREEQual INrange OUTrange TRIGger A BUS B 1 4 AUDiO DATa QUAL if ier LESSThan sets the Audio data qualifier to less than MOREThan sets the Audio data qualifier to greater than EQUal sets the Audio data qualifier to equal UNEQual sets the Audio data qualifier to not equal LESSEQual sets the Audio data qualifier to less than or equal sets the Audio data qualifier to greater than or equal INrange sets the Audio data qualifier to in range OUTrange sets the Audio data qualifier to out of range TRIGger A BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio DATa VALue Conditions Group Syntax Arguments 2 396 Sets or returns the trigger data lower word for the AUDIO bus This command requires DPO4AUDIO application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDi0 DATa VALue String TRIGger A BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDi0 DATa VALue lt String gt specifies the trigger data lower word 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio DATa WORD Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the trigger data alignment for the AUDIO bus This command requires DPO4AUDIO application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDi0 DATa WORD EITher LEFt RIGht TRIGger A BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDi0 DATa WORD EITher aligns the tr
25. wfm lt wfm gt lt wfm gt lt wfm gt lt wfm gt lt wfm gt wfm lt wfm gt lt wfm gt TRIGger A SETHOld DATa SOUrce TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk SOUrce DPO Models lt wfm gt specifies the source channel number 15 one of CH1 CH4 EXT or AUX You can specify only one waveform on a DPO MSO Models lt wfm gt specifies the source channel numbers Each lt wfm gt be one of CH1 CH4 or DO D15 Auxin EXT or AUX is not valid as a data source TRIGGER A SETHOLD DATA SOURCE CH1 sets channel 1 as the data source for the setup and hold trigger TRIGGER A SETHOLD DATA SOURCE might return TRIGGER A LOGIC SETHOLD DATA SOURCE CH2 indicating that channel 2 is the current data source for the setup and hold trigger TRIGger A SETHold DATa THReshold Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the data voltage threshold for setup and hold trigger Trigger TRIGger A SETHOld DATa THReshold lt NR3 gt TTL TRIGger A SETHOld DATa THReshold TTL specifies the preset TTL high level of 1 4 V NR3 is the setup and hold data level in V TRIGGER A SETHOLD DATA THRESHOLD TTL specifies the preset high level of 1 4 V as the current data voltage level for the setup and hold trigger 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 449 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order TRIGGER A SETHOLD DATA THRESHOLD might return TRIGGER A SETHOLD DATA THRESHOLD 1 2000E
26. 2 202 Sets or returns the vertical position of the currently selected math type Math 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MATH 1 VERTical POSition lt NR3 gt MATH 1 VERTical POSition CH lt x gt POSition REF lt x gt VERTical POSition lt NR3 gt is the desired position in divisions from the center graticule MATHL VERTICAL POSITION 1 3E 00 positions the Math 1 input signal 1 3 divisions higher than a position of 0 MATH1 VERTICAL POSITION might return MATH1 VERTICAL POSITION 1 3000 00 indicating that the current position of Math 1 is 1 3 divisions below the center graticule MATH 1 VERTical SCAle Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the vertical scale of the currently selected math type Math MATH 1 VERTical SCAle lt NR3 gt MATH 1 VERTical SCAle CH lt x gt SCAle REF lt x gt VERTical SCAle lt NR3 gt is the scale per division in the current math vertical units The range is from 1 0E 12 through 500 0E 12 MATH1 VERTICAL SCALE 100 03 sets the Math scale to 100 mV per division MATH VERTICAL SCALE might return MATH VERTICAL SCALE 1 0000 00 indicating that the current scale setting of Math is 1 V per division MATH 1 VERTical UNIts Group Returns the math waveform vertical measurement unit value Math 504000 and D
27. 49 73 59 89 79 121 112 10 132 26 172 5 26 J Z z 4 74 5A 90 7A 122 113 TAM 133 27 173 5 27 4B 75 5B 91 7B 123 114 12 134 TA28 174 SA28 L i 4 76 5C 92 7C 124 115 TA13 135 TA29 175 SA29 M 1 4D 77 5D 93 7D 125 116 14 136 TA30 176 SA30 N 4E 78 5E 94 7E 126 117 15 137 UNT 177 0 RUBOUT 4F 79 SF 95 5 TALK SECONDARY ADDRESSES ADDRESSES OR COMMANDS Tektronix REF ANSI STD X3 4 1977 IEEE STD 488 1 1987 ISO STD 646 2973 1 Appendix A Character Set A 2 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Appendix Reserved Words CAL CLS DDT ESE ESR IDN LRN OPC PSC PUD RCL RST SAV SRE STB TRG TST WAI CHX 1NR3 7 8 A AO Al A2 4 5 6 8 9 ABORT ABOrt ABSo lute AC ACKMISS ACQ ACQLENGTH ACQuire ACTIVeprinter ADD ADDR10 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual This is a list of reserved words for your instrument Capital letters identify the required minimum spelling ADDR7 ADDRANDDATA ADDRess ADDress ADVanced ALIas ALIas ALL ALLEV ALLFields ALLLines ALLQString ALWAYS AMPLi tude AND ANY APPKey APPpwr AREa ASCII ASCIi ASCii ASSIgn ATRIGger AUDIO AUTO AUTOSet AUTOZero AUX AUXOUt AUXin AVErage Auto B BO B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 BACKLight BACKwards BANdwidth BASE BDIFFBP BINary BITDelay BITOrder BITRate BI
28. CHecksum HEADertime RESPtime FRAMetime SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS lt gt LIN ERRTYPE SYNC specifies a sync error type PARi ty specifies a parity error type CHecksum specifies a checksum error type HEADertime specifies a header time error type RESPtime specifies a response time error type RAMetime specifies a frame time error type SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN ERRTYPE might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN ERRTYPE SYNC indicating a SYNC error type SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN IDentifier VALue 2 356 Sets or returns the binary address string used for LIN search if search condition is ID or IDANDDATA 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS lt gt IDentifier VALue Qstring SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B x LIN IDentifier VALue Qstring is a quoted string specifying the binary address string to be used for LIN search if search condition is ID or IDANDDATA SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN IDENTIFIER VALUE might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN IDENTIFIER VALUE XXXXXX indicating the binary address is undefined SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt PARallel VALue Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the binary data string to be used
29. SAVe SETUp 2 326 SAVe WAV Eform 2 327 Search Commands Group 2 41 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt COPy 2 330 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt STATE 2 331 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TOTAL 2 331 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio CONDition 2 332 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio DATa HIVALue 2 332 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio DATa OFFSet 2 333 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio DATa QUA Lifier 2 333 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio DATa VALue 2 334 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio DATa WORD 2 334 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN CONDition 2 334 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa DIRection 2 335 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa QUALifier 2 336 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa SIZe 2 336 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue 2 337 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN FRAMEtype 2 337 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess MODe 2 338 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess VALue 2 338 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CONDition 2 339 Index 7 Index SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CYCLEcount HIVALue 2 339 SEARCH
30. SETUP x TIME SETUP2 TIME might return SETUP2 TIME 15 24 07 which is the setup time for channel 2 The SRE Service Request Enable command sets or returns the bits in the Service Request Enable Register For information refer to Registers Status and Error SRE NR1 SRE CLS DESE ESE ESR EVENT EVMsg FACtory STB NR1 is a value in the range from 0 through 255 The binary bits of the SRER are set according to this value Using an out of range value causes an execution error The power on default for SRER is 0 if PSC is 1 If PSC is 0 the SRER maintains the previous power cycle value through the current power cycle SRE 48 sets the bits in the SRER to binary 00110000 SRE might return 32 showing that the bits in the SRER have the binary value of 00100000 STB Read Status Byte returns the contents of the Status Byte Register SBR using the Master Summary Status MSS bit For information refer to Registers 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 389 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Related Commands Returns Examples Status and Error STB CLS DESE ESE ESR EVENT EVMsg FACtory SRE lt NR1 gt STB might return 96 showing that the SBR contains the binary value 01100000 TEKSecure No Query Form 2 390 Group Syntax This command initializes both waveform and setup memories overwriting any previously store
31. SRE STB EVENT might return EVENT 110 showing that there was an error in a command header See page 3 12 Messages 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual EVMsg Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Returns Examples EVQty Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Removes a single event code from the Event Queue that is associated with the results of the last ESR read and returns the event code along with an explanatory message For information see Event Handling Status and Error EVMsg ALLEv CLS DESE ESE ESR EVENT SRE STB The event code and message in the following format lt Event Code gt lt Comma gt lt QString gt lt Event Code gt lt Comma gt lt QString gt lt QString gt lt Message gt lt Command gt where lt Command gt is the command that caused the error and may be returned when a command error is detected by the oscilloscope As much of the command will be returned as possible without exceeding the 60 character limit of the lt Message gt and lt Command gt string combined The command string is right justified EVMSG might return EVMSG 110 Command header error Returns the number of event codes in the Event Queue This is useful when using the ALLEv query which returns the exact number of events Status and Error EVQty ALLEv EVENT EVMsg EVQTY might return EVQTY
32. 1 and X TRIGGER A BUS B1L CAN DATA VALUE 1011 sets the CAN data value to 1011 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN FRAMEtype Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the frame type fora CAN FRAMEType trigger Applies to bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module This command is only valid when the TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN CONDition is FRAMETYPE Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN FRAMEtype DATA REMote ERRor OVERLoad TRIGger A BUS B X CAN FRAMEtype DATA specifies a data frame type REMote specifies a remote frame type ERRor specifies an error frame type OVERLO d specifies an overload frame type TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN FRAMETYPE DATA sets the CAN trigger frame type to DATA TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess MODe 2 400 Sets or returns the CAN addressing mode for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number Use this command to do the following 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Trigger on ID B Trigger in IDANDDATA This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess 5 ExTended TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess MODe STandard specifies the standard addressing mode EXTended specifies the e
33. 2 185 Horizontal Command Group 2 24 HORizontal DELay MODe 2 186 HORizontal DELay TIMe 2 187 HORizontal DIGital R ECOrdlength MAGnivu 2 188 HORizontal DIGital RECOrdlength MAIN 2 188 HORizontal DIGital SAMPLERate MAGnivu 2 188 HORizontal DIGital SAMPLERate MAIN 2 188 HORizontal PREViewstate 2 189 HORizontal RECOrdlength 2 189 HORizontal S AMPLERate 2 190 HORizontal 2 186 HORizontal POSition 2 188 HORizontal SCAle 2 190 ID 2 191 IDN 2 191 L LANGuage 2 191 2 192 LRN 2 192 Mark Command Group 2 24 MARK 2 193 MARK SELected FOCUS 2 195 MARK SELected MARKSINCOLumn 2 195 MARK SELected OWNer 2 196 MARK SELected SOURCE 2 196 MARK SELected STARt 2 196 MARK SELected S TATe 2 196 MARK SELected ZOOm POSition 2 197 MARK CREATE 2 194 MARK DELEte 2 194 MARK FREE 2 195 MARK SELected END 2 195 MARK TOTal 2 197 Math Command Group 2 26 MATH 1 HORizontal POSition 2 199 Index 4 MATH 1 HORizontal SCAle 2 200 MATH 1 HORizontal UNIts 2 200 MATH 1 SPECTral MAG 2 201 MATH 1 SPECTral WINdow 2 201 MATH 1 VERTical POSition 2 202 MATH 1 VERTical SCAle 2 203 MATH I VERTical UNIts 2 203 MATH 1 2 197 MATH 1 DEFine 2 198 MATH 1 TYPe 2 202 MATH MATH1 LABel 2 197 MATHVAR 2 204 MATHVAR VAR lt x gt 2 204 Measurement Command Group 2 27 MEASUrement CLEARSNapshot 2 206 MEASUrement MMed DELay DIRection 2 207 MEASUrement IMMed DELay
34. 2 380 Sets or returns the source setting for an transition trigger search to determine where to place a mark x is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFal1 Source CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFallj SOUrce CH1 CH4 specifies one input channel as the edge source MATH specifies the math waveform as the search source SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall WHEn Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the condition setting for an transition trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFal1 WHEn SLOwer FASTer EQual UNEQua1 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFal1 wHEn FASTer sets the trigger to occur when the transitioning signal is faster than the set volts second rate SLOwer sets the trigger to occur when the transitioning signal is slower than the set volts second rate EQual sets the trigger to occur when the transitioning signal is equal to the set volts second rate within a 5 tolerance UNEQual sets the trigger to occur when the transitioning signal is not equal to the set volts second rate 5 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TYPe Group Syntax Arg
35. 504000 and DPO4000 Series Digital Phosphor Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual AITNE PIA Tektronix 077 0248 00 504000 and 0 4000 Series Digital Phosphor Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual www tektronix com Tektronix 077 0248 00 Copyright Tektronix rights reserved Licensed software products are owned by Tektronix or its subsidiaries or suppliers and are protected by national copyright laws and international treaty provisions Tektronix products are covered by U S and foreign patents issued and pending Information in this publication supersedes that in all previously published material Specifications and price change privileges reserved TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix Inc Contacting Tektronix Tektronix Inc 14200 SW Karl Braun Drive P O Box 500 Beaverton OR 97077 USA For product information sales service and technical support North America call 1 800 833 9200 Worldwide visit www tektronix com to find contacts in your area Table of Contents Getting Started EE 1 1 Setting Up Remote 2 1 1 Command sated ee s 2 1 Command and Query Structure 2 2 2 2 2 1 Clearing the oscilloscope 2 menses he rennes 2 3 Command
36. 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order 3 and 4 are met on four channel oscilloscopes On two channel oscilloscopes only channel 1 and channel 2 are available When the TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCK SOUrce is set to one of the channels LOGIC sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the specified logical combinations of the remaining channels is true during a transition on the clock channel SETHO1d sets the oscilloscope to trigger on setup and hold violations between a data source and a clock source Use one channel input as the clock signal and a second channel input as the data input The clocking and data levels are used to determine if a clock or data transition has occurred TRIGGER A LOGIC CLASS might return TRIGGER A LOGIC CLASS LOGIC TRIGGER A LOGIC CLASS LOGIC sets the trigger A logic class to LOGIc which causes the oscilloscope to trigger when the specified logical combinations of channels 1 2 3 and 4 are met TRIGger A LOGIc FUNCtion Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the logical combination of the input channels for the A pattern and A state logic triggers Trigger TRIGger A LOGIC FUNCtion AND NANd NOR OR TRIGger A LOGIC FUNCtion TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CH lt x gt AND specifies to trigger if all conditions are true NANd specifies to trigger if any of the conditions is false NOR specifies to trig
37. Alphabetical Order Acquisition Command Group Use the commands in the Acquisition Command Group to set up the modes and functions that control how the oscilloscope acquires signals input to the channels and processes them into waveforms Using the commands in this group you can do the following Start and stop acquisitions Control whether each waveform is simply acquired averaged or enveloped over successive acquisitions of that waveform B Set the controls or conditions that start and stop acquisitions Control acquisition of channel waveforms B Set acquisition parameters Table 2 13 Acquisition Commands Command Description ACQuire Returns acquisition parameters ACQuire MAGnivu Sets or returns the MagniVu feature ACQuire MAXSamplerate Returns the maximum real time sample rate ACQuire MODe Sets or returns the acquisition mode ACQuire NUMACq Returns number of acquisitions that have occurred ACQuire NUMAVg Sets or returns the number of acquisitions for an averaged waveform ACQuire STATE Starts or stops the acquisition system ACQuire STOPAfter Sets or returns whether the acquisition is continuous or single sequence 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Command Groups Alias Command Group 2 12 Use the Alias commands to define new commands as a sequence of standard commands You may find this useful when repeatedly using the same commands to perform certain ta
38. Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Sets or returns the cursor type Cursors are attached to the selected waveform in Waveform mode and are attached to the display area in Screen mode Cursor CURSor FUNCtion OFF SCREEN WAVEform CURSor FUNCtion OFF removes the cursors from the display but does not change the cursor type SCREEN specifies both horizontal and vertical bar cursors which measure the selected waveform in horizontal and vertical units Use these cursors to measure anywhere in the waveform display area WAVE form specifies paired cursors in YT display format for measuring waveform amplitude and time In XY and XYZ format these cursors indicate the amplitude positions of an XY pair Chl vs Ch2 voltage where Chl is the X axis and Ch2 is the Y axis relative to the trigger CURSOR FUNCTION WAVEFORM selects the paired cursors for measuring waveform amplitude and time CURSOR FUNCTION might return CURSor FUNCtion SCREEN indicating that the screen cursors are currently selected CURSor HBArs Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the current settings for the horizontal bar cursors Cursor CURSOr HBArs CURSOR HBARS might return the horizontal bar setting as CURSOR HBARS POSITIONI 320 0000E 03 POSITION2 320 0000E 03 UNITS BASE CURSor HBArs DELTa Query Only Returns the vertical difference between the two horizontal bar cursors 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 13
39. Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Related Commands Examples wFMOutpre PT_Fmt CURVe DATa SOUrce WFMOUTPRE PT FMT might return wFMOutpre PT Fmt ENV indicating that the waveform data 1s a series of min max pairs WFMoOutpre PT Off Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples The set form of this command is ignored The query form always returns a 0 if the waveform specified by DATA SOUrce is on or displayed If the waveform 1s not displayed the query form generates an error and returns event code 2244 This command is for compatibility with other Tektronix oscilloscopes Waveform Transfer wFMOUutpre PT Off DATa SOUrce Arguments are ignored WFMOUTPRE PT OFF might return WFMOUTPRE PT OFF 0 indicating that the waveform specified by DATA SOURCE is on or displayed WFMoOutpre PT ORder Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples 2 492 This query is for compatibility with other Tektronix oscilloscopes and always returns LINEAR Waveform Transfer wFMOutpre PT_ORder DATa SOUrce WFMOUTPRE PT ORDER returns WFMOUTPRE PT ORDER LINEAR 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order WFMOutpre WFld Query Only Returns a string describing several aspects of the acquisition parameters for the waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command The query command will time out and an error will
40. EVEN to display only even harmonics ALL to display both odd and even harmonics POWER HARMONICS DISPLAY SELECT EVEN displays only even harmonics POWER HARMONICS DISPLAY SELECT might return PONER HARMONICS DISPLAY SELECT ALL indicating that both odd and even harmonics are displayed POWer HARMonics DISPlay TYPe Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the display type for harmonics tests This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer HARMonics DISPlay TYPe GRAph TABle POWer HARMonics DISPlay TYPe GRAph displays harmonic tests results in graphical format TAB le displays harmonic tests results in tabular format POWER HARMONICS DISPLAY TYPE GRAph sets the display type to graphical POWER HARMONICS DISPLAY TYPE might return POWER HARMONICS DISPLAY TYPE TAB indicating that the display type is set to tabular POWer HARMonics FREQRef Conditions Group 2 250 Sets or returns the frequency reference used when the harmonic standard is None This command requires DPO4PWR application module Power 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order POWer HARMoni cs FREQRef VOLTage CURRent HARMSOURCe FIXEDFREQuency POWer HARMonics FREQRef VOLTage to use a voltage waveform as the frequency reference CURRent to use a current waveform as the frequency refer
41. Examples Sets or queries the threshold for the channel specified by x Affects all trigger types using the channel Trigger TRIGger A SETHOld THReshold CH x NR3 ECL TTL TRIGger A SETHOld THReshold CH x NR3 specifies the threshold voltage in volts ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4V TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD CH1 1 5 sets the channel 1 threshold to 1 5 volts TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD CH1 might return TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD CH1 0 0E 0 indicating the channel 1 threshold is set to 0 0 volts TRIGger A SETHold THReshold D lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Sets the threshold for the selected digital channel Affects all trigger types using the digital channel Trigger TRIGger A SETHOld THReshold D x lt NR3 gt ECL TTL TRIGger A SETHOold THReshold D x lt NR3 gt specifies the threshold voltage in volts ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4V 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 451 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Examples TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD D1 ECL sets the threshold to ECL levels TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD D1 might return TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD D1 1 3000 indicating the threshold is set to 1 3 volts TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Returns
42. FILESystem DIR FILESystem CWD FILESystem MKDir None FILESystem DIR returns a list of files and directories in the current working directory FILESYSTEM DIR might return FILESYSTEM DIR tek00000 png my CAN setup set savedwfml isf myImages FILESystem FORMat No Query Form Group Syntax Arguments Examples Formats a mass storage device This command should be used with extreme caution as it causes all data on the specified mass storage device to be lost Drive letters e g E are case sensitive and must be upper case For all other FILESYSTEM commands drives letters are not case sensitive Example FILES FORMAT E Formats the USB flash drive installed in the oscilloscope s front panel USB port File System FILESystem FORMat drive name gt is a quoted string that defines the disk drive to format FILESYSTEM FORMAT E Formats the USB flash drive installed in the oscilloscope s front panel USB port FILESystem FREESpace Query Only Returns the number of bytes of free space on the current drive 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 175 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Related Commands File System FILESystem FREESpace FILESystem FREESpace FILESystem CWD FILESystem MKDir No Query Form Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Creates a new folder File System FILESystem MKDir lt directory path g
43. POWER SWLOSS TOFF ENERGY MAX might return POWER SWLOSS TON ENERGY MAX 1 indicating that the maximum Toff energy switching loss calculation is set to 1 J POWer SWLoss TOFF ENERGY MEAN Query Only Conditions Group Syntax Examples Returns the mean Toff energy for the switching loss calculation This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer SWLOSS TOFF ENERGY MEAN POWER SWLOSS TOFF ENERGY MEAN might return POWER SWLOSS TON ENERGY MEAN 1 indicating that the mean Toff energy switching loss calculation is set to 1 J POWer SWLoss TOFF ENERGY MIN Query Only Conditions Group Syntax Examples Returns the minimum Toff energy for the switching loss calculation This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer SWLOSS TOFF ENERGY MIN POWER SWLOSS TOFF ENERGY MIN might return POWER SWLOSS TON ENERGY MIN 1 indicating that the minimum Toff energy switching loss calculation 15 set to 1 J 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 307 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order POWer SWLoss TOFF POWER MAX Query Only Conditions Group Syntax Examples Returns the maximum Toff power for the switching loss calculation This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer SWLOSS TOFF POWER MAX POWER SWLOSS TOFF POWER MAX might return POWER SWLOSS TON POWER MAX 1 indicating that the maxi
44. Related Commands FILESystem CWD Arguments old file path is a quoted string that defines the file name and path Ifthe file path is within the current working directory you need only specify the file name new file path is a quoted string that defines the file name and path If the file path is within the current working directory you need only specify the file name Examples FILESYSTEM RENAME D TEK00000 SET D MYSETTING SET gives the file named TEK00000 SET the new name of MYSETTING SET The file remains in the root directory on the D drive FILESystem RMDir No Query Form Deletes a named directory This command deletes the specified directory and all of its contents The directory must not be a read only directory Group File System Syntax X FILESystem RMDir directory path 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 177 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Related Commands Arguments Examples FILESystem CWD lt directory path gt is a quoted string that defines the directory name and path If the file path is within the current working directory you need only specify the file name FILESYSTEM RMDIR D OldDirectory removes the directory named OldDirectory from the root of the D drive FILESystem WRITEFile No Query Form Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Writes the specified block data to a file in the oscilloscope current working directory If the speci
45. SCLK SOUrce CH1 CH2 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 BUS B x I2C CLOCK SCLK SOUrce 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments 1 4 specifies the analog channel to use as the 2 SCLK source 00 015 specifies the digital channel to use as the 2 SCLK source BUS B lt x gt I2C DATA SDATA SOUrce Sets or returns the 2 SDATA source for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number Conditions This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Group Bus Syntax BUS B x I2C DATA SDATA SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 D0O D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 BUS B lt x gt 12C DATA SDATA SOUrce Arguments 1 4 specifies the analog channel to use as the I2C SDATA source DO D15 specifies the digital channel to use as the 2 SCLK source BUS B lt x gt LABel Sets or returns the waveform label for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number 1 through 4 Group Bus Syntax BUS B lt x gt LABel lt Qstring gt BUS B lt x gt LABel Arguments lt Qstring gt is an alphanumeric string of text enclosed in quotes that contains the text label information for bus lt x gt The text string is limited to 30 characters BUS B lt x gt LIN BITRate Sets or returns the bit rate for LIN Group Bus 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 97 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Or
46. SEARCH SEARCH lt sx gt TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold MATH Sets or returns the math waveform threshold level for logic search 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 45 Command Groups Search Commands cont Command Description SEARCH SEARCH lt sx gt TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold REF lt x gt Sets or returns the reference waveform threshold level for logic search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt Sets or returns the lower waveform threshold level for all channel waveform searches SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOWerthreshold MATH Sets or returns the lower waveform threshold level for all math waveform searches SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOWerthreshold REF x Sets or returns the lower waveform threshold level for all reference waveform searches SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A Sets or returns the polarity for a pulse search PULSEWidth POLarity SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A Sets or returns the source waveform for a PULSEWidth SOUrce pulse search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A Sets or returns the condition for generating PULSEWidth WHEn a pulse width search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A Sets or returns the pulse width setting for a PULSEWidth WIDth pulse width search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT POLarity Sets or returns the polarity setting for a runt search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT SOUrce
47. SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY ERRTYPE CRCHEADER SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMEID HIVALUE XXXXXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMEID QUALIFIER EQUAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMEID VALUE XXXXXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMETYPE NORMAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER CRC SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER CYCLECOUNT XXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER FRAMEID SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER INDBITS XXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER PAYLENGTH XXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 I2C ADDRESS MODE ADDR7 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 I2C ADDRESS TYPE USER SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 I2C ADDRESS VALUE XXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 12C CONDITION START 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Appendix Factory Defaults Table C 1 Default values cont Command Default value SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 I2C DATA DIRECTION NOCARE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 I2C DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 12C DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN CONDITION SYNCFIELD SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA HIVALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL SEARCH SEARCH1 T
48. SETHOld THReshold REF lt x gt NR3 is the lower threshold in volts 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 379 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall DELTatime Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the transition time setting for an transition trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFal1l DELTatime NR3 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall DELTatime NR3 specifies the transition time in seconds SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall POLarity Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the polarity setting for an transition trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt 15 the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall POLarity EITher NEGative POSitive SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFal1 POLarity POSitive specifies that a pulse edge must traverse from the lower most negative to higher most positive level for transition triggering to occur NEGative specifies that a pulse edge must traverse from the upper most positive to lower most negative level for transition triggering to occur EITher specifies either positive or negative polarity SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall SOUrce Group Syntax
49. STATE is a valid message that sets the acquisition mode to sample The message then queries the number of acquisitions for averaging and the acquisition state Concatenated commands and queries are executed in the order received Here are some invalid concatenations DISPlay STYle NORMal ACQuire NUMAVg 8 no colon before ACQuire DISPlay GRAticule FULL DOTSONLY OFF extra colon before DOTSonly You could use DISPlay DOTsonly OFF instead DISPlay GRAticule FULL TRG colon before a star command MATH HORizontal SCAle 1 0e 1 HORizontal POSition 5 0 1 levels of the mnemonics are different either remove the second use of HORizontal or place MATH in front of HORizontal POSition Terminating This documentation uses EOM End of Message to represent a message terminator Table 2 4 End of Message Terminator Symbol Meaning EOM Message terminator The end of message terminator must be the END message EOI asserted concurrently with the last data byte The last data byte may be an ASCII line feed LF character This oscilloscope does not support ASCII LF only message termination The oscilloscope always terminates outgoing messages with LF and EOI Constructed Mnemonics Some header mnemonics specify one of a range of mnemonics For example a channel mnemonic can be CH2 CH3 CH4 You use these mnemonics in the command just as you do any other mnemonic For example there is a CHI POSition
50. STATE ON Set up the measurement parameters MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE AMPLITUDE MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE 1 Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the measurement OPC Wait for read from Output Queue Take amplitude measurement MEASUREMENT IMMED VALUE This is the simplest approach It requires no status handling or loops However you must set the controller time out for longer than the acquisition operation The information contained in the topic tabs above covers all the programming interface messages the oscilloscope generates in response to commands and queries For most messages a secondary message from the oscilloscope gives detail about the cause of the error or the meaning of the message This message is part of the message string and is separated from the main message by a semicolon Each message is the result of an event Each type of event sets a specific bit in the SESR and is controlled by the equivalent bit in the DESER Thus each message is associated with a specific SESR bit In the message tables the associated SESR bit is specified in the table title with exceptions noted with the error message text The following table shows the messages when the system has no events or status to report These have no associated SESR bit Table 3 3 No Event Messages Code Message 0 No events to report queue empty 1 No events to report new events pending ESR The foll
51. Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIC INPUt MATH HIGH LOW X SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIC INPut MATH HIGH specifies a high logic level LOW specifies a low logic level X specifies a don t care condition SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIc INPut REF x Group Syntax 2 366 Sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for a logic trigger search to determine where to place a mark SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and REF lt x gt is the reference channel number Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIC INPut REF lt x gt HIGH LOW X SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIC INPut REF lt x gt 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order HIGH specifies a high logic level LOW specifies a low logic level X specifies a don t care condition SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut CH lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the logic criteria for a logic pattern trigger search to determine where to place a mark SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and CH lt x gt is the channel number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern INPut CH x HIGH LOW Xj SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern INPut CH x HIGH specifies a high logic level LOW specifies a low logic level X specifies a don t care condition SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern
52. Sets or returns the source setting for a runt search SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A RUNT WHEn sets or returns the condition setting for a runt search SEARCH SEARCH lt sx gt TRIGger A RUNT WIDth Sets or returns the width setting for a runt search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A Sets or returns the clock slope setting for a SETHold CLOCk EDGE setup hold search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A Sets or returns the clock source setting for SETHold CLOCk SOUrce an setup hold search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A Sets or returns the clock threshold setting for SETHold CLOCk THReshold an setup hold search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A Sets or returns the data source setting for SETHold DATa SOUrce an setup hold search SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A SETHold DATa THReshold Sets or returns the data threshold setting for an setup hold search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A Sets or returns the hold time setting for an SETHold HOLDTime setup hold search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A Sets or returns the setup time setting for an SETHold SETTime setup hold search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold THReshold CH lt x gt Sets or returns the trigger search setup and hold threshold for the selected channel SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold THReshold MATH MATH1 Sets or returns the trigger search setup and hold threshold for the math waveform 804000 and DPO
53. Syntax Arguments Vertical AUXin PRObe RESistance AUXin PRObe RESistance might return AUXin PROBE RESISTANCE 1 0000E 6 indicating that the input resistance of the probe attached to the front panel Aux In connector is 1 NOTE This query will return 0 0 if no probe is attached or the attached probe does not report the input resistance This command changes the input bypass setting on VPI probes that support input bypass for example the 0001 If sent to a probe that does not support input bypass it is ignored Vertical AUXin PRObe SIGnal BYPass PASS AUXin PRObe SIGnal ByPass sets the probe to Bypass mode PASS sets the probe to Pass mode AUXin PRObe UNIts Query Only Group Syntax Examples 2 82 Returns a string describing the units of measure of the probe attached to the Aux In input Vertical AUXin PRObe UNIts AUXin PROBE UNITS might return AUXin PROBE UNITS V indicating that the units of measure for the attached probe are volts 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual BUS Conditions Group Syntax Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Sets or returns the parameters for each bus These parameters affect either the Serial Trigger Setup or the Bus Display This command requires a DPO4AUTO DPO4EMBD or DPO4COMP application module Bus BUS BUS B 1 4 AUDio BITDelay Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or return
54. TEST IEC CLASSALIMi t PASS FAIL or NA 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 261 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order POWer HARMonics RESults HAR lt 1 400 gt TEST IEC NORMAL Query Only Specifies if the Normal IEC harmonic limits are met NOTE The command returns NA if the standard does not specify a limit Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Group Power Syntax X POWer HARMonics RESults HAR 1 400 TEST NORMAL Returns PASS FAIL NA POWer HARMonics RESults HAR lt 1 400 gt TEST IEC POHCLIMit Query Only Specifies if the higher harmonic limit and conditions for the 21st and higher order odd harmonics are met NOTE The command returns NA if the limit does not apply for a specific harmonic Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Group Power Syntax X POWer HARMonics RESults HAR 1 400 TEST IEC POHCLIMit Returns PASS FAIL NA POWer HARMonics RESults HAR lt 1 400 gt TEST MIL NORMAL Query Only Returns the test result for the specified harmonic for the MIL STD 1399 testing standard This query is analogous to that for the IEC 61000 3 2 standard POWer HARMonics RESults HAR lt 1 400 gt TEST IEC NORMAL command 2 262 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Conditions Group Syntax Returns Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order NOTE The command returns NA if the standard does not sp
55. TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY FRAMEID HIVALUE XXXXXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY FRAMEID QUALIFIER EQUAL TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY FRAMEID VALUE XXXXXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY FRAMETYPE NORMAL TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY HEADER CRC TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY HEADER CYCLECOUNT XXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY HEADER FRAMEID XXXXXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY HEADER INDBITS XXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY HEADER PAYLENGTH XXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B4 I2C ADDRESS MODE ADDR7 TRIGGER A BUS B4 I2C ADDRESS TYPE USER TRIGGER A BUS B4 I2C ADDRESS VALUE XXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B4 I2C CONDITION START TRIGGER A BUS B4 I2C DATA DIRECTION NOCARE TRIGGER A BUS B4 I2C DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 I2C DATA START 0 00E 00 TRIGGER A BUS B4 I2C DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B4 LIN CONDITION SYNCFIELD TRIGGER A BUS B4 LIN DATA HIVALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B4 LIN DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL TRIGGER A BUS B4 LIN DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 LIN DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B4 LIN ERRTYPE SYNC TRIGGER A BUS B4 LIN IDENTIFIER VALUE XXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B4 PARALLEL VALUE TRIGGER A BUS B4 RS232C CONDITION TXSTART TRIGGER A BUS B4 RS232C RX DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 RS232C RX DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B4 RS232C TX DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 RS232C TX DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B4 SPI CONDITION 55 TRIGGER A BUS B4 SPI DATA IN VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B4 SPI DATA OUT VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGG
56. TRIGGER A EDGE SLOPE RISE sets the A edge trigger slope to positive which triggers on the rising edge of the signal TRIGGER A EDGE SLOPE might return TRIGGER A EDGE SLOPE FALL indicating that the A edge trigger slope 15 negative TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce Group Syntax 2 426 Sets or returns the source for the A edge trigger Trigger TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 DO D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 EXT LINE AUX 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce TRIGger A EDGE SLOpe TRIGger A EDGE COUPling 1 4 specifies an analog input channel as the A edge trigger source DO D15 specifies a digital channel as the source MSO models only EXT specifies an external trigger using the Aux In connector located on the front panel of the oscilloscope LINE specifies the AC line as the trigger source AUX specifies the Auxiliary Input as the trigger source if available on your oscilloscope TRIGGER A EDGE SOURCE CH1 sets channel 1 as the A edge trigger source TRIGGER A EDGE SOURCE might return TRIGGER A EDGE SOURCE CH1 indicating that channel 1 is the A edge trigger source TRIGger A HOLDoff Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Returns the trigger holdoff parameters These parameters specify the time period during which the
57. UNEQual SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A PULSEWi dth WHEn LESSThan places a mark if the pulse width 15 less than the time set by the SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A PULSEWidth WIDth command Than places a mark if the pulse width is true longer than the specified time set by the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth WIDth command EQUal places a mark if the pulse width is equal to the time set by the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth WIDth command within a tolerance of 5 UNEQual places a mark if the pulse width is unequal to the time the time set by the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSE Width WIDth command within a tolerance of 5 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth WIDth Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the pulse width setting for a pulse width trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A PULSEWidth WIDth lt NR3 gt SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A PULSEWi dth WIDth lt NR3 gt is the pulse width 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 373 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT POLarity Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the polarity setting for a runt trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A RUNT POLarity EITher NEGative POSitive SEARCH SE
58. Using the BUSY Query The BUSY query allows you to find out whether the oscilloscope is busy processing a command that has an extended processing time such as single sequence acquisition The same command sequence using the BUSY query for synchronization looks like this Set up conditional acquisition ACQUIRE STATE OFF SELECT CH1 ON HORIZONTAL RECORDLENGTH 1000 ACQUIRE MODE SAMPLE ACQUIRE STOPAFTER SEQUENCE Acquire waveform data ACQUIRE STATE ON Set up the measurement parameters MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE AMPLITUDE MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE CH1 Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the measurement while BUSY keep looping 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 3 9 Status and Events Using the OPC Command Take amplitude measurement MEASUREMENT IMMED VALUE This sequence lets you create your own wait loop rather than using the WAI command The BUSY query helps you avoid time outs caused by writing too many commands to the input buffer The controller is still tied up though and the repeated BUSY query will result in bus traffic If the corresponding status registers are enabled the OPC command sets the OPC bit in the Standard Event Status Register SESR when an operation is complete You achieve synchronization by using this command with either a serial poll or service request handler Serial Poll Method Enable the OPC bit in the Device Event Status E
59. and minimum point pairs Only Y values are explicitly transmitted Absolute coordinates are given by Xn XZEro XINcr n PT Off Ynmax YZEro YMUIt ynmax YOFf Ynmin YZEro YMUIt ynmin Y specifies a normal waveform where one ASCII or binary data point is transmitted for each point in the waveform record Only Y values are explicitly transmitted Absolute coordinates are given by Xn XZEro XINcr n PT Off Yn YZEro YMUIt yn YOFf WFMINPRE PT FMT ENV sets the incoming waveform data point format to enveloped WFMINPRE PT FMT might return WFMINPRE PT FMT ENV indicating that the waveform is transmitted as maximum and minimum point pairs The set form of this command is ignored The query form always returns a 0 This command is listed for compatibility with other Tektronix oscilloscopes Waveform Transfer WFMInpre PT Off lt NR1 gt WFMInpre PT Off Arguments are ignored 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual WFMinpre XINcr Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMinpre XUNit Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Sets or returns the horizontal interval between incoming waveform points in units specified by WFMInpre XUNIt Waveform Transfer WFMInpre XINCr lt NR3 gt WFMInpre XINcr WFMInpre XUNit WFMOutpre XINcr NR3 is the horizontal interval representation WFMINPRE XINCR 3E
60. argument is the floating point value of the position in XUNits of the first sample in the incoming waveform If XUNits is 5 lt NR3 gt is the time of the first sample in the incoming waveform WFMINPRE XZERO 5 7E 6 which indicates the trigger occurred 5 7 us before the first sample in the waveform WFMINPRE XZERO might return WFMINPRE XZEro 7 5000E 6 indicating that the trigger occurs 7 5 us after the first sample in the waveform Sets or returns the vertical scale factor of the incoming waveform expressed in YUNits per waveform data point level For one byte waveform data there are 256 data point levels For two byte waveform data there are 65 536 data point levels YMUIt YOFf and YZEro are used to convert waveform record values to YUNit values using the following formula where dl is the data level curve in dl is a data point in CURVe value in units curve in dl YOFf in dl YMUIt YZEro in units NOTE For a given waveform record YMUIt YOFf and YZEro have to be a consistent set otherwise vertical cursor readouts and vertical measurements may give incorrect results 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMinpre YOFf Group Syntax Related Commands Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Waveform Transfer WFMInpre YMUlt lt NR3 gt WFMInpre YMU1t DATa DESTination WFMInpre BYT Nr WFMInpre YUNit lt NR3 gt is
61. indicating that the XMAX value for log plot type is set to 1 0000 3 POWer SOA LOG XMIN Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the user XMIN value for use in Log SOA calculations This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer SOA LOG XMIN lt NR3 gt POWer SOA LOG XMIN NR3 is the XMIN value used for log SOA calculations POWER SOA LOG XMIN 2 sets the XMIN value to 2 0000 POWER SOA LOG XMIN might return POWER SOA LOG XMIN 100 0000E 3 indicating that the XMIN value for log plot type is set to 100 0000E 3 POWer SOA LOG YMAX Conditions Group Syntax Arguments 2 290 Sets or returns the user YMAX value for use in Log SOA calculations This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer SOA LOG YMAX lt NR3 gt POWer SOA LOG YMAX NR3 is the YMAX value used for log SOA calculations 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order POWER SOA LOG YMAX 10 sets the YMAX value to 10 0000 POWER SOA LOG YMAX might return POWER SOA LOG YMAX 100 0000 indicating that the YMAX value for log plot type is set to 100 0000 POWer SOA LOG YMIN Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the user YMIN value for use in Log SOA calculations This command requires DPO4PWR application module Power POWer SOA LOG
62. is the length of the data string in bytes 08 lt gt 12 Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the binary data string used for I2C triggering if the trigger condition is DATA or ADDRANDDATA Applies to bus x where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B x I2C DATa VALue lt QString gt TRIGger A BUS B x I2C DATa VALue Qstring is the binary data string where the number of bits is 8 times the number of bytes specified The only allowed characters in the string are 0 1 and X TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN CONDition Group Syntax Arguments 2 416 Sets or returns the trigger condition for LIN Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN CONDition SYNCField IDenti fier IDANDDATA WAKEup SLEEP ERROR TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN CONDition SYNCField sets the LIN trigger condition to sync field IDentifier sets the LIN trigger condition to identifier 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DATA sets the LIN trigger condition to data IDANDDATA sets the LIN trigger condition to id and data WAKEup sets the LIN trigger condition to wake up SLEEP sets the LIN trigger condition to sleep ERROR sets the LIN trigger condition to error TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN CONDITION ERROR sets the LIN trigger con
63. lt NR3 gt POWer SWLoss REFLevel ABSolute LOWVoltage NR3 is the low voltage reference level in volts POWER SWLOSS REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE LOWVOL TAGE 2 5 sets the absolute reference low voltage to 2 5000 V POWER SWLOSS REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE LOWVOLTAGE might return POWER SWLOSS REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE LOWVOLTAGE 5 0000 indicating that the absolute reference low voltage is set to 5 0000 V POWer SWLoss REFLevel PERCent GATEMid Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the mid voltage reference level used in switching loss power measurements in percent This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer SWLOSS REFLevel PERCent GATEMid lt NR3 gt POWer SWLoSS 1 PERCent GATEMid lt NR3 gt is the mid voltage reference level in volts POWER SWLOSS REFLEVEL PERCENT GATEMID 30 sets the gate mid reference voltage to 3096 POWER SWLOSS REFLEVEL PERCENT GATEMID might return POWER SWLOSS REFLEVEL PERCENT GATEMID 50 0000 indicating that the gate mid reference voltage is set to 50 POWer SWLoss REFLevel PERCent LOWCurrent Conditions Sets or returns the low current reference level used in switching loss power measurements in percent This command requires a DPO4PWR application module 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 305 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Arguments Examples Powe
64. specified by MEASUrement INDICators S TATE is being performed 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 215 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUrement INDICators STATE Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the state of visible measurement indicators Measurement MEASUrement INDICators STATE OFF MEAS x MEASUrement INDICators STATE OFF turns the visible measurement indicators off 5 lt gt displays the visible measurement indicators for measurement x where x can be 1 2 3 or 4 NOTE There must be an active measurement before you can activate an indicator for a specified measurement MEASUREMENT INDICATORS STATE MEAS turns on the display of visible measurement indicators for measurement 2 MEASUREMENT INDICATORS STATE might return MEASUREMENT INDICATORS STATE OFF indicating that no measurement indicators are active MEASUrement INDICators VERT lt x gt Query Only Group Syntax Examples 2 216 Returns the value of the specified vertical measurement indicator lt x gt from the trigger point where x can be 1 2 3 or 4 A negative value means that the indicator is positioned earlier in the waveform record than the trigger point Measurement MEASUrement INDICators VERT x MEASUREMENT INDICATORS VERT2 might return MEASUREMENT INDICATORS VERT2 3 724507E 6 indicating that the second measurement indicator is positioned 3 72 us be
65. 0 indicating that the acquisition Is stopped Sets or returns whether the oscilloscope continually acquires acquisitions or acquires a single sequence Acquisition ACQuire STOPAfter RUNSTOp SEQuence ACQui re STOPAfter ACQuire S TATE RUNSTOp specifies that the oscilloscope will continually acquire data if ACQuire S TATE is turned on SEQuence specifies that the next acquisition will be a single sequence acquisition ACQUIRE STOPAFTER RUnsTOP sets the oscilloscope to continually acquire data ACQUIRE STOPAFTER might return ACQUIRE STOPAFTER SEQUENCE indicating that the next acquisition the oscilloscope makes will be of the single sequence type Sets or returns the state of alias functionality Use Alias commands to define new commands as a sequence of standard commands You may find this useful when repeatedly using the same commands to perform certain tasks like setting up measurements Aliases are similar to macros but do not include the capability to substitute parameters into alias bodies To use Alias commands first define the alias then turn on the alias state Alias 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 73 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples ALIas lt NR1 gt ALIas ALlIas DEFine ALIas STATE OFF turns alias expansion off If a defined alias is sent when ALIas is off a command error 110 will be generated ON t
66. 0 turns off the deskew table display ON or turns on the deskew table display Sets the self test loop option Calibration and Diagnostic DIAg LOOP OPTion ALWAYS FAIL ONFAIL ONCE NTIMES ALWAYS continues looping until the self tests diagnostics are stopped via the front panel or by an oscilloscope command FAIL causes looping until the first self test diagnostic failure or until self tests diagnostics are stopped ONFAIL causes looping on a specific test group as long as a FAIL status is returned from the test ONCE executes self test diagnostics test sequence once NTIMES runs number of loops DIAG LOOP OPTION ONCE runs one loop of self tests DIAg LOOP OPTion NTIMes Group 2 154 Sets the self test loop option to run N times Calibration and Diagnostic 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DIAg LOOP OPTion NTIMes lt NR1 gt DIAg LOOP OPTion NTIMes lt NR1 gt is the number of self test loops DIAG LOOP OPTION NTIMES 3 sets the self test loop to run three times DIAG LOOP OPTION NTIMES might return DIAG LOOP OPTION NTIMES 5 indicating the self test loop is set to run five times DIAg LOOP STOP No Query Form Group Syntax Examples DIAg RESUIt FLAg Group Syntax Related Commands Returns Stops the self test at the end of the current loop Calibration and Diagnostic D
67. 0 turns off the measurement indicators ON or 1 turns on the measurement indicators POWER INDICATORS 1 turns on the indicator POWER INDICATORS might return POWER INDICators 0 indicating that the indicator is off POWer MODulation SOUrce Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the source waveform for modulation tests The voltage source waveform is specified using the POWer VOLTAGESOurce command and the current waveform is specified using the POWer CURRENTSOurce command This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer MODulation SOUrce VOLTage CURRent POWer MODulation SOUrce VOLTage specifies voltage source waveform for modulation tests CURRent specifies current source waveform for modulation tests POWER MODULATION SOURCE CURRent sets the modulation source to Current POWER MODULATION SOURCE might return POWER MODULATION SOURCE VOLT indicating that the modulation source is set to Voltage 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 269 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order POWer MODulation TYPe 2 270 Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the modulation type This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer MODulation TYPe Pwidth NwIdth PERIod PDUty NDUty FREQuency POWer MODulation TYPe PWIdth positive width is the distance time between the middle reference de
68. 00 indicating that 1 2 V is the current data voltage level for the setup and hold trigger TRIGger A SETHold HOLDTime Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the hold time for setup and hold violation triggering Trigger TRIGger A SETHOld HOLDTime lt NR3 gt TRIGger A SETHOld HOLDTime lt NR3 gt specifies the hold time setting in seconds Positive values for hold time occur after the clock edge Negative values occur before the clock edge TRIGGER A SETHOLD HOLDTIME 3 0E 3 sets the hold time for the setup and hold trigger to 3 ms TRIGGER A SETHOLD HOLDTIME might return TRIGGER A SETHOLD HOLDTIME 2 0000E 09 indicating that the current hold time for the setup and hold trigger is 2 ns TRIGger A SETHold SETTime Group Syntax Arguments Examples 2 450 Sets or returns the setup time for setup and hold violation triggering Trigger TRIGger A SETHOld SETTime lt NR3 gt TRIGger A SETHOold SETTime NR3 specifies the setup time for setup and hold violation triggering TRIGGER A SETHOLD SETTIME 3 0 6 specifies that the current setup time for setup and hold trigger is 3 us TRIGGER A SETHOLD SETTIME might return TRIGGER A LOGIC SETHOLD SETTIME 2 0000E 09 indicating that the current setup time for setup and hold trigger is 2 ns 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A SETHold THReshold CH x Group Syntax Arguments
69. 1 00E 01 SAVE ASSIGN TYPE IMAGE C 12 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Table C 1 Default values cont Appendix C Factory Defaults Command Default value SAVE IMAGE FILEFORMAT PNG SAVE IMAGE LAYOUT LANDSCAPE SAVE WAVEFORM FILEFORMAT INTERNAL SAVE WAVEFORM GATING NONE SEARCH SEARCH1 STATE 0 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN CONDITION SOF SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN DATA DIRECTION NOCARE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN FRAMETYPE DATA SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN IDENTIFIER MODE STANDARD SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN IDENTIFIER VALUE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CONDITION SOF SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT HIVALUE XXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT QUALIFIER EQUAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT VALUE XXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA HIVALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA OFFSET 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY EOFTYPE STATIC
70. 2 peak to peak finds the absolute difference between the maximum minimum amplitude in the entire waveform or gated region This measurement 15 applicable only to the analog channels POVershoot is the positive overshoot value over the entire waveform or gated region This measurement is applicable only to the analog channels Positive Overshoot Maximum High Amplitude x 100 PPULSECount is the count of positive pulses PwIdth positive width is the distance time between the middle reference default 50 amplitude points of a positive pulse The measurement is made on the first pulse in the waveform or gated region RISe timing measurement finds the rise time of the waveform The rise time is the time it takes for the leading edge of the first pulse encountered to rise from a low reference value default is 1096 to a high reference value default 1s 90 This measurement is applicable only to the analog channels RMS amplitude measurement finds the true Root Mean Square voltage in the entire waveform or gated region This measurement 15 applicable only to the analog channels Examples MEASUREMENT MEAS2 TYPE FREQUENCY defines measurement 2 as a measurement of the frequency of a waveform MEASUREMENT MEAS1 TYPE might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 TYPE RMS indicating that measurement 1 is defined to measure the RMS value of a waveform MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt UNIts Query Only Returns the units associated
71. 350 Queue Overflow Read the Event Queue with the EVENT query which returns only the event number with the EVMSG query which returns the event number and a text description of the event or with the ALLEV query which returns all the event numbers along with a description of the event Reading an event removes it from the queue Before reading an event from the Event Queue you must use the ESR query to read the summary of the event from the SESR This makes the events summarized by the ESR read available to the EVENT and EVMSG queries and empties the SESR Reading the SESR erases any events that were summarized by previous ESR reads but not read from the Event Queue Events that follow an ESR read are put in the Event Queue but are not available until ESR is used again Event Handling Sequence The figure below shows how to use the status and event handling system In the explanation that follows numbers in parentheses refer to numbers in the figure 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 3 5 Status and Events Device Event Status Enable Register DESER Read using DESE Write using DESE Standard Event Status Register SESR Read using ESR Cannot be written Event Status Enable Register ESER Read using ESE Write using ESE Status Byte Register SBR Read using STB Cannot be written Service Request Enable Register SRER Read using SRE Write using SRE
72. 4 V lt NR3 gt is the B trigger level in volts TRIGGER B LEVEL TTL sets the B trigger level to 1 4 V TRIGGER B LEVEL might return TRIGGER B LEVEL 173 0000E 03 indicating that the B trigger level is currently set at 173 mV TRIGger B LEVel CH lt x gt Group Syntax Sets or returns the B trigger level for channel lt x gt where x is the channel number Each Channel can have an independent Level Trigger TRIGger B LEVel CH x ECL TTL lt NR3 gt TRIGger B LEVel CH lt x gt 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 467 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order TRIGger B LEVel D lt x gt Arguments Examples Group Syntax Arguments ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4V lt NR3 gt specifies the trigger level in user units usually volts TRIGGER B LEVEL CH2 might return TRIGGER B LEVEL CH2 1 3000 00 indicating that the B edge trigger 1s set to 1 3 V for channel 2 TRIGGER B LEVEL CH3 TTL sets the B edge trigger to TTL high level for channel 3 Sets or returns the B trigger level for digital channel x where x is the channel number Each channel can have an independent level Trigger TRIGger B LEVel D x ECL TTL lt NR3 gt TRIGger B LEVel D lt x gt ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4V lt NR3 gt specifies the trigger level in user units u
73. 52 Lato 72 LA26 1010 LF SUB A 10 1 26 2A 42 3A 58 13 33 53 LAM 73 1 27 1011 ESC 11 1 27 2B 43 3B 59 14 34 54 LA12 74 LA28 1100 FF FS lt C 12 1C 28 2C 44 8C 60 15 35 55 LA13 75 1429 1101 CR GS 13 1D 29 2D 45 3D 61 16 36 56 1 14 76 LA30 1110 50 RS gt 14 1E 30 2E 46 3E 62 17 37 57 LA15 77 UNL 1111 SI US F 15 1 81 2 47 63 ADDRESSED UNIVERSAL LISTEN COMMANDS COMMANDS ADDRESSES KEY octal 5 ee GPIB code with ATN asserted ENQ ASCII character hex 5 5 X decimal 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual UPPER CASE LOWER CASE 100 0 120 16 140 5 0 160 SA16 p 40 64 50 80 60 96 70 112 101 1 121 17 141 SA1 161 17 4 41 65 51 81 61 97 71 113 102 2 122 18 142 2 162 18 R b r 42 66 52 82 62 98 72 114 103 TA3 123 19 143 SA3 163 SA19 C 6 43 67 53 83 63 99 73 115 104 TA4 124 TA20 144 SA4 164 5 20 4 t 44 68 54 84 64 100 74 116 105 TAS 125 21 145 5 5 165 21 U e 45 69 55 85 65 101 75 117 106 TAG 126 22 146 SA6 166 SA22 F V f V 46 70 56 86 66 102 76 118 107 127 TA23 147 SA7 167 SA23 G g w 47 57 87 67 103 77 119 110 8 130 24 150 SA8 170 5 24 X x 48 72 58 88 78 120 111 9 131 25 171 25
74. 83 BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDi0 CHANnel SIZe 2 84 BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio CLOCk POLarity 2 84 BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio CLOCk SOUrce 2 85 BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDi0 DATa POLarity 2 86 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDi10 DATa SIZe 2 86 BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDi0 DATa SOUrce 2 87 BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio DISplay FOR Mat 2 87 BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDi0 FRAME SI Ze 2 88 BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio FRAMESynce POLarity 2 88 BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio FRAMESync SOUrce 2 89 BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDi0 TYPe 2 89 BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio WORDSel POLarity 2 90 BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDi0 WORDSel SOUrce 2 90 BUS B lt x gt CAN BITRate 2 91 BUS B lt x gt CAN PRObe 2 92 BUS B lt x gt CAN SAMPLEpoint 2 92 BUS B lt x gt CAN SOUrce 2 92 BUS B lt x gt DISplay FORMAt 2 93 BUS B lt x gt DISplay TY Pe 2 93 BUS B lt x gt FLEXray BITRate 2 94 BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CHannel 2 94 BUS B lt x gt FLEXray SIGnal 2 95 BUS B lt x gt FLEXray SOUtrce 2 95 BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess RWINClude 2 96 BUS B lt x gt I2C CLOCK SCLK SOUrce 2 96 BUS B lt x gt I2C DATA SDATA SOUtce 2 97 BUS B lt x gt LIN BITRate 2 97 BUS B lt x gt LIN IDFORmat 2 98 BUS B lt x gt LIN POLAR ity 2 98 BUS B lt x gt LIN SAMPLEpoint 2 99 BUS B lt x gt LIN SOUrce 2 99 BUS B lt x gt LIN STANDard 2 100 BUS B lt x gt PARallel BIT lt x gt SOUrce 2 100 BUS B lt x gt PARallel CLOCK EDGE 2 100 BUS B lt x gt PARallel CLOCK ISCLOCKed 2 101 BUS B lt
75. B lt x gt PARallel CLOCK SOUrce Sets or returns the Parallel clock source for the specified bus BUS B lt x gt PARallel WIDth Sets or returns the width of the Parallel bus BUS B lt x gt POSition Sets or returns the position of the specified bus waveform BUS B lt x gt RS232C BlTRate Sets or returns the RS 232 bit rate for the specified bus BUS B lt x gt RS232C DATABits Sets or returns the number of bits for the data frame BUS B lt x gt RS232C DELIMiter Sets or returns the RS 232 delimiting value for a packet on the specified bus BUS B lt x gt RS232C DISplaymode BUS B lt x gt RS232C PARity Sets or returns the display mode for the specified bus display and event table Sets or returns parity for RS 232 data BUS B lt x gt RS232C POLarity Sets or returns the RS 232C polarity for the specified bus BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX SOUrce BUS B x RS232C TX SOUrce Sets or returns the RS 232 RX source Sets or returns the RS 232 TX Source BUS B x SPI BITOrder Sets or returns the bit order for the specified SPI bus BUS B lt x gt SPI CLOCK SCLK POLARity Sets or returns the SPI SCLK polarity BUS B lt x gt SPI CLOCK SCLK SOUrce Sets or returns the SPI SCLK source BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA IN MISO POLARity Sets or returns the SPI MISO polarity BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA IN MISO SOUrce Sets or returns the SPI MISO source BUS B lt x gt SPI DATAC OUT MO
76. BUS B lt x gt SPI CONDition 2 423 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa SIZe 2 424 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa IN MISO VALue 2 423 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa OUT MOSI VALue 2 424 TRIGger A BUS SOUrce 2 424 TRIGger A EDGE COUPling 2 425 TRIGger A EDGE SLOpe 2 426 TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce 2 426 TRIGger A HOLDoff TIMe 2 427 TRIGger A LEVel AUXin 2 428 TRIGger A LEVel CH lt x gt 2 429 TRIGger A LEVel D lt x gt 2 429 TRIGger A LOGIc CLAss 2 430 TRIGger A LOGIc FUNCtion 2 431 TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CH lt x gt 2 432 TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk EDGE 2 432 TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk SOUrce 2 433 TRIGger A LOGIc INPut D lt x gt 2 433 TRIGger A LOGIc INPut 2 432 TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern DELTatime 2 434 TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut D lt x gt 2 434 TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn 2 435 TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern W HEn LESSLimit 2 436 TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn MORELimit 2 436 TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern 2 434 TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold CH lt x gt 2 437 TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold D lt x gt 2 437 TRIGger A LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt 2 438 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Index TRIGger A LOWerthreshold D lt x gt 2 438 TRIGger A LOWerthreshold EXT AUX 2 439 TRIGger A PULse CLAss 2 440 TRIGger A PULSEWidth POLarity 2 441 TRIGger A PULSEWidth SOUrce 2 441 TRIGger A PULSEWidth WHEn 2 442 TRIGger A PULSE Width WIDth 2 443 TRIGger A PULSEWIDth 2 441 TRIGger A R
77. Byte Register bit 4 are also cleared The MAV bit indicates that information is in the output queue The device clear DCL GPIB control message will clear the output queue and thus MAV CLS does not clear the output queue or MAV 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 131 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Related Commands Examples CURSor Group Syntax Examples CLS can suppress a Service Request that is to be generated by an OPC This will happen if a single sequence acquisition operation is still being processed when the CLS command is executed Status and Error CLS DESE ESE ESR EVENT EVMsg SRE STB CLS clears the oscilloscope status data structures Returns all of the current cursor settings Cursor CURSor CURSOR might return the following as the current cursor settings CURSOR FUNCTION SCREEN HBARS POSITION1 0 0000 POSITION2 0 0000 UNITS BASE CURSOR MODE INDEPENDENT VBARS POSITIONL 19 0006E 6 POSITION2 18 9994E 6 UNITS SECONDS CURSor DDT Query Only Conditions Group Syntax Examples 2 132 Returns the cursor deltaY deltaT dY dT readout This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Cursor CURSor DDT CURSOR DDT might return CURSOR DDT 166 6670 indicating that the cursor dV dt read out is 166 6670 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual CURSor FUNCtion Group Syntax Arguments Examples
78. CREATE Creates a mark on a particular waveform or all waveforms in a column MARK DELEte Deletes a mark on a particular waveform all waveforms in a column or all marks MARK FREE Returns how many marks are free to be used MARK SELected END Returns the end of the selected mark in terms of 0 to 100 of the waveform 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Table 2 23 Mark Commands cont Command Command Groups Description MARK SELected FOCUS Returns the focus of the selected mark in terms of 0 to 100 of the waveform MARK SELected MARKSINCOLumn Returns how many marks are in the current zoom pixel column MARK SELected OWNer Returns the owner of the selected mark MARK SELected SOURCE Returns the source waveform of the selected mark MARK SELected STARt Returns the start of the selected mark in terms of 0 to 100 of the waveform MARK SELected STATe Returns the on or off state of the selected mark MARK SELected ZOOm POSition Returns the position of the selected mark in terms of 0 to 10096 of the upper window MARK TOTal Returns how many marks are used 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 25 Command Groups Math Command Group Use the commands in the Math Command Group to create and define a math waveform Use the available math functions to define your math waveform The math waveform you create depends on sources listed in the math ex
79. Ch 3 Index 4 Green Ch 4 Index 5 Red math Index 6 White reference Index 7 Orange Index 8 Gray Graticule 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Index 9 White text Index 10 Tek blue Index 11 Bright blue Index 12 Undefined Index 13 Blue Index 14 Undefined Index 15 Dark blue Bit 4 If set the foreground color is set to the default foreground color Bit 3 If set the background color is set to the default background color Bit 2 Undefined Bit 1 Undefined Bit 0 Undefined The ESC escape character followed by the character turns inverse video on or off and can be embedded in the message string Example abcESC defESC ghi specifies the string abcdefghi where the def portion is displayed in inverse video Example abcESC defESC ESC ghi specifies the string abcdefghi where the def portion appears in the channel 3 color magenta and the ghi portion appears in the normal text color except it s in inverse video An alternate way to enter characters is octal escape sequences This consists of a backslash followed by numerals in the standard C language printf fashion Another way to enter characters is xnn where the nn is the hexadecimal value of the character to display An advantage of these methods is that any controller program can be used Another advantage 18 it s easy to access characters with the h
80. Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Related Commands Examples CURVe DATa SOUrce WFMOutpre WAVFRM might return the waveform data as wFMOUTPRE BYT_NR 1 BIT NR 8 ENCDG ASCII BN FMT RI BYT MSB WFID Chl DC coupling 100 0mv div 4 000us div 10000 points Sample mode NR 20 FMT Y XUNIT s XINCR 4 0000E 9 XZERO 20 0000E 6 PT OFF 0 YUNIT V YMULT 4 0000E 3 YOFF 0 0000 YZERO 0 0000 CURVE 2 1 4 2 4 3 0 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 5 6 6 7 3 WFMinpre Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples WFMinpre BIT Nr Group Syntax Related Commands 2 478 Returns the waveform formatting and scaling specifications to be applied to the next incoming CURVe command data Waveform Transfer WFMInpre WFMoOutpre WFMINPRE might return the waveform formatting as WFMINPRE BIT NR 8 BN FMT RI BYT NR 1 BYT OR MSB ENCDG BIN NR PT 500 PT FMT Y 0 XINCR 2 0000E 6 XZERO 1 7536E 6 XUNIT s YMULT 1 0000E 3 YOFF 0 0000 YZERO 0 0000 YUNIT v Sets or returns the number of bits per binary waveform point for the incoming waveform Changing the value of WFMInpre BIT Nr also changes the value of WFMInpre BYT Nr Waveform Transfer WFMInpre BIT Nr NR1 WFMInpre BIT Nr WFMInpre BYT Nr 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Examples WFMinpre BN_Fmt Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMinpre BYT_Nr Group Syntax Relat
81. DPO4PWR application module Group Power Syntax POWer CURRENTSOurce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 REF1 REF2 REF3 REF4 POWer CURRENTSOurce Arguments 1 4 sets an analog channel as the current source 1 4 sets a reference as the current source Examples POWER CURRENTSOURCE 1 sets the current source as POWER CURRENTSOURCE might return PONER CURRENTSOURCE CH2 indicating that CH2 is the current source 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 247 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order POWer DISplay Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples POWer GATESOurce Conditions Group Syntax Arguments 2 248 Sets or returns the display state for the power application This is the equivalent to pressing the Test button and then selecting the power application The same control is provided for each application This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer DISplay OFF ON 0 1 POWer DISplay OFF or 0 turns off the display settings ON or 1 turns on the display settings POWER DISPLAY 1 turns on the display POWER DISPLAY might return POWER DISPLAY 0 indicating that the display is off Sets or returns the gate source for the power application This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer GATESOurce CH1 CH2 CH3 CHA4 REF1 REF2 REF3 REF4 NONe POWer GATESOurce 1 4 sets an analog channel as the gate source REF1
82. HIGH 90 0000 LOw 10 0000 MID1 50 0000 MID2 50 0000 MEASUREMENT INDICATORS STATE OFF NUMHORZ 0 0 HORZ1 99 0000E 36 HORZ2 99 0000E 36 HORZ3 99 0000E 36 HORZ4 99 0000 36 99 0000 36 2 99 0000E 36 VERT3 99 0000E 36 VERT4 99 0000 36 MEASUREMENT STATISTICS MODE OFF WEIGHTING 32 MEASUREMENT GATING SCREEN 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 205 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order MEASUrement CLEARSNapshot No Query Form Removes the measurement snapshot display Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement CLEARSNapshot Related Commands CLEARMenu MEASUrement GATing Specifies or returns the measurement gating setting Group Measurement Syntax X MEASUrement GATing OFF SCREen CURSor MEASUrement GATing Arguments OFF turns off measurement gating full record SCREen turns on gating using the left and right edges of the screen CURSor limits measurements to the portion of the waveform between the vertical bar cursors even if they are off screen Examples MEASUREMENT GATING CURSOR turns on measurement gating using the cursors as limits MEASUREMENT GATING might return MEASUREMENT GATING CURSOR indicating that measurements are limited to the portion of the waveform between the vertical bar cursors MEASUrement IMMed Query Only Returns all immediate measurement setup parameters Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement IMMed 2 206 504
83. IC bus 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 331 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Examples SPI specifies the Serial Peripheral Interface bus CAN specifies the Controller Area Network bus SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 SPI CONDITION SS SEARCH SEARCH1 2 SS SEARCH 1 TRIGGER A BUS SS SEARCH 1 TRIGGER A BUS BA SPI CONDITION SS SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 SPI DATA MOSI VALUE XX SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio CONDition Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the search trigger condition for the AUDIO bus Start of Frame or Data This command requires DPO4AUDIO application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDi0 CONDition SOF DATA SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDi0 CONDi tion SOF enables triggering at the start of frame for the audio bus DATA enables triggering on matching data for the audio bus SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio DATa HIVALue 2 332 Conditions Group Syntax Sets or returns the search trigger data upper word for the AUDIO bus This command requires DPO4AUDIO application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt 1 4
84. ID Requires a DPO4AUTO application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B X CAN DATa DIRection READ WRITE NOCARE TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa DIRection READ sets the CAN data direction to READ WRITE sets the CAN data direction to WRITE NOCARE sets the CAN data direction to either TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN DATA DIRECTION WRITE sets the CAN data direction to Write TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa QUALIifier Conditions Group Syntax 2 398 Sets or returns the CAN data qualifier for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This applies only if the trigger condition is IDANDDATA or DATA Requires a DPO4AUTO application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B X CAN DATa QUAL i fier LESSThan Than EQUal UNEQual LESSEQual EQual TRIGger A BUS B X CAN DATa QUAL i fier 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order LESSThan sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the data is less than the qualifier value Than sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the data is than the qualifier value 1 sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the data is equal to the qualifier value UNEQual sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the data is not equal to the qualifier value LESSEQual sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the data is less than or equal to the qualifier value EQua sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the data is than or eq
85. INPUT DO SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D10 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D11 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D12 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D13 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D14 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D15 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D2 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D3 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D4 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D5 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D6 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D7 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D8 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D9 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT MATH SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT REF 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT REF2 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT CH1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT CH2 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT DO SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT D1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT D10 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT D11 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT D12 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT D13 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT D14 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT D15 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT D2 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT D3 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT D4
86. INPut D lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the logic criteria for a logic pattern search to determine where to place a mark SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and D lt x gt is the digital channel number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern INPut D x HIGH Low xX SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern INPut D x HIGH specifies a high logic level LOW specifies a low logic level X specifies a don t care condition 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 367 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut MATH Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for a logic pattern trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH X TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern INPUt MATH HIGH LOW xX SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern INPut MATH HIGH specifies a high logic level LOW specifies a low logic level X specifies a don t care condition SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut REF x Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for a pattern trigger search to determine where to place a mark SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and REF lt x gt is the reference channel number Search SEARCH SEARCH X TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern INPut REF x HIGH
87. Listed Alphabetical Order Examples POWER SWLOSS TOTAL ENERGY MEAN might return POWER SWLOSS TOTAL ENERGY MEAN 1 indicating that the mean conduction energy switching loss calculation is set to 1 J POWer SWLoss TOTal ENERGY MIN Query Only Returns the minimum total energy for the switching loss calculation Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Group Power Syntax POWer SWLoss TOTal ENERGY MIN Examples POWER SWLOSS TOTAL ENERGY MIN might return POWER SWLOSS TOTAL ENERGY MIN 1 indicating that the minimum conduction energy switching loss calculation is set to 1 J POWer SWLoss TOTal POWER MAX Query Only Returns the maximum total power loss Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Group Power Syntax POWer SWLoss TOTal POWER MAX Examples POWER SWLOSS TOTAL POWER MAX might return POWER SWLOSS TOTAL POWER MAX 1 indicating that the maximum total power switching loss calculation is set to 1 W POWer SWLoss TOTal POWER MEAN Query Only Returns the mean total power loss Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module 2 312 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Power POWer SWLOSS TOTal POWER MEAN POWER SWLOSS TOTAL POWER MEAN might return POWER SWLOSS TOTAL POWER MEAN 1 indicating that the mean total power s
88. Listed in Alphabetical Order POWer SOA RESult NUMACq Query Only Conditions Group Syntax Examples Returns the number of acquisitions in the test This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer SOA RESu1t NUMACq POWER SOA RESULT NUMACQ might return POWER SOA RESULT NUMACQ 10 indicating that the number of acquisitions is 10 POWer SOA RESult STATe Query Only Conditions Group Syntax Returns Examples Returns the pass fail state of the SOA test This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer SOA RESu1t STATe PASS or POWER SOA RESULT STATE might return POWER SOA MASK STATE PASS indicating that the SOA test state is PASS POWer STATIstics No Query Form Conditions Group 2 296 Clears all the accumulated statistics of all measurements Performs the same function as the MEASUrement STATIstics command This command requires DPO4PWR application module Power 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order POWer STATIstics RESET RESET clears the measurement statistics POWer STATIstics MODE Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Enables or disables the display of the measurement statistics Performs the same function as the MEASUrement STATIstics s MODE command This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Pow
89. MODe Sets or returns whether cursors move in unison or separately CURSor VBArs Sets or returns the position of vertical bar cursors CURSor VBArs ALTERNATE lt x gt Returns the alternate readout for the waveform Vbar cursors CURSor VBArs DELTa Returns the horizontal difference between vbar cursors CURSor VBArs HPOS lt x gt Returns the vertical value of the specified vertical bar tick CURSor VBArs POSITION lt x gt Sets or returns the vbar cursor lt x gt horizontal position CURSor VBArs UNIts Sets or returns the horizontal units for vbar cursors CURSor VBArs USE Sets the vertical bar cursor measurement scale CURSor VBArs VDELTa Returns the vertical difference between the two vertical bar cursor ticks CURSor XY POLar RADIUS DELta Returns the difference between the cursors X radius and the cursor Y radius 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Table 2 17 Cursor Commands cont Command Command Groups Description CURSor XY POLar RADIUS POSITION lt x gt Returns the polar radius of the specified cursor CURSor XY POLar RADIUS UNIts Returns the polar radius units CURSor XY POLar THETA DELta Returns the XY cursor polar coordinate delta CURSor XY POLar THETA POSITION lt x gt Returns the cursor X or cursor Y polar coordinate CURSor XY POLar THETA UNIts Returns the cursor polar coordinate units CURSor XY PRODUCT DELta Returns
90. POWer QUAL i ty IRMS POWER QUALITY IRMS might return PONER QUALITY IRMS 1 00 indicating that the RMS current value is set to 1 00 A POWer QUALity PHASEangle Query Only Conditions Group Syntax Examples Returns the phase angle measurement This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer QUAL ity PHASEangle POWER QUALITY PHASEANGLE might return POWER QUALITY PHASEANGLE 0 indicating that the phase angle is set to 0 POWer QUALity POWERFACtor Query Only Conditions Group Syntax Examples 2 278 Returns the power factor measurement This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer QUAL ity POWERFACtor POWER QUALITY POWERFACTOR might return POWER QUALITY POWERFACTOR 1 0 indicating that the power factor is set to 1 0 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order POWer QUALity REACTpwr Query Only Returns the reactive power measurement Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Group Power Syntax X POWer QUALity REACTpwr Examples POWER QUALITY REACTPWR might return POWER QUALITY REACTpwr 100 indicating that the reactor power value is set to 100 VAR POWer QUALity TRUEpwr Query Only Returns the true power measurement Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Group Power Syntax POWer QUALity TRUEpwr Examples POWER QUA
91. PRODUCTID HEXadecimal USBTMC SERIALnumber USBTMC VENDORID DECimal USBTMC VENDORID HEXadecimal USBTMC PRODUCTID DECIMAL might return USBTMC PRODUCTID DECIMAL 1025 indicating the product ID in decimal 15 1025 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order USBTMC PRODUCTID HEXadecimal Query Only This query to returns the USBTMC product ID The product ID numbers vary for each instrument family and model Group Miscellaneous Syntax USBTMC PRODUCTID HEXadecimal Related Commands USBTMC PRODUCTID DECimal USBTMC SERIALnumber USBTMC VENDORID DECimal USBTMC VENDORID HEXadecimal Examples USBTMC PRODUCTID HEXADECIMAL might return USBTMC PRODUCTID HEXADECIMAL 0x0401 indicating the product ID in hexadecimal 15 0x0401 USBTMC SERIALnumber Query Only This query returns the instrument serial number Group Miscellaneous Syntax USBTMC SERIALnumber Related Commands USBTMC PRODUCTID DECimal USBTMC PRODUCTID HEXadecimal USBTMC VENDORID DECimal USBTMC VENDORID HEXadecimal Examples USBTMC SERIALNUMBER might return USBTMC SERIALNUMBER PQ30003 indicating the product serial number is PQ30003 USBTMC VENDORID DECimal Query Only This query returns the USBTMC vendor ID The Vendor ID for Tektronix is 0x699 or 1689 decimal Group X Miscellaneous Syntax USBTMC VENDORID DECimal 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 475 Commands Listed Al
92. Programmer Manual 2 49 Command Groups 2 50 Table 2 31 Trigger Commands cont Command Description TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CONDition Sets or returns the trigger condition for FLEXRAY TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CY CLEcount HIVALue Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for FLEXRAY cycle count high value TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CY CLEcount QUALifier Sets or returns the FLEXRAY cycle count qualifier TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CYCLEcount VALue Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for FLEXRAY cycle count low value TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa HIVALue Sets or returns the high binary data string to be used for FLEXRAY trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa OFFSet Sets or returns the offset of the data string in bytes TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa QUALIifier Sets or returns the FLEXRAY data qualifier TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa SiZe Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa VALue Sets or returns the low binary data string to be used for FLEXRAY trigger condition TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray EOFTYPE Sets or returns the end of file type TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray ERRTY PE Sets or returns the error type TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray F RAMEID HIVALue Sets or returns the binary data string to be u
93. Programmer Manual 2 411 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER FRAMEID might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER FRAMEID XXXXXXXXXXX indicating the frame id portion of the binary header string are don t cares TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER INDBits Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the indicator bits portion of the binary header string to be used for FLEXRAY trigger Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER INDBits lt QString gt TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray HEADER INDBits lt QString gt is a quoted string that is the indicator bits portion of the binary header string TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER INDBITS 11001 sets the indicator bits portion of the header string to 11001 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER INDBITS might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER INDBITS XXXXX indicating that the indicator bits portion of the header string are don t cares TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER PAYLength Group Syntax Arguments Examples 2 412 Sets or returns the payload length portion of the binary header string to be used for FLEXRAY trigger Trigger TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray HEADER PAYLength lt QString gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER PAYLength Qstring is the length of the payload portion of the Binary header string TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER PAYLENGTH 1100101 sets the FLE
94. RUNT WIDTH 2 0000E 09 indicating that the minimum width of a pulse runt trigger is 2 ns 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 445 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A SETHold Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the clock edge polarity voltage threshold and source input data voltage threshold and source and both setup and hold times for setup and hold violation triggering Trigger TRIGger A SETHOld TRIGGER A SETHOLD might return TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK SOURCE CH1 EDGE RISE THRESHOLD 100 0000E 3 TRIGGER A SETHOLD DATA SOURCE 2 THRESHOLD 80 0000E 3 SETHOLD HOLDTIME 20 0000E 9 SETTIME 8 0000E 9 TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the clock edge polarity voltage threshold and source input for setup and hold triggering Trigger TRIGger A SETHOld CLOCk TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK might return TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK SOURCE EXT EDGE FALL THRESHOLD 1 4000 TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk EDGE Group Syntax 2 446 Sets or returns the clock edge polarity for setup and hold triggering Trigger TRIGger A SETHOld CLOCk EDGE FALL RISe TRIGger A SETHOld CLOCk EDGE 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order FALL specifies polarity as the clock falling edge RISe specifies polarity as the clock rising edge TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK E
95. SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CYCLEcount QUALifier 2 340 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CY CLEcount VALue 2 341 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa HIVALue 2 341 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa OFFSet 2 342 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa QUALifier 2 342 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa SIZe 2 343 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa VALue 2 343 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray EOFTYPE 2 344 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray ERRTYPE 2 344 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEID HIVALue 2 345 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEID QUALifier 2 345 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEID VALue 2 346 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEType 2 347 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER CRC 2 347 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER CYCLEcount 2 348 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER FRAMEID 2 348 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER INDBits 2 349 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER PAY Length 2 349 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C AD
96. SOA mask testing This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer SOA MASK MAXAmps lt NR3 gt POWer SOA MASK MAXAmps lt NR3 gt is the maximum current applied to SOA mask testing POWER SOA MASK MAXAMPS 40 sets the SOA mask testing current to 40 A POWER SOA MASK MAXAMPS might return POWER SOA MASK MAXAMPS 30 0000 indicating that the SOA mask testing maximum current is set to 30 A POWer SOA MASK MAXVolts Conditions Group Syntax Arguments 2 292 Sets or returns the maximum voltage applied to SOA mask testing This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer SOA MASK MAXVOlts lt NR3 gt POWer SOA MASK MAXVOlts NR3 is the maximum voltage applied to SOA mask testing 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples POWER SOA MASK MAXVOLTS 200 sets the SOA mask testing voltage to 200 V POWER SOA MASK MAXVOLTS might return POWER SOA MASK MAXVOLTS 300 0000 indicating that the SOA mask testing maximum voltage is set to 300 V POWer SOA MASK MAXWatts Sets or returns the maximum power applied to SOA mask testing Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Group Power Syntax POWer SOA MASK MAXWatts lt NR3 gt POWer SOA MASK MAXWatts Arguments NR3 is the maximum power applied to SOA mask testing Examples POWER SOA MASK MAXWATTS 1000 sets the SOA mask testing
97. Series Programmer Manual 2 115 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Syntax Related Commands Returns Examples CALibrate INTERNal STATUS CAL This query will return one of the following INIT indicates the oscilloscope has not had internal signal path calibration run B PASS mdicates the signal path calibration completed successfully B FAIL indicates the signal path calibration did not complete successfully B RUNNING indicates the signal path calibration is currently running CALIBRATE INTERNAL STATUS might return CALIBRATE INTERNAL STATUS INIT indicating that the current status of the internal signal path calibration 18 that it has not been run CALibrate RESults Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Returns the status of internal and factory calibrations without performing any calibration operations The results returned do not include the calibration status of attached probes The CALibrate RESults query is intended to support GO NoGO testing of the oscilloscope calibration readiness all returned results should indicate PASS status if the oscilloscope is fit for duty It is quite common however to use uncalibrated probes particularly when the oscilloscope inputs are connected into a test system with coaxial cables Calibration and Diagnostic CALibrate RESults CAL CALibrate RESults FACtory Query Only Group 2 116 Returns the status of internal and factory calib
98. Series Programmer Manual 2 495 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Related Commands Examples See the description of WFMInpre YOFf to see how this position is used to convert waveform sample values to volts Waveform Transfer wFMOutpre YOFf DATa SOUrce WFMOutpre BYT_Nr WFMOUTPRE YOFF might return WFMOUTPRE YOFF 50 0000E 0 indicating that the position indicator for the waveform was 50 digitizing levels 2 divisions below center screen for 8 bit waveform data WFMOutpre YUNit Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Returns the vertical units for the waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command The query command will time out and an error will be generated if the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce is not turned on Waveform Transfer wFMOutpre YUNi t DATa SOUrce WFMOUTPRE YUNIT might return WFMOUTPRE YUNIT dB indicating that the vertical units for the waveform are measured in decibels WFMOutpre YZEro Query Only Group 2 496 Returns the vertical offset in units specified by WFMOutpre YUNit for the waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command The query command will time out and an error will be generated if the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce is not turned on See the description of WFMInpre 7 to see how this offset is used to convert waveform sample values to volts Waveform Transfer 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer
99. THETA UNIts 2 141 CURSor XY PRODUCT DELt2 2 141 CURSor X Y PRODUCT POSITION lt x gt 2 142 CURSor XY PRODUCT UNIts 2 142 CURSor XY RATIO DELta 2 142 CURSor XY RATIO POSITION lt x gt 2 142 CURSor XY RATIO UNIts 2 143 CURSor XY RECTangular X DELta 2 143 CURSor XY RECTangular X POSITION lt x gt 2 143 CURSor XY RECTangular X UNIts 2 144 CURSor XY RECTangular Y DELt2 2 144 CURSor XY RECTangular Y POSITION lt x gt 2 144 CURSor XY RECTangular Y UNIts 2 145 CURSor 2 132 CURSor DDT 2 132 CURSor FUNCtion 2 133 CURSor HBArs 2 133 CURSor HBArs DELTa 2 133 CURSor HBArs UNIts 2 134 CURSor HBArs USE 2 135 CURSor MODe 2 135 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual CURSor VBArs 2 136 CURSor VBArs DELTa 2 137 CURSor VBArs UNIts 2 138 CURSor VBArs USE 2 139 CURSor XY READOUT 2 143 CURVe 2 145 D D lt x gt 2 162 D lt x gt LABel 2 163 D lt x gt POSition 2 163 D lt x gt THREshold 2 164 DATa 2 146 DATa DESTination 2 147 DATa ENCdg 2 147 DATa SOUrce 2 149 DATa STARt 2 150 DATa STOP 2 150 DATE 2 151 DDT 2 152 DESE 2 152 DESkew 2 153 DESkew DISPlay 2 154 DIAg LOOP OPTion NTIMes 2 154 DIAg SELect lt function gt 2 157 DIAg LOOP OPTion 2 154 DIAg LOOP STOP 2 155 DIAg RESUIt FLAg 2 155 DIAg RESUIt LOG 2 156 DIAg SELect 2 156 DIAg STATE 2 157 Display Command Group 2 19 DISplay DIGital HEIght 2 158 DISplay INTENSITy BACKLight 2 160
100. TRG No Query Form Performs a group execute trigger on commands defined by DDT Group X Miscellaneous Syntax TRG Related Commands DDT Examples TRG immediately executes all commands that have been defined by DDT TRIGger No Query Form Forces a trigger event to occur Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger FORCe TRIGger Arguments FORCE creates a trigger event If TRIGger STATE is set to READy the acquisition will complete Otherwise this command will be ignored Examples TRIGGER FORCE forces a trigger event to occur 2 392 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A Sets the A trigger level automatically to 5096 of the range of the minimum and maximum values of the trigger input signal The query returns current A trigger parameters The trigger level is the voltage threshold through which the trigger source signal must pass to generate a trigger event This command works for the following cases Edge Trigger when source is Not Line Logic Trigger when Clock Source is not Off or Logic Pattern is Don t Care and Pulse Width Trigger Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A SETLevel TRIGger A Related Commands TRIGger A EDGE TRIGger A LOGIc TRIGger A PULse Arguments _ SETLevel sets the A trigger level to 50 of the range of the minimum and maximum values of the trigger input signal Examples TRIGGER A SETLEVEL sets the A trigger level to 50 of the r
101. TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI CONDition 2 359 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa SIZe 2 361 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa MISO IN VALue 2 360 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa MOS OUT VALue 2 360 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS SOUrce 2 361 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS 2 331 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A EDGE SLOpe 2 362 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A EDGE SOUIce 2 362 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel 2 362 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel lt gt 2 363 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel MATH 2 363 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel REF lt x gt 2 364 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc FUNCtion 2 364 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CH lt x gt 2 364 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCK EDGE 2 365 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk SOUrce 2 365 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut D lt x gt 2 366 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut MATH 2 366 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut REF lt x gt 2 366 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut CH lt x gt 2 367 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut D lt x gt 2 367 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut MATH 2 368 SEARCH SEARCH lt
102. TRIGger A EDGE commands LOGic specifies that a trigger occurs when specified conditions are met and is controlled by the TRIGger A LOGIc commands This trigger type is equivalent to the logic trigger and to the setup and hold trigger found in the user interface PULSe specifies that a trigger occurs when a specified pulse is found and is controlled by the TRIGger A PULse commands This trigger type is equivalent to the pulse width runt and rise fall time triggers found in the user interface BUS specifies that a trigger occurs when a communications signal is found Supports CAN PC SPI and RS 232 communications signals VIDeo specifies that the trigger occurs when a video signal is found TRIGGER A TYPE EDGE sets the A trigger type to EDGE TRIGGER A might return TRIGGER A TYPE PULSE indicating that the A trigger type is a pulse trigger TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets the upper threshold for channel lt x gt where x is the channel number Each channel can have an independent level Used only for runt and slew rate trigger types Trigger TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH x lt NR3 gt ECL TTL TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt lt NR3 gt is the threshold level in volts ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4V TRIGGER A UPPERTHRESHOLD CH2 50E 3 sets the upper limit of the pulse runt tri
103. WFMINPRE BYT NR might return WFMINPRE BYT NR 2 indicating that there are 2 bytes per incoming waveform data point Sets or returns which byte of binary waveform data is expected first for incoming waveform data when data points require than one byte This specification only has meaning when WFMInpre ENCdg is set to BIN and WFMInpre BYT Nr is 2 Waveform Transfer WFMInpre BYT Or LSB MSB WFMInpre BYT Or WFMInpre ENCdg WFMInpre BYT Nr WFMOutpre BYT Or LSB specifies that the least significant byte will be expected first MSB specifies that the most significant byte will be expected first WFMINPRE BYT OR MSB sets the most significant incoming byte of incoming waveform data to be expected first WFMINPRE BYT OR might return WFMINPRE BYT OR LSB indicating that the least significant incoming CURVe data byte will be expected first Sets or returns the type of encoding for incoming waveform data Waveform Transfer WFMInpre ENCdg ASCii BINary WFMInpre ENCdg 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMinpre NR Pt Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMinpre PT Fmt Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order WFMoOutpre ENCdg ASCi i specifies that the incoming data is in ASCII format BINary specifies that the incoming data is in a binary format whose further interpretation requires knowledge of BYT NR BIT NR BN FMT and BYT OR WFM
104. WFMInpre Y ZEro 2 486 WFMOutpre FRACTional 2 490 WFMoOutpre 2 487 WFMOtutpre BIT_Nr 2 488 WFMoOnutpre BN 2 488 WFMoOutpre BYT Nr 2 489 WFMoOutpre BYT Or 2 489 WFMOutpre ENCdg 2 490 WFMoOnutpre NR Pt 2 491 WFMoOutpre PT Fmt 2 491 WFMoOutpre PT Off 2 492 WFMoOutpre PT ORder 2 492 WFMOutpre WFId 2 493 WFMOutpre XINcr 2 494 WFMoOutpre XUNit 2 494 WFMoOutpre XZEro 2 494 WFMoOutpre Y MUIt 2 495 WFMOutpre Y OFf 2 495 WFMOutpre Y UNit 2 496 Y ZEro 2 496 Z Zoom Command Group 2 67 ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt FACtor 2 498 ZOOm ZOOMK lt x gt POSition 2 498 ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt SCAle 2 499 ZOOm ZOOMK lt x gt STATE 2 499 ZOOm 2 497 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Index ZOOm MODe 2 497 ZOOm ZOOMK lt x gt 2 498 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Index 13
105. a device error occurred 2 QYE Query Error Either an attempt was made to read the Output Queue when no data was present or pending or that data in the Output Queue was lost 1 RQC Request Control This is not used 0 LSB OPC Operation Complete Shows that the operation is complete This bit is set when all pending operations complete following an command The Status Byte Register SBR Records whether output is available in the Output Queue whether the oscilloscope requests service and whether the SESR has recorded any events Use a Serial Poll or the STB query to read the contents of the SBR The bits in the SBR are set and cleared depending on the contents of the SESR the Event Status Enable Register ESER and the Output Queue When you use a Serial Poll to obtain the SBR bit 6 is the RQS bit When you use the STB query to obtain the SBR bit 6 is the MSS bit Reading the SBR does not clear the bits 6 7 05 5 4 J2 1 0 6 EBB MV MSS Figure 3 2 The Status Byte Register SBR Table 3 2 SBR Bit Functions Bit Function 7 MSB Not used 6 RQS Request Service Obtained from a serial poll Shows that the oscilloscope requests service from the GPIB controller 6 MSS Master Status Summary Obtained from STB query Summarizes the ESB and MAV bits in the SBR 5 ESB Event Status Bit Shows that status is enab
106. applicable only to the analog channels Amplitude High Low AREa measures the voltage over time The area is over the entire waveform or gated region and is measured in volt seconds The area measured above the ground is positive while the area below ground is negative This measurement is applicable only to the analog channels BURst measures the duration of a burst The measurement is made over the entire waveform or gated region CARea cycle area measures the voltage over time In other words it measures in volt seconds the area over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region The area measured above the common reference point is positive while the area below the common reference point is negative This measurement is applicable only to the analog channels CMEan cycle mean measures the arithmetic mean over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region This measurement is applicable only to the analog channels CRMs cycle rms measures the true Root Mean Square voltage over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region This measurement is applicable only to the analog channels 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 223 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order 2 224 DELay measures the time between the middle reference default 50 amplitude point of the source waveform and the destination waveform This measurement is applicab
107. command and there is also a CH2 POSition command In the command descriptions this list of choices is abbreviated as CH lt x gt 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 5 Command Syntax Cursor Position Mnemonics Math Specifier Mnemonics 2 6 Measurement Specifier Mnemonics Channel Mnemonics Reference Waveform Mnemonics When cursors are displayed commands may specify which cursor of the pair to use Table 2 5 Channel Mnemonics Symbol Meaning CH lt x gt A channel specifier x is 1 through 4 Table 2 6 Cursor Mnemonics Symbol Meaning 5 lt gt cursor selector lt gt is either 1 2 POSITION lt x gt A cursor selector lt x gt is either 1 or 2 HPOS lt x gt A cursor selector lt x gt is either 1 or 2 Commands can specify the mathematical waveform to use as a mnemonic in the header Table 2 7 Math Specifier Mnemonics Symbol Meaning Math lt x gt A math waveform specifier lt x gt is 1 Commands can specify which measurement to set or query as a mnemonic in the header Up to eight automated measurements may be displayed Table 2 8 Measurement Specifier Mnemonics Symbol Meaning MEAS lt x gt A measurement specifier lt x gt is 1 through 4 Commands specify the channel to use as a mnemonic in the header Commands can specify the reference waveform to use as a mnemonic in the header Table 2 9 Reference Waveform Mnemon
108. commands in the Horizontal Command Group to control the oscilloscope horizontal parameters Table 2 22 Horizontal Commands Command Description HORizontal Returns settings for the horizontal commands HORizontal DELay MODe Sets or returns the horizontal delay mode HORizontal DELay TIMe Sets or returns the horizontal delay time HORizontal DIGital RECOrdlength MAGnivu Returns the record length of the MagniVu digital acquisition HORizontal DIGital RECOrdlength MAIN Returns the record length of the main digital acquisition HORIizontal DIGital SAMPLERate MAGnivu Returns the sample rate of the Magnivu digital acquisition HORizontal DIGital SAMPLERate MAIN Returns the sample rate of the main digital acquisition HORizontal POSition Sets or returns the horizontal position in percent that is used when delay is off HORizontal PREViewstate Returns the display system preview state HORizontal RECOrdlength Sets or returns the record length HORizontal SAMPLERate Sets or returns the sample rate HORizontal SCAle Sets or returns the horizontal scale Use the commands in the Mark Command Group to identify areas of the acquired waveform that warrant further investigation Table 2 23 Mark Commands Command Description MARK Move to the next or previous mark on the waveform or returns all learnable settings from the mark commands MARK
109. data parameters to their factory defaults except for DATa STOP which is set to the current acquisition record length SNAp sets DATa STARt and DATa STOP to match the current waveform cursor positions DATA might return DATA DESTINATION RIBINARY SOURCE CH1 START 1 STOP 500 WIDTH 1 DATA INIT initializes the waveform data parameters to their factory defaults Sets or returns the reference memory location for storing waveform data transferred into the oscilloscope by the CURVe command Waveform Transfer DATa DESTination REF lt x gt DATa DESTination CURVe REF x is the reference location where the waveform will be stored DATA DESTINATION might return DATA DESTINATION REF3 indicating that reference 3 is the currently selected reference memory location for incoming waveform data DATA DESTINATION indicates that incoming waveform data be stored in reference 1 Sets or returns the format of outgoing waveform data This command is equivalent to setting WFMOutpre ENCdg WFMOutpre BN Fmt andWFMOutpre BYT_ Or Setting the DATa ENGdg value causes the corresponding WFMOutpre values to be updated and conversley 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 147 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order 2 148 Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments NOTE This command and query does not apply to incoming waveform data Waveform Transfer DATa ENCdg FAStest RIBin
110. for the switching loss calculation Conditions This command requires DPO4PWR application module Group Power Syntax POWer SWLOSS TON ENERGY MEAN Examples POWER SWLOSS TON ENERGY MEAN might return POWER SWLOSS TON ENERGY MEAN 1 indicating that the mean Ton energy switching loss calculation 15 set to 1 J POWer SWLoss TON ENERGY MIN Query Only Returns the minimum Ton energy for the switching loss calculation Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 309 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Examples Power POWer SWLOSS TON ENERGY MIN POWER SWLOSS TON ENERGY MIN might return POWER SWLOSS TON ENERGY MIN 1 indicating that the minimum Ton energy switching loss calculation 15 set to 1 J POWer SWLoss TON POWER MAX Query Only Conditions Group Syntax Examples Returns the maximum Ton power for the switching loss calculation This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer SWLOSS TON POWER MAX POWER SWLOSS TON POWER might return POWER SWLOSS TON POWER MAX 1 indicating that the maximum Ton power switching loss calculation is set to 1 W POWer SWLoss TON POWER MEAN Query Only Conditions Group Syntax Examples 2 310 Returns the mean Ton power for the switching loss calculation This command requires a DPO4PWR application
111. four periodic measurements Measurement MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent HIGH lt NR3 gt MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent HIGH MEASUrement REFLevel METHod MEASUrement IMMed TY Pe MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TYPe lt NR3 gt is the high reference level ranging from 0 to 100 The default high reference level is 90 MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT HIGH 95 sets the high reference level to 95 of HIGH MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT HIGH might return MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT HIGH 90 indicating that the percentage high reference level is set to 90 of HIGH 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 231 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent LOW Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the percent where 100 15 equal to HIGH used to calculate the low reference level when MEASUrement REFLevel METHod is set to Percent This command affects the results of rise and fall measurements NOTE this command affects the associated reference level parameter for all MEASurements IMMed and the four periodic measurements Measurement MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent LOW lt NR3 gt MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent LOW MEASUrement REFLevel METHod MEASUrement IMMed TYPe MEASUrement MEAS x TY Pe NR3 is the low reference level ranging from 0 to 10095 The default low reference level is 10 MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT LOW 1
112. gt LIMit The IEC and MIL standards specify a limit for each harmonic magnitude Returns the limit in absolute units or as a percentage of the fundamental as specified by the standard IEC Class C Table 2 and MIL standards specify the limit as a percentage of the fundamental POWer HARMonics RESults HAR lt 1 400 gt PHASe Returns the phase of the harmonic in degrees The phase is measured relative to the zero crossing of the reference waveform When there is no reference waveform the phase is relative to the fundamental component POWer HARMonics RESults HAR lt 1 400 gt RMS ABSolute Returns the RMS magnitude of the harmonic expressed in absolute units POWer HARMonics RESults HAR lt 1 400 gt RMS PERCent Returns the RMS magnitude of the harmonic expressed as a percentage of the fundamental POWer HARMonics RESults HAR lt 1 400 gt TEST IEC CLASSALIMit Returns PASS FAIL or NA Specifies if the IEC Class A higher harmonic limit and conditions are met POWer HARMonics RESults HAR lt 1 400 gt TEST IEC NORMAL Returns PASS FAIL or NA Specifies if the Normal IEC harmonic limits are met POWer HARMonics RESults HAR lt 1 400 gt TESTIEC POHCLIMit Returns PASS FAIL or NA Specifies if the higher harmonic limit and conditions for the 21st and higher order odd harmonics are met POWer HARMonics RESults HAR lt 1 400 gt TEST MIL NORMAL Returns the test result for the speci
113. gt CAN PRObe CANH specifies the single ended CANH signal as specified by the CAN standard CANL specifies the single ended CANL signal as specified by the CAN standard RX specifies the receive signal on the bus side of the CAN transceiver TX specifies the transmit signal DIFFerential specifies the differential CAN signal BUS B lt x gt CAN SAMPLEpoint Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the sampling point during each bit period for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module Bus BUS B lt x gt CAN SAMPLEpoint lt NR1 gt BUS B x CAN SAMPLEpoint NR1 is the sample point in percent Values are limited to 25 30 70 75 BUS B lt x gt CAN SOUrce Conditions 2 92 Sets or returns the CAN bus data source for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Bus BUS B x CAN SOUrce CH1 CH2 01102 103 04105 06107 08 09 0101011 012 013 014 015 BUS B lt x gt CAN SOUrce CH1 CH4 is the analog channel to use as the data source 00 015 is the digital channel to use as the data source BUS B lt x gt DISplay FORMAt Conditions Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Sets or returns the display format for the num
114. gt AUDi0 DATa HIVALue lt String gt SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS lt 1 4 gt AUDi0 DATa 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order lt String gt specifies the search data trigger data upper word SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio DATa OFFSet Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the search trigger data offset for the AUDIO bus This command requires DPO4AUDIO application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDi0 DATa OFFSet lt NR1 gt SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS lt 1 4 gt AUDiO DATa OFFSet lt 1 gt is the search trigger data offset value SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio DATa QUALIifier Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the search trigger data qualifier for the AUDIO bus This command requires DPO4AUDIO application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDi0 DATa QUALi fier LESSThan MOREThan EQUal UNEQual LESSEQual MOREEQual INrange OUTrang SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDi0 DATa QUALi fier LESSThan sets the search trigger data qualifier to less than MOREThan sets the search trigger data qualifier to greater than EQUa sets the search trigger data qualifier to equal UNEQual sets the search trigger da
115. gt can only be 1 ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt POSition Sets or returns the horizontal position of the zoom window in terms of 0 to 100 of the overview window lt x gt can only be 1 ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt SCAle 200 200 lt gt 5 Sets or returns the horizontal zoom scale of the zoom window lt x gt can only be 1 Specifies or returns a trace as Zoomed on or off lt x gt can only be 1 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 67 Command Groups 2 68 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ACQuire Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands ACQuire MAGnivu Group Syntax Arguments Returns the following current acquisition parameters Stop after Acquisition state Mode Number of averages Sampling mode Acquisition ACQuire ACQuire MODe ACQuire NUMACq ACQuire NUMAVg ACQuire S TOPA fter Sets or returns the MagniVu feature which provides up to 32 times signal detail for fast viewing of short events This feature is not recommended for slow data formats such as RS 232 NOTE MagniVu channel sampling is available on MSO oscilloscopes only Acquisition ACQuire MAGnivu lt NR1 gt OFF ON ACQuire MAGni vu lt NR1 gt 0 disables the MagniVu feature any other value turns this feature on ON enables the MagniVu feature OFF disables the MagniVu feature 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer
116. gt lt gt lt QString gt lt Block gt ALIas DEFine lt QString gt ALlIas STATE The first lt QString gt is the alias label This label cannot be a command name Labels must start with a letter and can contain only letters numbers and underscores other characters are not allowed The label must be less than or equal to 12 characters The second Qstring or Block is a complete sequence of program messages The messages can contain only valid commands that must be separated by semicolons and must follow all rules for concatenating commands The sequence must be less than or equal to 256 characters ALIAS DEFINE ST1 RECALL SETUP 5 AUTOSET EXECUTE SELECT CH1 ON defines an alias named STI that sets up the oscilloscope ALIAS DEFINE STI returns ALIAS DEFINE 5 1 246 RECALL SETUP 5 AUTOSET EXECUTE SELECT CH1 ALlas DELEte No Query Form Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Removes a specified alias and is identical to ALIas DELEte NAMe An error message 15 generated if the named alias does not exist Alias ALIas DELEte Qstring ESR ALIas DELEte ALL Qstring is the name of the alias to be removed Using ALIas DELEte without specifying an alias causes an execution error lt QString gt must bea previously defined value 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 75 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Examples ALIAS DELETE SETUP1 deletes t
117. identifier field EXTended specifies a 29 bit identifier field SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN Dentifier ADDRess VALue 2 338 Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the binary address string to be used for a CAN trigger search if the search condition is ID or IDANDDATA SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess VALue lt bin gt SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS lt gt IDentifier ADDRess VALue lt bin gt is the address in binary format 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CONDition Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the trigger condition for FLEXRAY Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS lt gt FLEXray CONDition SOF FRAMETypeid CYCLEcount HEADer DATA IDANDDATA EOF ERROR SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS lt gt FLEXray CONDition SOF sets the FLEXRAY trigger condition to start of frame FRAMETypeid sets the FLEXRAY trigger condition to a frame type id sets the FLEXRAY trigger condition to cycle count HEADer sets the FLEXRAY trigger condition to header DATA sets the FLEXRAY trigger co
118. if a runt of any detectable width occurs LESSthan argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger if the a runt pulse is detected with width less than the time set by the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT WIDth command than argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger if the a runt pulse is detected with width than the time set by the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT WIDth command EQUal argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the pattern is true for a time period equal to the time period specified in SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT WIDth within a 5 tolerance NOTEQua argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the pattern is true for a time period greater than or less than but not equal the time period specified in SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT WIDth within a 5 tolerance SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT WIDth Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the width setting for a runt trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A RUNT WIDth lt NR3 gt SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A RUNT WIDth NR3 specifies the minimum width in seconds SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A SETHold CLOCKk EDGE Group Sets or returns the clock slope setting for a setup hold trigger search to determine where to place a mark x is the search number Search 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 375 Com
119. is equivalent to multiplying all gate data by one HAMming window function is based a cosine series HANning window function is based on a cosine series 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 201 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Examples MATH 1 TYPe Group Syntax Arguments Examples BLAckmanharris window function is based on a cosine series 1 SPECTRAL WINDOW HANNING applies a Hanning window to the spectral analyzer input data MATH1 SPECTRAL WINDOW might return MATH1 SPECTRAL WINDOW HAMMING indicating that the window function used to multiply the spectral analyzer input data is the Hamming window Sets or returns the math waveform mode type Math MATH 1 TYPe ADVanced DUAL FFT MATH 1 TYPe ADVanced sets the math waveform mode to advanced math DUAL sets the math waveform mode to dual waveform math FFT sets the math waveform mode to FFT math MATH TYPE FFT sets the math waveform mode to FFT MATH TYPE FFT MATH DEFINE FFT CH1 sets the math type to FFT and displays an FFT waveform of the channel 1 waveform using the current FFT scale and window settings MATH TYPE ADVANCED MATH DEFINE INTGCREF1 CH3 DELAY CH1 CH2 sets the math type to FFT and displays an advanced math waveform that is the integration of the product of and CH3 plus the result of the delay measurement between channel 1 and 2 MATH 1 VERTical POSition Group
120. is used to calculate the mid reference level for the second waveform specified when MEASUrement REFLevel METHod is set to Percent This command affects the results of delay measurements NOTE this command affects the associated reference level parameter for all MEASurements IMMed and the four periodic measurements Measurement MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID2 NR3 MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID2 MEASUrement REFLevel METHod lt NR3 gt is the mid reference level ranging from 0 to 100 The default mid reference level is 50 MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT MID2 40 sets the mid2 reference level to 4096 of HIGH MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT MID2 might return MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT MID2 45 indicating that the percentage mid2 reference level is set to 45 of HIGH 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 233 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID lt x gt Sets or returns the mid reference level for channel lt x gt where x is the measurement channel Group Measurement Syntax X MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID x lt NR3 gt MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent lt gt Arguments lt NR3 gt is the mid reference level in percent MEASUrement SNAPShot No Query Form Displays the measurement snapshot list on the oscilloscope screen The list contains the immediate values for all available measurements of the active signal Gro
121. lt x gt is the search number If a clock source is defined then the logic search is determined by the state of the other inputs at the clock transition If no clock source is defined then the logic search is determined only by the state of the inputs Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIC INPut CLOCk SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 REF NONe SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIC INPut CLOCk SOUrce lt gt specifies a channel input as the clock source where lt gt 1 2 3 or 4 MATH specifies the math waveform as the clock source REF specifies the reference waveform as the clock source NONe specifies no clock source 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 365 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut D lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the waveform logic criteria for a trigger search SEARCH x is the search number and D x is the digital channel number Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIC INPut D lt x gt HIGH LOW X SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC INPUut D x HIGH specifies a high logic level LOW specifies a low logic level X specifies a don t care condition SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIc INPut MATH Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for a logic trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt gt 15 the search number
122. lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This command requires a DPO4COMP application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa SIZe SEARCH SEARCH X TRIGger A BUS lt gt RS232C RX DATa SIZe NRI is the length of the data string in Bytes SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa VALue Conditions Group Syntax 2 358 Sets or returns the binary data string for an RS 232 trigger search if the condition involves RX SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This command requires a DPO4COMP application module Search SEARCH SEARCH X TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa VALue SEARCH lt gt TRIGger A BUS lt gt RS232C RX DATa VALue 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa SIZe Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the length of the data string to be used for an RS 232 trigger search if the Trigger condition is TX SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This command requires a DPO4COMP application module Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa SIZe SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt is the length of
123. might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIG A BUS B1 SPI COND SS DAT MOSI VAL XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCHT TRIG A BUS B1 SPI DAT MISO VAL SEARCH SEARCHT TRIG A BUS B1 SPI DAT SIZ 1 TRIG A BUS B1 12C COND STAR DAT VAL SIZ 1 NOCARE SEARCH 1 TRIG A BUS B1 I2C ADDR MOD ADDR7 TYP USER VAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIG A BUS B1 CAN COND SOF FRAME DATA DAT VAL XXXXXXXX SIZ 1 D IR NOCARE QUAL EQU SEARCH 1 10 ST VAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRI G A BUS B2 SPI COND SS DAT MOSI VAL XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIG A BUS B2 SPI DAT MISO VAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIG A BUS B2 SPI DAT SIZ SEARCH SEARCH TRIG A BUS B2 12C COND 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 329 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order STAR DAT VAL XXXXXXXX SIZ 1 DIR NOCARE SEARCH SEARCH TRIG A BUS B2 12C ADDR MOD ADDR7 TYP USER VAL XXXXXXX 3 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIG A BUS B2 CAN COND SOF FRAME DATA DAT VAL XXXXXXXX SIZ 1 DIR NOCARE QUAL EQU SEARCH SEARCHI TRIG A BUS B2 CAN ID MOD ST VAL XXXXXXXXXXX 5 SEARCH SEARCHL TRIG A BUS SOU B1 SEA RCH SEARCH1 TRIG A TYP EDG LEV 0 0000 LEV CH1 0 0000 CH2 0 0000 CH3 0 0000 CH4 0 0000 MATH 0 0000 RE F1 0 0000 REF2 0 0000 REF3 0 0000 REF4
124. most significant eight bits followed by significant eight bits of a 16 bit number The number specifies the position relative to the left margin of the message area For example to tab send TAB X or x09 NUL decimal 0 and CR decimal 13 For example using hexadecimal escape sequences MESSAGE SHOW x09 x01 x17Hello when sent as a command would cause the Hello to be displayed starting at pixel position 279 relative to the left margin set by the MESSAGE BOX command If you want to display characters starting at position 279 then 279 0x0117 split the hexadecimal number into two characters 0x01 and 0x17 and send x09 x01 x17 Special characters which control decoration are two character sequences where the first character is an escape 0 1 and the second character is as described below Bit 7 0 Bit 6 If set inverse video is toggled from current state and the following text is displayed in the new inverse state until the state is toggled again Remaining bits are ignored Bit 5 If set the color index in the four LSB s bits 0 through 3 is applied to the foreground or background color depending on the fg bg bit bit 4 Bit 4 If set color change is applied to the background otherwise applies to the foreground Bit 0 3 Specifies the color index 0 through 15 to change color as specified below Index 0 Black background Index 1 Yellow Ch 1 Index 2 Cyan Ch 2 Index 3 Magenta
125. new name to an existing file FILESystem RMDir Deletes a named directory FILESystem WRITEFile Writes the specified block data to the oscilloscope current working directory Hard Copy Command Group 2 22 Use the commands in the Hard Copy Command Group to make hard copies PictBridge commands belong to a separate group See page 2 32 PictBridge Command Group Table 2 21 Hard Copy Commands Command Description HARDCopy Sends a copy of the screen display to the selected printer HARDCopy ACTIVeprinter Sets or returns the currently active printer HARDCopy INKSaver Changes hard copy output to print color traces and graticule on a white background 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Command Groups Table 2 21 Hard Copy Commands cont Command Description HARDCopy LAYout Sets or returns the page orientation for hard copy HARDCopy PREVIEW Previews the current screen contents with the InkSaver palette applied HARDCopy PRINTer ADD Adds a network printer to the list of available printers HARDCopy PRINTer DELete Removes a network printer from the list of available printers HARDCopy PRINTer LIST Returns the list of currently attached printers HARDCopy PRINTer REName Renames a network printer in the list of available printers 504000 DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 23 Command Groups Horizontal Command Group Mark Command Group 2 24 Use the
126. of available printers replacing the currently stored settings with the settings specified in this command Four arguments must be present but the arguments may be empty strings if the value for a field is to be deleted Hard Copy HARDCopy PRINTer REName name new name new server new address name is the name of the printer to be deleted new name is the new name for this printer new server is the new print server for this printer new address is the new IP address for the server Sets or returns the Response Header Enable State that causes the oscilloscope to either include or omit headers on query responses NOTE This command does not affect IEEE Std 488 2 1987 Common Commands those starting with an asterisk these commands never return headers This command does affect the Response Header Enable State of both the USBTMC and VXI 11 interfaces Refer to the Introduction for additional information Miscellaneous 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 185 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples HEADer OFF ON lt NR1 gt HEADer VERBose OFF sets the Response Header Enable State to false This causes the oscilloscope to omit headers on query responses so that only the argument is returned ON sets the Response Header Enable State to true This causes the oscilloscope to include headers on applicable query res
127. of the oscilloscope and control events Several commands and queries used with the oscilloscope are common to all 488 2 compliant devices The IEEE Std 488 2 1987 defines these commands and queries The common commands begin with an asterisk character Table 2 30 Status and Error Commands Command Description ALLEv Returns all events and their messages BUSY Returns oscilloscope status CLS Clears status DESE Sets or returns the bits in the Device Event Status Enable Register ESE Sets or returns the bits in the Event Status Enable Register ESR Returns the contents of the Standard Event Status Register EVENT Returns event code from the event queue 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 47 Command Groups Table 2 30 Status and Error Commands cont Command Description EVMsg Returns event code message from the event queue EVQty Return number of events in the event queue Generates the operation complete message in the standard event status register when all pending operations are finished Or returns 1 when all current operations are finished PSC Sets or returns the power on status flag PUD Sets or returns a string of protected user data RST Resets the oscilloscope to factory default settings SRE Sets or returns the bits in the Service Request Enable Register STB Returns the contents of the Status Byte Register W
128. or equal MOREEQua sets the FLEXRAY data qualifier to greater than or equal 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order INrange sets the FLEXRAY data qualifier to in range OUTrange sets the FLEXRAY data qualifier to out of range SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA QUALIFIER LESSTHAN sets the data qualifier to LESSTHAN SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA QUALIFIER might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL indicating the data qualifier is EQUAL SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa SlZe Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for FLEXRAY trigger Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa SIZe NRI is the length of the data string in bytes Length range is 1 to 8 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA SIZE 8 sets the data size to 8 bytes SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA SIZE might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS FLEXRAY DATA SIZE 1 indicating the data size is 1 byte SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa VALue Group Syntax Sets or returns the low binary data string used for FLEXRAY trigger condition if tr
129. or returns the user XMAX value for use in linear SOA calculations Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Group Power Syntax POWer SOA LINear XMAX lt NR3 gt POWer SOA LINear XMAX Arguments lt NR3 gt is the XMAX value used for linear SOA calculations 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 287 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Examples POWER SOA LINEAR XMAX 700 sets XMAX value to 700 0000 POWER SOA LINEAR XMAX might return POWER SOA LINear XMAX 500 0000 indicating that the XMAX value for linear plot type is set to 500 0000 POWer SOA LINear XMIN Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the user XMIN value for use in linear SOA calculations This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer SOA LINear XMIN lt NR3 gt POWer SOA LINear XMIN NR3 is the XMIN value used for linear SOA calculations POWER SOA LINEAR XMIN 2 sets the XMIN value to 2 0000 POWER SOA LINEAR XMIN might return POWER SOA LINear XMIN 0 0E 0 indicating that the XMIN value for linear plot type is set to 0 0E 0 POWer SOA LINear YMAX Conditions Group Syntax Arguments 2 288 Sets or returns the user YMAX value for use in linear SOA calculations This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer SOA LINear YMAX lt NR3 gt POWer SOA LINear YMAX lt NR3 gt is the YMAX value u
130. over the entire waveform or gated region CARea cycle area measures the voltage over time In other words it measures in volt seconds the area over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region The area measured above the common reference point is positive while the area below the common reference point is negative This measurement is applicable only to the analog channels CMEan cycle mean measures the arithmetic mean over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region This measurement is applicable only to the analog channels CRMs cycle rms measures the true Root Mean Square voltage over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region This measurement is applicable only to the analog channels measures the time between the middle reference default 50 amplitude point of the source waveform and the destination waveform FALL measures the time taken for the falling edge of the first pulse in the waveform or gated region to fall from a high reference value default is 90 to a low reference value default is 10 This measurement is applicable only to the analog channels FREQuency measures the first cycle in the waveform or gated region Frequency is the reciprocal of the period and is measured in hertz Hz where 1 Hz 1 cycle per second HIGH measures the High reference 10096 level sometimes called Topline of a waveform This me
131. parameter for individual measurements use the MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt REFLevel commands Measurement MEASUrement REFLevel METHod ABSolute PERCent MEASUrement REFLevel METHod ABSo lute specifies that the reference levels set explicitly using the MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute commands This method is useful when 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order precise values are required for example when designing to published interface specifications such as RS 232 C PERCent specifies that the reference levels are calculated as a percent relative to HIGH and LOW The percentages are defined using the MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent commands MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL METHOD ABSOLUTE specifies that explicit user defined values are used for the reference levels MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL METHOD might return MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL METHOD PERCENT indicating that the reference level units used are calculated as a percent relative to HIGH and LOW MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent HIGH Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the percent where 10096 is equal to HIGH used to calculate the high reference level when MEASUrement REFLevel METHod is set to Percent This command affects the results of rise and fall measurements NOTE This command affects the associated reference level parameter for all MEASurements IMMed and the
132. qualifier to OUTrange SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMEID QUALIFIER OUTRANGE sets the frame id qualifier to out of range SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMEID QUALIFIER might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMEID QUALIFIER EQUAL indicating the frame id qualifier is EQUAL SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEID VALue 2 346 Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for FLEXRAY frame ID low value Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray FRAMEID VALue Qstring SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS lt gt FLEXray FRAMEID VALue Qstring is a quoted string representing the binary data string used for FLEXRAY frame ID low value 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples SEARCH SEARCHL TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMEID VALUE 11001101010 sets the value of the frame id is 11001101010 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMEID VALUE might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMEID VALUE 10110010101 indicating the value of the frame id is 10110010101 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEType Sets or returns the frame type for FLEXRAY Group X Search Syntax SEARCH SEARCH X TRIGger A BUS lt gt FLEXray FRAMEType
133. quotes Examples ETHERNET DOMAINNAME Alphal Mycorp com sets the domain name that 2 166 the oscilloscope uses to communicate with the network 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ETHERnet ENET ADDress Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the Ethernet address value assigned to the oscilloscope This is assigned at the factory and can not be changed Ethernet ETHERnet ENET ADDress ETHERNET ENET ADDRESS returns an Ethernet address such as 08 00 11 01 02 03 ETHERnet GATEWay IPADDress Group Syntax Arguments Examples ETHERnet HTTPPort Group Syntax Sets or returns the remote interface gateway IP address Ethernet ETHERnet GATEWay IPADDress lt QString gt ETHERnet GATEWay IPADDress Qstring is a standard IP address value enclosed in quotes ETHERNET GATEWAY IPADDRESS 128 143 16 1 sets the gateway IP address Sets or returns the remote interface HTTP port value Ethernet ETHERnet HTTPPort Qstring ETHERnet HTTPPort 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 167 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Arguments Examples ETHERnet IPADDress Group Syntax Arguments Examples ETHERnet NAME Group Syntax Arguments Examples 2 168 Qstring is an integer port number enclosed in quotes NOTE Consider the following if you are using the e Scope control software
134. runt of any detectable width occurs LESSthan argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger if the a runt pulse is detected with width less than the time set by the TRIGger A RUNT WIDth command than argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger if the a runt pulse is detected with width than the time set by the TRIGger A RUNT WIDth command EQUal argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger if a runt pulse is detected with width equal to the time period specified in TRIGger A RUNT WIDth within a 5 tolerance NOTEQua argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger if a runt pulse is detected with width greater than or less than but not equal to the time period specified in TRIGger A RUNT WIDth within a 5 tolerance TRIGGER A RUNT WHEN THAN sets the runt trigger to occur when the oscilloscope detects a runt in a pulse wider than the specified width TRIGGER A RUNT WHEN might return TRIGGER A PULSE RUNT WHEN OCCURS indicating that a runt trigger will occur if the oscilloscope detects a runt of any detectable width TRIGger A RUNT WIDth Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the width for a runt trigger Trigger TRIGger A RUNT WIDth lt NR3 gt TRIGger A RUNT WIDth TRIGger A RUNT WHEn lt NR3 gt specifies the minimum width in seconds TRIGGER A RUNT WIDTH 15E 6 sets the minimum width of the pulse runt trigger to 15 ps TRIGGER A RUNT WIDTH might return TRIGGER PULSE
135. search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Search 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 351 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments SEARCH SEARCH X TRIGger A BUS B x I2C CONDi tion STARt STOP REPEATstart ACKMISS ADDRess DATA ADDRANDDATA SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS lt gt I2C CONDi tion STARt specifies a search based on a start condition STOP specifies a search based on a stop condition REPEATstart specifies a search based on a repeat of start condition ACKMISS specifies a search based on a missing acknowledgement condition ADDRess specifies a search based on an address DATA specifies a search based on a data condition ADDRANDDATA specifies a search based on an address and data condition SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B x I2C DATa DlIRection Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the I2C search condition to be valid on a Read Write or Either condition SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and lt gt is the bus number This command requires DPO4EMBD application module Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B x I2C DATa DIRection READ WRITE NOCARE SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa DIRection READ specifies a read condition WRITE specifies a write condition NOCARE specifies either a read or write
136. sensitivity TRIGGER B EDGE COUPLING DC selects DC for the B trigger coupling TRIGGER B EDGE COUPLING might return TRIGGER B EDGE COUPLING ATRIGGER for the B trigger coupling TRIGger B EDGE SLOpe Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the slope for the B trigger Trigger TRIGger B EDGE SLOpe RISe FALL TRIGger B EDGE SLOpe TRIGger B EDGE RISe triggers on the rising or positive edge of a signal FALL triggers on the falling or negative edge of a signal TRIGGER B EDGE SLOPE FALL sets the B edge trigger to occur on the falling slope TRIGGER B EDGE SLOPE might return TRIGGER B EDGE SLOPE RISE indicating that the B edge trigger occurs on the rising slope TRIGger B EDGE SOUrce Group Syntax Sets or returns the source for the B trigger Trigger TRIGger B EDGE SOUrce CH lt x gt EXT LINE TRIGger B EDGE SOUrce 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 465 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Related Commands Arguments Examples TRIGger B EDGE CH lt x gt specifies one of the input channels as the B trigger source EXT specifies an external trigger using the Aux In connector located on the front panel of the oscilloscope as the B trigger source LINE specifies the power line as the B trigger source TRIGGER B EDGE SOURCE CH4 sets channel 4 as the input source for the trigger TRIGGER B EDGE SOURCE might retu
137. signed integer where the most significant byte is transferred first and RPBinary is positive integer where the most significant byte is transferred first SRIbinary and SRPbinary correspond to RIBinary and RPBinary respectively but 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Waveform Data and Record Lengths Waveform Data Locations and Memory Allocation Waveform Preamble Scaling Waveform Data Command Groups use a swapped byte order where the least significant byte is transferred first The byte order is ignored when DATa WIDth is set to 1 You can transfer multiple points for each waveform record You can transfer a portion of the waveform or you can transfer the entire record You can use the DATa STARt and DATa STOP commands to specify the first and last data points of the waveform record When transferring data into the oscilloscope you must first specify the record length of the destination waveform record You do this with the WFMInpre NR_ Pt command Next specify the first data point within the waveform record For example when you set DATa STARt to 1 data points will be stored starting with the first point in the record The oscilloscope will ignore the value set by DATa STOP when reading in data It will stop reading data when there is no data to read or when it has reached the specified record length When transferring data from the oscilloscope you must specify the first and last data points in the waveform recor
138. specified time period NORMa waits for a valid trigger event TRIGGER NORMAL specifies that a valid trigger event must occur before a trigger is generated TRIGGER A MODE might return TRIGGER A MODE NORMAL indicating that a valid trigger event must occur before a trigger is generated 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 439 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order TRIGger A PULse Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Returns the A pulse trigger parameters Trigger TRIGger A PULSe TRIGger A EDGE TRIGger A LOGIc TRIGGER A PULSE might return TRIGGER A PULSE CLASS TRANSITION TRIGger A PULse CLAss Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples 2 440 Sets or returns the type of pulse on which to trigger Trigger TRIGger A PULSe CLAss RUNt WIDth TRANsition TRIGger A PULSe CLAss TRIGger A RUNT TRIGger A PULSEWIDth TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall TRIGger A TYPe RUNt triggers when a pulse crosses the first preset voltage threshold but does not cross the second preset threshold before recrossing the first WIDth triggers when a pulse is found that has the specified polarity and is either inside or outside the specified time limits TRANS1i tion triggers when a pulse crosses both thresholds in the same direction as the specified polarity and the transition time between the two threshold crossings 18 greater or less than t
139. the A pulse trigger parameters TRIGger A PULse CLAss Sets or returns the type of pulse on which to trigger TRIGger A PULSEWIDth Returns the trigger A pulse width parameters TRIGger A PULSEWidth POLarity Sets or returns the polarity for the A pulse width trigger TRIGger A PULSEWidth SOUrce Sets or returns the source for the pulse width trigger TRIGger A PULSEWidth WHEn Sets or returns the criteria for width specification of pulse width trigger events TRIGger A PULSEWidth WIDth Sets or retums the width setting for the pulse width trigger 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Table 2 31 Trigger Commands cont Command Groups Command Description TRIGger A RUNT Returns the current A runt pulse trigger logic parameters TRIGger A RUNT POLarity Sets or returns the polarity for the A pulse runt trigger TRIGger A RUNT SOUrce Sets or returns the source for the A pulse trigger TRIGger A RUNT WHEn Sets or returns the type of pulse width the trigger checks for when it uncovers a runt TRIGger A RUNT WIDth Sets or returns the minimum width for A pulse runt trigger TRIGger A SETHold Returns settings for setup and hold violation triggering TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk Returns clock edge polarity voltage threshold and source input for setup hold triggering TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk EDGE Sets or returns the clock edge polarity for setup and hold triggering TRIGger A SETHol
140. the difference between the cursors X position and cursor Y position CURSor XY PRODUCT POSITION lt x gt Returns the position of the X or Y cursor used to calculate the X x Y cursor measurement CURSor XY PRODUCT UNIts Returns the XY cursor product units CURSor XY RATIO DELta Returns the ratio of the difference between the cursor X position and cursor Y position CURSor XY RATIO POSITION lt x gt Returns the X or Y position for the specified cursor CURSor XY RATIO UNIts Returns the X and Y cursor units for the ratio measurement CURSor XY READOUT Sets or returns the XY cursor readout selection CURSor XY RECTangular X DELta Returns the cursor X delta value in rectangular coordinates CURSor XY RECTangular X POSITION lt x gt Sets or returns the cursor X rectangular coordinates CURSor XY RECTangular X UNIts Returns the Cursor X rectangular units CURSor XY RECTangular Y DELta Returns The cursor Y delta value in rectangular coordinates CURSor XY RECTangular Y POSITION lt x gt gt Sets or returns the cursor Y rectangular coordinate CURSor XY RECTangular Y UNIts Returns the cursor Y rectangular units Display Command Group Use the commands in the Display Command Group to change the graticule style the display intensities and to set the characteristics of the waveform display NOTE Your settings globally affect all displayed waveforms 8040
141. the low reference level to 0 0 V MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE LOW might return MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE LOW 0 0000 00 indicating that the absolute low reference level is set to 0 0 V 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID 1 Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the mid reference level and is the 50 reference level when MEASUrement REFLevel METHod is set to Absolute This command affects the results of period frequency delay and all cyclic measurements NOTE this command affects the associated reference level parameter for all MEASurements IMMed and the four periodic measurements Measurement MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID 1 lt NR3 gt MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID 1 MEASUrement REFLevel METHod lt NR3 gt is the mid reference level in volts The default is 0 0 V MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE MID 1 71 sets the mid reference level to 71 V MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE MID might return MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE MID 0 7100 00 indicating that the absolute midl reference level is set to 71 V MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID2 Group Syntax Sets or returns the mid reference level for the to waveform when taking a delay measurement and is the 50 reference level when MEASUrement REFLevel METHod is set to Absolute This comm
142. the mid voltage reference level in volts POWER SWLOSS REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE GATEMID 100 sets the absolute gate mid reference voltage to 100 0000 V POWER SWLOSS REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE GATEMID might return POWER SWLOSS REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE GATEMID 50 0000 indicating that the gate mid reference voltage is set to 50 0000 V POWer SWLoss REFLevel ABSolute LOWCurrent Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the low current reference level used in switching loss power measurements in amperes This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer SWLoss REFLevel ABSolute LOWCurrent lt NR3 gt POWer SWLoSS REFLevel ABSolute LOWCurrent lt NR3 gt is the low voltage current level in amperes POWER SWLOSS REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE LOWCURRENT 2 8 sets the absolute reference low current to 2 8000 A POWER SWLOSS REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE LONCURRENT might return POWER SWLOSS REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE LONCURRENT 5 0000 indicating that the absolute reference low current is set to 5 0000 A POWer SWLoss REFLevel ABSolute LOWVoltage Conditions Group 2 304 Sets or returns the low voltage reference level used in switching loss power measurements in volts This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order POWer SWLoss REFLevel ABSolute LOWVoltage
143. the vertical scale factor per digitizing level of the incoming waveform points WFMINPRE YMULT might return WFMINPRE YMULT 40 0000E 3 which if YUNit is indicates that the vertical scale is 40 mV digitizing level 1V div for 8 bit data WFMINPRE YMULT 20E 3 specifies that if WFMInpre YUNit 15 V and WFMInpre BYT Nr is 1 the vertical scale is 20 mV digitizing level 500 mV div Sets or returns the vertical position of the incoming waveform digitizing levels Variations in this number are analogous to changing the vertical position of the waveform YMUIt YOFf and YZEro are used to convert waveform record values to YUNit values using the following formula where dl is the data level curve in dlisa data point in CURVe value in units curve in dl YOFf in dl YMUIt YZEro in units NOTE For a given waveform record YMUIt YOFf and YZEro have to be a consistent set otherwise vertical cursor readouts and vertical measurements may give incorrect results Waveform Transfer WFMInpre YOFf lt NR3 gt WFMInpre YOFf WFMInpre BYT_Nr WFMInpre YMUIt WFMOutpre YOFf 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 485 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Arguments Examples WFMinpre YUNit Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMinpre YZEro 2 486 lt NR3 gt is the vertical offset in digitizing levels WFMINPRE YOFF 50 specifies that the zero refe
144. to the search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt STATE Sets the search state to on or off SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TOTAL Returns the total number of matches for search lt x gt SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS Returns the search trigger bus type 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 41 Command Groups Search Commands cont 2 42 Command Description SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio CONDition Sets or returns the search trigger condition for the AUDIO bus Start of Frame or Data SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio DATa HIVALue Sets or returns the search trigger data upper word for the AUDIO bus SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B 1 4 AUDio DATa OFFSet Sets or returns the search trigger data offset for the AUDIO bus SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B 1 4 AUDio DATa QUALifier Sets or returns the search trigger data qualifier for the AUDIO bus SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B 1 4 AUDio DATa VALue Sets or returns the search trigger data lower word for the AUDIO bus SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B 1 4 AUDio DATa WORD Sets or returns the search trigger data alignment for the AUDIO bus SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN CONDition Sets or returns the search condition for CAN search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa DIRection Sets or returns the CAN se
145. transition time trigger parameters Trigger TRIGger A TRANSition 11 TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt TRIGGER A TRANSITION might return TRIGGER A TRANSITION POLARITY POSITIVE WHEN SLOWER DELTATIME 8 0000 9 TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall DELTatime Group Syntax Arguments Examples 2 452 Sets or returns the delta time used in calculating the transition value for the transition trigger Trigger TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFall DELTatime lt NR3 gt TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFal1 DELTatime lt NR3 gt specifies the delta time in seconds TRIGGER A TRANSITION DELTATIME 15 6 sets the delta time of the transition trigger to 15 us TRIGGER A TRANSITION DELTATIME might return TRIGGER A TRANSITION DELTATIME 2 0000E 09 indicating that the delta time of the transition trigger is set to 2 ns 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall POLarity Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the polarity for the transition trigger Trigger TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFallj POLarity EITher NEGative POSitive TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFal1 POLarity POSi tive indicates that a pulse edge must traverse from the lower most negative to higher most positive level for transition triggering to occur NEGative indicates that a pulse edge mus
146. upper threshold is set to 800 mV Returns the status of the oscilloscope This command allows you to synchronize the operation of the oscilloscope with your application program Status and Error BUSY WAI lt NR1 gt 0 means the oscilloscope is not busy processing a command whose execution time is extensive lt NR1 gt means the oscilloscope is busy processing one of the commands listed in the table below 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 113 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Examples CAL Query Only Group Syntax Returns Examples Commands that affect BUSY response Operation Command Single sequence ACQuire STATE ON or acquisition ACQuire STATE RUN or ACQuire STATE1 when ACQuire S TOPAfter is set to SEQuence Hard copy operation HARDCopy STArt Calibration step Refer to the optional oscilloscope Service Manual BUSY might return BUSY 1 indicating that the oscilloscope is currently busy Performs an internal self calibration and returns the oscilloscope calibration status NOTE Disconnect or otherwise remove all input signals prior to starting self calibration The self calibration can take several minutes to complete No other commands are executed until calibration is complete Calibration and Diagnostic CAL lt NR1 gt 1 indicates the calibration did not complete successfully NRI 0 indicates the calibration completed with
147. using the WFMOutpre query 6 Transfer waveform data from the oscilloscope using the CURVe query You can transfer waveforms to the oscilloscope from an external controller using the following sequence Specify the reference waveform using DATa DESTination Specify the record length of the reference waveform using WFMPre NR Pt Specify the waveform data format using WFMInpre ENCdg Specify first data point in the waveform record using DATa STARt 1 2 3 4 Specify the number of bytes per data point using WFMInpre BYT Nr 5 6 Transfer waveform preamble information using WFMInpre 7 Transfer waveform data to the oscilloscope using CURVe Table 2 34 Waveform Transfer Commands Command Description CURVe The command format transfers waveform data to the oscilloscope reference waveform specified by DATa DESTination The query format transfers waveform data from oscilloscope specified by the DATa SOUrce command DATa Sets the format and location of the waveform data that is transferred with the CURVe Command Or returns the format and location of the waveform data that is transferred with the CURVe command DATa DESTination Sets or returns the reference waveform for storing waveform data sent to the oscilloscope DATa ENCdg Sets or returns the format of outgoing waveform data 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Command Groups Table 2 34 Waveform Transfer Commands cont
148. value turns on the display of the specified waveform SELECT CH2 ON turns the channel 2 waveform display on and selects channel 2 SELECT CH1 might return SELECT CH1 1 indicating that channel 1 is being displayed Sets or returns the waveform that is the recipient of future channel related commands for example the cursor commands The command form also performs the equivalent of a SELect CH lt x gt ON command as well as the Math Reference and Bus variations of that command Vertical SELect CONTRO CH lt x gt MATH BUS lt x gt SELect CONTROI CH lt x gt specifies a channel waveform as the waveform affected by the front panel controls lt x gt is the channel number 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Returns Examples SELect D lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MATH specifies the math waveform as the waveform that is affected by the front panel controls BUS lt x gt specifies a bus waveform as the waveform affected by the front panel controls lt x gt specifies the bus number NONE if all the channels are turned off NONE is ignored on input SELECT CONTROL CH2 resets acquisition displays on channel 2 and causes the selected waveform to be the implied object of waveform commands SELECT CONTROL might return SELECT CONTROL MATH indicating that math is the implied object of waveform commands Turns on the display of the
149. where to place a mark This setting is applied to all channel searches that uses an upper threshold SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and CH lt x gt is the channel number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH x TTL SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH x TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A UPPerthreshold MATH 2 382 Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the math waveform upper threshold to determine where to place a mark This setting is applied to all math waveform searches that uses an upper threshold x is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold MATH TTL SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A UPPerthreshold MATH TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold REF lt x gt Sets or returns the reference waveform upper threshold to determine where to place a mark This setting is applied to all reference waveform searches that uses an upper threshold SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and REF lt x gt is the reference channel number Group Search Syntax SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A UPPerthreshold REF x TTL SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A UPPerthreshold REF x Arguments specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V SELect Sets or ret
150. with the specified measurement The measurement slots are specified by x which ranges from 1 through 4 Group Measurement Syntax X MEASUrement MEAS x UNIts 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 225 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Related Commands Examples MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TY Pe MEASUREMENT MEAS1 UNITS might return MEASUREMENT MEASI1 UNIts indicating units for measurement 1 are set to percent MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt VALue Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Returns a calculate value for the measurement specified by x which ranges from 1 through 4 NOTE This is the same value as displayed on screen If measurement statistics are enabled a new value is calculated with every waveform addition this value is updated approximately every 1 3 second If you are acquiring a long acquisition record the oscilloscope may take longer to update Measurement MEASUrement MEAS x VALue MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt UNIts ESR ALLEv MEASUREMENT MEAS1 VALUE might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 VALue 2 8740E 06 If the measurement has an error or warning associated with it then an item is added to the error queue The error can be checked for with the ESR and ALLEv commands MEASUrement METHod Group Syntax Related Commands 2 226 Sets or returns the method used to calculate the 0 and 100 reference level Mea
151. x gt PARallel CLOCK SOUrce 2 101 BUS B lt x gt PARallel WIDth 2 101 BUS B lt x gt POSition 2 102 BUS B lt x gt RS232C BITRate 2 102 BUS B lt x gt RS232C DATABits 2 103 BUS B lt x gt RS232C DELIMiter 2 103 BUS B lt x gt RS232C DISplaymode 2 103 BUS B lt x gt RS232C PARity 2 104 BUS B lt x gt RS232C POLarity 2 104 BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX SOUrce 2 105 BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX SOUrce 2 105 BUS B lt x gt SPI BITOrder 2 105 BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA SIZe 2 108 Index 1 Index BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA IN MISO POLARIity 2 107 BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA IN MISO SOUrce 2 107 BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA OUT MOSI POLARity 2 107 BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA OUT MOSI SOUrce 2 108 BUS B lt x gt SPI FRAMING 2 109 BUS B lt x gt SPI IDLETime 2 109 BUS B lt x gt SPI CLOCK SCLK POLARity 2 106 BUS B lt x gt SPI CLOCK SCLK SOUrce 2 106 BUS B lt x gt SPI SELect SS POLARity 2 109 BUS B lt x gt SPI SELect SS SOUrce 2 110 BUS LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt 2 111 BUS THReshold CH lt x gt 2 112 BUS THReshold D lt x gt 2 112 BUS UPPerthreshold CH x 2 113 BUS B lt x gt LABel 2 97 BUS B lt x gt STATE 2 110 BUS B lt x gt TYPE 2 111 BUSY 2 113 C CAL 2 114 CALibrate FACtory STATus 2 114 CALibrate INTERNal STARt 2 115 CALibrate INTERNal STATus 2 115 CALibrate RESults FACtory 2 116 CALibrate RESults SPC 2 117 CALibrate INTERNal 2 115 CALibrate RESults 2 116 Calibrat
152. x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut REF lt x gt 2 368 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn 2 368 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn LESSLimit 2 369 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn MORELimit 2 369 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold CH lt x gt 2 370 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold MATH 2 370 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold REF lt x gt 2 371 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt 2 371 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold MATH 2 371 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold REF lt x gt 2 372 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Index SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSE Width POLarity 2 372 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSE Width SOUrce 2 372 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSE Width WHEn 2 373 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSE Width WIDth 2 373 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT POLarity 2 374 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT SOUrce 2 374 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT WHEn 2 374 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT WIDth 2 375 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk EDGE 2 375 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk SOUrce 2 376 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk THReshold 2 376 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold DATa SOUrce 2 377 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt T
153. 0 POWer SWLoss TON POWER MIN 2 311 POWer SWLoss TOTal ENERGY MAX 2 311 POWer SWLoss TOTal ENERGY MEAN 2 311 POWer SWLoss TOTal ENERGY MIN 2 312 POWer SWLoss TOTal POWER MAX 2 312 POWer SWLoss TOTal POWER MEAN 2 312 POWer SWLoss TOTal POWER MIN 2 313 POWer CURRENTSOurce 2 247 POWer DISplay 2 248 POWer GATESOurce 2 248 POWer GATing 2 249 POWer INDICators 2 268 POWer QUALity IRMS 2 277 POWer QUALity V RMS 2 279 POWer RIPPle 2 284 POWer RIPPle SOUrce 2 287 POWer SOA LOG XMAX 2 289 POWer SOA LOG XMIN 2 290 POWer SOA LOG YMAX 2 290 POWer SOA LOG YMIN 2 291 POWer SOA PLOTTY Pe 2 295 POWer STATIstics 2 296 POWer SWLoss RDSon 2 303 POWer SWLoss VCEsat 2 313 POWer TYPe 2 314 POWer VOLTAGESOurce 2 315 PSC 2 315 PUD 2 316 R RCL 2 317 RECAIL SETUp 2 317 RECAII WAV Eform 2 318 REF lt x gt HORizontal DELay TIMe 2 319 REF lt x gt HORizontal SCAle 2 319 REF lt x gt VERTical POSition 2 320 REF lt x gt VERTical SCAle 2 321 REF lt x gt 2 318 REF lt x gt DATE 2 319 REF lt x gt LABel 2 320 REF lt x gt TIMe 2 320 REM 2 322 RST 2 322 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Index S SAV 2 323 Save and Recall Command Group 2 40 SAVe EVENTtable BUS lt x gt 2 324 SAVe IMAGe FILEFormat 2 325 SAVe WAV Eform FILEFormat 2 328 SAVe WAV Eform GATIng 2 328 SAVe ASSIgn TYPe 2 323 SAVe IMAGe 2 324 SAVe IMAGe INKSaver 2 325 SAVe IMAGe LAYout 2 326
154. 0 0000 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIG A UPP CH1 800 0000E 3 CH2 800 000 0E 3 CH3 800 0000E 3 CH4 800 0000E 3 MATH 800 0000E 3 REF1 800 0000E 3 REF2 800 0000E 3 REF3 800 000 0 3 4 800 0000E 3 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIG A LOW 0 0000 CH2 0 0000 CH3 0 0000 CH4 0 0000 MATH 0 0000 REF1 0 0000 REF2 0 0000 REF3 0 0000 REF4 0 0000 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIG A EDGE SOU CH1 SLO RIS SE ARCH SEARCH1 TRIG A LOGI FUNC 0 0000 2 0 0000 3 0 0000 4 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 REF2 0 0000 0 0000 4 0 0000 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIG A LOGI INP CH1 X CH2 X CH3 X CH4 X MA TH X REF2 X REF3 X REF4 X CLOC SOU NONE EDGE RIS SEARCH SEARCHI1 TRIG A LOGI PAT INP CHl 2 X CH3 4 X REF1 2 X REF4 X SEARCH SEARCH TRIG A LOGI PAT WHE TRU WHE LESSL 8 0000E 9 L 8 0000E 9 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIG A PULSEW SOU CH1 POL POS WHE LESS WID 8 0000 9 5 RCH SEARCH1 TRIG A RUNT SOU CH1 POL POS WHE OCCURS WID 8 0000 9 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIG A TRAN SOU CH1 POL POS WHE SLOW DELT 8 0000 9 SEARCH 1 TRIG A SETH CLOC SOU CH1 EDGE RIS THR 0 0000 SEARC H SEARCH1 TRIG A SETH DAT SOU CH2 THR 0 0000 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIG A SETH HOLDT 8 0000E 9 SETT 8 0000 9 5 1 5 0 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt COPy No Query Form 2 330 Group Syntax Arguments Copies the search c
155. 00 Series Programmer Manual C 23 Appendix Factory Defaults Table C 1 Default values cont Command Default value TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY EOFTYPE STATIC TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY ERRTYPE CRCHEADER TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY FRAMEID HIVALUE XXXXXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY FRAMEID QUALIFIER EQUAL TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY FRAMEID VALUE TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY FRAMETYPE NORMAL TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY HEADER CRC TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY HEADER CYCLECOUNT XXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY HEADER FRAMEID TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY HEADER INDBITS XXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY HEADER PAYLENGTH XXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B2 I2C ADDRESS MODE ADDR7 TRIGGER A BUS B2 I2C ADDRESS TYPE USER TRIGGER A BUS B2 I2C ADDRESS VALUE XXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B2 I2C CONDITION START TRIGGER A BUS B2 I2C DATA DIRECTION NOCARE TRIGGER A BUS B2 I2C DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 I2C DATA START 0 00E 00 TRIGGER A BUS B2 I2C DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B2 LIN CONDITION SYNCFIELD TRIGGER A BUS B2 LIN DATA HIVALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B2 LIN DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL TRIGGER A BUS B2 LIN DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 LIN DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B2 LIN ERRTYPE SYNC TRIGGER A BUS B2 LIN IDENTIFIER VALUE XXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B2 PARALLEL VALUE XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B2 RS232C CONDITI
156. 00 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 19 Command Groups Table 2 18 Display Commands Command Description DISplay Returns current display settings DISplay CLOCk Sets or returns the display of the date time stamp DISplay DiIGital HElIght Sets or returns the number of available digital waveform position slots DISplay GRAticule Sets or returns the type of graticule that is displayed DISplay FORMat Sets or returns the display format DISplay INTENSITy Returns all display intensity settings DISplay INTENSITy BACKLight Sets or returns the backlight intensity for the display DISplay INTENSITy GRAticule Sets or returns the graticule intensity for the display DISplay INTENSITy WAVEform Sets or returns the intensity of the waveforms DISplay PERSistence Sets or returns display persistence setting DISplay STYle DOTsonly Sets a dots only display MESSage Sets or queries message box screen annotation parameters MESSage BOX Sets or returns the coordinates of the message box MESSage CLEAR Clears the contents of the message box MESSage SHOW Sets or returns the contents of the message box MESSage STATE Controls the display of the message box Ethernet Command Group 2 20 Use the commands in the Ethernet Command Group to set up the Ethernet remote interface Table 2 19 Ethernet Commands Command Description ETHERnet DHCPbootp Sets or retur
157. 000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUREMENT IMMED might return MEASUREMENT IMMED DELAY DIRECTION FORWARDS EDGE1 RISE EDGE2 RISE MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE PERIOD UNITS S SOURCE1 CH1 SOURCE2 CH2 MEASUrement IMMed DELay Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns information about the immediate delay measurement This command is equivalent to viewing the delay measurement settings on the measurement readout Measurement MEASUrement IMMed DELay MEASUREMENT IMMED DELAY might return MEASUREMENT IMMED DELAY DIRECTION FORWARDS 1 RISE EDGE2 RISE MEASUrement IMMed DELay DlRection Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Sets or returns the starting point and direction that determines the delay to edge when taking an immediate delay measurement NOTE Use the MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce2 command to specify the delay to waveform Measurement MEASUrement IMMed DELay DIRection BACKWards FORWards MEASUrement IMMed DELay DIRection MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce2 BACKWards starts the search at the end of the waveform and looks for the last rising or falling edge in the waveform FORWards starts the search at the beginning of the waveform and looks for the first rising or falling edge in the waveform 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 207 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Examples MEASUR
158. 1 Default values cont Command Default value TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD D12 1 4 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD D13 1 4 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD D14 1 4 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD D15 1 4 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD D2 1 4 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD D3 1 4 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD D4 1 4 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD D5 1 4 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD D6 1 4 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD D7 14 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD D8 14 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD D9 1 4 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD EXT 0 00E 00 TRIGGER A MODE AUTO TRIGGER A PULSE CLASS WIDTH TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH POLARITY POSITIVE TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH WHEN LESSTHAN TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH WIDTH 8 00E 09 TRIGGER A RUNT POLARITY POSITIVE TRIGGER A RUNT WHEN OCCURS TRIGGER A RUNT WIDTH 8 00E 09 TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK EDGE RISE TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK SOURCE CH1 TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK THRESHOLD 0 00E 00 TRIGGER A SETHOLD DATA SOURCE NONE TRIGGER A SETHOLD DATA THRESHOLD 9 91E 37 TRIGGER A SETHOLD HOLDTIME 8 00E 09 TRIGGER A SETHOLD SETTIME 8 00E 09 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD CH1 0 00E 00 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD CH2 0 00E 00 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD DO 14 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD D1 14 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD D10 14 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD D11 14 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD D12 14 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD D13 14 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD D14 14 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manu
159. 1 TRIGGER A BUS HEADER CRC XXXXXXXXXXX indicating the CRC protion of the binary header string is don t cares SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER CYCLEcount Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the cycle count portion of the binary header string used for FLEXRAY trigger Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER CYCLECount Qstring SEARCH SEARCH X TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray HEADER CYCLEcount lt QString gt is a quoted string representing the cycle count portion of the binary header String used for FLEXRAY trigger SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER CYCLECOUNT 001101 sets the cycle count to 001101 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER CYCLECOUNT might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER CYCLECOUNT XXXXXX indicating the cycle count is don t cares SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray HEADER FRAMEID 2 348 Group Sets or returns the frame id portion of the binary header string used for FLEXRAY trigger Search 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH X TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER FRAMEID Qstring SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER FRAMEID lt QString gt is a quot
160. 1 SCALE 400 0000E 12 POSITION 46 8986 FACTOR 50 0000E 3 HORIZO NTAL POSITION 46 8986 SCALE 400 0000E 12 ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt FACtor Query Only Returns the zoom factor of a particular zoom box lt x gt can only be 1 Group Zoom Syntax 200 200 lt gt FACtor Returns lt NR1 gt is the zoom factor of a zoom box ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt POSition Sets the horizontal position of the zoom box in terms of 0 to 100 0 of upper window lt x gt can only be 1 Group Zoom Syntax Z00m ZOOM x POSition lt NR3 gt ZOOm ZOOM x POSi tion 2 498 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments lt NR3 gt is the horizontal position as a percent of the upper window ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt SCAle Sets or returns the horizontal scale of the zoom box lt x gt can only be 1 Group Zoom Syntax 200 200 lt gt 5 lt NR3 gt ZOOm ZOOM x SCAle Arguments NR3 is the horizontal scale of the zoom box ZOOm ZOOM x STATE Sets or returns the specified zoom on or off where x is the integer 1 representing the single zoom window x can only be 1 Group Zoom Syntax ZOOm ZOOM x STATE ON OFF lt NR1 gt ZOOm ZOOM x STATE Arguments turns Zoom 1 on OFF turns Zoom 1 off lt NR1 gt 0 disables the specified zoom any other value enables the specified zoom Examples ZOOM ZOOM1 STATE ON turns Zoom on ZOOM ZOOM1 STATE might return ZOOM
161. 16 waveform averages will be performed before exponential averaging starts ACQUIRE NUMAVG might return ACQUIRE NUMAVG 64 indicating that there are 64 acquisitions specified for averaging Starts or stops acquisitions When state is set to ON or RUN a new acquisition will be started If the last acquisition was a single acquisition sequence a new single sequence acquisition will be started If the last acquisition was continuous a new continuous acquisition will be started If RUN is issued in the middle of completing a single sequence acquisition for example averaging or enveloping the acquisition sequence is restarted and any accumulated data is discarded Also the oscilloscope resets the number of acquisitions If the RUN argument is issued while in continuous mode acquisition continues Acquisition ACQui re STATE OFF ON RUN STOP lt NR1 gt ACQuire STATE ACQuire STOPA fter OFF stops acquisitions STOP stops acquisitions ON starts acquisitions RUN starts acquisitions 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual ACQuire STOPAfter Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples ALlas Group Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order lt NR1 gt 0 stops acquisitions any other value starts acquisitions ACQUIRE STATE RUN starts the acquisition of waveform data and resets the count of the number of acquisitions ACQUIRE STATE might return ACQUIRE STATE
162. 2C RX DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 RS232C RX DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B3 RS232C TX DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 RS232C TX DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B3 SPI CONDITION SS TRIGGER A BUS B3 SPI DATA IN VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B3 SPI DATA OUT VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B3 SPI DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 SPI DATA S TART 0 00E 00 TRIGGER A BUS B4 CAN CONDITION SOF TRIGGER A BUS B4 CAN DATA DIRECTION NOCARE TRIGGER A BUS B4 CAN DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL TRIGGER A BUS B4 CAN DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 CAN DATA START 0 00E 00 TRIGGER A BUS B4 CAN DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B4 CAN FRAMETYPE DATA TRIGGER A BUS B4 CAN IDENTIFIER MODE STANDARD TRIGGER A BUS B4 CAN IDENTIFIER VALUE XXXXXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY CONDITION SOF TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT HIVALUE XXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT QUALIFIER EQUAL TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT VALUE XXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY DATA HIVALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY DATA OFFSET 1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY EOFTYPE STATIC C 26 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Table C 1 Default values cont Appendix C Factory Defaults Command Default value TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY ERRTYPE CRCHEADER
163. 3 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Related Commands Returns Examples Cursor CURSOr HBArs DELTa CURSor HBArs UNIts A floating point value with an exponent CURSOR HBARS DELTA might return CURSOR HBARS DELTA 5 0800E 00 indicating that the difference between the two cursors is 5 08 CURSor HBArs POSITION lt x gt Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples CURSor HBArs UNIts Group 2 134 Sets or returns the horizontal bar cursor position relative to ground which is expressed in vertical units usually volts The cursor is specified by x which can be or 2 Cursor CURSor HBArs POSITION lt x gt lt NR3 gt CURSOr HBArs POSITION lt x gt CURSor FUNCtion lt NR3 gt specifies the cursor position relative to ground CURSOR 1 25 0E 3 positions Cursor 1 of the horizontal cursors at 25 mV CURSOR HBARS POSITION2 might return CURSOR HBARS POSITION2 64 0000E 03 indicating that Cursor 2 of the horizontal bar cursors is at 64 mV Sets or returns the units for the horizontal bar cursors Cursor 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CURSOr HBArs UNIts BASE PERcent CURSor HBArs UNIts BASE selects the vertical units for the selected waveform PERcent selects ratio cursors CURSOR HBARS UNITS might return CURSOR HBARS U
164. 3 indicating the number of event codes in the Event Queue 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 171 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order FACtory No Query Form 2 172 Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Resets the oscilloscope to its factory default settings This command does the following Clears the Event Status Enable Register Clears the Service Request Enable Register Sets the Device Event Status Enable Register to 255 Purges all defined aliases Enables all Command Headers Sets the macro defined by DDT to zero length field Clears the pending operation flag and associated operations This command does not reset the following Communication settings Selected GPIB address Sate of the VXI 11 Ethernet IEEE Std 488 2 interface Calibration data that affects device specifications Protected user data Stored settings Power On Status Clear Flag Oscilloscope password Save and Recall FACtory PSC RCL RECAIESETUp RST SAV SAVe SETUp None FACTORY resets the oscilloscope to its factory default settings 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order FILESystem Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples FILESystem CWD Group Returns the directory listing of the current working directory and the number of bytes of free space available This query is the same as the FILESystem D
165. 3 sets the interval between incoming waveform points to 3 ms WFMINPRE XINCR might return WFMINPRE XINCR 1 0000E 3 indicating that if WFMInpre XUNit is set to s there is a 1 ms interval between incoming waveform points Sets or returns the horizontal units of the incoming waveform Supported units are 96 Hz A A A A V A dB A s AA AW AdB As Hz IRE S s V V A V V V W V dB V s VV VW VdB Volts Vs W W A W V W W W dB W s WA WV WW WdB Ws dB dB A dB V dB W dB dB dBA dBV dBW dBdB day degrees div hr min ohms percent s Waveform Transfer WFMInpre XUNit Qstring WFMInpre XUNit WFMoOutpre XUNit Qstring contains a maximum of three alpha characters that represent the horizontal unit of measure for the incoming waveform 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 483 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Examples WFMinpre XZEro Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMinpre YMUIt 2 484 WFMINPRE XUNIT HZ specifies that the horizontal units for the incoming waveform are hertz WFMINPRE XUNIT might return WFMINPRE XUNIT 5 indicating that the horizontal units for the incoming waveform are seconds Sets or returns the position value in XUNIts of the first sample of the incoming waveform Waveform Transfer WFMInpre XZEro lt NR3 gt WFMInpre XZEro WFMlInpre XINcr WFMInpre XUNit WFMOutpre XZEro lt NR3 gt
166. 4000 Series Programmer Manual Search Commands cont Command Groups Command Description SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A Sets or returns the trigger search setup and SETHold THReshold REF x hold threshold for the selected reference waveform SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall DELTatime SEARCH SEARCH lt sx gt TRIGger Af TRANSition RISEFall POLarity Sets or returns the transition time setting for an transition search Sets or returns the polarity setting for an transition search SEARCH SEARCH lt sx gt TRIGger Af TRANsition RISEFall SOUrce Sets or returns the source setting for an transition search SEARCH SEARCH lt sx gt TRIGger Af TRANsition RISEFall WHEn SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TYPe Sets or returns the condition setting for an transition search Sets or returns the trigger type setting for a search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt Sets or returns the waveform upper threshold level for all channel waveform searches SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold MATH SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold REF lt x gt Sets or returns the waveform upper threshold level for all math waveform searches Sets or returns the waveform upper threshold level for all reference waveform searches Status and Error Command Group Use the commands in the Status and Error Command Group to determine the status
167. 4000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Getting Started This manual explains the use of commands for remotely controlling your oscilloscope With this information you can write computer programs to perform functions such as setting the front panel controls taking measurements performing statistical calculations and exporting data for use in other programs Setting Up Remote Communications You can remotely communicate between your oscilloscope and PC via the Ethernet USB and GPIB using the TEK USB 488 Adapter Ethernet Ifyou are using Ethernet start by connecting an appropriate Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port RJ 45 connector on the rear panel of your oscilloscope This connects the oscilloscope to a 10 100 Base T local area network To change the Ethernet settings on your oscilloscope do the following 1 On the front panel push Utility Push Utility Page Select I O with the Multipurpose knob Push Ethernet Network Settings gt p yP On the side bezel menu if you are on a Ethernet network and using a through cable set DHCP BOOTP to On D If you are using a cross over cable set DHCP BOOTP to Off and set a hard coded TCPIP address USB Ifyou are using USB start by connecting an appropriate USB cable to the USB 2 0 high speed device port on the rear panel of your oscilloscope 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 1 1 Getting Started GPIB 1785 166 With USB the system aut
168. 4000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Table 2 31 Trigger Commands cont Command Groups Command Description TRIGger A HOLDoff Returns the A trigger holdoff parameters TRIGger A HOLDoff TIMe Sets or returns the A trigger holdoff time TRIGger A LEVel Sets or returns the trigger level for the A trigger TRIGger A LEVel AUXin Sets or returns the trigger level for the AUXIN port TRIGger A LEVel CH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel D lt x gt Specifies or returns the trigger level for the specified trigger channel Sets or returns the trigger level for the specified digital channel TRIGger A LOGIc Returns all A trigger logic settings TRIGger A LOGIc CLAss Sets or returns the type of A trigger logic TRIGger A LOGIc FUNCtion Sets or returns the logical TRIGger A LOGIc INPut combination of the input channels for the A logic trigger Returns the logic input values for all channels TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CH lt x gt Specifies or returns the logic setting for the specified channel TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk EDGE Sets the polarity of the clock channel TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk SOUrce TRIGger A LOGIc INPut D lt x gt Sets or returns the channel to use as the clock source Sets or returns the logic pattern for a trigger on digital channel lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern Returns the conditions for generating an A logic pattern trigger TRIGger A LOGIc P
169. 5 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Examples TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA QUALIFIER LESSTHAN sets the data qualifier to LESSTHAN TRIGGER FLEXRAY DATA QUALIFIER might return TRIGGER DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL indicating the data qualifier is EQUAL TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa SiZe Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for FLEXRAY trigger Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt is the FLEXRAY data string length in bytes TRIGGER A BUS Bl FLEXRAY DATA SIZE 8 sets the data string size to 8 bytes TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA SIZE might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA SIZE 1 indicating the data size is byte TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa VALue Group Syntax Arguments 2 406 Sets or returns the low binary data string to be used for FLEXRAY trigger condition if trigger condition is ID or IDANDDATA Trigger TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray DATa VALue Qstring TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray DATa VALue Qstring is a quoted string that is the binary data string for a FLEXRAY trigger if the trigger condition is ID or IDANDDATA 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
170. 5 kHz through 50 kHz 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 457 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Examples 50 sets the range of the video line scan rate to 50 kHz through 65 kHz TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM SCAN 15 sets the scan rate of the A trigger custom video to Rate 1 which is 15 kHz to 20 kHz standard broadcast rate TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM SCAN might return TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM SCAN RATE20 indicating that the video line rate for the A trigger custom video is set to Rate20 which is 20 kHz to 25 kHz TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom SYNCInterval Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or queries the sync interval for the standard under test This is only required for BiLevel Custom Use this command only when the video format is set to custom This command requires a DPO4VID application module Trigger TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTOm SYNCInterval lt NR3 gt TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTOm SYNCInterval lt NR3 gt is the sync interval TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM SYNCINTERVAL 4 0 6 sets the sync interval is set to 4 0 ps TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM SYNCINTERVAL might return TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM SYNCINTERVAL 4 7200E 6 indicating the sync interval is set to 4 72 ps TRIGger A VIDeo HDtv FORMat Conditions Group 2 458 Sets or returns the HDTV video signal format on which to trigger This command requires a DPO4VID application module Trigger 804000 and DPO4000 Ser
171. 5 sets the high reference level to 15 of HIGH MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT LOW might return MEASUREMENT PERCENT LOW 10 indicating that the percentage high reference level is set to 10 of HIGH MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID 1 2 232 Group Sets or returns the percent where 10096 is equal to HIGH that is used to calculate the mid reference level when MEASUrement REFLevel METHod is set to Percent This command affects the results of period frequency delay and all cyclic measurements NOTE this command affects the associated reference level parameter for all MEASurements IMMed and the four periodic measurements Measurement 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID 1 lt NR3 gt MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID 1 MEASUrement REFLevel METHod lt NR3 gt is the mid reference level ranging from 0 to 100 The default mid reference level is 50 MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT MID 1 60 sets the mid reference level to 60 of HIGH MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT MID might return MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT MID 65 indicating that the percentage mid reference level is set to 65 of HIGH MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID2 Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the percent where 100 is equal to HIGH that
172. 55 BUS B3 SPI IDLETIME 1 00E 07 BUS B3 SPI SELECT POLARITY LOW BUS B3 SPI SELECT SOURCE CH2 BUS B3 STATE 0 BUS B3 TYPE PARALLEL BUS B4 CAN BITRATE 500000 BUS B4 CAN PROBE CANH BUS B4 CAN SAMPLEPOINT 50 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual C 5 Appendix Factory Defaults Table C 1 Default values cont Command Default value BUS B4 CAN SOURCE CH1 BUS B4 DISPLAY FORMAT HEXADECIMAL BUS B4 DISPLAY TYPE BUS BUS B4 FLEXRAY BITRATE 10000000 BUS B4 FLEXRAY CHANNEL A BUS B4 FLEXRAY SIGNAL BDIFFBP BUS B4 FLEXRAY SOURCE CH1 BUS B4 I2C ADDRESS RWINCLUDE 0 BUS B4 I2C CLOCK SOURCE CH1 BUS B4 I2C DATA SOURCE CH2 BUS B4 LABEL Parallel BUS B4 LIN BITRATE 19200 BUS B4 LIN IDFORMAT NOPARITY BUS BA LIN MAXBYTEDELIM 14 BUS B4 LIN POLARITY NORMAL BUS B4 LIN SAMPLEPOINT 50 BUS B4 LIN SOURCE CH1 BUS B4 LIN STANDARD V2X BUS B4 PARALLEL CLOCK EDGE RISING BUS B4 PARALLEL CLOCK ISCLOCKED NO BUS B4 PARALLEL CLOCK SOURCE CH1 BUS B4 PARALLEL WIDTH 16 BUS B4 POSITION 0 00E 00 BUS B4 RS232C BITRATE 9600 BUS B4 RS232C DATABITS 8 BUS B4 RS232C DELIMITER LF BUS B4 RS232C DISPLAYMODE FRAME BUS B4 RS232C PARITY NONE BUS B4 RS232C POLARITY NORMAL BUS B4 RS232C RX SOURCE OFF BUS B4 RS232C TX SOURCE CH1 BUS B4 SPI BITORDER MSB BUS B4 SPI CLOCK POLARITY RISE BUS B4 SPI CLOCK SOURCE CH1 BUS B4 SPI DATA IN POLARITY HIGH BUS B4 SPI DATA IN SOUR
173. 8 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEID VALue 2 409 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMETyYype 2 410 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER CRC 2 410 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER CYCLEcount 2 411 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER FRAMEID 2 411 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER INDBits 2 412 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER PAY Length 2 412 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess MODe 2 413 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess TY Pe 2 413 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess VALue 2 414 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C CONDition 2 414 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa DIRection 2 415 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa SIZe 2 415 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa VALue 2 416 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN CONDition 2 416 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa HIVALue 2 417 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa QUALifier 2 417 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa SIZe 2 418 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa VALue 2 419 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN ERRTYPE 2 419 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN IDentifier VA Lue 2 420 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt PARallel VALue 2 420 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C CONDition 2 420 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa SIZe 2 421 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa VALue 2 421 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa SIZe 2 422 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa VALue 2 422 TRIGger A
174. 9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA IN MISO SOUrce Arguments 1 4 DO D15 is the channel to use as the SPI MISO source BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA OUT MOSI POLARity Sets or returns the SPI MOSI polarity for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number Conditions This command requires DPO4EMBD application module 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 107 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Arguments Bus BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA OUT MOSI POLARity LOW HIGH BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA OUT MOST POLARity LOw specifies the active low polarity HIGH specifies the active high polarity BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA OUT MOSI SOUrce Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the SPI MOSI source for bus lt x where x is the bus number gt This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Bus BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA OUT MOSI SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 BUS B x SPT DATA OUT MOSI SOUrce CH1 CH4 DO D15 is the channel to use as the SPI MISO source BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA SIZe Group Syntax Arguments Examples 2 108 Sets or returns the number of bits per word for the specified SPI bus Bus BUS B x SPI DATA SIZe lt NR1 gt BUS B x SPI DATA SIZe 1 is the data size of the specified bus BUS B1 SPI DATA SIZE 8 sets the data size for
175. 98 Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Math MATH 1 MATH 1 TYPe or MATH1 might return MATH TYPE DUAL DEFINE CH1 CH2 5 VERTICAL SCALE 100 0000E 3 POSITION 0 0000 UNITS V MATH HORIZONTAL SCALE 4 0000E 6 POSITION 50 0000 UNITS 5 MATH SPECTRAL DB WINDOW HANNING Sets or returns the current math function as a text string Dual math is defined if the string is of the form wfm operation lt wfm gt where the lt wfm gt s are any combination of live channels or reference waveforms lt operation gt is any of or and MATH 1 TYPe is DUAL FFT math is defined if the string is in the form FFT wfm where lt wfm gt is any live channel or reference waveform and the MATH 1 TYPe is FFT Advanced math is defined if the contents of the string can be parsed by the advanced math parser without errors and the MATH 1 TYPe is ADVanced On the front panel the Dual Wfm Math FFT and Advanced Math menus contain controls that allow building equivalent math expressions to those described above Math MATH 1 DEFine Qstring MATH 1 DEFine MATHVAR VAR lt x gt MATH 1 TYPe lt QString gt quoted string argument is the mathematical expression that defines the waveform Table 2 40 Advanced Math expression elements Expression Description CH1 CH4 REF1 REF4 Specifies a waveform data source 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
176. A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa SiZe Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for I2C search SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa VALue SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN CONDition Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for I2C search Sets or returns the search condition for a LIN search 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 43 Command Groups Search Commands cont 2 44 Command Description SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS Sets or returns the binary data string B lt x gt LIN DATa HIVALue SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS Sets or returns the LIN data qualifier B lt x gt LIN DATa QUALIifier SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS Sets or returns the length of the data string B lt x gt LIN DATa SIZe in bytes SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS Sets or returns the binary data string used B lt x gt LIN DATa VALue for a LIN search SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN ERRTYPE Sets or returns the error type used for a LIN Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN IDentifier VALue Sets or returns the binary address string used for LIN search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt PARallel VALue Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for a Parallel search SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS Sets or returns the trigger condition for
177. A SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 RS232C TX DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 SPI CONDITION 55 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 SPI DATA MISO VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 SPI DATA MOSI VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 SPI DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 CAN CONDITION SOF SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 CAN DATA DIRECTION NOCARE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 CAN DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 CAN DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 CAN DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 CAN FRAMETYPE DATA SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 CAN IDENTIFIER MODE STANDARD SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 CAN IDENTIFIER VALUE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY CONDITION SOF SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT HIVALUE XXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT QUALIFIER EQUAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT VALUE XXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY DATA HIVALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY DATA OFFSET 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY EOFTYPE STATIC SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY ERRTYPE CRCHEADER SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY FRAMEID HIVALUE
178. ADer command This is because the returned commands are intended to be sent back to the oscilloscope as a command string The VERBose command can still be used to specify whether the returned headers should be abbreviated or full length This command is identical to the LRN command Group Miscellaneous Syntax SET Related Commands HEADer LRN VERBose Examples SET returns a long response part of which could be as follows SET ACQUIRE STOPAFTER RUnSTOP STATE 1 MODE SAMPLE NUMENV INFINITE NUMAVG 16 SAMPLINGMODE RT HEADER 1 LOCK NONE LANGUAGE ENGLISH VERBOSE 1 ALIAS STATE 0 DISPLAY COLOR PALETTE NORMAL DISPLAY STYLE DOTSONLY 0 DISPLAY PERSISTENCE 0 0000 CLOCK 1 GRATICULE FULL INTEnSITY WAVEFORM 30 GRATICULE 75 BACKLIGHT HIGH HARDCOPY INKSAVER OFF LAYOUT LANDSCAPE PREVIEW 0 SAVE IMAGE FILEFORMAT BMP SAVE WAVEFORM FILEFORMAT INTERNAL SAVE ASSIGN TYPE SETUP TRIGGER A MODE AUTO TYPE EDGE LEVEL 20 0000E 3 LEVEL CH1 20 0000E 3 CH2 0 0000 CH3 0 0000 CH4 0 0000 TRIGGER A UPPERTHRESHOLD 1 4000 CH2 800 0000E 3 CH3 800 0000E 3 CH4 800 0000E 3 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD CH1 20 0000E 3 CH2 0 0000 CH3 0 0000 CH4 0 0000 TRIGGER A HOLDOFF TIME 20 0000 9 TRIGGER A EDGE SOURCE CH1 COUPLING DC SLOPE RISE TRIGGER A LOGIC CLASS SETHOLD FUNCTION AND THRESHOLD CH1 20 0000E 3 CH2 0 0000 CH3 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 387 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order 0 0000 CH4 0 0000 TRIG
179. AI Prevents the oscilloscope from executing further commands until all pending operations finish Trigger Command Group 2 48 Use the commands in the Trigger Command Group to control all aspects of triggering for the oscilloscope There are two triggers A and B Where appropriate this command set has parallel construction between triggers You can set the A or B triggers to edge mode Edge triggering lets you display a waveform at or near the point where the signal passes through a voltage level of your choosing You can also set A triggers to pulse logic or video modes With pulse triggering the oscilloscope triggers whenever it detects a pulse of a certain width or height Logic triggering lets you logically combine the signals on one or channels The oscilloscope then triggers when it detects a certain combination of signal levels Video triggering enables you to trigger on the most common Standard Definition video standards Table 2 31 Trigger Commands Command Description TRIGger Forces a trigger event to occur 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Table 2 31 Trigger Commands cont Command Groups Command Description TRIGger A Sets A trigger level to 50 or returns current A trigger parameters TRIGger A BUS Sets or returns the serial TRIGger A BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio CONDition trigger type Sets or returns the trigger condition for the AUDIO bus Start of Frame or Data TRIGg
180. ARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A EDGE SLOpe RISe specifies a rising edge FALL specifies a falling edge SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the source waveform for an edge trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 MATH SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce CH lt x gt specifies one input channel as the edge source where x is the channel number MATH specifies the math waveform as the search source SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel 2 362 Sets or returns the level for an edge trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel lt NR3 gt TTL SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel lt NR3 gt specifies the trigger level in volts TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4V SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel CH lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the level for an edge trigger search to determine where to place a mark SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and CH lt x gt is the channel number Each channel can have an independent level Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEV
181. ARCH x TRIGger A RUNT POLarity POSitive places a mark when the rising edge crosses the low threshold and the falling edge re crosses the low threshold without either edge ever crossing the high threshold NEGative places a mark when the falling edge crosses the high threshold and the rising edge re crosses the high threshold without either edge ever crossing the low threshold EITher places a mark on a runt of either polarity SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT SOUrce Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the source setting for a runt trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH X TRIGger A RUNT SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 MATH REF SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A RUNT SOUrce CH1 CH4 specifies an input channel as the edge source MATH specifies the math waveform as the search source REF specifies the reference waveform as the search source SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT WHEn 2 374 Sets or returns the condition setting for a runt trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A RUNT WHEn iLESSthan than EQual UNEQual OCCURS SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A RUNT WHEN OCCURS argument specifies a trigger event
182. ASE CURSOR MODE INDEPENDENT CURSOR VBARS POSITION1 1 20E 05 CURSOR VBARS POSITION2 1 20E 05 CURSOR VBARS UNITS SECONDS CURSOR XY RECTANGULAR X POSITION1 0 00E 00 CURSOR XY RECTANGULAR X POSITION2 0 00E 00 CURSOR XY RECTANGULAR Y POSITION1 0 00E 00 CURSOR XY RECTANGULAR Y POSITION2 0 00E 00 DO LABEL DO POSITION 6 00E 02 DO THRESHOLD 1 4 D1 LABEL D1 POSITION 6 00E 02 D1 THRESHOLD 1 4 D10 LABEL D10 POSITION 6 00E 02 D10 THRESHOLD 1 4 D11 LABEL D11 POSITION 6 00E 02 D11 THRESHOLD 1 4 D12 LABEL D12 POSITION 6 00E 02 D12 THRESHOLD 1 4 D13 LABEL D13 POSITION 6 00E 02 D13 THRESHOLD 1 4 D14 LABEL D14 POSITION 6 00E 02 D14 THRESHOLD 1 4 D15 LABEL D15 POSITION 6 00E 02 D15 THRESHOLD 1 4 D2 LABEL D2 POSITION 6 00E 02 C 8 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Table C 1 Default values cont Appendix C Factory Defaults Command Default value D2 THRESHOLD 1 4 D3 LABEL D3 POSITION 6 00E 02 D3 THRESHOLD 1 4 D4 LABEL D4 POSITION 6 00E 02 D4 THRESHOLD 1 4 D5 LABEL D5 POSITION 6 00E 02 D5 THRESHOLD 1 4 D6 LABEL D6 POSITION 6 00E 02 D6 THRESHOLD 1 4 D7 LABEL D7 POSITION 6 00E 02 D7 THRESHOLD 1 4 D8 LABEL D8 POSITION 6 00E 02 D8 THRESHOLD 1 4 D9 LABEL D9 POSITION 6 00E 02 D9 THRESHOLD 1 4 DATA DESTINATION DATA ENCDG RIBINARY DATA SOURCE CH1 DATA START 1 DATA STOP 10000 DISPLAY CLOCK 1 DI
183. ATic STATUS STDdev STOP STOPAfter STOPOnviol STRing STYle STandard SUBNETMask SwITCHingloss SWLoss SYNC SYNCField SYNCFrame SYNCInterval String TABle TDM TEKSecure TEMPerature TERmination TEST TESTnumber THDELta THDF THDR THETA 5 1 TIMe TOFF TON TOTAL TOTaluptime TRACk TRADitionalchinese TRANSition TRIGger TRIGgertosearch TRUEpwr TRUe TTL TURN TURNON TWEnty Twofi fty TX TXDATA TXENDPacket TXRX TXSTArt TYPE TYPe Than UNDO UNEQual UNIts UNLock UPPerthreshold USBDevice USBTMC USBTmc USE USER v1x V2X VALue 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual VBArs VCRESTfactor VDELTa VENDORID VERBose VERTAUTOSet VERTDEFault VERTi cal VIDeo VOLTAGESOurce VOLTage VOLts 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual VRMS WAKEup WAVEform WAVFrm WEIghting WFId WFMInpre wFMOutpre WHEn WIDth WINdow WORD WORDSe1 WRITE WRITEFile X 1 1 2 2 XDELta XFF XINcr XMAX XMIN XUNit XY XZEro Y Appendix B Reserved Words YDELta YES YMAX YMIN YMU It YOFf YT YUNItS YUNit YUNits YZEro ZOOM zoom B 5 Appendix Reserved Words B 6 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Appendix Factory Defaults Default Setup The following table lists the default values for each command NOTE Find the most up to date default values for your instrument and software by performing a TekSec
184. ATtern DELTatime Sets or returns the pattern trigger delta time value TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut D x Sets or returns the A logic trigger pattern for a trigger on digital channel x 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 53 Command Groups 2 54 Table 2 31 Trigger Commands cont Command Description TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn Sets or returns the pattern logic condition on which to trigger the oscilloscope TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn LESSLimit Sets or returns the maximum time that the selected pattern may be true and still generate an A logic pattern trigger TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn MORELimit Sets or returns the minimum time that the selected pattern may be true and still generate an A logic pattern trigger TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold CH lt x gt Sets or queries the trigger A logic threshold voltage for the specified channel TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold D lt x gt Sets or returns the trigger A logic threshold level for the specified digital channel TRIGger A LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt Sets or returns the lower threshold for the channel selected TRIGger A LOWerthreshold D lt x gt Sets the A trigger lower threshold for the digital channel selected TRIGger A LOWerthreshold EXT AUX Sets or returns the lower threshold for the Auxiliary input TRIGger A MODe Sets or returns the A trigger mode TRIGger A PULse Returns
185. AV 2 saves the current oscilloscope state in memory location 2 Sets or returns the assignment of the data to be saved when the front panel Save button is pressed Save and Recall SAVe ASSIgn TYPe IMAGe WAVEform SETUp SAVe ASSIgn TYPe 2 323 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Arguments IMAGe assigns the Save button to save screen images WAVEform assigns the Save button to save waveforms SETUp assigns the Save button to save setups SAVe EVENTtable BUS lt x gt No Query Form Group Syntax Arguments Saves the data from bus lt x gt to a specified file and location where x is the bus number Save and Recall SAVe EVENTtable BUS x file path file path is a quoted string that defines the file name and path location where the event table will be stored NOTE filename stands for a filename of up to 125 characters followed by a period and the three character extension Waveform files should have a csv extension for comma separated spreadsheet format files SAVe IMAGe No Query Form Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments 2 324 Saves a capture of the screen image into the specified file Supported image formats are PNG Windows Bitmap and TIFF If an extension for a supported file type is added to the file name then the corresponding format will be used If no supported extension is added to the file the format to use will be determined by the value obtained fro
186. AY BITRATE 9600 sets the FLEXRAY bit rate to 9600 bits per second BUS 1 BITRATE might return BUS B1 FLEXRAY BITRATE 10000000 indicating the FLEXRAY bit rate 1s 10 000 000 bits per second BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CHannel Group Syntax Arguments 2 94 Sets or returns the FLEXRAY ID format Bus BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CHannel A B BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CHannel A sets the FLEXRAY id format to channel A B sets the FLEXRAY id format to channel B 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order BUS B1 FLEXRAY CHANNEL sets the FLEXRAY id format to channel B BUS B1 FLEXRAY CHANNEL might return BUS B1 FLEXRAY CHANNEL A indicating that FLEXRAY id format is channel A BUS B x FLEXray SlGnal Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the FLEXRAY standard Bus BUS B x FLEXray SIGnal BDIFFBP BM TXRX BUS B x FLEXray SIGnal BDIFFBP sets the FLEXRAY standard to BDIFFBP BM sets the FLEXRAY standard to BM TXRX sets the FLEXRAY standard to TXRX BUS Bl FLEXRAY SIGNAL BM sets the FLEXRAY standard is BM BUS B1 FLEXRAY SIGNAL might return BUS B1 FLEXRAY SIGNAL BDIFFBP indicating the FLEXRAY standard is BDIFFBP BUS B lt x gt FLEXray SOUrce Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the FLEXRAY data source Bus BUS B lt x gt FLEXray SoOurce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 DO D1 D2 D3 D4 D5
187. B TIMe 2 463 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Arguments Examples EVENTS sets the B trigger to take place following a set number of trigger events after the A trigger occurs The number of events is specified by TRIGger B EVENTS COUNt TIMe sets the B trigger to occur a set time after the A trigger event The time period is specified by TRIGger B TIMe TRIGGER B BY TIME sets the B trigger to occur at a set time after the A trigger event TRIGGER B BY might return TRIGGER B BY EVENTS indicating that the B trigger takes place following a set number of trigger events after the A trigger occurs TRIGger B EDGE Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Returns the source slope and coupling for B trigger Trigger TRIGger B EDGE TRIGger B EDGE COUPling TRIGger B EDGE SLOpe TRIGger B EDGE SOUrce TRIGGER B EDGE might return TRIGGER B EDGE SOURCE CH1 SLOPE RISE COUPLING DC TRIGger B EDGE COUPling Group Syntax Related Commands 2 464 Sets or returns the type of coupling for the B trigger Trigger TRIGger B EDGE COUPling DC HFRej LFRej TRIGger B EDGE COUPling TRIGger B EDGE 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DC selects DC trigger coupling HFRej selects high frequency reject coupling LFRe j selects low frequency reject coupling NOISEre j selects DC low
188. BSolute LOW 2 280 Sets or returns the low reference level for power measurements 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer REFLevel ABSolute LOW lt NR3 gt Ranges D 1e6 1E6 POWer REFLevel ABSolute LOW lt NR3 gt is the absolute low value in volts Default value is 0 0E 0 POWER REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE LOW 1 0 sets the absolute high value to 1 0000 POWER REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE LOW might return POWER REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE LOW 1 0000 indicating that the absolute low value is set to 1 V POWer REFLevel ABSolute MID 1 3 Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the mid reference level for measurements MID3 is specific to the power application This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer REFLevel ABSolute MID 1 3 lt NR3 gt Ranges D 1e6 1E6 POWer REFLevel ABSolute MID lt 1 3 gt lt NR3 gt is the absolute mid reference value POWER REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE MID1 1 sets the mid reference voltage to 1V POWER REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE MID1 might return POWER REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE MID1 0 0E 0 indicating that the absolute reference voltage level is set to 0 0E 0 V POWer REFLevel HYSTeresis Sets or returns the measurement reference level hysteresis value 504000 and DPO4000 Series P
189. BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa SiZe Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the length of the data string to be used for a SPI trigger if the trigger condition is MISO MOSI or MISOMOSI Applies to bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B x SPI DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt TRIGger A BUS B x SPI DATa SIZe NRI is the length of the data string in bytes TRIGger A BUS SOUrce Conditions Group 2 424 Sets or returns the source for a Serial bus trigger This command requires DPO4AUTO or DPO4EMBD application module Trigger 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A BUS SOUrce B1 B2 B3 B4 TRIGger A BUS SOUrce B1 specifies the Bus 1 source B2 specifies the Bus 2 source B3 specifies the Bus 3 source B4 specifies the Bus 4 source TRIGger A EDGE Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Returns the trigger source coupling and slope for the edge trigger Trigger TRIGger A EDGE TRIGger A PULse TRIGger A LOGIc TRIGGER A EDGE might return TRIGGER A EDGE SOURCE CH1 COUPLING DC SLOPE RISE indicating the trigger source coupling and slope for the A edge trigger TRIGger A EDGE COUPling Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Sets or
190. BUS B1 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT VALUE XXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA HIVALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA OFFSET 1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY EOFTYPE STATIC TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY ERRTYPE CRCHEADER TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMEID HIVALUE TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMEID QUALIFIER EQUAL TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMEID VALUE XXXXXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMETYPE NORMAL TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER CRC XXXXXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER CYCLECOUNT XXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER FRAMEID XXXXXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER INDBITS XXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER PAYLENGTH XXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 I2C ADDRESS MODE ADDR7 TRIGGER A BUS B1 I2C ADDRESS TYPE USER TRIGGER A BUS B1 I2C ADDRESS VALUE XXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 12C CONDITION START TRIGGER A BUS B1 12C DATA DIRECTION NOCARE TRIGGER A BUS B1 I2C DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 I2C DATA START 0 00E 00 C 22 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Table C 1 Default values cont Appendix C Factory Defaults Command Default value TRIGGER A BUS B1 12C DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN CONDITION SYNCFIELD TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA HIVALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DA
191. C TX DATa SIZe Arguments NRI is the length of the data string in Bytes TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa VALue Sets or returns the binary data string for an RS 232 trigger if the condition involves TX Applies to bus lt x gt where x is the bus number Conditions This command requires DPO4COMP application module Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa VALue TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa VALue Arguments lt Qstring gt is the binary data string to be used for the trigger 2 422 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI CONDition Conditions Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Sets or returns the trigger condition for a SPI trigger Applies to bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B x SPI CONDition 55 STARTofframe MISO MOSI MISOMOSI TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI CONDition BUS B lt x gt SPI IDLETime BUS B lt x gt SPI FRAMING SS specifies the Slave Selection condition STARTOf frame is applicable when BUS B x SPI FRAMING is set to IDLEtime When the trigger condition is set to STARTof frame the instrument triggers on the first SPI clock after an idle time when there are no clocks MISO specifies the Master In Slave Out condition MOSI specifies the Master Out Slave In c
192. CE OFF BUS B4 SPI DATA OUT POLARITY HIGH C 6 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Table C 1 Default values cont Appendix C Factory Defaults Command Default value BUS B4 SPI DATA OUT SOURCE CH2 BUS B4 SPI DATA SIZE 8 BUS B4 SPI FRAMING 55 BUS B4 SPI IDLETIME 1 00E 07 BUS B4 SPI SELECT POLARITY LOW BUS B4 SPI SELECT SOURCE CH2 BUS B4 STATE 0 BUS B4 TYPE PARALLEL BUS LOWERTHRESHOLD CH1 0 00E 00 BUS LOWERTHRESHOLD CH2 0 00E 00 BUS UPPERTHRESHOLD CH1 8 00E 01 BUS UPPERTHRESHOLD CH2 8 00E 01 CH1 BANDWIDTH 3 50E 08 CH1 COUPLING DC CH1 DESKEW 0 00E 00 CH1 INVERT 0 CH1 LABEL CH1 OFFSET 0 00E 00 CH1 POSITION 0 00E 00 CH1 PROBE FORCEDRANGE 0 00E 00 CH1 PROBE GAIN 1 CH1 SCALE 1 00 01 CH1 TERMINATION 1 00E 06 CH1 YUNITS V CH2 BANDWIDTH 3 50E 08 CH2 COUPLING DC CH2 DESKEW 0 00E 00 CH2 INVERT 0 CH2 LABEL CH2 OFFSET 0 00E 00 CH2 POSITION 0 00E 00 CH2 PROBE FORCEDRANGE 0 00E 00 CH2 PROBE GAIN 1 CH2 SCALE 1 00 01 2 1 00 06 CH2 YUNITS V CURSOR FUNCTION OFF 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual C 7 Appendix Factory Defaults Table C 1 Default values cont Command Default value CURSOR HBARS POSITION1 0 00E 00 CURSOR HBARS POSITION2 0 00E 00 CURSOR HBARS UNITS B
193. CE2 CH2 MEASUREMENT MEAS1 STATE 0 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Table C 1 Default values cont Appendix C Factory Defaults Command Default value MEASUREMENT MEAS1 TYPE PERIOD MEASUREMENT MEAS2 DELAY DIRECTION FORWARDS MEASUREMENT MEAS2 DELAY EDGE1 RISE MEASUREMENT MEAS2 DELAY EDGE2 RISE MEASUREMENT MEAS2 SOURCE1 CH1 MEASUREMENT MEAS2 SOURCE2 CH2 MEASUREMENT MEAS2 STATE 0 MEASUREMENT MEAS2 TYPE PERIOD MEASUREMENT MEAS3 DELAY DIRECTION FORWARDS MEASUREMENT MEAS3 DELAY EDGE1 RISE MEASUREMENT MEAS3 DELAY EDGE2 RISE MEASUREMENT MEAS3 SOURCE1 CH1 MEASUREMENT MEAS3 SOURCE2 CH2 MEASUREMENT MEAS3 STATE 0 MEASUREMENT MEAS3 TYPE PERIOD MEASUREMENT MEAS4 DELAY DIRECTION FORWARDS MEASUREMENT MEAS4 DELAY EDGE1 RISE MEASUREMENT MEAS4 DELAY EDGE2 RISE MEASUREMENT MEAS4 SOURCE1 CH1 MEASUREMENT MEAS4 SOURCE2 CH2 MEASUREMENT MEAS4 STATE 0 MEASUREMENT MEAS4 TYPE PERIOD MEASUREMENT MEAS5 DELAY DIRECTION FORWARDS MEASUREMENT MEASS5 DELAY EDGE1 RISE MEASUREMENT MEASS5 DELAY EDGE2 RISE MEASUREMENT MEAS5 SOURCE1 CH1 MEASUREMENT MEAS5 SOURCE2 CH2 MEASUREMENT MEAS5 STATE 0 MEASUREMENT MEASS TYPE PERIOD MEASUREMENT MEAS6 DELAY DIRECTION FORWARDS MEASUREMENT MEAS6 DELAY EDGE1 RISE MEASUREMENT MEAS6 DELAY EDGE2 RISE MEASUREMENT MEAS6 SOURCE1 CH1 MEASUREMENT MEAS6 SOURCE2 CH2 MEASUREMENT MEAS6 STATE 0 MEASUREMENT MEAS6 TYPE PERIOD MEA
194. CURSOr XY PRODUCT POSITION lt x gt CURSor XY PRODUCT UNIts Query Only Returns the XY cursor product units Group Cursor Syntax CURSOr XY PRODUCT UNItS CURSor XY RATIO DELta Query Only Returns the ratio of the difference between the cursors X position and cursor Y position AX The ratio is calculated as Y2 Y1 X2 Group Cursor Syntax CURSOr XY RATIO DELta CURSor XY RATIO POSITION lt x gt Query Only Returns the X horizontal or Y vertical position for the specified cursor which can be 1 X or 2 Y The ratio is calculated as Position 1 Y1 X1 Position 2 2 2 Group Cursor Syntax CURSOr XY RATIO POSITION lt x gt 2 142 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CURSor XY RATIO UNIts Query Only Returns the cursor X and cursor Y units for the ratio measurement Group Cursor Syntax CURSOr XY RATIO UNItS CURSor XY READOUT Sets or returns the XY cursor readout selection This command is useful for oscilloscope models with limited display room Oscilloscopes with sufficient display such as the MSO4000 and DPO4000 series show all the readouts simultaneously Group Cursor Syntax CURSOr XY READOUT RECTangular POLARCord PRODuct RATio CURSor XY READOUT Arguments RECTangular specifies the XY readout as rectangular coordinates POLARCord specifies the XY readout as polar coordinates PRODuct speci
195. Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Trigger TRIGger A VIDeo POLarity NEGative POSitive TRIGger A VIDeo POLarity POSitive argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger on a positive video sync pulse NEGative argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger on a negative video sync pulse TRIGGER A VIDEO POLARITY NEGATIVE sets the oscilloscope to trigger on a negative video pulse TRIGGER A VIDEO POLARITY might return TRIGger A VIDeo POLARITY POSITIVE indicating that the oscilloscope is set to trigger on a positive video sync pulse TRIGger A VIDeo SOUrce Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the source for the A video trigger Trigger TRIGger A VIDeo SOUrce CH1 2 3 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 TRIGger A VIDeo SOUrce CH1 CH4 DO D15 specifies the input channel to use as the video trigger TRIGGER A VIDEO SOURCE CHI sets the source for A video trigger to Channel 1 TRIGGER A VIDEO SOURCE might return TRIGger A VIDeo SOURCE CH2 indicating that the source for the A video trigger is set to Channel 2 TRIGger A VIDeo STANdard Group Sets or returns the standard for the video trigger Trigger 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 461 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments Examples TRIGger A VIDeo STANdard NTSc PAL SECAM CUSTom HDtv TRIGger A VIDeo STANdard NTSc sets the oscilloscope to trigger
196. Commands MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 209 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Arguments Examples CH lt x gt is an input channel waveform where x is the channel number MATH lt y gt is math waveform The y variable can be expressed as an integer of 1 lt gt is reference waveform where x is the reference channel number D X is a digital waveform The x variable be expressed as an integer where x is the digital channel number Digital channels are available only on MSO models MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE2 REF3 sets the waveform in reference memory location 3 as the delay to source when making delay measurements MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE2 might return MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE2 1 indicating that Mathl is the immediate measurement source MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments For SOURcel Sets or returns the source for all single channel measurements For delay or phase measurements sets or returns the waveform to measure from For SOUrce2 Sets or returns the waveform to measure to when taking a delay measurement or phase measurement Measurement MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce x 1 2 CH4 D lt x gt MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce lt x gt 1 4 or MATH is the source waveform D X is a digital waveform The x variable can be expressed as an integer where x i
197. D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D BUS B x FLEXray SOUrce CH x sets the FLEXRAY source to channel x where x is 1 to 4 D lt x gt sets the FLEXRAY source to digital channel x where x is 1 to 16 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 95 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Examples BUS B1 FLEXRAY SOURCE CH4 sets the FLEXRAY source to channel 4 BUS B1 FLEXRAY SOURCE might return BUS B1 FLEXRAY SOURCE CH1 indicating the FLEXRAY source is channel 1 BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess RWINClude Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets and returns whether the read write bit is included in the address Bus BUS B x I2C ADDRess RWINClude lt NR1 gt OFF ON BUS B lt x gt 12C ADDRess RWINClude lt NR1 gt 0 does not include the read write bit in the addess any other value includes the read write bit in the address OFF does not include the read write bit in the address ON includes the read write bit in the address BUS B1 I2C ADDRESS RWINCLUDE ON includes the read write bit in the address BUS B1 I2C ADDRESS RWINCLUDE might return BUS B1 I12C ADDRESS RWINCLUDE 0 indicating the read write bit is not included in the address BUS B lt x gt I2C CLOCK SCLK SOUrce Conditions Group Syntax 2 96 Sets or returns the I2C SCLK source for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4EMBD or DPO4COMP application module Bus BUS B x I2C CLOCK
198. DATa DIRection READ WRITE NOCARE SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa DIRection SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN CONDition READ specifies the read condition WRITE specifies the write condition NOCARE specifies either a read or write condition 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 335 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa QUALIifier Conditions Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Sets or returns the CAN data qualifier for a search SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This only applies if the trigger condition is IDANDDATA or DATA This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS lt gt CAN DATa QUALi fier LESSThan Than EQUal UNEQual LESSEQual EQual SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS lt gt CAN DATa QUAL i fier SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B x CAN DATa VALue LESSThan searches for bus data less than the value specified by SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B x CAN DATa VALue Than searches for bus data greater than the value specified by SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B x CAN DATa VALue EQUal searches for bus data equal to the value specified by SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue UNEQual searches for bus data not equal to
199. DB VOLTS SEC AMPS SEC WATTS SEC V OVER S A OVER S W OVER S Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement IMMed UNIts Examples MEASUREMENT IMMED UNITS might return MEASUREMENT IMMED UNIts s indicating that units for the immediate measurement are in seconds 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 213 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUrement IMMed VALue Query Only Returns the value of the measurement specified by the MEASUrement IMMed TYPe command The measurement is immediately taken on the source s specified by MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce command NOTE A change to HORizontal MAIn SCALe or CH lt x gt SCALe will not necessarily have taken affect if immediately followed by this command Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement IMMed VALue Related Commands MEASUrement IMMed TYPe MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce ESR ALLEv Examples MEASUREMENT IMMED VALUE might return MEASUREMENT IMMED VALUE 9 9000E 37 If the measurement has an error or warning associated with it then an item 15 added to the error queue The error can be checked for with the ESR and ALLEv commands MEASUrement INDlCators Query Only Returns all measurement indicator parameters Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement INDICators Examples MEASUREMENT INDICATORS might return MEASUREMENT INDICATORS STATE MEAS1 NUMHORZ 0 NUMVERT 4 HORZ1 7 5E0 HORZ2 3 400000095367E0 HORZ3 0 0 0 24 0 0 0
200. DDRess TYPe 2 350 Sets or returns the I2C address type SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDReSS TYPe iGENeralcall STARtbyte HSmode EEPROM USER SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B x I2C ADDRess TYPe GENeralcall specifies the GENeralcall address type STARtbyte specifies the STARtbyte address type HSmode specifies the HSmode address type EEPROM specifies the EEPROM address type USER specifies a user address SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess VALue Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the binary address string to be used for an 2 trigger search if the search condition is ADDR or ADDRANDDATA SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B x I2C ADDRess VALue bin SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS lt gt I2C ADDRess bin is the address in binary format SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C CONDition Conditions Group Sets or returns the search condition for an I2C trigger search SEARCH lt x gt is the
201. DGE RISE specifies the polarity as the clock rising edge TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK EDGE might return TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK EDGE RISE indicating that polarity 1s specified as the clock rising edge TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk SOUrce Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the clock source for the setup and hold triggering Trigger TRIGger A SETHOld CLOCk SOUrce 1CH1 cH2 CH3 CH4 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D TRIGger A SETHOld CLOCk SOUrce TRIGger A SETHold DATa SOUrce CH1 CH4 or 00 015 specifies the input channel number 00 015 is only for MSO models AUX or EXT specifies an external trigger using the Aux Input connector located on the front panel of the oscilloscope TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK SOURCE CH1 specifies channel 1 as the clock input for setup and hold input TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK SOURCE might return TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK SOURCE CH4 indicating that channel 4 is the clock source for the setup and hold trigger input TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk THReshold Group Sets or returns the clock voltage threshold for the setup and hold trigger Trigger 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 447 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments Examples TRIGger A SETHOld CLOCk THReshold lt NR3 gt TTL TRIGger A SETHOld CLOCk THReshold TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V lt NR3 gt is the clock lev
202. DISplay REACTpwr Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples 2 274 Sets or returns the display state for the reactor power readout This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer QUALity DISplay REACTpwr OFF ON 0 1 POWer QUALity DISplay REACTpwr OFF or 0 turns off the reactor power display ON or 1 turns on the reactor power display POWER QUALITY DISPLAY REACTPWR 1 turns on the reactor power display POWER QUALITY DISPLAY REACTPWR might return POWER QUALITY DISPLAY REACTPWR 0 indicating that the reactor power display 15 off 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order POWer QUALity DISplay TRUEpwr Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the display state for the true power readout This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer QUALity DISplay TRUEpwr OFF ON 0 1 POWer QUALity DISplay TRUEpwr OFF or 0 turns off the true power display ON or 1 turns on the true power display POWER QUALITY DISPLAY TRUEPWR 1 turns on the true power display POWER QUALITY DISPLAY TRUEPWR might return POWER QUALITY DISPLAY TRUEPWR 0 indicating that the true power display 18 off POWer QUALity DISplay VCRESTfactor Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the display state for the voltage crest factor readout This command requires a DP
203. DISplay INTENSITy GRAticule 2 160 DISplay INTENSITy WAV Eform 2 161 DISplay STYle DOTsonly 2 162 DISplay 2 158 DISplay CLOCk 2 158 DISplay FORMat 2 159 DISplay GRAticule 2 159 DISplay INTENSITy 2 160 DISplay PERSistence 2 161 E ESE 2 164 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Index ESR 2 165 Ethernet Command Group 2 20 ETHERnet DNS IPADDress 2 166 ETHERnet ENET ADDress 2 167 ETHERnet GATEWay IPADDress 2 167 ETHERnet PING S TATUS 2 169 ETHERnet DHCPbootp 2 165 ETHERnet DOMAINname 2 166 ETHERnet HTTPPort 2 167 ETHERnet IPADDress 2 168 ETHERnet NAME 2 168 ETHERnet PASS Word 2 169 ETHERnet PING 2 169 ETHERnet SUBNETMask 2 170 EVENT 2 170 EVMsg 2 171 EVQty 2 171 F FACtory 2 172 File System Command Group 2 21 FILESystem FREESpace 2 175 FILESystem WRITEFile 2 178 FILESystem 2 173 FILESystem CWD 2 173 FILESystem DELEte 2 174 FILESystem DIR 2 174 FILESystem FOR Mat 2 175 FILESystem MKDir 2 176 FILESystem READFile 2 176 FILESystem REName 2 177 FILESystem RMDir 2 177 FPAnel PRESS 2 178 FPAnel TURN 2 180 G GPIBUsb ADDress 2 181 GPIBUsb ID 2 181 H Hard copy Command Group 2 22 HARDCopy 2 181 HARDCopy ACTIVeprinter 2 182 HARDCopy PRINTer ADD 2 184 HARDCopy PRINTer DELete 2 184 HARDCopy PRINTer LIST 2 185 Index 3 Index HARDCopy PRINTer REName 2 185 HARDCopy INKSaver 2 182 HARDCopy LAYout 2 183 HARDCopy PREVIEW 2 184 HEADer
204. DRange lt NR3 gt CH lt x gt PRObe FORCEDRange Arguments _ NR3 specifies the range which is probe specific Returns This command returns 0 0 for probes that do no support forced range CH lt x gt PRObe GAIN Sets or returns the gain factor for the probe attached to the channel specified by lt x gt where x is the channel number The gain of a probe is the output divided by the input transfer ratio For example a common 10x probe has a gain of 1V Group Vertical Syntax CH x PRObe GAIN lt NR3 gt CH x PRObe GAIN 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 125 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Related Commands Arguments Examples CH lt x gt SCAle lt NR3 gt is the probe gain Allowed values depend on the specific probe CH2 PROBE GAIN might return CH2 PROBE GAIN 0 1000 00 indicating that the attached 10x probe delivers 1 V to the channel 2 BNC for every 10 V applied to the probe input CH lt x gt PRObe ID Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the type and serial number of the probe attached to channel lt x gt where x is the channel number Vertical CH lt x gt PRObe ID CH2 PROBE ID might return CH2 PROBE ID TYPE 10X SERNUMBER N A indicating that a passive 10 probe of unknown serial number is attached to channel 2 CH lt x gt PRObe ID SERnumber Query Only Group Syntax Examples 2 126 Returns the serial number of the p
205. DRess MODe 2 350 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess TY Pe 2 350 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess VALue 2 351 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C CONDition 2 351 Index 8 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa DIRection 2 352 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa SIZe 2 352 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa VALue 2 353 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN CONDition 2 353 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa HIVALue 2 354 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa QUA Lifier 2 354 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa SIZe 2 355 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa VALue 2 355 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN ERRTYPE 2 356 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN IDentifier VA Lue 2 356 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt PARallel VALue 2 357 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C CONDition 2 357 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa SIZe 2 358 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa VALue 2 358 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa SIZe 2 359 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa VALue 2 359 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt
206. Default values cont Command Default value TRIGGER B LEVEL D14 1 4 TRIGGER B LEVEL D15 1 4 TRIGGER B LEVEL D2 1 4 TRIGGER B LEVEL D3 1 4 TRIGGER B LEVEL D4 1 4 TRIGGER B LEVEL D5 1 4 TRIGGER B LEVEL D6 1 4 TRIGGER B LEVEL D7 1 4 TRIGGER B LEVEL D8 1 4 TRIGGER B LEVEL D9 1 4 TRIGGER B LOWERTHRESHOLD CH1 0 00E 00 TRIGGER B LOWERTHRESHOLD CH2 0 00E 00 TRIGGER B LOWERTHRESHOLD DO 1 4 TRIGGER B LOWERTHRESHOLD D1 14 TRIGGER B LOWERTHRESHOLD D10 14 TRIGGER B LOWERTHRESHOLD D11 14 TRIGGER B LOWERTHRESHOLD D12 14 TRIGGER B LOWERTHRESHOLD D13 14 TRIGGER B LOWERTHRESHOLD D14 14 TRIGGER B LOWERTHRESHOLD D15 14 TRIGGER B LOWERTHRESHOLD D2 14 TRIGGER B LOWERTHRESHOLD D3 14 TRIGGER B LOWERTHRESHOLD D4 14 TRIGGER B LOWERTHRESHOLD D5 14 TRIGGER B LOWERTHRESHOLD D6 14 TRIGGER B LOWERTHRESHOLD D7 14 TRIGGER B LOWERTHRESHOLD D8 14 TRIGGER B LOWERTHRESHOLD D9 14 TRIGGER B STATE 0 TRIGGER B TIME 8 00E 09 TRIGGER B TYPE EDGE TRIGGER B UPPERTHRESHOLD CH1 8 00E 01 TRIGGER B UPPERTHRESHOLD CH2 8 00E 01 TRIGGER EXTERNAL PROBE 1 VERBOSE 1 ZOOM GRATICULE SIZE 80 ZOOM GRATICULE SPLIT EIGHTYTWENTY C 32 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Table C 1 Default values cont Appendix C Factory Defaults Command Default value ZOOM MODE 0 ZOOM ZOOM1 HORIZONTAL POSITION 50 ZOOM ZOOM1 HORIZONTAL SCALE 4 00E 06 ZOOM ZOOM1 POSIT
207. E 1 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce 1 CH lt x gt MATH lt y gt REF lt x gt D lt x gt MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce Related Commands MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce2 Arguments X CH x is an input channel waveform The x variable can be expressed as integer where x is the channel number MATH lt y gt is a math waveform The y variable can be expressed as an integer of 1 lt gt is a reference waveform The x variable can be expressed as an integer where x is the reference channel number D X is a digital waveform The x variable can be expressed as an integer where is the digital channel number Digital channels are available only on MSO models Examples MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE 1 1 specifies Mathl as the immediate measurement source MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE might return MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE1 CH3 indicating that channel 3 is the immediate measurement source MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce2 Sets or returns the source to measure to for phase or delay immediate measurements Tip Source2 measurements only apply to phase and delay measurement types which require both a target Sourcel and reference Source2 source Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce2 lt gt lt gt REF x D x MEASUrement SOUrce2 Related
208. E CH1 BUS B2 DISPLAY FORMAT HEXADECIMAL BUS B2 DISPLAY TYPE BUS BUS B2 FLEXRAY BITRATE 10000000 BUS B2 FLEXRAY CHANNEL A BUS B2 FLEXRAY SIGNAL BDIFFBP BUS B2 FLEXRAY SOURCE CH1 BUS B2 I2C ADDRESS RWINCLUDE 0 BUS B2 I2C CLOCK SOURCE CH1 BUS B2 I2C DATA SOURCE CH2 BUS B2 LABEL Parallel BUS B2 LIN BITRATE 19200 BUS B2 LIN IDFORMAT NOPARITY BUS BZ LIN MAXBYTEDELIM 14 BUS B2 LIN POLARITY NORMAL BUS B2 LIN SAMPLEPOINT 50 BUS B2 LIN SOURCE CH1 BUS B2 LIN STANDARD V2X BUS B2 PARALLEL CLOCK EDGE RISING BUS B2 PARALLEL CLOCK ISCLOCKED NO BUS B2 PARALLEL CLOCK SOURCE CH1 BUS B2 PARALLEL WIDTH 16 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual C 3 Appendix Factory Defaults Table C 1 Default values cont Command Default value BUS B2 POSITION 0 00E 00 BUS B2 RS232C BITRATE 9600 BUS B2 RS232C DATABITS 8 BUS B2 RS232C DELIMITER LF BUS B2 RS232C DISPLAYMODE FRAME BUS B2 RS232C PARITY NONE BUS B2 RS232C POLARITY NORMAL BUS B2 RS232C RX SOURCE OFF BUS B2 RS232C TX SOURCE CH1 BUS B2 SPI BITORDER MSB BUS B2 SPI CLOCK POLARITY RISE BUS B2 SPI CLOCK SOURCE CH1 BUS B2 SPI DATA IN POLARITY HIGH BUS B2 SPI DATA IN SOURCE OFF BUS B2 SPI DATA OUT POLARITY HIGH BUS B2 SPI DATA OUT SOURCE CH2 BUS B2 SPI DATA SIZE 8 BUS B2 SPI FRAMING 55 BUS B2 SPI IDLETIME 1 00E 07 BUS B2 SPI SELECT POLARITY LOW BUS B2 SPI SELECT SOURCE CH2 BUS B2 STA
209. EARCH lt x gt is the search number and CH lt x gt is the channel number Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIC THReshold CH lt x gt lt NR3 gt TTL SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIC THReshold CH lt x gt lt NR3 gt specifies the trigger level in volts TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold MATH Group Syntax Arguments 2 370 Sets or returns the math waveform threshold level for a logic trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC THReshold MATH TTL SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIC THReshold MATH TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold REF lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the reference waveform threshold level for a logic trigger search to determine where to place a mark SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and REF lt x gt is the reference channel number Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIC THReshold REF x TTL SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIC THReshold REF x TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the channel waveform lower thre
210. EDGE lt x gt 2 208 MEASUrement IMMed DELay 2 207 MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce 2 208 MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce lt x gt 2 210 MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce2 2 209 MEASUrement MMed TYPe 2 210 MEAS Urement IMMed UNIts 2 213 MEASUrement IMMed VALue 2 214 MEASUrement INDICators HORZ lt x gt 2 214 MEASUrement INDICators NUMHORZ 2 215 MEASUrement INDICators NUMVERT 2 215 MEASUrement INDICators STATE 2 216 MEASUrement INDICators VERT lt x gt 2 216 MEASUrement INDICators 2 214 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt COUNt 2 217 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay DIRection 2 218 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay EDGE lt x gt 2 218 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay 2 217 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt MAXimum 2 219 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt MEAN 2 219 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt MINImum 2 219 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE 1 2 220 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOUrce lt x gt 2 221 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE2 2 220 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt STATE 2 222 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt STDdev 2 222 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TY Pe 2 223 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt UNIts 2 225 MEASUrement MEAS x VALue 2 226 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt 2 217 MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute HIGH 2 227 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute LOW 2 228 MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID 2 229 MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID lt x gt 2 230 MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID2 2 229 MEASUrement
211. EF lt x gt HORizontal DELay TIMe Sets or returns the horizontal position of the specified reference waveform in percent of the waveform that is displayed to the right of the center vertical graticule REF lt x gt HORizontal SCAle Sets or returns the horizontal scale for a reference waveform 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Table 2 32 Vertical Commands cont Command Groups Command Description REF lt x gt LABel Sets or returns the specified reference waveform label Sets or returns the vertical position for reference channel lt x gt REF lt x gt TIMe Returns the time that a reference waveform was stored REF lt x gt VERTical POSition Sets or returns the vertical position of the specified reference waveform REF lt x gt VERTical SCAle Sets or returns the reference waveform vertical scale in vertical units div SELect Returns information on which waveforms are on or off and which waveform is selected SELect BUS lt x gt Turns on or off the specified bus waveform or returns whether the specified bus channel is on or off SELect CH lt x gt Turns on or off the specified waveform returns whether the specified channel is on or off SELect CONTROI Sets or returns the waveform that is selected as the implied recipient of channel related commands SELect D lt x gt SELect MATH 1 Turns on the display of digital channel lt x gt and resets t
212. EMBD application module Bus BUS B lt x gt SPI CLOCK SCLK POLARity FALL RISe BUS B lt x gt SPI CLOCK SCLK POLARi ty FALL specifies the falling edge RISe specifies the rising edge BUS B x SPI CLOCK SCLK SOUrce Conditions Group Syntax 2 106 Sets or returns the SPI SCLK source for bus x where x is the bus number This command requires DPO4EMBD application module Bus BUS B lt x gt SPI CLOCK SCLK SOUrce CH1 CH2 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 BUS B x SPI CLOCK SCLK SOUrce 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments 1 4 or 00 015 is the channel to use as the SPI SCLK source BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA IN MISO POLARity Sets or returns the SPI MISO polarity for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number Conditions This command requires DPO4EMBD application module Group Bus Syntax BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA IN MISO POLARity LOW HIGH BUS B x SPI DATA IN MISO POLARity Arguments LOW specifies an active low polarity HIGH specifies an active high polarity BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA IN MISO SOUrce Sets or returns the SPI MISO source for bus lt x where x is the bus number Conditions This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Group Bus Syntax BUS B x SPI DATA IN MISO SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D
213. EMENT IMMED DELAY DIRECTION FORWARDS starts searching from the beginning of the waveform record and looks for the first rising or falling edge MEASUREMENT IMMED DELAY DIRECTION might return MEASUREMENT IMMED DELAY DIRECTION BACKWARDS indicating that searching begins at the end of the waveform record and looks for the last rising or falling edge MEASUrement IMMed DELay EDGE lt x gt Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the slope of the edge the oscilloscope uses for the delay from or to waveform when taking an immediate delay measurement Measurement MEASUrement IMMed DELay EDGE x FALL RISe MEASUrement IMMed DELay EDGE lt x gt MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce2 x specifies which waveform to use where x 1 is the from waveform and x 2 15 the to waveform FALL specifies the falling edge RISe specifies the rising edge MEASUREMENT IMMED DELAY EDGE1 RISE specifies that the from waveform rising edge be used for the immediate delay measurement MEASUREMENT IMMED DELAY EDGE1 returns either RISE or FALL MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce 1 2 208 Sets or returns the source for all single source immediate measurements and specifies the source to measure from when taking an immediate delay measurement or phase measurement NOTE If you do not specify a numerical suffix the source is assumed to be SOURC
214. EOI gt termination character is embedded in the string Several oscilloscope commands use a block argument form as defined in the table below Table 2 12 Block Argument Symbol Meaning lt NZDig gt A nonzero digit character in the range of 1 9 lt Dig gt A digit character in the range of 0 9 lt DChar gt A character with the hexadecimal equivalent of 00 through FF 0 through 255 decimal lt Block gt A block of data bytes defined as lt Block gt lt NZDig gt lt Dig gt lt Dig gt lt DChar gt 0 lt DChar gt lt terminator gt lt NZDig gt specifies the number of lt Dig gt elements that follow Taken together the lt NZDig gt and lt Dig gt elements form a decimal integer that specifies how many lt DChar gt elements follow 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Command Syntax Block Argument a ALIas DEFINE SETUp1 231AUTOSet EXECute SELect REF1 ON Block Header Specifies Data Length Specifies Number of Length Digits that Follow 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 9 Command Syntax 2 10 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Command Groups This manual lists the MSO4000 and DPO4000 Series IEEE488 2 commands in two ways First it presents them by functional groups Then it lists them alphabetically The functional group list starts below The alphabetical list provides detail on each command See page 2 69 Commands Listed in
215. ER A BUS B4 SPI DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 SPI DATA START 0 00E 00 TRIGGER A BUS SOURCE 1 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 27 Appendix Factory Defaults Table C 1 Default values cont Command Default value TRIGGER A EDGE COUPLING DC TRIGGER A EDGE SLOPE RISE TRIGGER A EDGE SOURCE CH1 TRIGGER A HOLDOFF TIME 2 00E 08 TRIGGER A LEVEL 0 00E 00 TRIGGER A LEVEL AUXIN 0 00E 00 TRIGGER A LEVEL CH1 0 00E 00 TRIGGER A LEVEL CH2 0 00E 00 TRIGGER A LEVEL D0 1 4 TRIGGER A LEVEL D1 1 4 TRIGGER A LEVEL D10 1 4 TRIGGER A LEVEL D11 1 4 TRIGGER A LEVEL D12 1 4 TRIGGER A LEVEL D13 1 4 TRIGGER A LEVEL D14 1 4 TRIGGER A LEVEL D15 1 4 TRIGGER A LEVEL D2 1 4 TRIGGER A LEVEL D3 1 4 TRIGGER A LEVEL D4 1 4 TRIGGER A LEVEL D5 1 4 TRIGGER A LEVEL D6 1 4 TRIGGER A LEVEL D7 1 4 TRIGGER A LEVEL D8 1 4 TRIGGER A LEVEL D9 1 4 TRIGGER A LOGIC CLASS LOGIC TRIGGER A LOGIC FUNCTION AND TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT CH1 X TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT CH2 X TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT CLOCK EDGE RISE TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT CLOCK SOURCE NONE TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT DO X TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D1 X TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D10 X TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D11 X TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D12 X TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D13 X TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D14 X C 28 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Appendix Factory Defaults Table C 1 Default values co
216. ERIOD might return PONER HARMONICS IEC OBSPERIOD 10 indicating that the IEC observation period is set to 10 s POWer HARMonics IEC POWERFACtor Conditions Group Sets or returns the rated power factor for IEC harmonics This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 255 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments Examples POWer HARMonics IEC POWERFACtor lt NR3 gt POWer HARMonics POWERFACtor lt NR3 gt is the power factor Valid values ranges from 0 to in increments of 0 1 POWER HARMONICS POWERFACTOR 1 sets the power factor to 1 0000 POWER HARMONICS IEC POWERFACTOR might return POWER HARMONICS POWERFACTOR 900 0000E 03 indicating that the power factor is set to 0 9 POWer HARMonics MIL FUNDamental CALCmethod Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the measurement method for the MIL harmonics fundamental current for use in calculating limits This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer HARMonics MIL FUNDamental CALCmethod MEAS USER POWer HARMonics MIL FUNDamental CALCmethod MEAS specifies that the value of the fundamental current used in calculating limits is measured USER specifies that the value of the fundamental current used in calculated limits is user defined POWER HARMONICS MIL FUNDAMENTAL CALCMETHOD USER
217. EXRAY trigger condition to data IDANDDATA sets the FLEXRAY trigger condition to id and data EOF sets the FLEXRAY trigger condition to end of frame ERROR sets the FLEXRAY trigger condition to error TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CONDITION might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CONDITION SOF indicating the GLEXRAY condition is start of frame TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CONDITION might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CONDITION SOF indicating the GLEXRAY condition is start of frame TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CYCLEcount HIVALue 2 402 Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for FLEXRAY cycle count high value Trigger TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray CYCLECount HIVALue lt QString gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CYCLEcount HIVALue lt QString gt is a quoted string that is the cycle count high value TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT HIVALUE 110010 sets the cycle count high value to 110010 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT HIVALUE might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT HIVALUE XXXXXX indicating the cycle count high value is don t care TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CYCLEcount QUALifier Sets or returns the FLEXRAY cycle count qualifier Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CYCLEcount QUAL if ier iLESSThan
218. Ecount QUALifier 2 340 Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the FLEXRAY cycle count qualifier Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CYCLEcount QUAL i fier LESSThan MOREThan EQUal UNEQual LESSEQual MOREEQual INrange OUTrange SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CYCLEcount QUALi fier LESSThan sets the cycle count qualifier to less than MOREThan sets the cycle count qualifier to greater than EQUal sets the cycle count qualifier to equal UNEQual sets the cycle count qualifier to not equal LESSEQual sets the cycle count qualifier to less than or equal MOREEQual sets the cycle count qualifier to greater than or equal INrange sets the cycle count qualifier to in range OUTrange sets the cycle count qualifier to out of range SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT QUALIFIER LESSTHANsets the cycle count qualifier to LESSTHAN SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT QUALIFTER might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT QUALIFIER EQUAL indicating the cycle count qualifier is set to EQUAL 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CYCLEcount VALue Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for FLEXRAY cycle count l
219. FRAMEID XXXXXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY HEADER INDBITS XXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY HEADER PAYLENGTH XXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 12C ADDRESS MODE ADDR7 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 I2C ADDRESS TYPE USER SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 I2C ADDRESS VALUE XXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCHT TRIGGER A BUS B3 12C CONDITION START SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 I2C DATA DIRECTION NOCARE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 12C DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 12C DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 LIN CONDITION SYNCFIELD SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 LIN DATA HIVALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 LIN DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 LIN DATA SIZE 1 16 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Table C 1 Default values cont Appendix C Factory Defaults Command Default value SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 LIN DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 LIN ERRTYPE SYNC SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 LIN IDENTIFIER VALUE XXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 PARALLEL VALUE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 RS232C CONDITION TXSTART SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 RS232C RX DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 RS232C RX DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 RS232C TX DAT
220. GER A LOGIC INPUT X CH2 X CH3 X CH4 X CLOCK SOURCE NONE EDGE RISE TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT CH1 X CH2 X CH3 X CH4 X TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN TRUE WHEN LESSLIMIT 4 0000E 9 LIMIT 4 0000 9 TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK SOURCE CH1 EDGE RISE THRESHOLD 20 0000E 3 TRIGGER A SETHOLD DATA SOURCE CH2 SETUP lt x gt DATE Query Only Group Syntax Examples SETUP lt x gt LABEL Group Syntax Arguments Examples 2 388 Returns the date when the oscilloscope setup was saved for the specified channel lt gt Save and Recall SETUP x DATE SETUP4 DATE might return SETUP4 DATE 04 18 06 which is the setup date for channel 4 Sets or returns the setup label for the specified channel x where x can be 1 through 10 Save and Recall SETUP lt x gt LABEL Qstring Qstring is an alphanumeric string of characters enclosed in quotes that defines the label text for SETUP lt x gt The length of the string is limited to 30 characters SETUP LABEL might return SETUPT LABEL TEST 2 which is the label setup for channel 1 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SETUP lt x gt TIME Query Only Group Syntax Examples SRE Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples STB Query Only Returns the time when the oscilloscope setup was saved for the specified channel lt gt Save and Recall
221. GER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY ERRTYPE CRCHEADER TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY FRAMEID HIVALUE TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY FRAMEID QUALIFIER EQUAL TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY FRAMEID VALUE TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY FRAMETYPE NORMAL TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY HEADER CRC XXXXXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY HEADER CYCLECOUNT XXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY HEADER FRAMEID XXXXXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY HEADER INDBITS XXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY HEADER PAYLENGTH XXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B3 I2C ADDRESS MODE ADDR7 TRIGGER A BUS B3 I2C ADDRESS TYPE USER TRIGGER A BUS B3 I2C ADDRESS VALUE XXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B3 I2C CONDITION START TRIGGER A BUS B3 I2C DATA DIRECTION NOCARE TRIGGER A BUS B3 I2C DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 I2C DATA START 0 00E 00 TRIGGER A BUS B3 12C DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual C 25 Appendix Factory Defaults Table C 1 Default values cont Command Default value TRIGGER A BUS B3 LIN CONDITION SYNCFIELD TRIGGER A BUS B3 LIN DATA HIVALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B3 LIN DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL TRIGGER A BUS B3 LIN DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 LIN DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B3 LIN ERRTYPE SYNC TRIGGER A BUS B3 LIN IDENTIFIER VALUE XXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B3 PARALLEL VALUE XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B3 RS232C CONDITION TXSTART TRIGGER A BUS B3 RS23
222. Gger A LOGIC FUNCtion AND places a mark 1f all conditions are true NANd places a mark if any of the conditions are false NOR places a mark if all conditions are false OR places a mark if any of the conditions are true SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CH lt x gt Group Syntax 2 364 Sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for a logic trigger search to determine where to place a mark SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and CH lt x gt is the channel number Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIC INPut CH lt x gt HIGH LOW X SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC INPut CH lt x gt 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order HIGH specifies the logic high LOW specifies the logic low X specifies a don t care state SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk EDGE Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns whether the clock edge is a rising or falling for a logic search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger INPut CLOCK EDGE FALL RISe SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIC INPut EDGE RISe specifies a rising edge FALL specifies a falling edge SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk SOUrce Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the clock source definition for a logic trigger search
223. Gger A VIDeo SYNC FIELD Sets or returns the video field trigger TRIGger B Sets the B trigger level to 50 or returns the B trigger parameters TRIGger B BY Sets or returns B trigger time or event qualifiers TRIGger B EDGE Returns B trigger edge type parameters TRIGger B EDGE COUPling Sets or returns the type of B trigger coupling TRIGger B EDGE SLOpe Sets or returns the B edge trigger slope TRIGger B EDGE SOUrce Sets or returns the B edge trigger source TRIGger B EVENTS Returns the current B trigger events parameter TRIGger B EVENTS COUNt Sets or returns the number of events that must occur before the B trigger occurs TRIGger B LEVel Sets or returns the level for the B trigger TRIGger B LEVel CH lt x gt Sets or returns the level for the B trigger for a specific channel TRIGger B LEVel D lt x gt Sets or returns the B trigger level for digital channel lt x gt TRIGger B LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt Sets or returns the B trigger lower threshold for the channel selected TRIGger B LOWerthreshold D lt x gt Sets or queries the B trigger lower threshold for the digital channel selected TRIGger B STATE Returns the current state of the B trigger TRIGger B TIMe Sets or returns the B trigger delay time TRIGger B TYPe Sets or returns the type of B trigger 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 57 Command Groups Table 2 31 Trigger Commands con
224. Group Mark Syntax MARK SELected STARt MARK SELected STATe Query Only Returns the on or off state of the selected mark The selected mark is at or near the center of the screen If you press the front panel Set Clear button this mark will disappear Group Mark Syntax MARK SELected STATe 2 196 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MARK SELected ZOOm POSition Query Only Returns the position of the selected mark 0 to 100 of the zoom overview window Group Mark Syntax MARK SELected Z00m POSition MARK TOTal Query Only Returns how many marks are currently in use Group Mark Syntax MARK TOTa1 MATH MATH1 LABel Sets or queries the waveform label for the math waveform Group Syntax MATH MATH1 LABel lt QString gt MATH 1 LABe1 Arguments _ QString is the quoted string used as the label for the math waveform Examples MATH LABEL Output sets the label for the math waveform to Output MATH LABEL might return MATH LABEL Sum of channel 1 and channel 2 indicating the current label for the math waveform MATH 1 Query Only Returns the definition of the math waveform The returned data depends on the setting of the MATH 1 TYPe command 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 197 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Related Commands Examples MATH 1 DEFine 2 1
225. IAg LOOP STOP DIAG LOOP STOP stops the self test at the end of the current loop Query Only Returns the pass fail status from the last self test sequence execution Use this query to determine which test s has failed Calibration and Diagnostic DIAg RESU1t FLAg DIAg RESUIt LOG PASS indicates that all of the selected self diagnostic tests have passed FAIL indicates that at least one of the selected self diagnostic tests has failed IN PROGRESS indicates that at least one of the selected self diagnostic tests is ongoing NOT RUN indicates that the selected diagnostic test suite has not been run since the instrument was powered on 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 155 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Examples DIAG RESULT FLAG might return DIAG RESULT FLAG PASS DIAg RESUIt LOG Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Returns Examples Returns the internal results log from the last self test sequence execution The list contains all modules and module interfaces that were tested along with the pass fail status of each Calibration and Diagnostic DIAg RESU1t LOG DIAg RESUIt FLAg lt QString gt in the following format Status Module name gt lt Status gt lt Module name gt DIAG RESULT LOG might return DIAG RESULT LOG NOT RUN CPU NOT RUN DISPLAY NOT RUN FPANEL NOT RUN IO NOT RUN ACQ NOT RUN RO M NOT RUN APPKEY DIAg SE
226. IGger A LEVel D lt x gt lt NR3 gt ECL TTL TRIGger A LEVel D x 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 429 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Arguments ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4V lt NR3 gt specifies the trigger level in volts TRIGger A LOGIc Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Returns all of the A logic trigger parameters Trigger TRIGger A LOGIC TRIGger A LOGIc CLAss TRIGGER A LOGIC might return TRIGGER A LOGIC CLASS SETHOLD FUNCTION AND THRESHOLD CH1 20 0000E 3 CH2 0 0000 CH3 0 0000 CH4 0 0000 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT CHi X CH2 X CH3 X CH4 X CLOCK SOURCE NONE EDGE RISE TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT CH1l X CH2 X CH3 X CH4 X TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN TRUE WHEN LESSLIMIT 4 0000E 9 LIMIT 4 0000E 9 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN DELTATIME 4 0000E 9 TRIGger A LOGIc CLAss Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments 2 430 Sets or returns the class of the Logic Trigger This command is used in conjunction with the TRIGger A TY Pe command Trigger TRIGger A LOGIC CLAss LOGIC SETHold j TRIGger A LOGIC CLAss TRIGger A TYPe TRIGger A PULse CLAss LOGIC sets the oscilloscope to trigger on logical combinations of the channels When the TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk SOUrce is NONE LOGIC sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the specified logical combinations of channels 1 2
227. IGger B LOWerthreshold D lt x gt 2 469 TRIGger B UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt 2 471 TRIGger EXTernal PRObe 2 471 TRIGger EXTernal YUNIts 2 472 TRIGger A 2 393 TRIGger A BUS 2 394 TRIGger A EDGE 2 425 TRIGger A HOLDoff 2 427 TRIGger A LEVel 2 428 TRIGger A LOGIc 2 430 TRIGger A MODe 2 439 TRIGger A PULse 2 440 TRIGger A RUNT 2 443 TRIGger A RUNT WHEn 2 444 TRIGger A SETHold 2 446 TRIGger A TYPe 2 454 TRIGger A VIDeo 2 456 TRIGger B 2 463 TRIGger B BY 2 463 TRIGger B EDGE 2 464 TRIGger B EVENTS 2 466 TRIGger B LEVel 2 467 TRIGger B STATE 2 469 TRIGger B TIMe 2 470 TRIGger B TYPe 2 470 TRIGger EXTernal 2 471 TRIGger FREQuency 2 472 TRIGger S TATE 2 472 TST 2 473 U JNLock 2 473 SBDevice CONFigure 2 473 JSBTMC PRODUCTID DECimal 2 474 SBTMC PRODUCTID HEXadecimal 2 475 SBTMC SERIALnumber 2 475 SBTMC VENDORID DECimal 2 475 JSBTMC VENDORID HEXadecimal 2 476 SBTMC 2 474 V VERBose 2 476 Vertical Command Group 2 58 ccc Index 12 WAI 2 477 Waveform Transfer Command Group 2 61 WAVFrm 2 477 WFMInpre 2 478 WFMInpre BIT 2 478 WFMInpre BN Fmt 2 479 WFMInpre BYT_Nr 2 479 WFMInpre BYT_Or 2 480 WFMInpre ENCdg 2 480 WFMInpre NR Pt 2 481 WFMInpre PT Fmt 2 481 WFMInpre PT Off 2 482 WFMInpre XINcr 2 483 WFMlInpre XUNIt 2 483 WFMInpre XZEro 2 484 WFMInpre Y MUIt 2 484 WFMInpre YOFf 2 485 WFMlInpre YUNIt 2 486
228. INPRE ENCDG ASC sets the format of incoming waveform data to ASCII format WFMINPRE ENCDG might return WFMINPRE ENCDG BIN indicating that the incoming waveform data is in binary format Sets or returns the number of data points that are in the incoming waveform record Waveform Transfer WFMInpre NR Pt lt NR1 gt WFMInpre NR Pt CURVe DATa DATa STARt DATa STOP SAVe WAV Eform SAVe WAV Eform FILEFormat WFMOutpre NR Pt lt NR1 gt is the number of data points if WFMInpre PT is set to Y It is the number of min max pairs if WFMInpre PT is set to ENV WFMINPRE NR PT 10000 specifies that 10000 data points will be expected WFMINPRE NR might return WFMINPRE NR PT 10000 indicating that there are 10000 data points in the expected incoming waveform record Sets or returns the point format of the incoming waveform data Regardless of the argument used the scale offset and so on are interpreted similarly When ENV is used waveform data is interpreted over the min max pair when Y 1s used it is interpreted over a single point 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 481 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMinpre PT Off Group Syntax Arguments 2 482 Waveform Transfer WFMInpre PT Fmt WFMInpre PT Fmt WFMoOutpre PT Fmt ENV specifies that the waveform is transmitted in envelope mode as maximum
229. ION 50 ZOOM ZOOM1 SCALE 4 00E 06 ZOOM ZOOM1 STATE 0 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual C 33 Appendix Factory Defaults C 34 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Appendix Programming Example The following series of commands and queries illustrate many of the most common commands and techniques In this example data sent from the controller computer to the oscilloscope is prefaced with the gt symbol Replies from the oscilloscope have no preface gt rem Check for any messages and clear them from the queue gt esr 128 gt allev ALLEV 401 Power on gt rem Set the scope to the default state gt factory gt rem Set the scope parameters that differ from the defaults gt chl scale 2 0 7 hor m scale 100e 6 gt trig a level 2 4 7 rem Start a single sequence acquisition 7 acquire stopafter sequence 7 acquire state on gt rem Wait for the acquisition to complete gt rem Note your controller program time out must be set long enough to handle the wait gt opc 1 gt Use the oscilloscope built in measurements to measure the waveform you acquired gt measu immed type mean gt measu immed value MEASUREMENT IMMED VALUE 1 2767 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual D 1 Appendix D Programming Example gt rem sure to use the esr query to check for measurement errors gt measu i
230. IR query and the FILESystem FREESpace query File System FILESystem FILESystem CWD FILESystem DELEte FILESystem DIR FILESystem REName None FILESYSTEM might return FILESYSTEM DIR tek00000 bmp elusiveGlitchl png TEMP TMP filel wfm file2 wfm MATH1 wfm REF1 wfm REF2 wfm FREESPACE 30212096 Sets or returns the current working directory CWD for FILESystem commands The default working directory is D Anytime you use this command to change the directory the directory that you specify is retained as the current working directory until you either change the directory or you delete the directory If you delete the current working directory the oscilloscope resets current working directory to the default directory D the next time the oscilloscope is powered on or the next time you execute a file system command This command supports the permutations of file and directory names supported by Microsoft Windows Relative path names for example Temp B Absolute path names for example D MyWaveform Implied relative path names for example newfile txt becomes D TekScope newfile txt if the current working directory is D TekScope File System 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 173 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments Examples FILESystem CwD lt new working directory path gt lt new working directory path gt is a quoted string tha
231. IT s XINCR 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 487 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order WFMOutpre BIT_Nr Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMOutpre BN_Fmt Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments 2 488 4 0000E 9 XZERO 20 0000E 6 PT OFF 0 YUNIT V YMULT 15 6250E 6 YOFF 6 4000E 3 YZERO 0 0000 Sets and returns the number of bits per waveform point that outgoing waveforms contain as specified by the DATa SOUrce command Changing the value of WFMoOutpre BIT Nr also changes the values of WFMOutpre BYT Or Waveform Transfer WFMOutpre BIT Nr lt NR1 gt WFMOUutpre BIT Nr DATa SOUrce WFMOutpre BN Fmt lt NR1 gt is the number of bits per data point and can be 8 or 16 WFMOUTPRE BIT NR 16 sets the number of bits per waveform point to 16 for outgoing waveforms WFMOUTPRE BIT NR might return WFMOUTPRE BIT NR 8 indicating that outgoing waveforms use 8 bits per waveform point Sets or returns the format of binary data for outgoing waveforms specified by the DATa SOUrce command Changing the value of WFMOutpre BN Fmt also changes the value of DATa ENCdg Waveform Transfer wFMOutpre BN_Fmt RI RP WFMOUutpre BN Fmt DATa ENCdg DATa SOUrce RI specifies signed integer data point representation RP specifies positive integer data point representation 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
232. ITION2 9 00E 6 positions the cursor2 vertical bar cursor at 9 ms CURSor VBArs POSITION1 this command might return CURSOR VBARS POSITION1 1 0000E 06 indicating that the cursor vertical bar is positioned at 1 us Sets or returns the units for the vertical bar cursors Cursor CURSOr VBArs UNIts SEConds HERtz DEGrees PERcent CURSor VBArs UNIts SEConds sets the units of the vertical bar cursors for the time domain seconds HERtz sets the units of the vertical bar cursors for the frequency domain Hertz DEGrees sets the units to degrees for measuring phase PERcent sets the units to percent for use with ratio cursors 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Returns Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SECONDS HERTZ DEGREES or PERCENT depending on the current vertical bar cursor units CURSOR VBARS UNITS HERtz sets the units of the VBArs cursors to 1 seconds CURSOR VBARS UNITS might return CURSOR VBARS UNITS SECONDS indicating that the units for the vertical bar cursor are currently set to seconds CURSor VBArs USE No Query Form Conditions Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets the vertical bar cursor measurement scale This command is only applicable when ratio cursors are on Cursor CURSOr VBArs USE CURrent HALFgrat FIVEdivs CURSor VBArs UNIts CURrent sets the V Bar measurement scale so that 095 is the current position of the
233. IZE CARD sets the image print size to 89 MM 55 MM PICTBRIDGE IMAGESIZE might return PICTBRIDGE IMAGESIZE DEFLT indicating the default image print size 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order PICTBridge PAPERSize Sets the output print paper size Group PictBridge Syntax PICTBridge PAPERSize DEFLT L L2 HAGAKIPCARD 54 86 MMLOOBY150 INABY6 INBBY10 LETTER IN1 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 ROLL89MM ROLL127MM ROLL100MM ROLL210MM Arguments DEFLT for a default paper size L for a paper size L L2 for a paper size 2L HAGAKIPCARD for a paper size Hagaki MM54BY86 for a card paper size MM100BY150 for paper size of 100 150 MM IN4BY6 for a paper size of 4 6 8 10 for a paper size of 8 10 LETTER for a letter paper size 11 17 for a paper size of 11 17 for a paper size A1 for a Al paper size A2 for a A2 paper size A3 for a A3 paper size A4 for a A4 paper size A5 for a A5 paper size A6 for a A6 paper size A7 for a A7 paper size 8 for a A8 paper size A9 for a A9 paper size BO for a BO paper size B1 for a paper size B2 for a B2 paper size 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 245 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order B3 for a B3 paper size B4 for a B4 paper size B5 for a 5 paper size B6 for a B6 paper size 7 for a B7 paper size B8 for a B8 paper size B9 for a B9 paper size ROLL89MM f
234. If you don t enter a port address the URL then the ETHERnet HTTPPort value must be set to 80 which is the default port for HTTP protocol If you use a URL with a port address for example http DPO4104 04WKLA 1234 the port number is specified by the number after the colon Set the ETHERnet HTTPPort value to this same number ETHERNET HTTPPORT 80 sets the HTTP port value to 80 Sets or returns the IP address assigned to the oscilloscope Ethernet ETHERnet IPADDress Qstring ETHERnet IPADDress lt QString gt is a standard IP address value enclosed in quotes ETHERNET IPADDRESS 123 121 13 214 sets the oscilloscope s IP address Sets or returns the network name assigned to the oscilloscope Ethernet ETHERnet NAME lt QString gt ETHERnet NAME lt QString gt is the network name assigned to the oscilloscope enclosed in quotes ETHERNET NAME labscope1 sets the oscilloscope s network name 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ETHERnet PASSWord Sets or returns the HTTP Ethernet access password If a password is set the user must enter the password before the user s Web browser can access the oscilloscope Group Ethernet Syntax X ETHERnet PASSWord new ETHERnet PASSWord Arguments new is a new password enclosed in quotes Examples ETHERNET PASSWORD 2 53 replaces the current Ethernet password with th
235. LIN STANDARD might return BUS B1 LIN STANDARD V2X indicating the LIN standard is V2X BUS B lt x gt PARallel BIT lt x gt SOUrce Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the parallel bit source for B lt x gt where x is the bus number and Bit lt x gt is the bit number Bus BUS B x PARallel BIT x SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 DO D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 BUS B x PARallel BIT x SOUrce CH1 CH4 or DO D15 specifies the bit source lt gt lt gt specifies the bit number BUS B x PARallel CLOCK EDGE Group 2 100 Sets or returns the parallel clock edge for bus x where x is the bus number Bus 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order BUS B x PARallel CLOCK EDGE EITher RISing FALling BUS B lt x gt PARal lel CLOCK EDGE EIther specifies either edge as the clock edge RISing specifies the rising edge as the clock edge FAL ling specifies the falling edge as the clock edge BUS B lt x gt PARallel CLOCK ISCLOCKed Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the parallel bus clock function for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number Bus BUS B lt x gt PARallel CLOCK ISCLOCKed YES NO BUS B lt x gt PARallel CLOCK ISCLOCKed YES specifes that the Parallel bus is clocked NO specifes that the Parallel bus is not clocked BUS B lt x gt PARallel CLOCK SOUrce Gro
236. LITY TRUEPWR might return PONER QUALITY TRUEpwr 1000 W indicating that the true power value is set to 1000 W POWer QUALity VRMS Query Only Returns the RMS voltage measurement Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Group Power Syntax POWer QUALi ty VRMS 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 279 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Examples POWER QUALITY VRMS might return POWER QUALITY VRMS 115 indicating that the rms voltage value is set to 115 V POWer REFLevel ABSolute No Query Form Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets the reference levels to their default unit values This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer REFLevel ABSolute SETTODEFaults SETTODEFau Its sets the reference levels to their default values POWer REFLevel ABSolute HIGH Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the top reference level for power measurements This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer REFLevel ABSolute HIGH NR3 0 1 1 6 POWer REFLevel ABSolute HIGH lt NR3 gt is the absolute high value in volts Default value is 0 0E 0 POWER REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE HIGH 2 sets the absolute high value to 2 000 POWER REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE HIGH might return POWER REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE HIGH 2 indicating that the absolute high value 15 set to 2 V POWer REFLevel A
237. LOW x SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern INPut REF lt x gt HIGH specifies a high logic level LOW specifies a low logic level X specifies a don t care condition SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn 2 368 Group Sets or returns the condition for generating a logic pattern trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax SEARCH SEARCH X TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern WHEn TRUe FALSe LESSThan Than EQUal UNEQual SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern WHEn Arguments X TRUe places a mark when the pattern becomes true FALSe places a mark when the pattern becomes false LESSThan places a mark if the specific pattern is true less than the time set by the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern W HEn LESSLimit command Than places a mark if the specific pattern is true longer than the specified time set by the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn MORELimit command 1 places a mark if the specific pattern is true longer than the time set by the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern W HEn LESSLimit command but less than the specified time set by the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn MORELimit command UNEQual places a mark if the specific pattern is true less than the time set by
238. Lect No Query Form Group Syntax Arguments 2 156 Sets the type of diagnostics grouping Calibration and Diagnostic DIAg SELect 0 1 1 10 ALL runs all diagnostic groups APPKey runs just the application key diagnostic group CPU runs just the CPU diagnostic group DISplay runs just the display circuit diagnostic group FFPAnel runs just the front panel diagnostic group IO runs just the IO board diagnostic group 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ROM runs just the IO board diagnostic group ACQ runs just the acquisition system diagnostic group DIAg SELect lt function gt No Query Form Group Syntax Arguments Examples Runs self tests on the specified system subsystem Calibration and Diagnostic DIAg SELect function function specifies a single oscilloscope subsystem on which to run self tests diagnostics Valid values are ACQ tests the acquisition system APPKey tests the application keys CPU tests the CPU DISplay tests the display FPAnel tests the front panel controls IO tests the IO ports ROM tests the system read only memory DIAG SELECT CPU sets the oscilloscope to run just CPU tests DIAg STATE No Query Form Group Syntax Arguments This command starts or stops the oscilloscope self test Depending on the argument self test cap
239. MEAS through MEAS4 MEASUrement STATIstics MODE Turns measurement statistics on or off MEASUrement STATIstics WElghting Controls the responsiveness of the mean and standard deviation to waveform changes Miscellaneous Command Group 2 30 Use the commands in the Miscellaneous Command Group to perform actions that do not fit into other categories Several commands and queries are common to all 488 2 1987 devices The 488 2 1987 standard defines these commands The common commands begin with an asterisk character Table 2 26 Miscellaneous Commands Command Description AUTOSet Sets the vertical horizontal and trigger controls to provide a stable display of the appropriate waveform This is equivalent to pressing the front panel Autoset button AUTOSet ENAble Enables or disables the autoset feature CLEARMenu Clears the current menu from the display DATE Sets or returns the date displayed by the oscilloscope DDT Sets or returns the commands that will be executed by the group execute trigger DESkew Causes the deskew values for all channels to be set to the recommended values DESkew DISPlay Sets or returns the state of the deskew table display FPAnel PRESS Simulates the action of pressing a specified front panel button FPAnel TURN Duplicates the action of turning a specified front panel control knob GPIBUsb ADDress Returns the current GPIB address GPIBUsb ID R
240. MODulation TY Pe 2 270 POWer QUALity APPpwr 2 271 POWer QUALity DISplay APPpwr 2 271 POWer QUALity DISplay FREQuency 2 271 POWer QUALity DISplay ICRESTfactor 2 272 POWer QUALity DISplay IRMS 2 272 POWer QUALity DISplay PHAS Eangle 2 273 POWer QUALity DISplay POWERFACtor 2 273 POWer QUALity DISplay REACTpwr 2 274 POWer QUALity DISplay TRUEpwr 2 275 POWer QUALity DISplay V CRESTfactor 2 275 POWer QUALity DISplay V RMS 2 276 POWer QUALity FREQREFerence 2 276 POWer QUALity FREQuency 2 277 POWer QUALity ICRESTfactor 2 277 POWer QUALity PHASEangle 2 278 POWer QUALity POWERFACtor 2 278 POWer QUALity REACTpwr 2 279 POWer QUALity TRUEpwr 2 279 POWer REFLevel ABSolute 2 280 POWer REFLevel ABSolute HIGH 2 280 POWer REFLevel ABSolute LOW 2 280 POWer REFLevel ABSolute MID lt 1 3 gt 2 281 POWer REFLevel HYSTeresis 2 281 POWer REFLevel METHod 2 282 POWer REFLevel PERCent 2 283 POWer REFLevel PERCent HIGH 2 283 POWer REFLevel PERCent LOW 2 283 POWer REFLevel PERCent MID lt 1 3 gt 2 284 POWer RIPPle RESults AMPL itude 2 285 POWer RIPPle RESults MAX 2 285 POWer RIPPle RESults MEAN 2 286 POWer RIPPle RESults MIN 2 286 POWer RIPPle RESults STDdev 2 286 POWer SOA LINear XMA X 2 287 POWer SOA LINear XMIN 2 288 POWer SOA LINear YMAX 2 288 POWer SOA LINear YMIN 2 289 POWer SOA MASK DEFine 2 291 POWer SOA MASK MAXAmps 2 292 Index 6 POWer SOA MASK MAX Volts 2 292 POWer SOA MASK MAX
241. Manual Syntax Related Commands Examples 200 Query Only Group Syntax Examples ZOOm MODe Group Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order wFMOutpre YZEro DATa SOUrce WFMOutpre Y UNit WFMOUTPRE YZERO might return WFMOUTPRE YZERO 100 0000E 3 indicating that vertical offset is set to 100 mV Returns the current vertical and horizontal positioning and scaling of the display Zoom Zoom ZOOM might return ZOOM MODE 1 GRATICULE SIZE 80 SPLIT EIGHTYTWENTY ZOOM ZOOM1 STATE 1 SCALE 400 0000E 12 POSITION 46 8986 FACTOR 50 0000E 3 HORIZONTAL POSITION 46 8986 SCALE 40 0 0000E 12 Turns Zoom mode on or off The Zoom query returns the current state of Zoom mode This command is equivalent to pressing the zoom button located on the front panel Zoom ZOOm MODe ON OFF lt NR1 gt ZOOM MODe ON turns on Zoom mode OFF turns off Zoom mode lt NR1 gt 0 turns off Zoom mode any other value turns on Zoom mode 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 497 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Examples ZOOM MODE OFF turns off Zoom mode ZOOM MODE might return ZOOM MODE 1 indicating that Zoom mode is currently turned on ZOOm ZOOM x Query Only Returns the current vertical and horizontal positioning and scaling of the display x can only be 1 Group Zoom Syntax Z00m zooMoc Examples 200 200 1 might return ZOOM ZOOM1 STATE
242. Manual 2 69 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order ACQuire MAXSamplerate Query Only Group Syntax Examples ACQuire MODe 2 70 Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Returns the maximum real time sample rate which varies from model to model Acquisition ACQuire MAXSamplerate ACQUIRE MAXSAMPLERATE might return 2 5000E 9 in DPO4034 indicating the maximum real time sample rate is 2 5GS s Sets or returns the acquisition mode of the oscilloscope for all live waveforms Waveforms are the displayed data point values taken from acquisition intervals Each acquisition interval represents a time duration set by the horizontal scale time per division The oscilloscope sampling system always samples at the maximum rate so the acquisition interval may include than one sample The acquisition mode which you set using this ACQuire MODe command determines how the final value of the acquisition interval is generated from the many data samples Acquisition ACQuire MODe SAMple PEAKdetect HIRes AVErage ENVelope ACQui re MODe ACQuire NUMAVg CURVe SAMp le specifies that the displayed data point value is the first sampled value that 1s taken during the acquisition interval In sample mode all waveform data has 8 bits of precision You can request 16 bit data with a CURVe query but the lower order 8 bits of data will be zero SAMple is the default mode PEAKdetect specifies the display of high low ra
243. N ERRTYPE SYNC SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 LIN IDENTIFIER VALUE XXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 PARALLEL VALUE XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 RS232C CONDITION TXSTART SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 RS232C RX DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 RS232C RX DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 RS232C TX DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 RS232C TX DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 SPI CONDITION 55 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 SPI DATA MISO VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 SPI DATA MOSI VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 SPI DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS SOURCE B1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A EDGE SLOPE RISE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A EDGE SOURCE CH1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LEVEL 0 00E 00 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LEVEL CH1 0 00E 00 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LEVEL CH2 0 00E 00 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LEVEL MATH 0 00E 00 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LEVEL REF1 0 00E 00 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LEVEL REF2 0 00E 00 C 18 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Appendix Factory Defaults Table C 1 Default values cont Command Default value SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC FUNCTION AND SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT CH1 X SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT CH2 X SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT CLOCK EDGE RISE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT CLOCK SOURCE NONE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC
244. N SLOWER DELTATIME 4 0000E 9 TRIGGER A VIDEO POLARITY POSITIVE SOURCE CH1 STANDARD NTSC SYNC ALLLINES HOLDOFF FIELD 0 0000 TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM FORMAT PROGRESSIVE SCAN RATE15K TRIGGER A VIDEO LINE 1 H DTV FORMAT HD1080160 TRIGGER A BUS SOURCE 1 1 12 START DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SIZE 1 START 0 0000 DIRECTION NOCARE TRIGGER A BUS Bl I2C ADDRESS MODE ADDR7 TYPE USER VALUE XXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS BT SPI CONDITION MOSI DATA OUT VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 SPT DATA IN VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 SPI DATA SIZE 1 START 0 0000 Sets or returns the trigger type I2C CAN SPI RS 232 or Parallel There are up to four serial buses B1 B4 depending on your instrument model Each be independently set to one of the serial trigger types The serial parameters related to the trigger are broken into two sections Trigger A SERIAL xxx consisting of parameters the user will change frequently and BUS B1 xxx consisting of parameters the user will specify once bus definition Requires a DPO4AUTO DPO4EMBD DPO4COMP application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS I2C SPI CAN RS232 PARalle1 TRIGger A BUS I2C specifies the Inter IC bus SPI specifies the Serial Peripheral Interface bus CAN specifies the Controller Area Network bus PARallel specifies the Parallel bus NOTE Parallel bus commands work with MSO4000 Series oscilloscopes only TRIGg
245. NITS BASE indicating that the units for the horizontal bar cursors are base CURSor HBArs USE No Query Form Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples CURSor MODe Conditions Group Sets the horizontal bar cursor measurement scale This command is only applicable when ratio cursors are on Cursor CURSor HBArs USE CURrent HALFgrat CURSor HBArs UNIts CURrent sets the H Bar measurement scale so that 0 is the current position of the lowest H Bar cursor and 100 is the current position of the highest H Bar cursor HALFgrat sets H Bar measurement scale so that half the screen major divisions five on the MSO DPO4000 is 100 where 0 is 2 5 divisions and 100 is 2 5 divisions from the center horizontal graticule CURSOR HBARS USE HALFGRAT sets Bar measurement scale so that five screen major divisions equals 100 Sets or returns whether the two cursors move linked together in unison or separately This applies to the Waveform cursors display mode This command is only applicable when waveform cursors are displayed Cursor 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 135 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments Examples CURSor MODe INDependent CURSor MODe TRACK ties the navigational functionality of the two cursors together For cursor 1 adjustments this ties the movement of the two cursors together however cursor 2 continues to move
246. NORMa PAYLoad NULL SYNC STARTup SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS lt gt FLEXray FRAMEType Arguments sets the FLEXRAY frame type to normal PAYLoad sets the FLEXRAY frame type to payload NULL sets the FLEXRAY frame type to NULL SYNC sets the FLEXRAY frame type to sync STARTup sets the FLEXRAY frame type to start up Examples SEARCH 1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMETYPE STARTUP sets the flexray frame type to startup SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMETYPE might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMETYPE NORMAL indicating the flexray frame type is normal SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER CRC Sets or returns the CRC portion of the binary header string to be used for FLEXRAY trigger Group Search Syntax SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER CRC Qstring SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray HEADER CRC 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 347 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Arguments Examples lt QString gt is a quoted string representing the CRC portion of the binary header string used for FLEXRAY trigger SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER CRC 00110010101 sets the CRC protion of the binary header string 00110010101 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER CRC might return SEARCH SEARCH
247. O4000 Series Programmer Manual ID Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples IDN Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples LANGuage Group Syntax Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Returns identifying information about the oscilloscope and related firmware Miscellaneous ID IDN ID might return TEK DPO4034 CF 91 1CT FV v1 0000 This indicates the oscilloscope model number configured format and firmware version number Returns the oscilloscope identification code Miscellaneous IDN ID IDN might return TEKTRONIX DPO4034 SN123456789 CF 91 1CT FV v1 00000 indicating the oscilloscope model number serial number configured number and firmware version number Sets or returns the user interface display language This command only affects the oscilloscope displayed language Remote commands and their responses are always in English Miscellaneous LANGuage ENGLish FRENch GERMan ITALian SPANish PORTUguese JAPAnese KOREan RUSSian SIMPlifiedchinese TRADi tionalchinese 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 191 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order LOCk Examples Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples LRN Query Only 2 192 Group LANGuage LANGUAGE might return LANGUAGE ENGLISH Enables or disables all front panel buttons and knobs There is no front panel equivalent When the front panel is lock
248. O4PWR application module Power POWer QUALity DISplay VCRESTfactor OFF ON 0 1 POWer QUALity DISplay VCRESTfactor OFF or 0 turns off the voltage crest factor display ON or turns on the voltage crest factor display POWER QUALITY DISPLAY VCRESTFACTOR 1 turns on the voltage crest factor display 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 275 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order POWER QUALITY DISPLAY VCRESTFACTOR might return POWER QUALITY DISPLAY VCRESTFACTOR 0 indicating that the voltage crest factor display 15 off POWer QUALity DISplay VRMS Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the display state for the rms voltage readout This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer QUALity DISplay VRMS OFF ON 0 1 POWer QUALity DISplay VRMS OFF or 0 turns off the rms voltage display ON or 1 turns on the rms voltage display POWER QUALITY DISPLAY VRMSO turns off the rms voltage display POWER QUALITY DISPLAY VRMS might return POWER QUALITY DISPLAY VRMS 1 indicating that the rms voltage display 18 on POWer QUALity FREQREFerence Conditions Group Syntax Arguments 2 276 Sets or returns the power quality frequency reference This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer QUALity FREQREFerence VOLTage CURRent POWer QUAL i ty FREQREFerence VOLTage sets voltage as the power qual
249. ON TXSTART TRIGGER A BUS B2 RS232C RX DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 RS232C RX DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B2 RS232C TX DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 RS232C TX DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B2 SPI CONDITION 55 TRIGGER A BUS B2 SPI DATA IN VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B2 SPI DATA OUT VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B2 SPI DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 SPI DATA START 0 00E 00 C 24 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Table C 1 Default values cont Appendix C Factory Defaults Command Default value TRIGGER A BUS B3 CAN CONDITION SOF TRIGGER A BUS B3 CAN DATA DIRECTION NOCARE TRIGGER A BUS B3 CAN DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL TRIGGER A BUS B3 CAN DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 CAN DATA START 0 00E 00 TRIGGER A BUS B3 CAN DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B3 CAN FRAMETYPE DATA TRIGGER A BUS B3 CAN IDENTIFIER MODE STANDARD TRIGGER A BUS B3 CAN IDENTIFIER VALUE TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY CONDITION SOF TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT HIVALUE XXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT QUALIFIER EQUAL TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT VALUE XXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY DATA HIVALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY DATA OFFSET 1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY EOFTYPE STATIC TRIG
250. OTO FASTer FAStest FFT FIELD FIFty FILEFormat FILESystem FILter FINE FIRst FIVEdivs FIXEDFREQValue FIXEDFREQuency FLAg FLEXray FOCUS FOLder FORCEDRange FORCe FORMAt FORMat FORWards 1 FRACTional FRAME FRAMEID FRAMESync FRAMEType FRAMETypeid FRAMEtype FRAMING FRAMetime FRAme FREE FREESpace FRENch FREQREFerence FREQRef FREQuency FUNCtion FUNDamental GAIN GATEMi d GATESOurce GATEWay GATIng GATe GATing GENeralcall GERMan GND GPIBUsb GRAph GRAticule GRId GROUPing HAGAKIPCARD HAGAKIPcard HAMmi ng HANning HARDCopy HARM3ALTernate HARM5ALTernate HARMSOURCe HARMonics 5 HD1080150 HD1080160 HD1080P24 HD1080P25 1080 5 24 HD480P60 HD720P60 HDtv HEADER HEADer HEADertime HEIght HEXadecimal HFRej HIGH HIGHLimit HIRes HIStogram HIVALue HOLDTime HOLDof f zontal HSmode HTTPPort HYSTeresis 2 25 ICRESTfactor ID IDANDDATA IDFORmat IDLETime IDLEtime IDPrint IDentifier IEC IECMAX IMAGESize IMAGe IMAge IMMed IMPedance IN 11 17 IN2P5BY3P25 IN4BY6 IN8BY10 INDBits INDICators 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual INDIvidual INDependent INFInite INIT INKSaver INPUTPOWer INPut INTENSITy INTERLAced INTERNal INVERTed INVert INVerted INrange 0 IPADDress IRMS ISCLOCKed ITALian JAPAnese KOREan L L2 L4 LABEL LABel LANGuage LANdscape LARge LAYout LEFt LESSEQual LESSLimit LESSThan LE
251. OURCE D14 BUS B1 PARALLEL BIT15 SOURCE D15 BUS B1 PARALLEL BIT16 SOURCE CH1 BUS B1 PARALLEL BIT17 SOURCE CH2 BUS B1 PARALLEL BIT2 SOURCE D2 BUS B1 PARALLEL BIT3 SOURCE D3 BUS B1 PARALLEL BIT4 SOURCE D4 BUS B1 PARALLEL BIT5 SOURCE D5 BUS B1 PARALLEL BIT6 SOURCE D6 BUS B1 PARALLEL BIT7 SOURCE D7 BUS B1 PARALLEL BIT8 SOURCE D8 BUS B1 PARALLEL BIT9 SOURCE D9 BUS B1 PARALLEL CLOCK EDGE RISING BUS B1 PARALLEL CLOCK ISCLOCKED NO BUS B1 PARALLEL CLOCK SOURCE CH1 BUS B1 PARALLEL WIDTH 16 BUS B1 POSITION 0 00E 00 BUS B1 RS232C BITRATE 9600 BUS B1 RS232C DATABITS 8 BUS B1 RS232C DELIMITER LF BUS B1 RS232C DISPLAYMODE FRAME BUS B1 RS232C PARITY NONE BUS B1 RS232C POLARITY NORMAL BUS B1 RS232C RX SOURCE OFF BUS B1 RS232C TX SOURCE CH1 BUS B1 SPI BITORDER MSB BUS B1 SPI CLOCK POLARITY RISE 2 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Table C 1 Default values cont Appendix C Factory Defaults Command Default value BUS B1 SPI CLOCK SOURCE CH1 BUS B1 SPEDATA IN POLARITY HIGH BUS B1 SPI DATA IN SOURCE OFF BUS B1 SPI DATA OUT POLARITY HIGH BUS B1 SPI DATA OUT SOURCE CH2 BUS B1 SPI DATA SIZE 8 BUS B1 SPI FRAMING 55 BUS B1 SPI IDLETIME 1 00E 07 BUS B1 SPI SELECT POLARITY LOW BUS B1 SPI SELECT SOURCE CH2 BUS B1 STATE 0 BUS B1 TYPE PARALLEL BUS B2 CAN BITRATE 500000 BUS B2 CAN PROBE CANH BUS B2 CAN SAMPLEPOINT 50 BUS B2 CAN SOURC
252. Outpre PT_Off This query always returns a 0 if the waveform specified by DATA SOUrce is on or displayed WFMOutpre PT_ORder This query always returns LINEAR WFMOutpre WFld Returns a string describing the acquisition parameters for the outgoing waveform WFMOutpre XINcr Returns the horizontal sampling interval for the outgoing waveform WFMOutpre XUNit Returns the horizontal units for the outgoing waveform WFMOutpre XZEro Returns the time of the first point in the outgoing waveform WFMOutpre YMUIt Returns the vertical scale factor per digitizing level for the outgoing waveform WFMOutpre YOFf Returns the vertical position in digitizing levels for the outgoing waveform WFMOutpre YUNit Returns the vertical units for the outgoing waveform WFMOutpre YZEro Returns the vertical offset for the outgoing waveform 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Zoom Command Group Command Groups Use the commands in the Zoom Command Group to expand and position the waveform display horizontally without changing the time base settings Table 2 35 Zoom Commands Command Description 200 Returns the horizontal positioning and scaling of the zoom display ZOOm MODe Sets or returns the zoom mode ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt FACtor Returns the current horizontal positioning and scaling of the zoom display Returns the zoom factor of the zoom window lt
253. P and TIFF are uncompressed where as PNG is compressed SAVe IMAGe INKSaver determines whether the data sent is in InkSaver mode NOTE The Hardcopy command with no arguments is equivalent to pressing the HardCopy button on the front panel when the data is sent to the printer As there is no front panel equivalent of the HARDCOPY START you can choose to save the images to a different location using the SAVE button HARDCOPY initiates a screen copy to the active printer HARDCopy ACTIVeprinter Group Syntax Arguments HARDCopy INKSaver 2 182 Sets or returns the currently active printer When a hard copy operation is performed the output will be sent to this printer One of two methods of specifying the printer can be used specifying an index value obtained from looking at the list of attached printers or by specifying the printer name Hard Copy HARDCopy ACTIVeprinter lt NR1 gt lt name gt HARDCopy ACTIVeprinter NRI is the index of the desired printer as returned from HARDCopy PRINTer LIST name is the name of the printer as specified in the printer list This name is case sensitive and must be entered exactly as shown in the list Changes hard copy output to print traces and graticule on a white background while retaining waveform color information except for channel 1 which prints as 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Arguments Examples HARDC
254. PO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 203 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Syntax MATH 1 VERTical UNIts Examples MATH VERTICAL UNITS might return MATH VERTICAL UNITS joules indicating that the math vertical unit label for unknown values is joules MATHVAR Query Only Queries both numerical values you can use within math expressions Group Math Syntax MATHVAR Related Commands Returns Examples lt gt Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments 2 204 MATHVAR VAR lt x gt MATH 1 DEFine lt NR3 gt are the stored numerical values MATHVAR returns the values of all variables stored in locations through 2 Sets or returns one of two different numerical values you can use within math expressions These values can range from 10 0e 18 to 1 0e 15 the default values are 0 0 lt x gt specifies the location or 2 in which you can store values Stored math variables be referenced within math expressions as VARI and 2 For example the following command defines as the product of Channel 1 and math variable 1 MATHI DEFINE CHI VARI Math MATHVAR VAR x NR3 MATHVAR VAR x lt gt MATH 1 DEFine lt NR3 gt specifies the numerical value to be stored in location x 1 through 2 gt 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples MATHVAR VAR2 2 43E 5
255. PPERTHRESHOLD MATH 8 00E 01 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A UPPERTHRESHOLD REF1 8 00E 01 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A UPPERTHRESHOLD REF2 8 00E 01 SELECT BUS1 0 SELECT BUS2 0 SELECT BUS3 0 SELECT BUS4 0 1 0 SELECT CH1 SELECT CH2 SELECT CONTROL CH1 SELECT DO SELECT D1 SELECT D10 SELECT D11 SELECT D12 SELECT D13 SELECT D14 SELECT D15 SELECT D2 SELECT D3 SELECT D4 SELECT D5 SELECT D6 SELECT D7 SELECT D8 SELECT D9 SELECT DALL SELECT MATH SELECT REF1 504000 DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual C 21 Appendix Factory Defaults Table C 1 Default values cont Command Default value SELECT REF2 0 TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN CONDITION SOF TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN DATA DIRECTION NOCARE TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN DATA START 0 00E 00 TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN FRAMETYPE DATA TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN IDENTIFIER MODE STANDARD TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN IDENTIFIER VALUE TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CONDITION SOF TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT HIVALUE XXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT QUALIFIER EQUAL TRIGGER A
256. Query Form Group Syntax Arguments Displays a preview of the current screen contents with the InkSaver palette applied Hard Copy HARDCopy PREVIEW ON OFF lt NR1 gt ON or lt NR1 gt Z 0 turns preview mode on OFF or lt NR1 gt 0 turns preview mode off HARDCopy PRINTer ADD No Query Form Group Syntax Arguments Adds a network printer to the list of available printers All three arguments must be present but only one of server name or server IP address may be specified An empty string can be used for blank arguments Hard Copy HARDCopy PRINTer ADD lt name gt lt server gt lt address gt lt name gt is the name of the network printer queue server is the host name of the print LPR server lt address gt is the IP address of the print server HARDCopy PRINTer DELete No Query Form Group Syntax Arguments 2 184 Removes a network printer from the list of available printers The printer name is Case sensitive Hard Copy HARDCopy PRINTer DELete lt name gt lt name gt is the name of the printer to be deleted 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order HARDCopy PRINTer LIST Query Only Group Syntax Returns a list of currently attached printers Hard Copy HARDCOpy PRINTer LIST HARDCopy PRINTer REName No Query Form HEADer Group Syntax Arguments Group Renames a network printer on the list
257. R A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT VALUE 11001101 sets the cycle count value to 11001101 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT VALUE might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT VALUE XXXXXX indicating the cycle count value is don t care TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa HIVALue Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the high binary data string to be used for FLEXRAY trigger if trigger condition is ID or IDANDDATA Trigger TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray DATa HIVALue lt QString gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa HIVALue lt QString gt is a quoted string that is the FLEXRAY binary data high value TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA HIVALUE 11001101 XXXXXXX1 sets the binary data string high value to 11001101 XXXXXXX1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA HIVALUE might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA HIVALUE XXXXXXXX indicating the binary data string high value is don t care TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa OFFSet 2 404 Sets or returns the offset of the data string in bytes to be used for FLEXRAY trigger 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group S
258. REF4 sets a reference as the gate source NONe is set when the gate source is not used in the application 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual POWer GATing Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order POWER GATESOURCE 1 sets the gated source as POWER GATESOURCE might return POWER GATESOURCE 2 indicating that 2 is the gated source Sets or returns the power application gating This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer GATing OFF SCREen CURSor POWer GATing OFF turns off measurement gating full record SCREen turns on gating using the left and right edges of the screen CURSor limits measurements to the portion of the waveform between the vertical bar cursors even if they are off screen POWER GATING CURSOr sets cursor gating on the oscilloscope POWER GATING might return POWER GATING OFF indicating that gating is turned off on the oscilloscope POWer HARMonics DISPlay SELect Conditions Group Syntax Sets or returns the harmonics to be displayed when the harmonics standard is NONe This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer HARMonics DISPlay SELect ODD EVEN ALL POWer HARMonics DISPlay SELect 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 249 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Arguments Examples ODD to display only odd harmonics
259. REFLevel METHod 2 230 MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent HIGH 2 231 MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent LOW 2 232 MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID 2 232 MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID lt x gt 2 234 MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID2 2 233 MEASUrement REFLevel 2 227 MEASUrement SNAPShot 2 234 MEASUrement STATIstics 2 234 MEASUrement STATIstics MODE 2 234 MEASUrement STATIstics WEIghting 2 235 MEASUrement 2 205 MEASUrement GATing 2 206 MEASUrement IMMed 2 206 MEASUrement METHod 2 226 MESSage 2 236 MESSage BOX 2 236 MESSage CLEAR 2 237 MESSage SHOW 2 237 MESSage STATE 2 240 Miscellaneous Command Group 2 30 N NEWpass 2 240 0 OPC 2 241 PASS Word 2 242 PICTBridge DATEPrint 2 242 PICTBridge IMAGESize 2 244 PICTBridge PAPERSize 2 245 PICTBridge PAPERType 2 246 PICTBridge PRINTQual 2 247 PICTBridge DEFault 2 243 PICTBridge IDPrint 2 243 POWer HARMonics DISPlay SELect 2 249 POWer HARMonics DISPlay TY Pe 2 250 POWer HARMonics FREQRef 2 250 POWer HARMonics FREQRef FIXEDFREQValue 2 251 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Index POWer HARMonics IEC CLAss 2 252 POWer HARMonics IEC FILter 2 252 POWer HARMonics IEC FUNDamental 2 253 POWer HARMonics IEC GROUPing 2 253 POWer HARMonics IEC INPUTPOWer 2 254 POWer HARMonics IEC LINEFREQuency 2 254 POWer HARMonics IEC OBSPERiod 2 255 POWer HARMonics IEC POWERFA tor 2 255 POWer HARMonics MIL FUNDamental CALCmetho
260. RIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN ERRTYPE SYNC SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN IDENTIFIER VALUE XXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 PARALLEL VALUE XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 RS232C CONDITION TXSTART SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 RS232C RX DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 RS232C RX DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 RS232C TX DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 RS232C TX DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 SPI CONDITION 55 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 SPI DATA MISO VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH 1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 SPI DATA MOSI VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 SPI DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 CAN CONDITION SOF SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 CAN DATA DIRECTION NOCARE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 CAN DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 CAN DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 CAN DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 CAN FRAMETYPE DATA SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 CAN IDENTIFIER MODE STANDARD SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 CAN IDENTIFIER VALUE XXXXXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY CONDITION SOF SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT HIVALUE XXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT QUALIFIER EQUAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT VALUE XXXX
261. RIGger A PULSEWidth POLarity Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the polarity for a pulse trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A PULSEWidth POLarity NEGative POSitive SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A PULSEWidth POLarity POSITIVe places a mark only when the polarity of the pulse is positive NEGative places a mark only when the polarity of the pulse is negative SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth SOUrce Group Syntax 2 372 Sets or returns the source waveform for a pulse trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A PULSEWidth SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 REF SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth SOUrce 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CH lt x gt specifies one input channel as the edge source where lt x gt 1 2 3 or 4 MATH specifies the math waveform as the search source REF specifies the reference waveform as the search source SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth WHEn Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the condition for generating a pulse width search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A PULSEWi dth wHEn iLESSthan than EQual
262. RIGger A SETHold DATa THReshold 2 377 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold HOLDTime 2 378 SEARCH SEARCHK lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold SETTime 2 378 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold THReshold CH lt x gt 2 378 SEARCH SEARCHK lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold THReshold REF lt x gt 2 379 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold THReshold MATH MATH1 2 379 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TY Pe 2 381 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold lt gt 2 382 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold MATH 2 382 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold REF lt x gt 2 383 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall DELTatime 2 380 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall POLarity 2 380 Index 9 Index SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANSsition RISEFall SOUrce 2 380 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall WHEn 2 381 SEARCH 2 329 SELect 2 383 SELect BUS lt x gt 2 383 SELect CH lt x gt 2 384 SELect CONTROI 2 384 SELect D lt x gt 2 385 SELect MATH 1 2 386 SELect REF lt x gt 2 386 SET 2 387 SETUP lt x gt DATE 2 388 SETUP lt x gt LABEL 2 388 SETUP lt x gt TIME 2 389 SRE 2 389 Status and Error Command Group 2 47 STB 2 389 T TEKSecure 2 390 TIME 2 391 TOTaluptime 2 392 TRG 2 392 Trigger Command Group 2 48 TRIGger 2 392 TRIGger A BUS B 1 47 AUDio COND
263. RMat Group Syntax Arguments Examples DISplay GRAticule Group Syntax 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Display DISplay DIGital HEIght SMA11 MEDium LARge DISplay DIGital HEIght 5 sets the height to 40 MEDium sets the height to 20 LARge sets the height to 10 Sets or returns the display format Display DISplay FORMat YT XY DISplay FORMat YT sets the display to a voltage versus time format and is the default mode XY argument displays one waveform against another Selecting one source causes Its corresponding source to be implicitly selected producing a single trace from the two input waveforms DISPLAY FORMAT XY sets the display format to XY DISPLAY FORMAT might return DISPLAY FORMAT YT indicating the display format is YT Selects or queries the type of graticule the oscilloscope displays Display DISplay GRAticule CROSSHair FRAme FUL1 GRId DISplay GRAticule 2 159 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Arguments Examples CROSSHair specifies a frame and cross hairs FRAme specifies a frame only FUL specifies a frame a grid and cross hairs GRId specifies a frame and grid only DISPLAY GRATICULE FRAme sets the graticule type to display the frame only DISPLAY GRATICULE might return DISPLAY GRATICULE FULL indicating that all graticule elements are selected DiSplay INTENSITy Query Only Group
264. S POLARity BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA OUT MOSI SOUrce Sets or returns the SPI MOSI polarity Sets or returns the SPI MOSI source BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA SIZe Sets or returns the number of bits per word for the specified bus BUS B lt x gt SPI FRAMING Sets or returns the SPI framing type BUS B lt x gt SPI IDLETime Sets or returns the SPI bus idle time in seconds for the specified bus 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 15 Command Groups Table 2 15 Bus Commands cont Commands Description BUS B lt x gt SPI SELect SS POLARity Sets or returns the SPI SS polarity BUS B lt x gt SPI SELect SS SOUrce Sets or returns the SPI SS source BUS B lt x gt STATE Turns the specified bus on and off BUS B lt x gt TYPE Sets or returns the specified bus type BUS LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt Sets or returns the lower threshold for each channel BUS THReshold CH lt x gt Sets or returns the threshold for a channel BUS THReshold D lt x gt Sets or returns the threshold for a digital channel BUS UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt Sets or returns the upper threshold for each channel 2 16 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Calibration and Diagnostic Command Group Command Groups The Calibration and Diagnostic commands provide information about the current state of oscilloscope calibration They also initiate internal signal path calibration SPC or execute diagn
265. S B lt 1 4 gt AUDi0 CLOCk SOUrce CH1 ch4 or DO D15 specifies the clock source for the audio bus BUS B1 AUDIO CLOCK SOURCE D1 sets D1 as the clock source for the audio bus BUS B1 AUDIO CLOCK SOURCE might return BUS B1 AUDIO CLOCK SOURCE CH1 indicating that the clock source is set to CHI 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 85 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio DATa POLarity Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the data polarity for the AUDIO bus This command requires DPO4AUDIO application module Bus BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDi0 DATa POLarity NORMal INVERTed BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDi0 DATa POLarity NORMa specifies positive data polarity for the audio bus INVERTed specifies negative data polarity for the audio bus BUS B1 AUDIO DATA POLARITY INVERTed sets the data polarity to Inverted BUS B1 AUDIO DATA POLARITY might return BUS B1 AUDIO DATA POLARITY NORMAL indicating that the data polarity is set to Normal BUS B 1 4 AUDio DATa SIZe Conditions Group Syntax Arguments 2 86 Sets or returns the number of bits per word for the AUDIO bus NOTE The number of bits specified for this command must be always less than or equal to the number of bits per channel BUS B lt x gt AUDio CHANnel SIZe This command requires DPO4AUDIO application module Bus BUS B 1 4 AUDiO DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt BUS B 1 4 AUD
266. SB devices to communicate using IEEEA88 style messages This lets you run your GPIB software applications on USB hardware Before setting up the oscilloscope for remote communication using the electronic physical GPIB interface you should familiarize yourself with the following GPIB requirements A unique device address must be assigned to each device on the bus No two devices can share the same device address No than 15 devices be connected to any one line One device should be connected for every 6 feet 2 meters of cable used No than 65 feet 20 meters of cable should be used to connect devices to a bus At least two thirds of the devices on the network should be powered on while using the network Connect the devices on the network in a star or linear configuration Do not use loop or parallel configurations To function correctly your oscilloscope must have a unique device address The default setting for the GPIB configuration is GPIB Address 1 To change the GPIB address settings do the following 1 On the front panel push Utility Push Utility Page Select I O with the Multipurpose knob Push GPIB es 92 Enter the GPIB address on the side bezel menu using the multipurpose knob This will set the GPIB address on an attached TEK USB 488 Adapter The oscilloscope is now set up for bidirectional communication with your contro
267. SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa HIVALue Sets or returns the high binary data string SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa OFFSet Sets or returns the offset of the data string in bytes SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa QUALIifier Sets or returns the FLEXRAY data qualifier 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Search Commands cont Command Command Groups Description SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa S Ze Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa VALue Sets or returns the low binary data string SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray EOFTYPE Sets or returns the end of frame type SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray ERRTY PE Sets or returns the error type SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEID HIVALue Sets or returns the binary data string used for FLEXRAY frame ID high value SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEID QUALIifier Sets or returns the FLEXRAY frame ID qualifier SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray F RAMEID VALue Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for FLEXRAY frame low value SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEType
268. SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD REF2 0 00E 00 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH POLARITY POSITIVE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH WHEN LESSTHAN SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH WIDTH 8 00E 09 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A RUNT POLARITY POSITIVE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A RUNT WHEN OCCURS SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A RUNT WIDTH 8 00E 09 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK EDGE RISE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK SOURCE CH1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK THRESHOLD 0 00E 00 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A SETHOLD DATA SOURCE NONE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A SETHOLD DATA THRESHOLD 9 91E 37 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A SETHOLD HOLDTIME 8 00E 09 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A SETHOLD SETTIME 8 00E 09 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD CH1 0 00E 00 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD CH2 0 00E 00 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD MATH 0 00E 00 C 20 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Appendix Factory Defaults Table C 1 Default values cont Command Default value SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD REF 1 0 00E 00 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD REF2 0 00E 00 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A TRANSITION DELTATIME 8 00E 09 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A TRANSITION POLARITY POSITIVE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A TRANSITION WHEN SLOWER SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A TYPE EDGE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A UPPERTHRESHOLD CH1 8 00E 01 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A UPPERTHRESHOLD CH2 8 00E 01 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A U
269. SPLAY COLOR PALETTE NORMAL DISPLAY DIGITAL HEIGHT MEDIUM DISPLAY FORMAT YT DISPLAY GRATICULE FULL DISPLAY INTENSITY BACKLIGHT HIGH DISPLAY INTENSITY GRATICULE 75 DISPLAY INTENSITY WAVEFORM 35 DISPLAY PERSIS TENCE 0 00E 00 DISPLAY STYLE DOTSONLY 0 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 9 Appendix Factory Defaults Table C 1 Default values cont Command Default value HARDCOPY INKSAVER 1 HARDCOPY LAYOUT LANDSCAPE HARDCOPY PREVIEW 0 HEADER 1 HORIZONTAL DELAY MODE 1 HORIZONTAL DELAY TIME 0 00E 00 HORIZONTAL POSITION 50 HORIZONTAL RECORDLENGTH 10000 HORIZONTAL SCALE 4 00 06 LOCK NONE MATH DEFINE CH1 CH2 MATH HORIZONTAL POSITION 50 MATH HORIZONTAL SCALE 4 00E 06 MATH HORIZONTAL UNITS 5 MATH LABEL MATH SPECTRAL MAG DB MATH SPECTRAL WINDOW HANNING MATH TYPE DUAL MATH VERTICAL POSITION 0 00E 00 MATH VERTICAL SCALE 1 00 01 MATH VERTICAL UNITS V MATHVAR VAR1 0 00E 00 MATHVAR VAR2 0 00E 00 MEASUREMENT GATING SCREEN MEASUREMENT IMMED DELAY DIRECTION FORWARDS MEASUREMENT IMMED DELAY EDGE1 RISE MEASUREMENT IMMED DELAY EDGE2 RISE MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE1 CH1 MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE2 CH2 MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE PERIOD MEASUREMENT INDICATORS STATE OFF MEASUREMENT MEAS 1 DELAY DIRECTION FORWARDS MEASUREMENT MEAS1 DELAY EDGE1 RISE MEASUREMENT MEAS1 DELAY EDGE2 RISE MEASUREMENT MEAS1 SOURCE1 CH1 MEASUREMENT MEAS1 SOUR
270. STATE 0 DISPLAY COLOR PALETTE NORMAL DISPLAY STYLE DOTSONLY 0 DISPLAY PERSISTENCE 0 0000 CLOCK 1 GRATICULE FULL INTEnSITY WAVEFORM 30 GRATICULE 75 BACKLIGHT HIGH HARDCOPY INKSAVER OFF LAYOUT LANDSCAPE PREVIEW 0 SAVE IMAGE FILEFORMAT BMP SAVE WAVEFORM FILEFORMAT INTERNAL SAVE ASSIGN TYPE SETUP TRIGGER A MODE AUTO TYPE EDGE LE VEL 20 0000E 3 LEVEL CH1 20 0000E 3 CH2 0 0000 CH3 0 0000 CH4 0 0000 TRIGGER A UPPERTHRESHOLD CH1 1 4000 cH2 800 0000E 3 CH3 800 0000E 3 CH4 800 0000E 3 TRIGG ER A LOWERTHRESHOLD CH1 20 0000E 3 CH2 0 0000 CH3 0 0000 CH4 0 0000 TRIGGER A H OLDOFF TIME 20 0000E 9 TRIGGER A EDGE SOURCE CH1 COUPLING DC SLOPE RISE TRIGGER A LOGIC CLASS SETHOLD FUNCTION AND THRESHOLD CH1 20 0000E 3 CH2 0 0000 CH3 0 0 000 CH4 0 0000 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT CH1 X CH2 X CH3 X CH4 X CLOCK SOURCE NONE EDGE RISE TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT CH1 X CH2 X CH3 X CH4 X TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN TRUE WHEN LESSLIMIT 4 0000E 9 LIMIT 4 0000E 9 TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK SOURCE CH1 EDGE RISE THRESHOLD 20 0000E 3 TRIGGER A SETHOLD DATA SOURCE CH2 THRESHOLD 0 0000 TRIGGER A SETHOLD HOLDTIME 4 0000E 9 SETTIME 4 0000E 9 TRIGGER A PULSE CLASS TRANSITION TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH SOURCE CH1 POLARITY POSITIVE WHEN LESSTHAN WIDTH 4 0000 9 TRIGGER A RUNT SOURCE CH1 POLARITY POSITIVE WHEN OCCURS WIDTH 4 0000E 9 TRIGGER A TRANSITION SOURCE 1 MARK Moves to the next or previous reference mark on the waveform Re
271. STATE PASSED indicating that the probe has been degaussed AUXin PRObe FORCEDRange Group Syntax 2 80 Changes or returns the range on a Tek VPI probe attached to the Aux In input Vertical AUXin PRObe FORCEDRange lt NR3 gt AUXin PRObe FORCEDRange 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments NR3 is the probe range which is probe dependent AUXin PRObe GAIN Sets or returns the gain factor of a probe that is attached to the Aux In input Group X Vertical Syntax AUXin PRObe GAIN lt NR3 gt AUXin PRObe GAIN Arguments NR3 is the probe gain which is probe dependent Examples AUXin PROBE GAIN might return AUXin PROBE GAIN 100 0000E 3 indicating that the attached 10x probe delivers 0 1 V to the Aux In BNC for every 1 0 V applied to the probe input AUXin PRObe ID SERnumber Query Only Returns the serial number of the probe that is attached to the auxiliary input Group Vertical Syntax AUXin PRObe ID SERnumber AUXin PRObe ID TYPE Query Only Returns the type of probe that is attached to the auxiliary input Group Vertical Syntax AUXin PRObe ID TYPE AUXin PRObe RESistance Query Only Returns the resistance of the probe attached to the front panel Aux In connector 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 81 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Examples AUXin PRObe SIGnal Group
272. SUREMENT MEAS7 DELAY DIRECTION FORWARDS 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Appendix Factory Defaults Table C 1 Default values cont Command Default value MEASUREMENT MEAS7 DELAY EDGE1 RISE MEASUREMENT MEAS7 DELAY EDGE2 RISE MEASUREMENT MEAS7 SOURCE1 CH1 MEASUREMENT MEAS7 SOURCE2 CH2 MEASUREMENT MEAS7 STATE 0 MEASUREMENT MEAS7 TYPE PERIOD MEASUREMENT MEAS8 DELAY DIRECTION FORWARDS MEASUREMENT MEAS8 DELAY EDGE1 RISE MEASUREMENT MEAS8 DELAY EDGE2 RISE MEASUREMENT MEAS8 SOURCE1 CH1 MEASUREMENT MEAS8 SOURCE2 CH2 MEASUREMENT MEAS8 STATE 0 MEASUREMENT MEAS8 TYPE PERIOD MEASUREMENT METHOD AUTO MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE HIGH 0 00E 00 MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE LOW 0 00E 00 MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE MID1 0 00E 00 MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE MID2 0 00E 00 MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL METHOD PERCENT MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT HIGH 90 MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT LOW 10 MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT MID1 50 MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT MID2 50 MEASUREMENT STATISTICS MODE ALL MEASUREMENT STATISTICS WEIGHTING 32 MESSAGE BOX 271 82 292 114 MESSAGE SHOW MESSAGE STATE 0 REF1 HORIZONTAL DELAY TIME 0 00E 00 REF1 HORIZONTAL SCALE 4 00 06 REF1 VERTICAL POSITION 0 00E 00 REF1 VERTICAL SCALE 1 00E 01 REF2 HORIZONTAL DELAY TIME 0 00E 00 REF2 HORIZONTAL SCALE 4 00 06 REF2 VERTICAL POSITION 0 00E 00 REF2 VERTICAL SCALE
273. Sage SHOW MESSage CLEAR Arguments OFF or lt NR1 gt 0 removes the message window from the screen ON or lt 1 gt 0 displays the message window its contents on the screen NEWpass No Query Form This command changes the password that enables access to password protected data The PASSWord command must be successfully executed before using this command or an execution error will be generated Group Miscellaneous Syntax NEWpass lt QString gt Related Commands 2 240 PUD PASS Word 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual OPC Arguments Examples Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Qstring is the new password which can contain up to 16 characters NEWPASS mypassword creates a new password mypassword for accessing your protected data Generates the operation complete message in the Standard Event Status Register SESR when all pending commands that generate an OPC message are complete The OPC query places the ASCII character 1 into the output queue when all such OPC commands are complete The OPC response is not available to read until all pending operations finish See page 3 1 Status and Events The OPC command allows you to synchronize the operation of the oscilloscope with your application program See page 3 7 Synchronization Methods Table 2 41 Commands that Generate an OPC Message Operation Command Single sequen
274. Save and Recall Command 2 40 Search Command Group 2 41 Status and Error Command 2 2 47 Trigger Command 2 sme se e e ee eren 2 48 Vertical Command Group e EE e rene ie I rore EDT IRSE 2 58 Waveform Transfer Command 22 en 2 61 Zoom Command Group sues 2 67 Commands Listed in Alphabetical 2 2 69 Status e eie Emp EAE TRAESENT FEVER AT Te ten 3 1 cuo Me 3 1 nc 3 4 Event Handling Sequence cec sete ee en tenen wana REPRE e EE Lea desir eee ds 3 5 Synchronization 5 2 0 3 7 504000 DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual i Table of Contents Appendix Ay Character Pon ed S EE qe 1 Appendix B Reserved 8 2 2 2 EE Ea 1 Appendix C Factory Defaults 2 e ee hne eee eee eren C 1 Default Setups EEE S C 1 Appendix D Programming e 2 D 1 Index 80
275. Saver Related Commands SAVe IMAGe Arguments OFF or 0 generates images from the Inksaver palette ON or 1 generates 1mages using the Standard palette 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 325 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order SAVe IMAGe LAYout Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the layout to use for saved screen images Save and Recall SAVe IMAGe LAYout LANdScape PORTRait SAVe IMAGe LAYout LANdscape specifies that screen images are saved in landscape format PORTRait specifies that screen images are saved in portrait format SAVe SETUp No Query Form 2 326 Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Stores the state of the oscilloscope to a specified memory location You can later use the RCL command to restore the oscilloscope to this saved state Save and Recall SAVe SETUp lt file path gt lt NR1 gt RCL RECAI SETUp SAV lt file path gt is the target location for storing the setup file lt file path gt is a quoted string that defines the file name and path Input the file path using the form lt drive gt lt dir gt lt filename gt lt extension gt and one or lt dir gt s are optional If you do not specify them the oscilloscope will store the file in the current working directory lt filename gt stands for a filename Use of wildcard characters in filenames is not supported Filename extensions are not required but are highly recomme
276. Sets or retums the line frequency for the IEC standard POWer HARMonics IEC OBSPERiod Sets or returns the IEC observation period POWer HARMonics IEC POWERFACtor Sets or returns the power factor for IEC harmonics POWer HARMonics MIL FUNDamental CALCmethod POWer HARMonics MIL FUNDamental USER CURRent Sets or returns the measurement method for the MIL harmonics fundamental frequency Sets or returns RMS amperes for User calculation method POWer HARMonics MIL LINEFREQuency Sets or returns the line frequency for MIL STD 1399 harmonics tests POWer HARMonics MIL POWERLEVel Sets or returns the power level for MIL STD 1399 harmonics tests POWer HARMonics NR_HARMonics Sets of returns the number of harmonics a value in the range of 20 to 400 when the harmonics standard is NONe POWer HARMonics RESults HAR lt 1 400 gt FREQuency Returns the frequency of the harmonic 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 33 Command Groups 2 34 Table 2 28 Power Commands cont Command Description POWer HARMonics RESults HAR lt 1 400 gt IECMAX The IEC standard specifies harmonics measurements to be computed in windows of time with each time window being nominally 200 ms This returns the maximum of the RMS magnitude of the harmonic computed across successive 200 ms time windows within an observation period entered by the user POWer HARMonics RESults HAR lt 1 400
277. T Nr BLAckmanharris BM BMP BN Fmt BOTh BOX BTRIGger BURSt BUS BUSY BUSX BY BYPass BYT BYT Or Block BX C1 C2 C3 CALCmethod CALibrate CAN CANH CANL CARD CARea CATalog CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 1 CHannel CHecksum CHX CLASSALIMit CLASS CLEAR CLEARMenu CLEARSNapshot CLEar CLOCK CLOCk CM10BY15 CM13BY18 CM15BY21 CM18BY24 CM6BY8 CM7BY10 CM9BY13 CMEan COLUMN COMMAND CONDCALCmethod CONDition CONDuction CONFigure CONTRO1 CONTinue COUNT COUP ling CPU CR CRC CRCHeader CRCTrailer CREATE CRMS CROSSHair CURRENTSOurce CURRent CURSor CURSors CURVe CURrent CUSTom CwD CYCLECOunt D DO D1 D10 B 1 Appendix Reserved Words D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 DATA DATABits DATE DATEPrint DATa DATI DB DC DDT DECimal DEFLT DEFault DEFine DEGAUSS DEGrees DELEte DELIMiter DELTa DELTatime DELay DELayed DELete DELta DESE DESKew DESTination DESkew DHCPbootp DIAg DIFFerential DIGital DIR DIRection DISPlay DISabled DISplaymode DNS DOMAINname DOTsonly DPOMOodels B 2 DRAFT DUAL DUmp DYNAMi C Dx E ECL EDGE EEPROM EITher ENAble ENCdg END ENERGY ENERGYLOSS ENET ENGLish ENV ENVelope EOF EOFTYPE EQUal ERROR ERRTYPE ERRlog ETHERnet EVEN EVENTS EVENTtable EVMsg EVQty EXECute EXT EXTended EXTernal FACtor FACtory FAIL FAILures FALL FALSe FALling FASTPH
278. TA QUALIFIER EQUAL TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN ERRTYPE SYNC TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN IDENTIFIER VALUE XXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 PARALLEL VALUE TRIGGER A BUS B1 RS232C CONDITION TXSTART TRIGGER A BUS B1 RS232C RX DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 RS232C RX DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 RS232C TX DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 RS232C TX DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 SPI CONDITION 55 TRIGGER A BUS B1 SPI DATA IN VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 SPI DATA OUT VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 SPI DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 SPI DATA START 0 00E 00 TRIGGER A BUS B2 CAN CONDITION SOF TRIGGER A BUS B2 CAN DATA DIRECTION NOCARE TRIGGER A BUS B2 CAN DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL TRIGGER A BUS B2 CAN DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 CAN DATA START 0 00E 00 TRIGGER A BUS B2 CAN DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B2 CAN FRAMETYPE DATA TRIGGER A BUS B2 CAN IDENTIFIER MODE STANDARD TRIGGER A BUS B2 CAN IDENTIFIER VALUE TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY CONDITION SOF TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT HIVALUE XXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT QUALIFIER EQUAL TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT VALUE XXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY DATA HIVALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY DATA OFFSET 1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX 804000 and DPO40
279. TE 0 BUS B2 TYPE PARALLEL BUS B3 CAN BITRATE 500000 BUS B3 CAN PROBE CANH BUS B3 CAN SAMPLEPOINT 50 BUS B3 CAN SOURCE CH1 BUS B3 DISPLAY FORMAT HEXADECIMAL BUS B3 DISPLAY TYPE BUS BUS B3 FLEXRAY BITRATE 10000000 BUS B3 FLEXRAY CHANNEL A BUS B3 FLEXRAY SIGNAL BDIFFBP BUS B3 FLEXRAY SOURCE CH1 BUS B3 I2C ADDRESS RWINCLUDE 0 BUS B3 I2C CLOCK SOURCE CH1 BUS B3 I2C DATA SOURCE CH2 BUS B3 LABEL Parallel C 4 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Table C 1 Default values cont Appendix C Factory Defaults Command Default value BUS B3 LIN BITRATE 19200 BUS B3 LIN IDFORMAT NOPARITY BUS B3 LIN MAXBYTEDELIM 14 BUS B3 LIN POLARITY NORMAL BUS B3 LIN SAMPLEPOINT 50 BUS B3 LIN SOURCE CH1 BUS B3 LIN STANDARD V2X BUS B3 PARALLEL CLOCK EDGE RISING BUS B3 PARALLEL CLOCK ISCLOCKED NO BUS B3 PARALLEL CLOCK SOURCE CH1 BUS B3 PARALLEL WIDTH 16 BUS B3 POSITION 0 00E 00 BUS B3 RS232C BITRATE 9600 BUS B3 RS232C DATABITS 8 BUS B3 RS232C DELIMITER LF BUS B3 RS232C DISPLAYMODE FRAME BUS B3 RS232C PARITY NONE BUS B3 RS232C POLARITY NORMAL BUS B3 RS232C RX SOURCE OFF BUS B3 RS232C TX SOURCE CH1 BUS B3 SPI BITORDER MSB BUS B3 SPI CLOCK POLARITY RISE BUS B3 SPI CLOCK SOURCE CH1 BUS B3 SPEDATA IN POLARITY HIGH BUS B3 SPI DATA IN SOURCE OFF BUS B3 SPI DATA OUT POLARITY HIGH BUS B3 SPI DATA OUT SOURCE CH2 BUS B3 SPI DATA SIZE 8 BUS B3 SPI FRAMING
280. TION START SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 I2C DATA DIRECTION NOCARE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 12C DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 12C DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 LIN CONDITION SYNCFIELD SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 LIN DATA HIVALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 LIN DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 LIN DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 LIN DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 LIN ERRTYPE SYNC SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 LIN IDENTIFIER VALUE XXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 PARALLEL VALUE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 RS232C CONDITION TXSTART SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 RS232C RX DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 RS232C RX DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 RS232C TX DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 RS232C TX DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 SPI CONDITION 55 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 SPI DATA MISO VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 SPI DATA MOSI VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 SPI DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 CAN CONDITION SOF SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 CAN DATA DIRECTION NOCARE 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Appendix Factory Defaults Table C 1 Default values cont
281. TMC PRODUCTID HEXadecimal Returns the USBTMC product ID USBTMC SERIALnumber Returns the instrument serial number USBTMC VENDORID DECimal Returns the USBTMC vendor ID USBTMC VENDORID HEXadecimal Returns the USBTMC vendor ID VERBose Sets or returns the verbose state 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 31 Command Groups PictBridge Command Group Use the commands in the PictBridge Command Group to store printer settings Table 2 27 PictBridge Commands Command Description PICTBridge DATEPrint Enables or disables printing the date on the print output PICTBridge DEFault Sets the arguments for all PICTBridge commands to their default values PICTBridge IDPrint Enables or disables printing the oscilloscope model and serial number on the print output PICTBridge IMAGESize Sets or returns the image print size PICTBridge PAPERSize Sets the output print paper size PICTBridge PAPERType Sets or returns the paper type PICTBridge PRINTQual Sets or returns the output print quality USBDevice CONFigure Enables or disables the rear USB port for use with Pictbridge printers Power Command Group 2 32 Use the commands in the Power Command Group for power analysis The power measurements include Power quality m Switching loss B Safe operating area Harmonics m Ripple Modulation analysis This command group is available when the DPO4PWR application
282. TTER LEVel LF LFRej LIMITS LIMit LIN LINE LINEAr LINEFREQuency LINEPeriod LINear LIST LJ LOCk LOG LOGIC LOOP LOW LOwCurrent LOWLimit LOWVoltage LOWerthreshold LSB MAG MAGni vu MAIN MARK MARKSINCOLumn MASK MATH 1 MATH 1 MAX MAXAmps MAXSamplerate 1 5 MAXWatts MAXimum MEAN MEAS MEASUrement MEASX MEDium MEG MESSage METHod MID MID2 MIL MIN MINImum MINMax MISO MISOMOSI MIXed MKDir MM100BY150 MM54BY86 MODE MODULationanalysis MODe MODulation MOREEQual MORELimit MOREThan MOREthan MOSI MSB NAME 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual NANd NDUty NEGative NEWpass NEXT NO NOCARE NOISErej NONE NONe NOPARity NOR NORMAL NOTCOMPuted NR1 NR3 NR_HARMonics NR_PT NTIMES NTSC NULL NULLFRDynamic NULLFRStatic NUMACq NUMAVg NUMCYCles NUMENTries NUMERiC NUMEnv NUMHORZ NUMVERT NWIdth OBSPERiod OCCURS ODD OFF OFFSet ON ONCE ONFAIL OPTion OR OUT OUTrange OVERLoad OWNer PACKET PAL PAPERSize PAPERType PARal lel PARity PASS Appendix B Reserved Words PASSFai 1 PASSWord PATtern PAYLength PAYLoad PDUty PEAKdetect PERCent PERIod PERSistence PERCent PHASEangle PHASe PHAse PHOTO PICTBridge PING PK2Pk PLAIN PLOTTYPe PNG POHC POHCLIMit POHL POINTS POLARCord POLARity POLar POLarity PORTRait PORTUguese POSition POSitive POVershoot POWER POWERFACtor POWERFa
283. TY DISPLAY IRMS might return POWER QUALITY DISPLAY IRMS 0 indicating that the rms current display Is off POWer QUALity DISplay PHASEangle Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the display state for the phase angle readout This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer QUALity DISplay PHASEangle OFF ON 0 1 POWer QUALity DISplay PHASEangle OFF or 0 turns off the phase angle display ON or 1 turns on the phase angle display POWER QUALITY DISPLAY PHASEANGLE 1 turns on the phase angle display POWER QUALITY DISPLAY PHASEANGLE might return POWER QUALITY DISPLAY PHASEANGLE 0 indicating that the phase angle display is off POWer QUALity DISplay POWERFACtor Sets or returns the display state for the power factor readout 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 273 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer QUALity DISplay POWERFACtor OFF ON 0 1 POWer QUALity DISplay POWERFACtor OFF or 0 turns off the power factor display ON or turns on the power factor display POWER QUALITY DISPLAY POWERFACTOR 1 turns on the power factor display POWER QUALITY DISPLAY PONERFACTOR might return POWER QUALITY DISPLAY POWERFACTOR 0 indicating that the power factor display is off POWer QUALity
284. UDIO WORDSEL SOURCE CH1 sets as the word select source BUS B1 AUDIO WORDSEL SOURCE might return BUS B1 AUDIO WORDSEL SOURCE CH2 indicating that the word select source is set to CH2 BUS B lt x gt CAN BITRate Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Returns Examples Sets or returns the bit rate for CAN bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module Bus BUS B X CAN BITRate NR1 fRATE10K RATE20K RATE33K RATE37K RATE5OK RATE62K RATE83K RATE92K RATE100K RATE125K RATE250K RATE5OOK RATE800K RATELM BUS B lt x gt CAN BITRate NR1 is the bit rate The instrument supports bit rates at 10 bps intervals You can enter any positive integer and the instrument will coerce the value to the closest supported bit rate The query always returns the numerical bit rate value bus b1 can bitrate rate400k sets the CAN bit rate to 400K bus b1 can bitrate might return 05 1 RATE800K indicating the bit rate is set to 800K 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 91 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order BUS B lt x gt CAN PRObe Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the probing method to probe CAN bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module Bus BUS B lt x gt CAN PRObe CANH CANL RX TX DIFFerential BUS B lt x
285. UNEQual sets the LIN data qualifier to not equal LESSEQual sets the LIN data qualifier to less than or equal MOREEQual sets the LIN data qualifier to greater than or equal INrange sets the LIN data qualifier to in range OUTrange sets the LIN data qualifier to out of range TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA QUALIFIER OUTRANGE sets the data qualifier to out of range TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA QUALIFIER might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL indicating the data qualifier is set to equal TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa SiZe 2 418 Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for LIN trigger Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt TRIGger A BUS B x LIN DATa SIZe NRI is the size of the data string in bytes TRIGGER A BUS Bl LIN DATA SIZE 8 sets the data size to 8 bytes TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA SIZE might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA SIZE 1 indicating the data size is 1 byte 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa VALue Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for LIN trigger condition if trigger condition is ID or IDANDDATA Trigger TRIGger A BUS B x LIN DATa VALue lt QString gt TRIGger A BUS B x LIN DATa VALue lt QString gt is a quoted string that is the LIN
286. UNT POLarity 2 443 TRIGger A RUNT SOUrce 2 444 TRIGger A RUNT WIDth 2 445 TRIGger A SETHold CLOCK EDGE 2 446 TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk SOUrce 2 447 TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk THReshold 2 447 TRIGger A SETHold CLOCK 2 446 TRIGger A SETHold DATa SOUrce 2 448 TRIGger A SETHold DATa THReshold 2 449 TRIGger A SETHold DATa 2 448 TRIGger A SETHold HOLDTime 2 450 TRIGger A SETHold SETTime 2 450 TRIGger A SETHold THReshold CH lt x gt 2 451 TRIGger A SETHold THReshold D lt x gt 2 451 TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt 2 455 TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom LINEPeriod 2 457 TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom SCAN 2 457 TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom SYNCInterval 2 458 TRIGger A VIDeo CUS Tom FORMat 2 456 TRIGger A VIDeo HDtv FORMat 2 458 TRIGger A VIDeo HOLDOoff FIELD 2 459 TRIGger A VIDeo LINE 2 460 TRIGger A VIDeo POLarity 2 460 TRIGger A VIDeo SOUrce 2 461 TRIGger A VIDeo S TANdard 2 461 TRIGger A VIDeo SYNC FIELD 2 462 TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall DELTatime 2 452 TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall POLarity 2 453 TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall SOUrce 2 453 TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall WHEn 2 454 TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall 2 452 TRIGger B EDGE COUPling 2 464 TRIGger B EDGE SLOpe 2 465 TRIGger B EDGE SOUrce 2 465 TRIGger B EVENTS COUNt 2 466 TRIGger B LEVel CH lt x gt 2 467 TRIGger B LEVel D lt x gt 2 468 Index 11 Index TRIGger B LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt 2 468 TR
287. Verbose state to false which returns minimum length keywords for applicable setting queries ON sets the Verbose state to true which returns full length keywords for applicable setting queries lt NR1 gt a 0 returns minimum length keywords for applicable setting queries any other value returns full length keywords VERBOSE ON enables the Verbose state VERBOSE might return VERB 0 indicating that the Verbose state is disabled Prevents the oscilloscope from executing further commands or queries until all pending commands that generate an OPC message are complete This command allows you to synchronize the operation of the oscilloscope with your application program See page 3 7 Synchronization Methods Status and Error WAT BUSY OPC WAI prevents the oscilloscope from executing any further commands or queries until all pending commands that generate an OPC message are complete WAVFrm Query Only Group Syntax Returns WFMOutpre and CURVe data for the waveform as specified by the DATA SOUrce command This command is equivalent to sending both WFMoOutpre and CURVe with the additional provision that the response to WAVFrm is guaranteed to provide a synchronized preamble and curve The source waveform as specified by DATA SOURCE must be active or the query will not return any data and will generate an error indicator Waveform Transfer WAVFrm 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 477
288. WLoss TOFF POWER MAX Returns the minimum Toff energy switching loss calculation Returns the maximum Toff power switching loss calculation POWer SWLoss TOFF POWER MEAN Returns the mean Toff power switching loss calculation POWer SWLoss TOFF POWER MIN Returns the minimum Toff power switching loss calculation POWer SWLoss TON ENERGY MAX Returns the maximum Ton energy switching loss calculation POWer SWLoss TON ENERGY MEAN Returns the mean Ton energy switching loss calculation POWer SWLoss TON ENERGY MIN Returns the minimum Ton energy switching loss calculation POWer SWLoss TON POWER MAX Returns the maximum Ton power switching loss calculation POWer SWLoss TON POWER MEAN Returns the mean Ton power switching loss calculation POWer SWLoss TON POWER MIN Returns the minimum Ton power switching loss calculation POWer SWLoss TOTal ENERGY MAX Returns the maximum total energy switching loss calculation POWer SWLoss TOTal ENERGY MEAN Returns the mean total energy switching loss calculation POWer SWLoss TOTal ENERGY MIN Returns the minimum total energy switching loss calculation 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 39 Command Groups Table 2 28 Power Commands cont Command Description POWer SWLoss TOTal POWER MAX Returns the maximum total power switching loss calculation POWer SWLoss TOTal POWER MEAN Returns the
289. Watts 2 293 POWer SOA MASK NR PT 2 293 POWer SOA MASK STATe 2 294 POWer SOA MASK STOPOnviol 2 294 POWer SOA RESult FAILures QTY 2 295 POWer SOA RESult NUMACq 2 296 POWer SOA RESult STATe 2 296 POWer STATIstics MODE 2 297 POWer STATIstics WEIghting 2 297 POWer SWLoss CONDCALCmethod 2 298 POWer SWLoss CONDuction ENERGY MAX 2 298 POWer SWLoss CONDuction ENERGY MEAN 2 299 POWer SWLoss CONDuction ENERGY MIN 2 299 POWer SWLoss CONDuction POWER MAX 2 300 POWer SWLoss CONDuction POWER MEAN 2 300 POWer SWLoss CONDuction POWER MIN 2 300 POWer SWLoss DISplay 2 301 POWer SWLoss GATe POLarity 2 301 POWer SWLoss GATe TURNON 2 302 POWer SWLoss NUMCYCles 2 302 POWer SWLoss REFLevel ABSolute GATEMid 2 303 POWer SWLoss REFLevel A BSolute LOWCurrent 2 304 POWer SWLoss REFLevel A BSolute LOWVoltage 2 304 POWer SWLoss REFLevel PERCent GATEMid 2 305 POWer SWLoss REFLevel PERCent LOWCurrent 2 305 POWer SWLoss REFLevel PERCent LOWVoltage 2 306 POWer SWLoss TOFF ENERGY MA X 2 306 POWer SWLoss TOFF ENERGY MEAN 2 307 POWer SWLoss TOFF ENERGY MIN 2 307 POWer SWLoss TOFF POWER MAX 2 308 POWer SWLoss TOFF POWER MEAN 2 308 POWer SWLoss TOFF POWER MIN 2 308 POWer SWLoss TON ENERGY MAX 2 309 POWer SWLoss TON ENERGY MEAN 2 309 POWer SWLoss TON ENERGY MIN 2 309 POWer SWLoss ITON POWER MAX 2 310 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual POWer SWLoss TON POWER MEAN 2 31
290. X TRIGger A BUS B x CAN DATa VALue SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B x CAN DATa QUALifier bin is the data in binary format SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN FRAMEtype Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the CAN Frame Type to be used if the trigger search condition is Frame Type SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module Search SEARCH SEARCH X TRIGger A BUS lt gt CAN FRAMEtype DATA REMote ERRor OVERLoad SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS lt gt CAN FRAMEtype DATA specifies a data frame REMote specifies a remote frame 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 337 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order ERRor specifies an error frame OVERLoad specifies an overload frame SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess MODe Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the CAN addressing mode for a trigger search to a standard or extended format SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess MODe STandard ExXTended SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess MODe STandard specifies an 11 bit
291. XRAY header paylength to 1100101 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER PAYLENGTH might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER PAYLENGTH XXXXXXX indicating the FLEXRAY header paylength is don t care TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt l2C ADDRess MODe Sets or returns the I2C address mode to 7 or 10 bit Applies to bus lt x gt where x is the bus number Conditions This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess MODe ADDR7 ADDR10 TRIGger A BUS B x I2C ADDRess MODe Arguments ADDR7 specifies the 7 bit C address mode ADDR10 specifies the 10 bit I2C address mode Examples TRIGGER A BUS B1 I2C ADDRESS MODE ADDR10 sets the I2C address mode to 10 bit TRIGger A BUS B x l2C ADDRess TYPe Sets or returns the DC address type The only supported address type is USER Applies to bus x where x is the bus number Conditions This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A BUS B x I2C ADDRess TYPe icENeralcall STARtbyte HSmode EEPROM USER TRIGger A BUS B x I2C ADDRess TYPe Arguments _ GENeralcall specifies a general call address STARtbyte specifies a start byte address 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 413 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order HSmode specifies a high speed mode address EEPROM specifies a
292. XX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY DATA HIVALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY DATA OFFSET 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX C 14 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Table C 1 Default values cont Appendix C Factory Defaults Command Default value SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY EOFTYPE STATIC SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY ERRTYPE CRCHEADER SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY FRAMEID HIVALUE XXXXXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY FRAMEID QUALIFIER EQUAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY FRAMEID VALUE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY FRAMETYPE NORMAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY HEADER CRC SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY HEADER CYCLECOUNT XXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY HEADER FRAMEID SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY HEADER INDBITS XXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY HEADER PAYLENGTH XXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 I2C ADDRESS MODE ADDR7 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 I2C ADDRESS TYPE USER SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 I2C ADDRESS VALUE XXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 12C CONDI
293. XXX indicating the frame id value is don t care 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 409 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEType Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the frame type for FLEXRAY Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEType NORMa PAYLoad NULL SYNC STARTup TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEType NORMa specifies the normal frame type PAYLoad specifies the payload frame type NULL specifies the null frame type SYNC specifies the sync frame type STARTUp specifies the startup frame type TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMETYPE PAYLOAD sets the frame type to payload TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMETYPE might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMETYPE NORMAL indicating the frame type is set to normal TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER CRC Group Syntax Arguments Examples 2 410 Sets or returns the CRC portion of the binary header string to be used for FLEXRAY trigger Trigger TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray HEADER CRC lt QString gt TRIGger lt gt HEADER CRC lt QString gt is quoted string that is the CRC portion of the binary header string TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER CRC 11001100101 sets the CRC portion of the binary header string to 11001100101 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabe
294. Xray CHannel Sets or returns the FLEXRAY ID format BUS B x FLEXray SIGnal Sets or returns the FLEXRAY standard BUS B lt x gt FLEXray SOUrce Sets or returns the FLEXRAY data source BUS B lt x gt 12C ADDRess RWINClude Sets and returns whether the read write bit is included in the address BUS B lt x gt I2C CLOCK SCLK SOUrce Sets or returns the 2 SCLK source BUS B lt x gt I2C DATA SDATA SOUrce Sets or returns the 2 SDATA source BUS B lt x gt LABel Sets or returns the waveform label for the specified bus BUS B lt x gt LIN BITRate Sets or returns the bit rate for LIN BUS B lt x gt LIN IDFORmat Sets or returns the LIN ID format BUS B lt x gt LIN POLARity Sets or returns the LIN polarity BUS B lt x gt LIN SAMPLEpoint Sets or returns the sample point in at which to sample during each bit period 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Table 2 15 Bus Commands cont Command Groups Commands Description BUS B lt x gt LIN SOUrce Sets or returns the LIN data source BUS B lt x gt LIN STANDard Sets or returns the LIN standard BUS B lt x gt PARallel BIT lt x gt SOUrce Sets or returns the Parallel bit source for the specified bus BUS B lt x gt PARallel CLOCK EDGE Sets or returns the Parallel clock edge for the specified bus BUS B lt x gt PARallel CLOCK ISCLOCKed Sets or returns the Parallel bus clock function for the specified bus BUS
295. Y MEAN 1 indicating that the mean conduction energy switching loss calculation is set to 1 J POWer SWLoss CONDuction ENERGY MIN Query Only Returns the minimum conduction energy for the switching loss calculation Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Group Power Syntax POWer SWLoss CONDuction ENERGY MIN Examples POWER SWLOSS CONDUCTION ENERGY MIN might return POWER SWLOSS CONDUCTION ENERGY MIN 1 indicating that the minimum conduction energy switching loss calculation is set to 1 J 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 299 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order POWer SWLoss CONDuction POWER MAX Query Only Returns the maximum conduction power for the switching loss calculation Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Group Power Syntax Power SwLoss CONDuction POWER MAX Examples POWER SWLOSS CONDUCTION POWER MAX might return POWER SWLOSS CONDUCTION POWER MAX 1 indicating that the maximum conduction power switching loss calculation is set to 1 W POWer SWLoss CONDuction POWER MEAN Query Only Returns the mean conduction power for the switching loss calculation Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Group Power Syntax X POWer SWLoss CONDuction POWER MEAN Examples POWER SWLOSS CONDUCTION POWER MEAN might return POWER SWLOSS CONDUCTION POWER MEAN 1 indicating that the mean conduction po
296. YMIN lt NR3 gt POWer SOA LOG YMIN lt NR3 gt is the YMIN value used for log SOA calculations POWER SOA LOG YMIN 1 sets the YMIN value to 1 0000 POWER SOA LOG YMIN might return POWER SOA LOG YMIN 100 0000E 3 indicating that the Y MIN value for log plot type 1s set to 100 0000E 3 POWer SOA MASK DEFine Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the X Volts and Y Amps coordinates of the current SOA mask You can specify the number of points from 2 to 10 minimum being 2 Successive X values must be gt the preceding X values The number of XY points sent determines the value of NR PT This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer SOA MASK DEFine lt NR3 gt POWer SOA MASK DEFine NR3 represents SOA mask coordinates 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 29 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Examples POWER SOA MASK DEFINE 10 specifies the SOA mask coordinates as 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 30 0000 25 0000 30 0000 300 0000 2 5000 300 0000 2 POWER SOA MASK DEFINE might return POWER SOA MASK DEFINE 0 0E 0 30 0000 25 0000 30 0000 300 0000 2 5000 300 0000 0 0E 0 indicating that the SOA mask coordinates are set to 0 0 0 30 0000 25 0000 30 0000 300 0000 2 5000 300 0000 0 0 0 POWer SOA MASK MAXAmps Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the maximum current applied to
297. ZOOM1 STATE 1 indicating that Zooml is on 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 499 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order 2 500 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Status and Events The oscilloscope provides a status and event reporting system for the Ethernet GPIB with the TEK USB 488 Adapter and USB interfaces This system informs you of certain significant events that occur within the oscilloscope The oscilloscope status handling system consists of five 8 bit registers and two queues for each interface The remaining Status subtopics describe these registers and components They also explain how the event handling system operates Registers Overview The registers in the event handling system fall into two functional groups Status Registers contain information about the status of the oscilloscope They include the Standard Event Status Register SESR Enable Registers determine whether selected types of events are reported to the Status Registers and the Event Queue They include the Device Event Status Enable Register DESER the Event Status Enable Register ESER and the Service Request Enable Register SRER Status Registers Standard Event Status Register SESR and the Status Byte Register SBR record certain types of events that may occur while the oscilloscope is in use IEEE Std 488 2 1987 defines these registers Each bit in a Status Register records a particular type of even
298. abilities are either turned on or off Calibration and Diagnostic DIAg STATE EXECute ABORt EXECute starts diagnostics ABORt stops diagnostics at the end of the current loop 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 157 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Examples DiSplay Query Only Group Syntax DISplay CLOCk Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples DiSplay DIGital HElght 2 158 DIAG STATE EXECute starts diagnostics Returns the current display settings Display DISplay Sets or returns whether the oscilloscope displays the date and time The query form of this command returns an ON 1 or an OFF 0 Display DISplay CLOCk ON OFF lt NR1 gt DISplay CLOCk DATE TIME ON enables the display of date and time OFF disables the display of date and time lt NR1 gt 0 disables the display of date and time any other value enables the display of date and time DISPLAY CLOCK ON enables display of date and time DISPLAY CLOCK might return DISPLAY CLOCK 1 indicating that the display of date and time is currently enabled Sets or returns the number of available digital waveform position slots NOTE If the number of live digital channels exceeds the number of slots their height is reduced to a smaller size allowing all digital channels to be displayed 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Arguments DISplay FO
299. ace a mark for digital channel lt x gt SEARCH SEARCH lt sx gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut MATH Sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for the logic search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut REF lt x gt SEARCH SEARCH lt sx gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut CH lt x gt Sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for the logic search Sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for the logic search SEARCH SEARCH lt sx gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut D lt x gt Sets or returns the criteria for a pattern search to determine where to place a mark for digital channel lt x gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut MATH Sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for the logic search SEARCH SEARCH lt sx gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut REF lt x gt Sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for the logic search SEARCH SEARCH lt sx gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn Sets or retums the condition for generating a logic pattern search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn LESSLimit Sets or returns the maximum time that the selected pattern may be true SEARCH SEARCH lt sx gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn MORELimit Sets or returns the minimum time that the selected pattern may be true SEARCH SEARCH lt sx gt TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold CH lt x gt Sets or returns the channel threshold level for an logic search
300. agniVu digital acquisition Group Horizontal Syntax HORizontal DIGital SAMPLERate MAGni vu HORizontal DIGital SAMPLERate MAIN Query Only Returns the sample rate of the main digital acquisition Group Horizontal Syntax X HORizontal DIGital SAMPLERate MAIN HORizontal POSition Sets or returns the horizontal position in percent that is used when delay if off If Horizontal Delay Mode is turned off this command is equivalent to adjusting the HORIZONTAL POSITION knob on the front panel When Horizontal Delay 2 188 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Mode is on this command stores a new horizontal position that is used when Horizontal Delay Mode is turned off Horizontal HORizontal POSition NR3 HORizontal POSition HORizontal DELay TIMe NR3 is the horizontal position expressed as the percentage of the waveform acquired before the trigger HORIZONTAL POSITION 50 sets the horizontal position to 5096 HORIZONTAL POSITION might return HORIZONTAL POSITION 100 indicating that the horizontal position 18 set to 100 HORizontal PREViewstate Query Only Group Syntax Returns Returns a boolean value to indicate whether the display system is in the preview state Horizontal HORi zontal PREViewstate lt NR1 gt if the display system is in the preview state lt NR1 g
301. al Appendix Factory Defaults Table C 1 Default values cont Command Default value TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD D15 14 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD D2 14 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD D3 14 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD D4 14 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD D5 14 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD D6 14 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD D7 14 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD D8 14 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD D9 14 TRIGGER A TRANSITION DELTATIME 8 00E 09 TRIGGER A TRANSITION POLARITY POSITIVE TRIGGER A TRANSITION WHEN SLOWER EDGE TRIGGER A UPPERTHRESHOLD CH1 8 00E 01 TRIGGER A UPPERTHRESHOLD CH2 8 00E 01 TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM FORMAT PROGRESSIVE TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM LINEPERIOD 6 36E 05 TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM SYNCINTERVAL 4 72E 06 TRIGGER A VIDEO HOLDOFF FIELD 0 00E 00 TRIGGER A VIDEO LINE 1 TRIGGER A VIDEO POLARITY POSITIVE TRIGGER A VIDEO STANDARD NTSC TRIGGER A VIDEO SYNC ALLLINES TRIGGER B BY TIME TRIGGER B EDGE COUPLING DC TRIGGER B EDGE SLOPE RISE TRIGGER B EDGE SOURCE CH1 TRIGGER B EVENTS COUNT 1 TRIGGER B LEVEL 0 00E 00 TRIGGER B LEVEL CH1 0 00E 00 TRIGGER B LEVEL CH2 0 00E 00 TRIGGER B LEVEL DO 14 TRIGGER B LEVEL D1 14 TRIGGER B LEVEL D10 1 4 TRIGGER B LEVEL D11 1 4 TRIGGER B LEVEL D12 1 4 TRIGGER B LEVEL D13 1 4 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual C 31 Appendix Factory Defaults Table C 1
302. al SCAle Sets or returns the vertical scale of the currently selected math type MATH 1 VERTical UNIts Returns the math waveform vertical units MATH 1 HORizontal POSition Sets or returns the math horizontal display position for FFT or non live math reference waveforms MATH 1 TYPe Sets or returns the math waveform mode type 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Command Groups Table 2 24 Math Commands cont Command Description MATHVAR Returns all numerical values used within math expressions MATHVAR VAR lt x gt Sets or returns numerical values you can use within math expressions Measurement Command Group Use the commands in the Measurement Command Group to control the automated measurement system Up to four automated measurements can be displayed on the screen In the commands these measurement readouts are named MEAS lt x gt where lt x gt is the measurement number In addition to the four displayed measurements the measurement commands let you specify an additional measurement IMMed The immediate measurement has no front panel equivalent Immediate measurements are never displayed Because they are computed only when needed immediate measurements slow the waveform update rate less than displayed measurements Whether you use displayed or immediate measurements use the VALue query to obtain measurement results Measurement commands can set and query measurement p
303. al acquisition window moves the level at the vertical center of the acquisition window for the specified channel Visualize offset as scrolling the acquisition window towards the top of a large signal for increased offset values and scrolling towards the bottom for decreased offset values The resolution of the vertical window sets the offset increment for this control Offset adjusts only the vertical center of the acquisition window for channel waveforms to help determine what data is acquired The oscilloscope always displays the input signal minus the offset value The channel offset range depends on the vertical scale factor Table 2 36 Channel Offset Range Offset range ViDiv Setting 1 Input 50 Input 1 mV div 50 mV div t 1V 1V 50 5 mV div 99 5 mV div 0 5 V 0 5 V 100 mV div 500 mV div 10 V 45V 505 mV div 995 mV div 5 V 45V 504000 DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 121 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples CH lt x gt POSition 2 122 Group Table 2 36 Channel Offset Range cont Offset range VIDiv Setting 1 MQ Input 50 Input 1 Vidiv 5 Vidiv 100 V 45V 1 5 05 V div 10 V div 50 V N A 1 1 50 Q input 1 V div is the maximum setting NOTE The above table describes oscilloscope behavior only when no probe is attached and when the external attenuation factor is 1 0
304. alues depends on the probe attached and any other external factors you have specified For reference and math waveforms this setting controls the display only graphically scaling these waveforms and having no affect on the acquisition hardware Vertical 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 129 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples CH lt x gt TERmination 2 130 Group Syntax Arguments Examples CH lt x gt SCAle lt NR3 gt CH lt x gt SCAle CH lt x gt OFFSet CH lt x gt POSition REF lt x gt VERTical SCAle MATH 1 VERTical SCAle lt NR3 gt is the vertical channel scale in units per division The value entered here is truncated to three significant digits CH4 SCALE 100E 03 sets the channel 4 scale to 100 mV per division CH2 SCALE might return CH2 SCALE 1 0000 indicating that the current scale setting of channel 2 is 1 V per division Sets the connected disconnected status of a 50 resistor which may be connected between the specified channel s coupled input and oscilloscope ground The channel is specified by lt x gt There is also a corresponding query that requests the termination parameter and translates this enumeration into one of the two float values Vertical CH x TERmination FIFty MEG lt NR3 gt CH x TERmination FIFty sets the channel x input resistance to 50 MEG sets the channel x input resist
305. an B x RS232C CONDition RS 232 trigger SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS Sets or returns the length of the data string lt gt 5232 512 for an RS 232 trigger if the trigger condition is RX SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt R 232C RX DATa VALue Sets or returns the binary data string for an RS 232 trigger if the condition involves RX SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS lt gt 5232 512 Sets or returns the length of the data string to be used for an RS 232 Trigger if the Trigger condition is TX SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa VALue Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for an RS 232 trigger if the condition involves RX SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI CONDition Sets or returns the search condition for SPI search SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa MISO IN VALue Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for SPI search if the search condition is MISO or MISOMOSI SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa MOSI OUT VALue Sets or returns the binary data string for an SPI search if the search condition is MISO or MISOMOSI SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa SlZe Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for SPI search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS SOUrce Sets or re
306. ance to 1 lt NR3 gt specifies the channel lt x gt input resistance numerically CH4 TERMINATION 50 0E 0 establishes 50 impedance on channel 1 2 TERMINATION might return CH2 TERMINATION 50 0E 0 indicating that channel 2 is set to 50 impedance 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual CH lt x gt YUNits Group Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Sets or returns the units for the channel specified by lt x gt where x is the channel number String arguments are case insensitive and any unsupported units will generate an error Supported units are Hz A A A V A W A s AA AW AdB As B Hz IRE S s V V A V V V W V dB V s VV VW VdB Volts Vs W W A W V W W W dB W s WA WV WW WdB Ws dB dB A dB V dB W dB dB dBA dBV dBW dBdB day degrees div hr min ohms percent s Vertical CH x YUNits lt QString gt CH x YUNits QString is a string of text surrounded by quotes specifying the supported units CLEARMenu No Query Form Group Syntax CLS No Query Form Clears the current menu from the display This command is equivalent to pressing the front panel Menu off Miscellaneous CLEARMenu Clears the following Event Queue Standard Event Status Register m Status Byte Register except the bit If the CLS command immediately follows an lt EOI gt the Output Queue and MAV bit Status
307. and affects the results of delay measurements NOTE this command affects the associated reference level parameter for all MEASurements IMMed and the four periodic measurements Measurement MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID2 lt NR3 gt MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID2 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 229 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Related Commands Arguments Examples MEASUrement REFLevel METHod lt NR3 gt is the mid reference level in volts The default is 0 0 V MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE MID2 0 5 sets the mid reference level for the delay waveform to 0 5 V MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE MID2 might return MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE MID2 0 5000 00 indicating that the absolute mid2 reference level is set to 0 5 V MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the mid reference level for channel lt x gt where x is the measurement channel Measurement MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID lt x gt lt NR3 gt MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID lt x gt lt NR3 gt is the mid reference level in volts MEASUrement REFLevel METHod Group Syntax Arguments 2 230 Specifies or returns the reference level units used for measurement calculations NOTE this command affects the associated reference level parameter for all MEASurements IMMed and the eight periodic measurements To change the
308. and is always valid Examples PASSWORD 22 enables the PUD and NEWpass set commands PASSWORD disables the PUB and NEWpass set commands You can still use the query version of PUD PICTBridge DATEPrint Enables or disables printing the date on the print output Group PictBridge Syntax PICTBridge DATEPrint DEFLT OFF ON Arguments DEFLT is the default setting of the printer ON enables the date print on the print output OFF disables the date print on the print output 2 242 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order PICTBRIDGE DATEPRINT ON enables the date print on the print output PICTBRIDGE DATEPRINT might return PICTBRIDGE DATEPRINT DEFLT indicating the default setting of the printer PICTBridge DEFault No Query Form Group Syntax Examples PICTBridge IDPrint Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets the arguments for all PictBridge commands to their default values The default values are same as printer default settings PictBridge PICTBridge DEFault PICTBRIDGE DEFAULT sets all PICTBridge commands to their default values Enables or disables printing the oscilloscope model and serial number on the print output PictBridge PICTBridge IDPrint DEFLT OFF ON DEFLT is the default setting of the printer ON enables the oscilloscope model and serial number print on the print output OFF disable
309. and read from the resulting list Group Vertical Syntax CH x PRObe MODel String CH x PRObe MODe1 CH lt x gt PRObe PROPDELay Sets or returns the propagation delay for the probe connected to the specified channel Group Vertical Syntax CH lt x gt PRObe PROPDELay lt NR3 gt CH x PRObe PROPDELay 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 127 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Arguments lt NR3 gt specifies the propagation time delay for the connected probe Examples CH1 PROBE PROPDELAY 100E 12 sets the propagation delay to 100 ps CH1 PROBE PROPDELAY might return CHI PROBE PROPDELAY 1 1E 9 indicating that the CH1 propagation delay is set to 1 1 ns CH lt x gt PRObe RECDESkew Query Only Returns the recommended deskew for the probe connected to the specified channel Group Vertical Syntax CH lt x gt PRObe RECDESkew CH lt x gt PRObe RESistance Query Only Returns the resistance factor of the probe attached to channel lt x gt where x is the channel number Group X Vertical Syntax lt gt PRObe RESistance Examples CH2 PRObe RESistance might return CH2 PROBE RESISTANCE 10 0000E 6 indicating that the input resistance of the probe attached to Channel 2 is 1 NOTE This query will return 0 0 if no probe is attached or the attached probe does not report the input resistance CH x PRObe SIGnal Sets or returns the inp
310. and returns NA the harmonic limit does not apply This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer HARMonics RESults IEC HARM5ALTernate PASS FAIL NA POWER HARMONICS RESULTS LEC HARMSALTERNATE might return POWER HARMONICS RESULTS HARMSALTERNATE PASS indicating the test result POWer HARMonics RESults IEC POHC Query Only Conditions Group Syntax Examples 2 264 Returns the IEC POHC measurement This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer HARMonics RESults IEC POHC POWER HARMONICS RESULTS might return POWER HARMONICS RESULTS 0 5 indicating that the IEC POHC is set to 0 5 A 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order POWer HARMonics RESults IEC POHL Query Only Returns the IEC POHL measurement Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Group Power Syntax POWer HARMonics RESults IEC POHL Examples POWER HARMONICS RESULTS POHL might return POWER HARMONICS RESULTS 0 5 indicating that the IEC POHL is set to 0 5 A POWer HARMonics RESults IEC POWer Query Only Returns the IEC input power that is used to calculate limits Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Group Power Syntax X POWer HARMonics RESults IEC POWer Examples POWER HARMONICS RESULTS POWER might r
311. ands Listed Alphabetical Order Examples SIGNEDDECimal specifies a signed decimal data display BUS B1 AUDIO DISPLAY FORMAT BINARY sets the display format to Binary BUS B1 AUDIO DISPLAY FORMAT might return BUS B1 AUDIO DISPLAY FORMAT SIGNEDDECIMAL indicating that the display format 1s set to signed decimal BUS B 1 4 AUDio FRAME SIZe Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the number of channels in each frame for the AUDIO bus NOTE This command is applicable only for TDM audio bus type BUS B x AUDTO TYPe TDM This command requires DPO4AUDIO application module Bus BUS B 1 4 AUDiO FRAME SIZe NR1 BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUD10 FRAME SIZe NR1 specifies the number of channels in each frame BUS B1 AUDIO FRAME SIZE 2 sets the frame size to 2 BUS B1 AUDIO FRAME SIZE might return BUS B1 AUDIO FRAME SIZE 8 indicating that the number of channels in each frame is set to 8 BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio FRAMESync POLarity Conditions Group Syntax 2 88 Sets or returns the frame sync polarity for the AUDIO bus This command requires DPO4AUDIO application module Bus BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDi0 FRAMESync POLarity FALL RISe BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUD10 FRAMESync POLarity 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order FALL specifies the falling edge as the frame sync polarity RISe
312. ands for a filename the use of wildcard characters in filenames is not supported Filename extensions are not required but highly recommended RECALL WAVEFORM 00000 15 recalls the waveform stored in the file named TEK00000 ISF from the current directory for waveforms to the reference location 1 REF lt x gt Query Only Group Syntax 2 318 Returns reference waveform data for the channel specified by lt x gt where x is the reference channel number Vertical REF lt x gt 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order REF lt x gt DATE Query Only Returns the date that reference waveform data for channel lt x gt was copied into the internal reference memory where x is the reference channel number Group Vertical Syntax REF lt x gt DATE REF lt x gt HORizontal DELay TiMe Sets or returns the horizontal delay time for reference waveform lt x gt where x is the reference channel number The delay time is expressed in seconds and is limited to 5 times the reference horizontal scale Group Vertical Syntax REF x HORizontal DELay TIMe lt NR3 gt REF lt x gt HORizontal DELay TIMe Arguments NR3 is the delay time in seconds Examples REF2 HORIZONTAL DELAY TIME 4 0 6 sets the horizontal delay time for the REF2 waveform to 4 us REF lt x gt HORizontal SCAle Sets or returns the horizontal scale for reference wavefo
313. aneous DDT lt Block gt lt QString gt DDT ALlas TRG lt Block gt is a complete sequence of program messages The messages can contain only valid commands that must be separated by semicolons and must follow all rules for concatenating commands The sequence must be less than or equal to 80 characters The format of this argument is always returned as a query lt QString gt is a complete sequence of program messages The messages can contain only valid commands that must be separated by semicolons and must follow all rules for concatenating commands The sequence must be less than or equal to 80 characters DDT OACQUIRE STATE RUN specifies that the acquisition system will be started each time a command is sent Sets or returns the bits in the Device Event Status Enable Register DESER The DESER is the mask that determines whether events are reported to the Standard Event Status Register SESR and entered into the Event Queue For a detailed discussion of the use of these registers see Registers Status and Error 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DESE lt NR1 gt DESE CLS ESE ESR EVENT EVMsg SRE STB NRI sets the binary bits of the DESER according to this value which ranges from through 255 For example DESE 209 sets the DESER to the binary value 11010001 that is the m
314. ange 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray FRAMEID QUALi fier 1 55 sets the frame id qualifier to less than MOREThan sets the frame id qualifier to greater than EQUal sets the frame id qualifier to equal UNEQual sets the frame id qualifier to not equal LESSEQual sets the frame id qualifier to less than or equal MOREEQual sets the frame id qualifier to greater than or equal INrange sets the frame id qualifier to in range OUTrange sets the frame id qualifier to out of range TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMEID QUALIFIER LESSTHAN sets the frame id qualifier to less than TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMEID QUALIFIER might return TRIGGER A BUS Bl FLEXRAY FRAMEID QUALIFIER EQUAL indicating the frame id qualifier is set to equal TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEID VALue Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for FLEXRAY frame ID low value Trigger TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray FRAMEID VALue lt QString gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEID VALue lt QString gt is a quoted string that is the FLEXRAY frame ID low value TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMEID VALUE 11001100101 sets the frame id value to 11001100101 TRIGGER 1 FRAMEID VALUE might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMEID VALUE XXXXXXXX
315. ange of the minimum and maximum values of the trigger input signal TRIGGER A might return a long response with A trigger parameters some of which could be as follows TRIGGER AUTO TYPE EDGE LEVEL 20 0000E 3 LEVEL CH1 20 0000E 3 cH2 0 0000 CH3 0 0000 CH4 0 0000 TRIGGER A UPPERTHRESHOLD CH1 1 4000 CH2 800 0000E 3 CH3 8 00 0000E 3 CH4 800 0000E 3 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD CH1 20 0000E 3 CH2 0 0000 CH3 0 0000 cH4 0 0000 TRIGGER A HOLDOFF TIME 20 0000E 9 TRIGGER A EDGE SOURCE CH1 COUPLING DC SLOPE RISE TRIGGER A LOGIC CLASS SETHOLD FUNCTION AND THRESHOLD CH1 20 0000E 3 CH2 0 0000 CH3 0 0000 CH4 0 0000 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT CH X CH2 X CH3 4 X CLOCK SOURCE NONE EDGE RISE TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT CH1 X CH2 X CH3 X CH4 X TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN TRUE WHEN LESSLIMIT 4 0000E 9 MO RELIMIT 4 0000E 9 TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK SOURCE CH1 EDGE RISE THRESHOLD 20 000 OE 3 TRIGGER A SETHOLD DATA SOURCE CH2 THRESHOLD 0 0000 TRIGGER A SETHOLD HOLD TIME 4 0000E 9 SETTIME 4 0000E 9 TRIGGER A PULSE CLASS TRANSITION TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH SOURCE CH1 POLARITY POSITIVE WHEN LESSTHAN WIDTH 4 0000 9 TRIGGER A RUNT SOURCE CH1 POLARITY POSITIVE WHEN 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 393 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order TRIGger A BUS Conditions Group Syntax Arguments OCCURS WIDTH 4 0000E 9 TRIGGER A TRANSITION SOURCE CH1 POLARITY POSITIVE WHE
316. application module Power POWer SWLoss CONDCALCmethod VOLTage RDSon VCEsat POWer SWLOSS CONDCALCmethod VOLTage sets voltage as the conduction calculation method RDSon sets RDSon as the conduction calculation method VCEsat sets VCEsat as the conduction calculation method POWER SWLOSS CONDCALCMETHOD RDSon sets the conduction calculation method to RDSon POWER SWLOSS CONDCALCMETHOD might return POWER SWLOSS CONDCALCMETHOD VOLT indicating that the conduction calculation method is set to Voltage POWer SWLoss CONDuction ENERGY MAX Query Only Conditions Group 2 298 Returns the maximum conduction energy for switching loss calculation This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax POWer SwLoss CONDuct ion ENERGY Examples POWER SWLOSS CONDUCTION ENERGY MAX might return POWER SWLOSS CONDUCTION ENERGY MAX 1 indicating that the maximum conduction energy switching loss calculation is set to 1 J POWer SWLoss CONDuction ENERGY MEAN Query Only Returns the mean conduction energy in the conduction period for the switching loss calculation Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Group Power Syntax POWer SWLoss CONDuction ENERGY MEAN Examples POWER SWLOSS CONDUCTION ENERGY MEAN might return POWER SWLOSS CONDUCTION ENERG
317. arameters You can assign some parameters such as waveform sources differently for each measurement Other parameters such as reference levels have only one value which applies to all measurements Table 2 25 Measurement Commands Command Description MEASUrement Returns all measurement parameters MEASUrement CLEARSNapshot Removes the measurement snapshot display MEASUrement GATing Sets or returns the measurement gating MEASUrement IMMed Returns all immediate measurement setup parameters MEASUrement IMMed DELay Returns information about the immediate delay measurement MEASUrement IMMed DELay DlRection Sets or returns the search direction to use for immediate delay measurements MEASUrement IMMed DELay EDGE lt x gt Sets or returns the slope of the edge used for immediate delay and to waveform measurements 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 27 Command Groups 2 28 Table 2 25 Measurement Commands cont Command Description MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce Sets or returns the from source for all single channel immediate measurements MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce2 Sets or returns the source to measure to for phase or delay immediate measurements MEASUrement IMMed TYPe Sets or returns the type of the immediate measurement MEASUrement IMMed UNIts Returns the units of the immediate measurement MEASUrement IMMed VALue Returns the value of t
318. arch condition to be valid on a READ WRITE or either SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B x CAN DATa QUAL fier Sets or returns the CAN data qualifier SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B x CAN DATa SIZe Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for CAN search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for CAN search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN FRAMEtype Sets or returns the CAN Frame Type to be used SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess MODe Sets or returns the CAN addressing mode to standard or extended format SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess VALue Sets or returns the binary address string to be used for CAN search SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CONDition Sets or returns the trigger condition for FLEXRAY SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CYCLEcount HIVALue Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for FLEXRAY cycle count high value SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray CYCLEcount QUALifier Sets or returns the FLEXRAY cycle count qualifier SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CYCLEcount VALue Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for FLEXRAY cycle count low value
319. ary RPBinary SRIbinary SRPbinary DATa ENCdg WFMoOutpre ENCdg WFMOutpre BN Fmt WFMOutpre BYT Or ASCIi specifies the ASCII representation for waveform data points If ASCII is the value then BN Fmt and BYT Or are ignored FAStest specifies that the data be sent in the fastest possible manner consistent with maintaining accuracy and is interpreted with respect to the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce RIBINARY specifies signed integer data point representation with the most significant byte transferred first When BYT Nr is 1 the range is from 128 through 127 When BYT Nr is 2 the range is from 32 768 through 32 767 Center screen is 0 zero The upper limit is the top of the screen and the lower limit is the bottom of the screen This is the default argument RPBinary specifies the positive integer data point representation with the most significant byte transferred first When BYT Nr is 1 the range from 0 through 255 When BYT Nr is 2 the range is from 0 to 65 535 The center of the screen is 127 The upper limit is the top of the screen and the lower limit is the bottom of the screen SRIbinary is the same as RIBinary except that the byte order is swapped meaning that the least significant byte 1s transferred first This format is useful when transferring data to IBM compatible PCs SRPbinary is the same as RPBinary except that the byte order is swapped meaning that the least significant byte 1s transferred firs
320. asurement is applicable only to the analog channels LOW measures the Low reference 096 level sometimes called Baseline of a waveform This measurement is applicable only to the analog channels 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 211 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order 2 212 MAXimum finds the maximum amplitude This value is the most positive peak voltage found It is measured over the entire waveform or gated region This measurement is applicable only to the analog channels MEAN amplitude measurement finds the arithmetic mean over the entire waveform or gated region This measurement is applicable only to the analog channels MINImum finds the minimum amplitude This value is typically the most negative peak voltage It is measured over the entire waveform or gated region This measurement is applicable only to the analog channels NDUty negative duty cycle is the ratio of the negative pulse width to the signal period expressed as a percentage The duty cycle is measured on the first cycle in the waveform or gated region Negative Duty Cycle Negative Width Period x 100 NEDGECount is the count of falling edges NOVershoot negative overshoot finds the negative overshoot value over the entire waveform or gated region This measurement is applicable only to the analog channels Negative Overshoot Low Minimum Amplitude 100 NPULSECount is the count of negative pulses NwIdth negative
321. ation DATa SOUrce DATa STARt DATa STOP WFMInpre WFMInpre BYT_Nr WFMOutpre HEADer Arguments Block is the waveform data in binary format The waveform is formatted as lt x gt lt yyy gt lt data gt lt newline gt where 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 145 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order DATa 2 146 Examples Group Syntax lt x gt is the number of y bytes For example if lt yyy gt 500 then lt x gt 3 lt yyy gt is the number of bytes to transfer If width is 1 then all bytes on the bus are single data points If width is 2 then all bytes on the bus are 2 bytes wide Use the WFMInpre BYT Nr command to set the width for waveforms transferred into the oscilloscope Use WFMOutpre BYT Nr to set the width for waveforms transferred out from the oscilloscope lt data gt is the curve data lt newline gt is a single byte new line character at the end of the data lt asc curve gt is the waveform data in ASCII format The format for ASCII data is lt NR1 gt lt NR1 gt where each lt NR1 gt represents a data point DIGital Sends the data to the specified reference waveform slot as specified by the DATA DESTINATION command If the data encoding is a binary format then depending upon the setting of HEADER the binary block header is prepended to the output data MSO models only CURVE with ASCII encoding start and stop of 1 and 10 respectively and a width set to 1 mi
322. ax Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order value in units curve in dl YOFf in dl YMUIt YZEro in units NOTE For a given waveform record YMUIt YOFf and YZEro have to be a consistent set otherwise vertical cursor readouts and vertical measurements may give incorrect results Waveform Transfer WFMInpre YZEro lt NR3 gt WFMInpre YZEro WFMInpre YUNit WFMOutpre Y ZEro NR3 is the offset in YUNits WFMINPRE YZERO 1 5 0 specifies that the zero reference point for the incoming waveform is 1 5 V below the center of the data range given that WFMInpre YUNit is set to V WFMINPRE YZERO might return WFMINPRE YZEro 7 5000E 6 indicating that the zero reference for the incoming waveform is 7 5 uV below the center of the data range given that WFMInpre YUNit is set to V WFMOutpre Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns waveform transmission and formatting parameters for the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce command If the waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command is not displayed the oscilloscope returns only the waveform transmission parameters BYT Nr BIT Nr ENCdg BN Fmt BYT Waveform Transfer wFMOutpre WFMOUTPRE might return the waveform formatting data as WFMOUTPRE BYT NR 2 BIT NR 16 ENCDG ASCII BN FMT RI BYT OR MSB WFID Chl DC coupling 100 0mv div 4 000us div 10000 points Sample mode NR PT 10000 PT FMT Y XUN
323. ay Mode to off any other value sets this mode to on HORIZONTAL DELAY MODE OFF sets the Horizontal Delay Mode to off allowing the horizontal position command to operate like the HORIZONTAL POSITION knob on the front panel HORIZONTAL DELAY MODE might return HORIZONTAL DELAY MODE OFF indicating that the Horizontal Delay Mode is off and that the horizontal position command operates like the HORIZONTAL POSITION knob on the front panel HORizontal DELay TIMe Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the horizontal delay time position that is used when delay is on the default mode Horizontal HORizontal DELay TIMe NR3 zontal DELay TIMe HORizontal POSition NR3 is the delay in seconds HORizontal DELay TIME 0 3 sets the delay of acquisition data so that the resulting waveform is centered 300 ms after the trigger occurs 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 187 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order HORizontal DIGital RECOrdlength MAGnivu Query Only Returns the record length of the MagniVu digital acquisition Group Horizontal Syntax HORizontal DIGital RECOrdlength MAGnivu HORizontal DIGital RECOrdlength MAIN Query Only Returns the record length of the main digital acquisition Group Horizontal Syntax HORizontal DIGital RECOrdlength MAIN HORizontal DIGital SAMPLERate MAGnivu Query Only Returns the sample rate of the M
324. be generated if the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce is not turned on Waveform Transfer Group Syntax wFMoutpre WFId Related Commands DATa SOUrce Returns Qstring comprises the following comma separated fields documented in the tables below Table 2 44 Waveform Suffixes Field Description Examples Source The source identification string as it appears in CH1 4 the front panel scale factor readouts Math1 Ref1 4 Coupling A string describing the vertical coupling of the AC coupling waveform the Source waveform in the case of couplng Dual Waveform Math GND coupling Vert Scale A string containing the vertical scale factor of 100 0 mV div the unzoomed waveform The numeric portion 20 00 dB div will always be four digits The examples cover 45 00 deg div all known internal units 785 4 mradidiv 500 0 uVs div 10 00 kV s div 200 0 mV div 50 00 unk div Horiz Scale A string containing the horizontal scale factor of 100 ms div the unzoomed waveform The numeric portion 10 00 kHz div will always be four digits The examples cover all known internal units Record Length A string containing the number of waveform 1000 points points available in the entire record The 1000000 points numeric portion is given as an integer Acquisition Mode A string describing the mode used to acquire Sample mode the waveform Pk Detect mode Envelope
325. betical Order Examples SYNCFrame sets the FLEXRAY error type for a trigger to SYNCFrame STARTupnosync sets the FLEXRAY error type for a trigger to STARTupnosync NULLFRStatic sets the FLEXRAY error type for a trigger to NULLFRStatic NULLFRDynami c sets the FLEXRAY error type for a trigger to NULLFRDynamic TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY ERRTYPE SYNCFRAME sets the FLEXRAY trigger type is S YNCFRAME TRIGGER A BUS Bl FLEXRAY ERRTYPE might return TRIGGER A BUS Bl FLEXRAY ERRTYPE CRCHEADER indicating the FLEXRAY trigger type is CRCHeader TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEID HIVALue Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for FLEXRAY frame ID high value Trigger TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray FRAMEID HIVALue lt QString gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEID HIVALue lt QString gt is a quoted string that is the binary frame id high value TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMEID HIVALUE 11001100101 sets the frame id high value to 11001100101 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMEID HIVALUE might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMEID HIVALUE XXXXXXXXXXX indicating the frame id high value is don t care TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEID QUALIifier 2 408 Group Syntax Sets or returns the FLEXRAY frame ID qualifier Trigger TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray FRAMEID QUALi fier LESSThan MOREThan EQUal UNEQual LESSEQual MOREEQual INrange OUTr
326. betical Order Measurement MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE2 CH lt x gt MATH lt y gt REF lt x gt D lt x gt MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE2 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TYPe CH lt x gt is an input channel waveform where x is the channel number MATH lt y gt is the math waveform which is always 1 REF lt x gt is reference waveform where x is the reference channel number D lt x gt is a digital waveform where x is the digital channel number Digital channels are available only on MSO models MEASUREMENT MEAS4 SOURCE2 CHI specifies as the delay to source when making delay measurement MEASUREMENT MEAS2 SOURCE2 might return MEASUREMENT MEAS2 SOURCE2 1 indicating that Math 1 is the measurement 2 source MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOUrce lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments For SOURcel Sets or returns the source for all single channel measurements For delay or phase measurements sets or returns the waveform to measure from For SOUrce2 Sets or returns the waveform to measure to when taking a delay measurement or phase measurement Measurement MEASUrement MEAS x SOUrce x CH lt x gt MATH D lt x gt MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOUrce lt x gt CH lt x gt is an input channel waveform where x is the channel number MATH is the math waveform REF x is reference waveform where x is the reference channel number D lt x gt is a digital waveform where x is th
327. bootp Sets or returns the network initialization search for a DHCP BOOTP server Group Ethernet Syntax X ETHERnet DHCPbootp ON OFF ETHERnet DHCPbootp Arguments enables the oscilloscope to search the network for a DHCP or BOOTP server in order to automatically assign a dynamic IP address to the oscilloscope 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 165 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples NOTE Do not use DHCP BOOTP searching if your oscilloscope has been assigned a static address on a network If you set this command to ON the DHCP BOOTP search will delete or change your static IP address information OFF disables the oscilloscope to search the network for a DHCP or BOOTP server ETHERNET DHCPBOOTP ON sets the oscilloscope to search for a DHCP or BOOTP server and assign a dynamic IP address to the oscilloscope ETHERnet DNS IPADDress Sets or returns the network Domain Name Server Dns IP address Group Ethernet Syntax ETHERnet DNS IPADDress Qstring ETHERnet DNS IPADDress Arguments Qstring is a standard IP address value enclosed in quotes Examples ETHERNET DNS IPADDRESS 128 196 13 352 sets the Dns IP address that the oscilloscope uses to communicate with the network ETHERnet DOMAlNname Sets or returns the network domain name Group Ethernet Syntax ETHERnet DOMAINname Qstring ETHERnet DOMAINname Arguments lt QString gt is the network domain name enclosed in
328. ce acquisition ACQuire STATE ON NR 1 AUXin PRObe DEGAUss EXECute CH lt x gt PRObe DEGAUss EXECute DIAg STATE EXECute RECAII SETUp file path RECAII WAVEform file path REF x SAVe IMAGe file path SAVe SETUp file path SAVe WAVEform wfm REF lt x gt TEKSecure Hard copy operation HARDCopy START Calibration step STARt PREVious CONTinue Status and Error OPC OPC BUSY WAI OPC generates the operation complete message in the SESR at the completion of all pending OPC operations 504000 DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 241 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order OPC might return to indicate that all pending OPC operations are finished PASSWord No Query Form Enables the PUD and NEWpass set commands Sending PASS Word without any arguments disables these same commands Once the password is successfully entered the PUD and NEWpass commands are enabled until the oscilloscope is powered off or until the FACtory command or the PASSWord command with no arguments is issued To change the password you must first enter the valid password with the PASSWord command and then change to your new password with the NEWpass command Remember that the password is case sensitive Group X Miscellaneous Syntax PASSWord lt Qstring gt Related Commands NEWpass PUD Arguments lt QString gt is the password and can include up to 10 characters The factory default password is XYZZY
329. ce error too few points received 2259 File too big 2270 Alias error 2271 Alias syntax error 2273 Illegal alias label 2276 Alias expansion error 2277 Alias redefinition not allowed 2278 Alias header not found 2285 TekSecure R Pass 2286 TekSecure R Fail 2500 Setup error file does not look like a setup file 2501 Setup warning could not recall all values from external setup 2620 Mask error too few points received 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 3 15 Status and Events Device Error System Event Execution Warning Table 3 5 Execution Error Messages EXE Bit 4 cont Code Message 2760 Mark limit reached 2761 No mark present 2762 Search copy failed The following table lists the device errors that can occur during oscilloscope operation These errors may indicate that the oscilloscope needs repair Table 3 6 Device Error Messages DDE Bit 3 Code Message 310 System error 311 Memory error 312 PUD memory lost 314 Save recall memory lost The following table lists the system event messages These messages are generated whenever certain system conditions occur Table 3 7 System Event Messages Code Message 400 Query event 401 Power on PON bit 7 set 402 Operation complete OPC bit 0 set 403 User request URQ bit 6 set 404 Power fail DDE bit 3 set 405 Request control 410 Query INTERRUPTED QYE bit 2 set 420 Q
330. ce is set to Infinite it does not mean that the brightness of any pixel should never decrease The brightness of a pixel is proportionally dependent on the ratio between its intensity which does NOT decrease at Infinite Persistence and the maximum value of intensity of any pixel on the screen If a particular pixel get hit less often than others its brightness will decrease over time It will become less bright relative to the pixels that get hit often Display 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 161 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments Examples DISplay PERSistence 1 NR3 CLEAR AUTO MINImum INFInite DISplay PERSistence lt NR3 gt specifies the time of the persistence CLEAR resets the persist time count down and clears the display of acquired points INFInite displays waveform points until a control change resets the acquisition system When persistence is set to infinite it does not mean that the brightness of any pixel should never decrease The brightness of a pixel is proportionally dependent on the ratio between its intensity which does NOT decrease at infinite persistence and the maximum value of intensity of any pixel on the screen Thus if a particular pixel gets hit less often than others its brightness will decrease over time It will become less bright relative to the pixels that get hit often AUTO specifies that the oscilloscope automatically determines the best wav
331. certain VPI probes support this command See the probe documentation for how to set these string arguments Vertical AUXin PRObe COMMAND lt QString gt lt QString gt lt QString gt are quoted strings specifying the probe command and value to set in the probe attached to the auxiliary input AUXIN PROBE COMMAND OUTPUT ON turns the output of a Tektronix VPI DPG probe on AUXIN PROBE COMMAND MODE 4 4V1MHz sets a Tektronix VPI DPG probe to the 4 4V1MHz mode AUXIN PROBE COMMAND MODE might return AUXIN PROBE COMMAND 4 4V1MHZ 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 79 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order AUXin PRObe DEGAUSs No Query Form Group Syntax Arguments Examples Starts a degauss autozero cycle on a TekVPI current probe attached to the Aux In input If you send this command to a probe that does not support this function it is ignored Vertical AUXin PRObe DEGAUss EXECute EXECute starts a probe degauss cycle AUXin PROBE DEGAUSS EXECUTE degausses the probe attached to the Aux In input AUXin PRObe DEGAUss STATE Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the state of the probe degauss NEEDED RECOMMENDED PASSED FAILED RUNNING The command will return PASSED for probes that do not support degauss operations Vertical AUXin PRObe DEGAUSS STATE AUXin PROBE DEGAUSS STATE might return AUXin PROBE DEGAUSS
332. condition SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa SIZe 2 352 Conditions Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for an 2 trigger search if the search condition is DATA or ADDRANDDATA SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B x I2C DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B x I2C DATa SIZe NRI is the data string length in bytes SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B x I2C DATa VALue Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for an I2C trigger search if the search condition is DATA or ADDRANDDATA SEARCH x is the search number and B x is the bus number This command requires DPO4EMBD application module Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B x I2C DATa VALue bin SEARCH SEARCH X TRIGger A BUS B x I2C DATa VALue bin is the data in binary format SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN CONDition Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the search condition for a LIN search Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN CONDition SYNCField IDenti fier
333. ctions to obtain measurements and statistics about the general power quality in your test circuit SWITCHingloss Use the switching loss functions to obtain the power loss and energy loss across the acquired waveform including turn on loss turn off loss conduction loss and total loss Typically use these functions to characterize losses in power supply switching devices as they switch on and off SOA Use the safe operating functions to obtain an X Y display of the switching device under test s voltage and current Also use them to perform a mask test of the X Y signal relative to the graphical X Y description of the device specification table The safe operating area is typically the voltage and current values that a semiconductor can operate without damaging itself HARMoni cs Use the harmonics functions to obtain the frequency spectrum of the source waveform and associated measurement values Harmonic measurements can help one perform in depth troubleshooting of power quality problems Use the ripple functions to obtain measurements and statistics for the AC components of the acquired waveform Ripples are often found on top of a large DC signal MODULationanalysis Use the modulation functions to obtain a trend plot of a measurement value across the acquired waveform This is useful for showing the variations in the modulated switching signal DESKew Run the deskew procedure to match the delays through the probes Different
334. ctor POWERLEVe 1 POWERLOSS POWer POWerupstatus PRESS PREVIEW PREViewstate PREVious PRINTQual PRINTer PRODDELta PRODUCT PRODUCTID PRODuct PROGressive PROPDELay B 3 Appendix Reserved Words PRObe PT_Fmt PT_ORder PT Off PULSEWIDth PULSEWi dth PULSe PULSe PwIdth Qstring QTY QUALi fier QUALity Qstring RADIUS RATDELta RATE15K RATE1M RATE20K RATE25K RATE35K RATE5OK RATE800K RATIO RATio RDELta RDSon REACTpwr READ READFile READOUT RECA11 RECDESkew RECOrdlength RECTangular REF REF2 REF3 REF4 REFLevel REF 1t x gt REFX REM REMote REName REPEATStart RESET RESOlution RESPtime RESUIt RESistance RESult B 4 RESults RI RIBinary RIGht RIPPle RISEFall RISe RISing RJ RMDir RMS ROLL100MM ROLL127MM ROLL210MM ROLL89MM ROM RP RPBinary RS232 RS232C RUN RUNSTOp RUNT RUNt RUSSian RwINClude RX RXDATA RXENDPacket RXSTArt SAMPLERate SAMPLEpoint SAMple SAVe SCAN SCAle SCLK SCREEN SCREen SDATA SEARCH SEARCHtotrigger SECAM SEConds SELect SELected SEQuence SERIALnumber SERnumber SET SETHold SETLevel SETTODEFaults SETTime SETUp SHOW SIGNEDDECimal SIGnal SIMPlifiedchinese size SLEEP SLEWRate SLOWer SLOpe SMAT1 SNAPShot 5 SOA SOF SOURCE2 SOURCE 1 SPANi sh SPC SPECTral SPI SPREADSheet SPace SRIbinary SRPbinary SS STANDard START STARTofframe STARTup START STARtbyte STATE STATIstics STATUS STATe ST
335. d 2 256 POWer HARMonics MIL FUNDamental USER CURRent 2 256 POWer HARMonics MIL LINEFREQuency 2 257 POWer HARMonics MIL POWERLEVel 2 257 POWer HARMonics NR_HARMonics 2 258 POWer HARMonics RESults HAR lt 1 400 gt FREQuency 2 258 POWer HARMonics RESults HAR lt 1 400 gt IECMAX 2 259 POWer HARMonics RESults HAR lt 1 400 gt LIMit 2 259 POWer HARMonics RESults HAR lt 1 400 gt PHASe 2 260 POWer HARMonics RESults HAR lt 1 400 gt RMS ABSolute 2 260 POWer HARMonics RESults HAR lt 1 400 gt RMS PERCent 2 261 POWer HARMonics RESults HAR lt 1 400 gt TEST IEC CLASSALIMit 2 261 POWer HARMonics RESults HAR lt 1 400 gt TEST IEC NORMAL 2 262 POWer HARMonics RESults HAR lt 1 400 gt TEST IEC POHCLIMit 2 262 POWer HARMonics RESults HAR lt 1 400 gt TEST MIL NORMAL 2 262 POWer HARMonics RESults IEC FUNDamental 2 263 POWer HARMonics RESults IEC HARM3ALTernate 2 263 POWer HARMonics RESults IEC HARMSALTernate 2 264 POWer HARMonics RESults IEC POHC 2 264 POWer HARMonics RESults IEC POHL 2 265 POWer HARMonics RESults IEC POWer 2 265 POWer HARMonics RESults IEC POWERFactor 2 265 POWer HARMonics RESults PASSFail 2 266 Index 5 Index POWer HARMonics RESults RMS 2 266 POWer HARMonics RESults SAVe 2 266 POWer HARMonics RESults THDF 2 267 POWer HARMonics RESults THDR 2 267 POWer HARMonics SOURce 2 267 POWer HARMonics STANDard 2 268 POWer MODulation SOUrce 2 269 POWer
336. d Setting DATa STARt to 1 and DATa STOP to the record length will always return the entire waveform The DATa SOUrce command specifies the waveform source when transferring a waveform from the oscilloscope You can only transfer one waveform at a time Waveforms sent to the oscilloscope are always stored in one of the reference memory locations Use the DATa DESTination command to specify a reference memory location Each waveform you transfer has an associated waveform preamble which contains information such as horizontal scale vertical scale and the other settings in effect when the waveform was created Refer to the individual WFMInpre and WFMOutpre commands for information Once you transfer the waveform data to the controller you can convert the data points into voltage values for analysis using information from the waveform preamble 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 63 Command Groups Transferring Waveform Data from the Oscilloscope Transferring Waveform Data to the Oscilloscope 2 64 You can transfer waveforms from the oscilloscope to an external controller using the following sequence 1 Select the waveform source s using DATa SOUrce 2 Specify the waveform data format using DATa ENCdg 3 Specify the number of bytes per data point using WFMOutpre BYT Nr 4 Specify the portion of the waveform that you want to transfer using DATa STARt and DATa STOP 2 Transfer waveform preamble information
337. d CLOCk SOUrce Sets or returns the clock source for the A logic trigger setup and hold input TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk THReshold Sets or returns the clock voltage threshold for setup and hold trigger TRIGger A SETHold DATa Returns the voltage threshold and data source for the setup hold trigger TRIGger A SETHold DATa SOUrce Sets or returns the data source for the setup and hold trigger TRIGger A SETHold DATa THReshold Sets or returns the data voltage threshold for setup and hold trigger TRIGger A SETHold HOLDTime Sets or returns the hold time for the setup and hold violation triggering TRIGger A SETHold SETTime Sets or returns the setup time for setup and hold violation triggering TRIGger A SETHold THReshold CH lt x gt Sets or queries the threshold for the channel 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 55 Command Groups 2 56 Table 2 31 Trigger Commands cont Command Description TRIGger A SETHold THReshold D lt x gt Sets the A trigger setup and hold threshold for the selected digital channel TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt Sets the upper threshold for the channel selected TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall Returns the delta time polarity and both upper and lower threshold limits for the transition time trigger TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall DELTatime Sets or returns the delta time used in calculating the transit
338. d Commands Arguments Examples WFMOutpre ENCdg Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMOutpre ENCdg WFMOutpre BYT_Nr LSB specifies that the least significant byte will be transmitted first MSB specifies that the most significant byte will be transmitted first WFMOUTPRE BYT_OR MSB sets the most significant outgoing byte of waveform data to be transmitted first WFMOUTPRE BYT_OR might return WFMOUTPRE BYT OR LSB indicating that the least significant data byte will be transmitted first Sets and queries the type of encoding for outgoing waveforms Waveform Transfer wFMOutpre ENCdg 5 11 wFMOutpre ENCdg DATa ENCdg WFMOutpre BYT_Nr WFMOutpre BYT_Or WFMoOutpre BIT Nr WFMOutpre BN Fmt ASCii specifies that the outgoing data is to be in ASCII format Waveforms will be sent as NR1 numbers BINary specifies that outgoing data 1s to be in a binary format whose further specification is determined by WFMOutpre BYT Nr WFMOutpre BIT Nr WFMoOutpre BN Fmt and WFMOutpre BYT WFMOUTPRE ENCDG might return WFMOUTPRE ENCDG BIN indicating that outgoing waveform data will be sent in binary format WFMOUTPRE ENCDG ASC specifies that the outgoing waveform data will be sent in ASCII format WFMOutpre FRACTional Query Only 2 490 The set form of this command is ignored The query form always returns a 0 if the waveform specified by DATA SOUrce is on or displa
339. d data These are the WFMInpre WFMOutpre and DATa command values after the TEKSecure operation gt WF BIN gt WF 4 0 100 gt WF gt WF 4 0 gt WF BIN gt WF s 4 0 _ 1 WFMOUTPRE BIT_NR 8 WFMOUTPRE ENCDG WFMOUTPRE BN_FMT RI WFMOUTPRE BYT_OR MSB MOUTPRE WFID Ch1 DC coupling 100 0mv div 00 5 41 10000 points Sample mode WFMOUTPRE NR PT 00 WFMOUTPRE PT FMT Y WFMOUTPRE XUNIT 5 MOUTPRE XINCR 4 0000E 9 WFMOUTPRE XZERO 20 0000E 6 MOUTPRE PT OFF 0 WFMOUTPRE YUNIT V WFMOUTPRE YMULT 000E 3 WFMOUTPRE YOFF 0 0000 WFMOUTPRE YZERO 0 0000 MINPRE BYT NR 1 WFMINPRE BIT NR 8 WFMINPRE ENCDG WFMINPRE BN FMT RI WFMINPRE BYT OR MSB PT 10000 WFMINPRE PT FMT Y WFMINPRE XUNIT WFMINPRE XINCR 4 0000E 9 WFMINPRE XZERO 0 0000 MINPRE PT OFF 0 WFMINPRE YUNIT V WFMINPRE YMULT 000E 3 WFMINPRE YOFF 0 0000 WFMINPRE YZERO 0 0000 DATA DESTINATION DATA ENCDG RIBINARY DATA SOURCE 1 DATA START 1 DATA STOP 10000 DATA WIDTH 1 NOTE The TEKSecure command can take up to five minutes to complete The oscilloscope is inoperable during this period Miscellaneous TEKSec ure 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TEKSECURE initializes both waveform and setup memories This is a program example of ho
340. data in the form of a quoted string which is simply a group of ASCII characters enclosed by a single quote 7 or double quote The following is an example of a quoted string This is a quoted string This documentation represents these arguments as follows Table 2 11 Quoted String Argument Symbol Meaning lt QString gt Quoted string of ASCII text 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 7 Command Syntax 2 8 Block A quoted string can include any character defined in the 7 bit ASCII character set Follow these rules when you use quoted strings 1 Use the same type of quote character to open and close the string For example this is a valid string 2 You can mix quotation marks within a string as long as you follow the previous rule For example this is an acceptable string 3 You can include a quote character within a string by repeating the quote For example here is a mark 4 Strings can have upper or lower case characters 5 If you use a GPIB network you cannot terminate a quoted string with the END message before the closing delimiter 6 Acarriage return or line feed embedded in a quoted string does not terminate the string The return is treated as another character in the string 7 The maximum length of a quoted string returned from a query is 1000 characters Here are some invalid strings Invalid string argument quotes are not of the same type B test lt
341. ddress string used for LIN trigger if the trigger condition is ID or IDANDDATA TRIGGER A BUS B LIN IDENTIFIER VALUE 110010 sets the identifier value to 110010 TRIGGER A BUS BL LIN IDENTIFIER VALUE might return TRIGGER A BUS B1L LIN IDENTIFIER VALUE XXXXXX indicating the identifier value is XXXXXX TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt PARallel VALue Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for a Parallel trigger Applies to bus lt x gt where x is the bus number Trigger TRIGger A BUS B x PARallel vALue lt QString gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt PARal lel VALue lt QString gt is the binary data string TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C CONDition 2 420 Sets or returns the condition for an RS 232C trigger where x is the bus number 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order This command requires a DPO4COMP application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B x RS232C CONDi tion RXSTArt RXDATA RKENDPacket TXSTArt TXDATA TXENDPacket TRIGger A BUS B x RS232C CONDi tion RXSTArt specifies a search based on the RX Start Bit RXDATA specifies a search based on RX Data RXENDPacket specifies a search based on the RX End of Packet condition TXSTArt specifies a search base on the TX Start Bit TXDATA specifies a search based on TX Data TXENDPacket specifies a search based on t
342. der Syntax Arguments Examples BUS B lt x gt LIN BITRate lt NR1 gt BUS B lt x gt LIN BITRate NR1 is the LIN bit rate You can enter any positive integer and the instrument will coerce the value to the closest supported bit rate BUS B1 LIN BITRATE 9600 sets the bit rate 9600 BUS B1 LIN BITRATE might return BUS B1 LIN BITRATE 2400 indicating the bit rate is set to 2400 BUS B lt x gt LIN IDFORmat Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the LIN ID format Bus BUS B lt x gt LIN IDFORmat NOPARity PARity BUS B lt x gt LIN IDFORmat NOPARity sets the LIN id format to no parity PARity sets the LIN id format to parity BUS B1 LIN IDFORMAT PARITY sets the LIN id format to parity BUS B1 LIN IDFORMAT might return BUS B1 LIN IDFORMAT NOPARITY indicating the LIN id format is no parity BUS B lt x gt LIN POLARity Group Syntax Arguments 2 98 Sets or returns the LIN polarity Bus BUS B lt x gt LIN POLARity NORMal INVerted BUS B lt x gt LIN POLARity NORMa specifies normal LIN polarity INVerted specifies inverted LIN polarity 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples BUS B1 LIN POLARITY INVERTED sets the LIN polarity to INVERTED BUS B1 LIN POLARITY might return BUS B1 LIN POLARITY NORMAL indicating the LIN polarity is normal BUS B lt x gt LIN SAMPLEpoint Sets or returns the sample
343. dgement condition ADDRess specifies a search based on address DATA specifies a search based on data ADDRANDDATA specifies a search based on address and data TRIGGER A BUS B1 12C CONDITION START specifies start as the I2C trigger condition TRIGger A BUS B x l2C DATa DlRection Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the DC trigger type to be valid on a Read Write or Either condition Read or write is indicated by the R W bit in the DC protocol Applies to bus x where x is the bus number This command requires DPO4EMBD application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B x I2C DATa DIRection READ WRITE NOCARE TRIGger A BUS B x I2C DATa DIRection READ specifies read as the data direction WRITE specifies write as the data direction NOCARE specifies either as the data direction TRIGGER A BUS B1 I2C DATA DIRECTION WRITE specifies write as the PC data direction TRIGger A BUS B x I2C DATa SIZe Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for an I2C trigger if the trigger condition is DATA or ADDRANDDATA Applies to bus x where x is the bus number 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 415 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Conditions Group Syntax Arguments This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B x I2C DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt TRIGger A BUS B x I2C DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt
344. dicating that the number of harmonics is set to 40 POWer HARMonics RESults HAR lt 1 400 gt FREQuency Query Only Returns the frequency of the harmonic 2 258 504000 DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Conditions Group Syntax Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order NOTE The command returns NA if the current harmonic standard is set to a new standard other than the returned query This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer HARMOnics RESults HAR 1 400 FREQuency POWER HARMONICS RESULTS HAR400 FREQUENCY might return POWER HARMONICS RESULTS HAR400 FREQUENCY 24000 indicating that the harmonic frequency is set to 24000 POWer HARMonics RESults HAR lt 1 400 gt IECMAX Query Only Conditions Group Syntax Examples The IEC Standard specifies harmonics measurements to be computed in time windows with each time window being nominally 200 ms This returns the maximum of the RMS magnitude of the harmonic computed across successive 200 ms time windows within an observation period entered by the user NOTE The command returns NA if the current harmonic standard is set to a new standard other than the returned query This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer HARMonics RESults HAR 1 400 IECMAX POWER HARMONICS RESULTS HAR400 IECMAX might return POWER HARMONICS RESULTS HAR400 IECMAX 1 0 indicating t
345. digital channel x This commands affects all trigger types using the digital channel Trigger TRIGger A LOGIC THReshold D x lt NR3 gt ECL TTL TRIGger A LOGIC THReshold D x TRIGger A LEVel D lt x gt lt NR3 gt specifies the threshold level in volts ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4V 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 437 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the lower threshold for the channel selected Each channel can have an independent level Used in Runt and Slew Rate triggers as the lower threshold Used for all other trigger types as the single level threshold Trigger TRIGger A LOWerthreshold CH x ECL TTL lt NR3 gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold CH x TRIGger A LEVel CH lt x gt ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4V lt NR3 gt is the clock level in volts TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD CH2 50 3 sets the lower limit threshold for CH2 of the pulse runt trigger to 50 mV TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD CH2 might return TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD CH2 1 2000E 01 indicating that the lower limit threshold for CH2 of the pulse runt trigger is set to 120 mV TRIGger A LOWerthreshold D lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments 2 438 Sets the lower thres
346. digital channel lt x gt and resets the acquisition x gt is the channel number The query returns whether the channel is on or off but does not indicate whether it is the selected waveform Vertical SELect D x lt NR1 gt OFF ON lt gt ON turns on the display of specified waveform This waveform also becomes the selected waveform OFF turns off the display of the specified waveform lt NR1 gt 0 turns off the display of the specified waveform any other value turns on the display of the specified waveform SELECT D2 ON turns the digital channel 2 waveform display on and selects digital channel 2 SELECT D2 might return SELECT D2 1 indicating that digital channel 2 is being displayed 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 385 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order SELect MATH 1 Group Syntax Arguments Examples SELect REF lt x gt 2 386 Group Syntax Arguments Turns on and off the display of the math waveform The query returns whether the math waveform is on or off but does not indicate whether it is the selected waveform Vertical SELect MATH 1 0N OFF lt NR1 gt SELect MATH 1 ON turns on the display of the specified waveform This waveform also becomes the selected waveform OFF turns off the display of the specified waveform lt NR1 gt 0 turns off the display of the specified waveform any other value turns on the display of th
347. dition to error 1 1 CONDITION might return TRIGGER A BUS Bl LIN CONDITION SYNCFIELD indicating the LIN trigger condition is sync field TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa HIVALue Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for LIN trigger if trigger condition is ID or IDANDDATA Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa HIVALue Qstring TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa HIVALue lt QString gt is a quoted string that is the binary data string used for LIN trigger if the trigger condition is ID or IDANDDATA TRIGGER A BUS Bl LIN DATA HIVALUE 11001010 sets the high value to 11001010 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA HIVALUE might return TRIGGER A BUS Bl LIN DATA HIVALUE XXXXXXXX indicating the high value is don t care TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa QUALIifier Group Sets or returns the LIN data qualifier This only applies if the trigger condition is IDANDDATA or DATA Trigger 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 417 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments Examples TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa QUALi fier LESSThan MOREThan EQUal UNEQual LESSEQual MOREEQual INrange OUTrange TRIGger A BUS B X LIN DATa QUAL i fier LESSThan sets the LIN data qualifier to less than MOREThan sets the LIN data qualifier to greater than EQUa sets the LIN data qualifier to equal
348. documentation describes the commands and queries using Backus Naur Notation Form BNF notation Refer to the following table for the symbols that are used Table 2 1 Symbols for Backus Naur Form Symbol Meaning lt gt Defined element Is defined as Exclusive OR Group one element is required Optional can be omitted Previous element s may be repeated Comment Command and Query Structure Commands consist of set commands and query commands usually called commands and queries Commands modify oscilloscope settings or tell the oscilloscope to perform a specific action Queries cause the oscilloscope to return data and status information Most commands have both a set form and a query form The query form of the command differs from the set form by its question mark at the end For example the set command ACQui has a query form ACQuire MODe Not all commands have both a set and a query form Some commands have set only and some have query only Messages A command message is a command or query name followed by any information the oscilloscope needs to execute the command or query Command messages may contain five element types defined in the following table 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 1 Command Syntax Commands Table 2 2 Command Message Elements Symbol Meaning lt Header gt This is the basic command name If the header ends with a q
349. dth is the distance time between the middle reference default 50 amplitude points of a positive pulse The measurement is made on the first pulse in the waveform or gated region RISe timing measurement finds the rise time of the waveform The rise time is the time it takes for the leading edge of the first pulse encountered to rise from a low reference value default is 10 to a high reference value default is 90 This measurement is applicable only to the analog channels RMS amplitude measurement finds the true Root Mean Square voltage in the entire waveform or gated region This measurement is applicable only to the analog channels Examples MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE FREQUENCY defines the immediate measurement to be a frequency measurement MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE might return MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPe RMS indicating that the immediate measurement is the true Root Mean Square voltage MEASUrement IMMed UNIts Query Only Returns the units of the immediate measurement VOLTS VOLTS SQUARED SEC HERTZ PERCENT DIVS SAMPLES OHMS AMPS WATTS MINUTES DEGREES UNKNOWN AMPS SQUARED HOURS DAYS DB BYTES INVERSE HERTZ IRE V OVER V V OVER A VOLTS WATTS V OVER W VOLTS DB V OVER DB A OVER V A OVER A AMPS WATTS A OVER W AMPS DB A OVER DB WATTS VOLTS W OVER V WATTS AMPS W OVER A WATTS SQUARED W OVER W WATTS DB W OVER DB DB VOLTS DB OVER V DB AMPS DB OVER A DB WATTS DB OVER W DB SQUARED DB OVER
350. e new password ZENS3 ETHERNET PASSWORD might return ETHERNET PASSWORD ZENS3 ETHERnet PING No Query Form Causes the oscilloscope to ping the gateway IP address Group Ethernet Syntax ETHERnet PING EXECute Examples ETHERNET PING EXECUTE causes the oscilloscope to ping the gateway IP address ETHERnet PING STATUS Query Only Returns the results from sending the ETHERnet PING command to ping the gateway IP address Group Ethernet Syntax ETHERnet PING STATUS 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 169 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Returns OK is returned if the computer at the gateway IP address answers NORESPORSE is returned if the computer at the gateway IP address does not answer INPROGRESS is returned if the ping operation is still executing ETHERnet SUBNETMask Sets or returns the remote interface subnet mask value Group X Ethernet Syntax ETHERnet SUBNETMask Qstring ETHERnet SUBNETMask Arguments Qstring is the subnet mask value enclosed in quotes Examples ETHERNET SUBNETMASK 255 255 255 0 sets the subnet mask value using standard IP address notation format EVENT Query Only Returns an event code from the Event Queue that provides information about the results of the last ESR read EVENT also removes the returned value from the Event Queue Group Status and Error Syntax EVENT Related Commands Examples 2 170 ALLEv CLS DESE ESE ESR EVMsg
351. e power readout POWer QUALity DISplay VCRESTfactor Sets or retums the display state for the voltage crest factor readout POWer QUALity DISplay VRMS Sets or returns the display state for the rms voltage VRMS readout POWer QUALity FREQREFerence Sets or returns the power quality frequency reference POWer QUALity FREQuency Returns the frequency measurement POWer QUALIity ICRESTfactor Returns the current crest factor measurement POWer QUALIity IRMS Returns the rms current measurement POWer QUALity PHASEangle Returns the phase angle measurement POWer QUALity POWERFACtor Returns the power factor measurement POWer QUALity REACTpwr Returns the reactive power measurement POWer QUALity TRUEpwr Returns the true power measurement POWer QUALity VRMS Returns the rms voltage measurement POWer REFLevel ABSolute Sets the reference levels to their default unit values POWer REFLevel ABSolute HIGH Sets or returns the top reference level for rise time POWer REFLevel ABSolute LOW Sets or returns the low reference level for rise time POWer REFLevel ABSolute MID 1 3 Sets or returns the mid reference level for measurements POWer REFLevel HYSTeresis Sets or returns the measurement reference level hysteresis value POWer REFLevel METHod Sets or returns the method used to calculate the 096 and 10096 reference level POWer REFLevel PERCent
352. e 15 off Prompts the oscilloscope to return all events and their messages delimited by commas and removes the returned events from the Event Queue Use the ESR query to enable the events to be returned This command is similar to repeatedly sending EVMsg queries to the oscilloscope Status and Error ALLEV ESR EVMsg ALLEV might return ALLEV 2225 Measurement error No waveform to measure 420 Query UNTERMINATED AUTOSet No Query Form Group Syntax Arguments Sets the vertical horizontal and trigger controls of the oscilloscope to automatically acquire and display the selected waveform Miscellaneous AUTOSet UNDO EXECute autosets the displayed waveform UNDo restores the oscilloscope settings to those present prior to the autoset execution 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 77 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Examples AUTOSet ENAble Group Syntax Arguments Examples AUXin Query Only Group Syntax AUXin PRObe Group Syntax 2 78 AUTOSET EXECUTE vertical horizontal and trigger controls of the oscilloscope to automatically acquire and display the selected waveform Enables or disables the autoset feature This is useful for classroom purposes where the instructor wants the students to achieve the desired instrument settings without the benefit of the autoset feature This setting is not saved in setup files or SET or LRN que
353. e 3 3 The Device Event Status Enable Register DESER The Event Status Enable Register ESER This register controls which types of events are summarized by the Event Status Bit ESB in the SBR Use the ESE command to set the bits in the ESER Use the ESE query to read it 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PON URQ EXE DDE QYE OPC Figure 3 4 Event Status Enable Register ESER The Service Request Enable Register SRER This register controls which bits in the SBR generate a Service Request and are summarized by the Master Status Summary MSS bit 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 3 3 Status and Events Queues 3 4 PSC Command Output Queue Use the SRE command to set SRER Use the SRE query to read the register The RQS bit remains set to one until either the Status Byte Register is read with a Serial Poll or the MSS bit changes back to a zero 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ESB Figure 3 5 The Service Request Enable Register SRER The PSC command controls the Enable Registers contents at power on Sending PSC sets the Enable Registers at power on as follows m DESER 255 equivalent to a DESe 255 command ESER 0 equivalent to an ESE 0 command SRER 0 equivalent to an SRE 0 command Sending PSC 0 lets the Enable Registers maintain their values in nonvolatile memory
354. e are no clocks MISO specifies a search based on the Master In Slave Out condition MOSI specifies a search based on the Master Out Slave In condition MISOMOSI specifies a search based on the Master In Slave Out and Master Out Slave In conditions SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa MISO IN VALue Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the binary data string for an SPI trigger search if the search condition is MISO or MISOMOSI SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa MISO IN VALue lt bin gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa MISO IN VALue lt bin gt is the data string in binary format SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa MOSI OUT VALue 2 360 Sets or returns the binary data string for an SPI trigger search if search the condition is MOSI or MISOMOSI SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa MOSI OUT VALue bin SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS lt gt SPI
355. e digital channel number Digital channels are available only on MSO models 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 221 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt STATE Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns whether the specified measurement slot is computed and displayed The measurement slot is specified by lt x gt which ranges from through 4 For a measurement to display you must have selected a source waveform and defined the measurement you want to take and display You select the measurement using the MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE 1 command You define the measurement type using the MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TYPe command Measurement MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt STATE OFF ON lt NR1 gt MEASUrement MEAS x STATE MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE 1 MEASUrement MEAS x TYPe OFF disables calculation and display of the specified measurement slot ON enables calculation and display of the specified measurement slot lt NR1 gt 0 disables calculation and display of the specified measurement slot any other value enables calculation and display of the specified measurement slot MEASUREMENT 52 STATE ON computes and displays the measurement defined as measurement 2 MEASUREMENT MEAS1 STATE might return MEASUREMENT MEASI STATE 0 indicating that measurement defined for measurement slot 1 is disabled MEASUrement MEAS lt
356. e division multiplexing audio format BUS B1 AUDIO TYPE RJ sets right justified as the audio format BUS B1 AUDIO TYPE might return BUS B1 AUDIO TYPE I2S indicating that the audio format is set to DS BUS B 1 4 AUDio WORDSel POLarity Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the word select polarity for the AUDIO bus This command requires DPO4AUDIO application module Bus BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDi0 WORDSel POLarity NORMal INVERTed BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUD10 WORDSel POLarity NORMa specifies positive WORDSel polarity INVERTed specifies negative WORDSel polarity BUS B1 AUDIO WORDSEL POLARITY NORMal sets normal as the word select polarity BUS B1 AUDIO WORDSE1 POLARITY might return BUS BL AUDIO WORDSEL POLARITY NORMAL indicating that the word select polarity is set to normal BUS B 1 4 AUDio WORDSel SOUrce Conditions 2 90 Sets or returns the word select source waveform for the AUDIO bus This command requires DPO4AUDIO application module 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Bus BUS B 1 4 AUDiO WORDSel SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 BUS B 1 4 AUDiO WORDSel SOUrce CH1 CH4 specifies the channel to use as the word select source 00 015 specifies the digital channel to use as the word select source BUS B1 A
357. e is don t care SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa QUALIifier 2 354 Group Syntax Sets or returns the LIN data qualifier This only applies if the trigger condition is IDANDDATA or DATA Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa QUALi fier LESSThan MOREThan EQUal UNEQual LESSEQual MOREEQual INrange OUTrange SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa QUALi fier 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order LESSThan sets the LIN data qualifier to less than MOREThan sets the LIN data qualifier to greater than EQUal sets the LIN data qualifier to equal UNEQual sets the LIN data qualifier to not equal LESSEQual sets the LIN data qualifier to less than or equal MOREEQual sets the LIN data qualifier to greater than or equal INrange sets the LIN data qualifier to in range OUTrange sets the LIN data qualifier to out of range SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER 1 1 QUALIFIER LESSThan sets the data qualifier to lessthan SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS 1 1 QUALIFIER might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL indicating the data qualifier is equal SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa SiZe Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the length of the data string
358. e search marks Search lt x gt is the search number which is always 1 lt gt is the channel number MSO oscilloscopes only Search 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH X TRIGger A SETHOld THReshold CH x lt NR3 gt SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A SETHold THReshold CH x NR3 is the lower threshold in volts SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold THReshold MATH MATH1 Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the trigger search setup and hold threshold for the math waveform This helps to determine where to place search marks Search lt x gt is the search number which is always 1 MSO oscilloscopes only Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A SETHO1d THReshold MATH MATH1 NR3 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A SETHold THReshold MATH MATH1 NR3 is the lower threshold in volts SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold THReshold REF lt x gt Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the trigger search setup and hold threshold for the selected reference waveform This helps to determine where to place search marks Search lt x gt is the search number which is always 1 REF lt x gt is the reference waveform number MSO oscilloscopes only Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A SETHold THReshold REF x lt NR3 gt SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A
359. e specified waveform SELECT MATH ON turns the math waveform display on and selects it SELECT MATH might return SELECT MATH 1 indicating that the math waveform is being displayed Turns on and off the display of the reference waveform x The x gt variable represents the reference channel number The query returns whether the channel 18 on or off Vertical SELect REF x ON OFF lt NR1 gt SELect REF x ON turns on the display of the specified waveform This waveform also becomes the selected waveform OFF turns off the display of the specified waveform lt NR1 gt 0 turns off the display of the specified waveform any other value turns on the display of the specified waveform 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples SELECT REF2 ON turns the channel 2 waveform display on and selects reference waveform 2 SELECT REF2 might return SELECT REF2 1 indicating that reference waveform 2 is being displayed SET Query Only Returns the commands that list the oscilloscope settings except for configuration information for the calibration values the WFMInpre query and the WFMOutpre query This query allows you to record or learn the current oscilloscope settings You can use these commands to return the oscilloscope to the state it was in when you made the SET query The SET query always returns command headers regardless of the setting of the HE
360. e stores the string This oscilloscope belongs to me in the user protected data area PUD might return 221PROPERTY OF COMPANY X 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order RCL No Query Form This command restores the state of the oscilloscope from a copy of the settings stored in memory The settings are stored using the SAV command Group Save and Recall Syntax NRI Related Commands FACtory LRN RECAII SETUp RST SAV SAVe SETUp Arguments NRI is a value in the range from to 10 which specifies a saved setup storage location Examples RCL 3 restores the oscilloscope from a copy of the settings stored in memory location 3 RECAII SETUp No Query Form Restores the state of the oscilloscope from a copy of the settings stored in memory The settings are stored using the SAV command Group Save and Recall Syntax RECAll SETUDp FACtory NR1 file path gt Related Commands FACtory RCL RST SAV SAVe SETUp FILESystem C WD Arguments Factory restores the factory setup NRI is a value in the range from 1 to 10 which specifies a saved setup storage location file path specifies a location for an oscilloscope setup file file is a quoted string that defines the file name and path Input the file path using the form drive dir filename extension and one or dir s are optional If you do not specify the
361. e units e g volts MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID2 Sets or returns the mid reference level for delay to measurements MEASUrement REFLevel METHod MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent HIGH Sets or returns the method for assigning high and low reference levels Sets or returns the top reference percent level for rise time MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent LOW Sets or returns the low reference percent level for rise time MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID Sets or returns the mid reference percent level for waveform measurements MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID2 Sets or returns the mid reference percent level for second waveform measurements MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce lt x gt Sets or returns the source for the current single channel measurement MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOUrce lt x gt Sets or returns the source for the specified measurement MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID x Sets or returns the mid reference level for the specified channel in absolute volts MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID lt x gt Sets or returns the mid reference level for the specified channel in percent 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 29 Command Groups Table 2 25 Measurement Commands cont Command Description MEASUrement SNAPShot Displays the measurement snapshot list MEASUrement STATIstics Clears or returns all of the statistics accumulated for all period measurements
362. ear DCL function Command Entry The following rules apply when entering commands B You can enter commands in upper or lower case B You can precede any command with white space characters White space characters include any combination of the ASCII control characters 00 through 09 and OB through 20 hexadecimal 0 through 9 and 11 through 32 decimal m The oscilloscope ignores commands consisting of any combination of white space characters and line feeds 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 3 Command Syntax 2 4 Abbreviating Concatenating You can abbreviate many oscilloscope commands Each command in this documentation shows the minimum acceptable abbreviations in capitals For example you can enter the command ACQuire NUMAvg simply as ACQ NUMA or acq numa Abbreviation rules may change over time as new oscilloscope models are introduced Thus for the most robust code use the full spelling If you use the HEADer command to have command headers included as part of query responses you can further control whether the returned headers are abbreviated or are full length with the VERBose command You can concatenate any combination of set commands and queries using a semicolon The oscilloscope executes concatenated commands in the order received When concatenating commands and queries you must follow these rules 1 Separate completely different headers by a semicolon and by the beginning colon on a
363. easured on the first cycle in the waveform or gated region Negative Duty Cycle Negative Width Period x 100 NEDGECount is the count of negative edges NOVershoot negative overshoot finds the negative overshoot value over the entire waveform or gated region This measurement is applicable only to the analog channels Negative Overshoot Low Minimum Amplitude 100 NPULSECount is the count of negative pulses NwIdth negative width measurement is the distance time between the middle reference default 50 amplitude points of a negative pulse The measurement is made on the first pulse in the waveform or gated region PDUty positive duty cycle is the ratio of the positive pulse width to the signal period expressed as a percentage It is measured on the first cycle in the waveform or gated region Positive Duty Cycle Positive Width Period x 100 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order PEDGECount is the count of positive edges PERIOd is the time required to complete the first cycle in a waveform or gated region Period is the reciprocal of frequency and is measured in seconds PHAse measures the phase difference amount of time a waveform leads or lags the reference waveform between two waveforms The measurement is made between the middle reference points of the two waveforms and is expressed in degrees where 360 represents one waveform cycle
364. ecifies the Serial Peripheral Interface bus not available on two channel models CAN specifies the Controller Area Network bus RS232C specifies the RS 232C bus PARallel specifies the Parallel bus BUS LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets the lower threshold for each channel This applies to all search and trigger types that use the channel This command supersedes the BUS THReshold CH lt x gt above Bus BUS LOWerthreshold CH x lt NR3 gt ECL TTL BUS LOWerthreshold CH x lt NR3 gt specifies the threshold in volts ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4V BUS LOWERTHRESHOLD CHI1 TTL sets the lower threshold to 800mV BUS LOWERTHRESHOLD CH1 might return BUS LOWERTHRESHOLD CH1 800 0000E 3 indicating the CH1 lower threshold is 800 mV 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 111 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order BUS THReshold CH lt x gt Conditions Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments BUS THReshold D lt x gt Conditions Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments 2 112 Sets or returns the threshold for analog channel lt x gt where x is the channel number This setting applies to all trigger types that use the channel This command requires a DPO4AUTO DPO4EMBD or DPO4COMP application module Bus BUS THReshold CH lt x gt ECL TTL lt NR3 gt
365. ecify a limit for the specific harmonic This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer HARMonics RESulIts HAR lt 1 400 gt TEST MIL NORMAL PASS FAIL or NA POWer HARMonics RESults IEC FUNDamental Query Only Conditions Group Syntax Examples Returns the IEC fundamental current used in calculating limits This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer HARMonics RESuIts FUNDamental POWER HARMONICS RESULTS FUNDAMENTAL might return POWER HARMONICS RESULTS FUNDAMENTAL 1 0 indicating that the IEC fundamental frequency is set to 1 0 A POWer HARMonics RESults IEC HARM3ALTernate Query Only Conditions Group Syntax Returns the IEC harmonics test result for the 3rd harmonic NOTE The command returns NA if the limit does not apply This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer HARMonics RESults IEC HARM3ALTernate 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 263 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Returns Examples PASS FAIL or NA POWER HARMONICS RESULTS HARM3ALTERNATE might return POWER HARMONICS RESULTS HARM3ALTERNATE PASS indicating the test result POWer HARMonics RESults IEC HARMS5ALTernate Query Only Conditions Group Syntax Returns Examples Returns the overall harmonics test result for the 5th harmonic NOTE The comm
366. ed neither theFPAnel PRESS nor the FPAnel TURN commands will work They will not generate an error event either You can work around this by using the appropriate programmatic interface commands instead of the front panel commands For example to set the trigger level to 5096 you could use TRIGger A SETLevel To force a trigger you could use TRIGger FORCe Miscellaneous Lock ALL NONe LOCk UNLock ALL disables all front panel controls NONe enables all front panel controls This is equivalent to the UNLock ALL command LOCK ALL locks the front panel controls LOCK might return LOCK NONE indicating that the front panel controls are enabled by this command Returns the commands that list the oscilloscope settings except for configuration information for the calibration values the WFMInpre query and the WFMoOutpre query This query allows you to record or learn the current oscilloscope settings You can use these commands to return the oscilloscope to the state it was in when you made the LRN query This command is identical to the SET Command Miscellaneous 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax LRN Related Commands SET Examples LRN might return a long response part of which could be as follows ACQUIRE STOPAFTER RUnSTOP STATE 1 MODE SAMPLE NUMENV INFINITE NUMAVG 16 SAMPLINGMODE RT HEADER 1 LOCK NONE LANGUAGE ENGLISH VERBOSE 1 ALIAS
367. ed Commands 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order lt NR1 gt number of bits per data point can be 8 or 16 WFMINPRE BIT NR 16 sets the number of bits per waveform point to 16 for incoming data WFMINPRE BIT NR might return WFMINPRE BIT NR 8 indicating that incoming waveform data uses 8 bits per waveform point Sets or returns the format of binary data for incoming waveforms Waveform Transfer WFMInpre BN_Fmt RI RP WFMInpre BN Fmt WFMoOutpre BN RI specifies signed integer data point representation RP specifies positive integer data point representation WFMINPRE BN FMT RP specifies positive integer data point representation WFMINPRE BN FMT might return WFMINPRE BN_FMT RI indicating that the incoming data 15 currently interpreted as signed integers Sets or returns the data width for the incoming waveform Changing the value of WFMlInpre BYT Nr also changes the value of WFMlInpre BIT Nr Waveform Transfer WFMInpre BYT Nr lt NR1 gt WFMInpre BYT Nr WFMInpre BIT Nr 2 479 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Arguments Examples WFMinpre BYT_Or Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMinpre ENCdg Group Syntax 2 480 NRI is the number of bytes per data point and can be 1 or 2 WFMINPRE BYT NR 1 sets the number of bytes per incoming waveform data point to 1 which is the default setting
368. ed string representing the frame id portion of the binary header string used for FLEXRAY trigger SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER FRAMEID 10110010101 sets the frame id portion of the binary header string to 10110010101 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER FRAMEID might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER FRAMEID XXXXXXXXXXX indicating the frame id portion of the binary header string is don t cares SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER INDBits Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the indicator bits portion of the binary header string used for FLEXRAY trigger Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS lt gt FLEXray HEADER INDBits Qstring SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray HEADER INDBi ts lt QString gt is a quoted string representing the indicator bits portion of the binary header string used for FLEXRAY trigger SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER INDBITS 10100 sets the indicator bits of the header to 10100 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER INDBITS might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER INDBITS XXXXX indicating the indicator bits of the header are don t cares SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER PAYLength Sets or returns the payload length portion of the binary
369. eform persistence based on the value of waveform intensity DISPLAY INTEnsITY WAVEFORM MINImum specifies that the waveform persistence is set to the minimum value of 0 0E0 DISPLAY PERSISTENCE 3 specifies that the waveform points are displayed fading for 3 seconds before they completely disappear DISplay STYle DOTsonly D lt x gt 2 162 Group Syntax Arguments Group Turns on or off the dots only mode for the waveform display Display DISplay STYle DOTsonly ON OFF lt NR1 gt DISplay STYle DOTsonly ON or lt NR1 gt 0 turns on the dots only display OFF or lt NR1 gt 0 turns off the dots only display Sets or returns parameters for digital channel lt x gt where x is the channel number Vertical 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax D lt x gt LABel Group Syntax Arguments Examples D lt x gt POSition Group Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order D lt x gt Sets or returns the waveform label for digital channel lt x gt where x is the channel number Vertical D lt x gt LABel lt Qstring gt D lt x gt LABel lt Qstring gt is an alphanumeric string of text enclosed in quotes that contains the text label information for the digital channel lt x gt waveform The text string is limited to 30 characters D4 LABEL might return D4 LABEL Clk wfm 4 Sets or returns the vertical position for digital channel lt x gt w
370. el in volts TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK THRESHOLD TTL specifies the preset TTL value of 1 4 V as the clock threshold for the setup and hold trigger TRIGGER SETHOLD CLOCK THRESHOLD might return TRIGGER A LOGIC SETHOLD CLOCK THRESHOLD 1 2000 00 indicating that the clock threshold for the setup and hold trigger is 1 2 V TRIGger A SETHold DATa Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Returns the voltage threshold and data source for the setup and hold trigger Trigger TRIGger A SETHOld DATa TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk TRIGGER A SETHOLD DATA might return TRIGGER A SETHOLD DATA SOURCE CH2 THRESHOLD 80 0000 3 TRIGger A SETHold DATa SOUrce Group 2 448 Sets or returns the data source for the setup and hold trigger You cannot specify the same source for both clock and data For DPO models you can specify only a single data source Data sources for DPO models may be one of CH1 CHA or the Auxin port EXT or AUX For MSO models you can specify any combination of CH1 CH4 and D0 D15 as the data sources Trigger 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DPO Models TRIGger A SETHOld DATa SOUrce lt wfm gt MSO Models TRIGger A SETHOld DATa SOUrce lt wfm gt lt wfm gt lt wfm gt wfm lt wfm gt lt wfm gt lt wfm gt lt wfm gt lt wfm gt
371. el CH lt x gt lt NR3 gt TTL SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel CH x NR3 specifies the trigger level in volts TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LEVel MATH 1 Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the math waveform level for an edge trigger search to determine where to place a mark x is the search number The value of MATH is 1 for all oscilloscopes Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LEVel MATH TTL SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LEVel MATH TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 363 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel REF lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the specified reference waveform level for an edge trigger search to determine where to place a mark SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and REF lt x gt is the reference channel number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel REF lt x gt TTL SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel REF x TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc FUNCtion Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the logic operator for a logic trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIC FUNCtion AND NANd NOR OR SEARCH SEARCH x TRI
372. el for the specified channel CH lt x gt PRObe PROPDELay Sets or returns the propagation delay for the probe connected to the specified channel CH lt x gt PRObe RECDESkew Returns the recommended deskew for the probe connected to the specified channel CH lt x gt PRObe RESistance Returns the resistance of the probe that is attached to the specified channel CH lt x gt PRObe S Gnal Sets or returns the input bypass setting of channel lt x gt TekVPI probe CH lt x gt PRObe UNIts Returns the units of measure of the probe that is attached to the specified channel CH lt x gt SCAle Sets or returns the vertical scale of the specified channel CH lt x gt TERmination Sets or returns channel input termination CH lt x gt YUNits Sets or returns the units for the specified channel D lt x gt Returns parameters for digital channel lt x gt D lt x gt LABel Sets or returns the waveform label for digital channel lt x gt D lt x gt THREshold Sets or returns the logical threshold for digital channel lt x gt D lt x gt POSition Sets or returns the vertical position for digital channel lt x gt DESkew Causes the deskew values for all channels to be set to the recommended values DESkew DISPlay Sets or returns the state of the deskew table display REF lt x gt Returns reference waveform data for channel lt gt REF lt x gt DATE Returns the date that a reference waveform was stored R
373. ence HARMSOURCe to use a harmonic source waveform as the frequency reference FIXEDFREQuency to use a fixed frequency value instead of a waveform for the frequency reference POWER HARMONICS FREQREF VOLTage sets voltage source as the frequency reference POWER HARMONICS FREQREF might return POWER HARMONICS FREQREF FIXEDFREQ indicating that the frequency reference is a fixed value POWer HARMonics FREQRef FIXEDFREQValue Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the frequency value when the FREQRef selection is FIXEDFREQuency This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer HARMonics FREQRef FIXEDFREQValue lt NR3 gt POWer HARMonics FREQRef FIXEDFREQValue lt NR3 gt is the fixed frequency value POWER HARMONICS FREQREF FIXEDFREQVALUE 100 sets the frequency to 100 Hz POWER HARMONICS FREQREF FIXEDFREQVALUE might return POWer HARMONICS FREQREF FIXEDFREQVALUE 60 indicating that the fixed frequency value is set to 60 Hz 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 251 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order POWer HARMonics IEC CLAss Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the equipment class for IEC harmonics This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer HARMonics IEC CLAss A B C1 C21 C3 D POWer HARMonics IEC CLAss A specifies Class Equipment B specifies Class B Equip
374. ent error No positive crossing 2214 Measurement error No crossing target waveform 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Status and Events Table 3 5 Execution Error Messages EXE Bit 4 cont Code Message 2215 Measurement error No crossing second waveform 2216 Measurement error No crossing target waveform 2217 Measurement error Constant waveform 2219 Measurement error No valid edge No arm sample 2220 Measurement error No valid edge No arm cross 2221 Measurement error No valid edge No trigger cross 2222 Measurement error No valid edge No second cross 2223 Measurement error Waveform mismatch 2224 Measurement error WAIT calculating 2225 Measurement error No waveform to measure 2226 Measurement error Null Waveform 2227 Measurement error Positive and Negative Clipping 2228 Measurement error Positive Clipping 2229 Measurement error Negative Clipping 2230 Measurement error High Ref lt Low Ref 2231 Measurement error No statistics available 2233 Requested waveform is temporarily unavailable 2235 Math error invalid math description 2240 Invalid password 2241 Waveform requested is invalid 2244 Source waveform is not active 2245 Saveref error selected channel is turned off 2250 Reference error the reference waveform file is invalid 2253 Reference error too many points received 2254 Referen
375. entage POWER REFLEVEL PERCENT LOW 15 sets the low reference level to 1596 of the signal amplitude POWER REFLEVEL PERCENT LOW might return POWER REFLEVEL PERCENT LOW 10 indicating that the percentage low reference level is set to 9096 of the signal amplitude POWer REFLevel PERCent MID lt 1 3 gt Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the mid reference percent level for waveform measurements Mid3 is specific to the power application This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer REFLevel PERCent MID lt 1 3 gt lt NR3 gt Ranges D 0 0 100 0 POWer REFLevel PERCent MID lt 1 3 gt lt NR3 gt is the mid value in percentage POWER REFLEVEL PERCENT MID1 25 sets the mid reference voltage to 25 POWER REFLEVEL PERCENT MID1 might return POWER REFLEVEL PERCENT MID1 50 0000 indicating that the mid reference voltage level is set to 50 POWer RIPPle No Query Form Conditions 2 284 Does a vertical autoset for ripple measurements or sets the vertical offset to 0 This command requires a DPO4PWR application module 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Power POWer RIPPle VERTAUTOSet VERTDEFault VERTAUTOSet automatically scales the source waveform to optimize ripple measurements VERTDEFau It sets the vertical offset of the source waveform to 0 volts
376. er Group Syntax Arguments Bus BUS B lt x gt SPI SELect 55 POLARity LOW HIGH BUS B lt x gt SPI SELect SS POLARity LOW specifies an active low polarity HIGH specifies an active high polarity BUS B lt x gt SPI SELect SS SOUrce Conditions Group Syntax Arguments BUS B lt x gt STATE Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments 2 110 Sets or returns the SPI SS source for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Bus BUS B lt x gt SPI SELect SS SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 BUS B x SPI SELect SS soUrce CH1 CH4 DO D15 is the channel to use as the SPI SS source Sets or returns the on off state of bus x where x is the bus number Bus BUS B lt x gt STATE lt NR1 gt OFF ON BUS B lt X gt STATE SELect BUS lt x gt ON or lt NR1 gt 0 turns on the bus OFF or lt NR1 gt 0 turns off the bus 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual BUS B lt x gt TYPE Group Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Sets or returns the bus type for lt x gt where x is the bus number The supported bus types are dependent on the oscilloscope model and the installed application keys Bus BUS B lt x gt TYPE 1I2C SPI CAN RS232C PARal lel BUS lt gt 2 specifies the Inter IC bus SPI sp
377. er POWer STATIStics MODE OFF ALL POWer STATIstics MODE ALL turns on measurement statistics display OFF turns all measurements statistics off POWER STATISTICS MODE OFF turns measurements statistics display off POWER STATISTICS MODE might return MEASUREMENT STATISTICS MODE ALL indicating that measurement statistics are turned on and all statistics are being displayed for each measurement POWer STATIstics WElghting Conditions Group Syntax Sets the number of samples which are included for the statistics computations for mean and the standard deviation Performs the same function as the MEASUrement STATIstics WElIghting command This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer STATIStics WEIghting NR1 Ranges L 2 1000 POWer STATIStics WEIghting 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 297 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Arguments Examples lt NR1 gt is the number of samples used for the mean and standard deviation statistical accumulations POWER STATISTICS WEIGHTING 4 sets statistical weighting to four samples POWER STATISTICS WEIGHTING might return POWER STATISTICS WEIGHTING 4 indicating that statistics weighting is currently set to 4 samples POWer SWLoss CONDCALCmethod Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the power application switching loss conduction calculation method This command requires a DPO4PWR
378. er A BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio CONDition 2 394 Sets or returns the trigger condition for the AUDIO bus Start of Frame or Data 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions This command requires DPO4AUDIO application module Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A BUS B 1 4 AUDio CONDition SOF DATA TRIGger A BUS B 1 4 AUDiO CONDi tion Arguments SOF enables triggering on the start of frame DATA enables triggering on matching data TRIGger A BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio DATa HIVALue Sets or returns the trigger data upper word for the AUDIO bus Conditions This command requires DPO4AUDIO application module Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDi0 DATa HIVALue String TRIGger A BUS B 1 4 AUDiO DATa HIVALue TRIGger A BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio DATa OFFSet Sets or returns the trigger data offset for the AUDIO bus Conditions This command requires DPO4AUDIO application module Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A BUS B 1 4 AUDiO DATa OFFSet lt NR1 gt TRIGger A BUS B 1 4 AUDiO DATa OFFSet Arguments lt 1 gt is the trigger data offset value 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 395 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio DATa QUALIifier Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the trigger data qualifier for the AUDIO bus This command requires DPO4AUDIO application module Trigger
379. er A BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio DATa HIVALue Sets or returns the trigger data upper word for the AUDIO bus TRIGger A BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio DATa OFFSet Sets or returns the trigger data offset for the AUDIO bus TRIGger A BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio DATa QUALifier Sets or returns the trigger data qualifier for the AUDIO bus TRIGger A BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio DATa VALue Sets or returns the trigger data lower word for the AUDIO bus TRIGger A BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio DATa WORD Sets or returns the trigger data alignment for the AUDIO bus TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN CONDition TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa DIRection Sets or returns the CAN condition Sets or returns the CAN trigger condition to be valid onaREAD WRITE or either TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa QUALIifier Sets or returns the CAN data qualifier TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa SIZe Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for CAN trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for CAN trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN FRAMEtype Sets or returns the CAN trigger frame type TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess MODe Sets or returns the CAN addressing mode TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN Dentifier ADDRess VALue Sets or returns the binary address string used for the CAN trigger 804000 and DPO4000 Series
380. er A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa OFFSet Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the offset of the data string in bytes to be used for FLEXRAY trigger Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray DATa OFFSet lt NR1 gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa OFFSet NR1 is the FLEXRAY data offset in bytes A byte offset of 1 signifies don t care and no byte offset is used The instrument will trigger or match any byte value that fits SEARCH SEARCHL TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA OFFSET 10 sets the FLEXRAY data offset to 10 bytes SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA OFFSET might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA OFFSET 0 indicating the offset 1s set to 0 bytes SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa QUALIifier 2 342 Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the FLEXRAY data qualifier Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS lt gt FLEXray DATa QUALi fier LESSThan MOREThan EQUal UNEQual LESSEQual MOREEQual INrange OUTrange SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray DATa QUAL i fier LESSThan sets the FLEXRAY data qualifier to less than MOREThan sets the FLEXRAY data qualifier to greater than EQUa sets the FLEXRAY data qualifier to equal UNEQual sets the FLEXRAY data qualifier to not equal LESSEQual sets the FLEXRAY data qualifier to less than
381. erical information in the bus waveform lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4AUTO DPO4EMBD or DPO4COMP application module Bus BUS B lt x gt DISplay FORMAt BINary HEXadecimal ASCII BUS B x DISplay FORMAt BUS B lt x gt TYPE BINary specifies a binary data display HEXadecimal specifies a hexadecimal data display ASCII specifies an ASCII format for RS 232 only MIXed specifies a mixed format for LIN and FlexRay only BUS B lt x gt DiSplay TYPe Conditions Sets or returns the display type for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number You can set up the bus to display the protocol information the logic waveforms that comprise the bus or both This command requires a DPO4AUTO DPO4EMBD or DPO4COMP application module 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 93 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Arguments Bus BUS B lt x gt DISplay TYPe BUS BOTh BUS B lt x gt DISplay TYPe BUS displays the bus waveforms only BOTh displays both the bus and logic waveforms BUS B lt x gt FLEXray BITRate Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the bit rate for FLEXRAY Bus BUS B lt x gt FLEXray BITRate lt NR1 gt BUS B lt x gt FLEXray BITRate lt NR1 gt specifies the FLEXRAY bit rate You can enter any positive integer and the instrument will coerce the value to the closest supported bit rate BUS B1 FLEXR
382. ets or returns the type of B trigger The only supported B trigger type is EDGE Trigger TRIGger B TYPe EDGE TRIGger B TYPe TRIGger A TYPe EDGE sets the B trigger type to edge 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples EDGE sets the trigger type to edge TRIGGER B TYPE might return TRIGGER B TYPE EDGE TRIGger B UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt Sets the upper threshold for the channel selected Each channel can have an independent level Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger B UPPerthreshold CH x lt NR3 gt TTL TRIGger B UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt Arguments specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V lt NR3 gt is the clock level in volts TRIGger EXTernal Query Only Returns all external trigger parameters Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger EXTernal TRIGger EXTernal PRObe Sets or returns the attenuation factor value of the external probe connector Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger ExXTernal PRObe lt NR3 gt TRIGger EXTernal PRObe Arguments NR3 is the attenuation factor of the probe Examples TRIGGER EXTERNAL PROBE might return TRIGGER EXTERNAL PROBE 1 0E1 for a 10X probe 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 471 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger EXTernal YUNIts Query Only Group Syntax Examples TRIGger FREQuency Group Syntax Examples Returns the external
383. ets the A logic trigger input to logic HIGH for channel 2 TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk EDGE Group 2 432 Sets the polarity of the clock channel Trigger 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A LOGIC INPut CLOCk EDGE FALL RISe TRIGger A LOGIC INPut CLOCK EDGE RISe specifies to trigger on the rising or positive edge of a signal FALL specifies to trigger on the falling or negative edge of a signal TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk SOUrce Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the channel to use as the clock source The clock can be selected as NONE A selection of None implies pattern trigger Any other selection implies state trigger Trigger TRIGger A LOGIC INPut CLOCk SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 NONE TRIGger A LOGIC INPUut CLOCk SOUrce CH1 CH4 specifies the analog input channel source DO D15 specifies the digital input channel source NONE specifies a Pattern trigger TRIGger A LOGIc INPut D lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the logic pattern for a trigger on digital channel lt x gt where x is the channel number Trigger TRIGger A LOGIC INPut D x HIGH LOW xX TRIGger A LOGIC INPut D lt x gt High specifies the logic high state Low specifies the logic low state X specifies a don t care state 504000 and DPO4000 Se
384. eturn POWER HARMONICS RESULTS 5 indicating that the IEC power is set to 5 W POWer HARMonics RESults IEC POWERFactor Query Only Returns the IEC power factor measurement Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Group Power Syntax POWer HARMonics RESults IEC POWERFactor 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 265 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Examples POWER HARMONICS RESULTS IEC POWERFACTOR might return POWER HARMONICS RESULTS IEC POWERFACTOR 9 1900E 37 indicating that the IEC power factor is set to 9 1900E 37 POWer HARMonics RESults PASSFail Query Only Returns the overall harmonics test result PASS FAIL or NA Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Group Power Syntax POWer HARMonics RESults PASSFai 1 Examples POWER HARMONICS RESULTS PASSFAIL might return POWER HARMONICS RESULTS PASSFAIL PASS indicating that the harmonics test passed POWer HARMonics RESults RMS Query Only Returns the root mean square value of the harmonics source waveform Conditions This command requires DPO4PWR application module Group Power Syntax X POWer HARMonics RESults RMS Examples POWER HARMONICS RESULTS RMS might return PONER HARMONICS RESULTS RMS 1 0 indicating that the harmonics source waveform RMS is set to 1 0 POWer HARMonics RESults SAVe No Query Form Saves the harmonic results to the specified file
385. eturns the identification string of the connected adaptor module and firmware version 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Command Groups Table 2 26 Miscellaneous Commands cont Command Description HEADer Sets or returns the Response Header Enable State ID Returns identifying information about the oscilloscope and its firmware IDN Returns the same information as the ID command except the data is formatted according to Tektronix Codes amp Formats LANGuage Sets or returns the user interface display language LOCk Sets or returns the front panel lock state LRN Returns a listing of oscilloscope settings NEWpass Changes the password for user protected data PASSWord Enables the PUD and NEWpass set commands REM Specifies a comment which is ignored by the oscilloscope SET Returns a listing of oscilloscope settings TEKSecure Initializes both waveform and setup memories TIME Sets or returns the time displayed by the oscilloscope TOTaluptime Returns the total number of hours that the oscilloscope has been turned on since the nonvolatile memory was last programmed TRG Performs the group execute trigger GET TST Tests the interface and returns the status UNLock Unlocks front panel 05 Returns the USBTMC information used by the USB hosts to determine the instrument interfaces USBTMC PRODUCTID DECimal Returns the USBTMC product ID USB
386. eturns the polar radius for the specified cursor where x can be either or 2 Group Cursor Syntax CURSor XY POLar RADIUS POSITION lt x gt CURSor XY POLar RADIUS UNIts Query Only Returns the polar radius units Group Cursor Syntax CURSor XY POLar RADIUS UNItS 2 140 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CURSor XY POLar THETA DELta Query Only Returns the XY cursor polar angle delta Group Cursor Syntax CURSOr POLar THETA DELta CURSor XY POLar THETA POSITION lt x gt Query Only Returns the cursor X or cursor Y polar coordinate where x is either 1 or 2 Group Cursor Syntax CURSOr XY THETA POSITION lt x gt CURSor XY POLar THETA UNIts Query Only Returns the cursor coordinate units Group Cursor Syntax CURSOor XY THETA UNItS CURSor XY PRODUCT DELta Query Only Returns the difference between the cursors X position and cursor Y position The AX AY value is calculated as X2 x Y2 Y1 Group Cursor Syntax CURSOr XY PRODUCT DELta 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 141 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CURSor XY PRODUCT POSITION lt x gt Query Only Returns the position of the X or Y cursor used to calculate the X x Y cursor measurement Position 1 x Y 1 Position 2 X2 x Y2 The cursor is specified by x which can be 1 or 2 Group Cursor Syntax
387. eturns the waveform label for channel lt x gt CH lt x gt OFFSet Sets or returns the channel offset CH lt x gt POSition Sets or returns the channel vertical position CH lt x gt PRObe Returns the gain resistance units and ID of the probe that is attached to the specified channel CH lt x gt PRObe AUTOZero Sets the TekVPI probe attached to the specified channel input to autozero CH lt x gt PRObe COMMAND Sets the state of the specified probe control CH lt x gt PRObe DEGAUss Starts degauss autozero cycle on a TekVPI current probe attached to the specified channel input CH lt x gt PRObe DEGAUss STATE Returns the state of the probe degauss CH lt x gt PRObe FORCEDRange Sets or returns the range on a TekVPI probe attached to the specified channel CH lt x gt PRObe GAIN Sets or returns the gain factor of the probe that is attached to the specified channel CH lt x gt PRObe ID Returns the type and serial number of the probe that is attached to the specified channel 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 59 Command Groups 2 60 Table 2 32 Vertical Commands cont Command Description CH lt x gt PRObe ID SERnumber Returns the serial number of the probe that is attached to the specified channel CH lt x gt PRObe ID TYPE Returns the type of probe that is attached to the specified channel CH lt x gt PRObe MODel Sets or returns the probe mod
388. f cycles counted for the switching loss calculation POWer SWLoss RDSon Sets or returns RDSON value for use in switching loss calculations when the conduction calculation method is RDSON POWer SWLoss REFLevel ABSolute GATEMid Sets or returns the mid voltage reference level used in switching loss power measurements in volts POWer SWLoss REFLevel ABSolute LOWCurrent Sets or returns the low current reference level used in switching loss power measurements in amperes 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Table 2 28 Power Commands cont Command Command Groups Description POWer SWLoss REFLevel ABSolute LOWVoltage Sets or returns the low voltage reference level used in switching loss power measurements in volts POWer SWLoss REFLevel PERCent GATEMid Sets or returns the mid voltage reference level used in switching loss power measurements in percentage POWer SWLoss REFLevel PERCent LOWCurrent Sets or returns the low current reference level used in switching loss power measurements in percentage POWer SWLoss REFLevel PERCent LOWVoltage Sets or returns the low voltage reference level used in switching loss power measurements in percentage POWer SWLoss TOFF ENERGY MAX Returns the maximum Toff energy switching loss calculation POWer SWLoss TOFF ENERGY MEAN Returns the mean Toff energy switching loss calculation POWer SWLoss TOFF ENERGY MIN POWer S
389. fault 50 amplitude points of a positive pulse The measurement is made on all the cycles in the waveform or gated region NwIdth negative width measurement is the distance time between the middle reference default 50 amplitude points of a negative pulse The measurement is made on all the cycles in the waveform or gated region PERIOd is the time required to complete the first cycle in a waveform or the gated region The time is measured between the mid reference default being 50 amplitude points of the waveform PDUty positive duty cycle is the ratio of the positive pulse width to the signal period expressed as a percentage It is measured on all the cycles in the waveform or gated region Positive Duty Cycle Positive Width Period x 100 NDUty negative duty cycle is the ratio of the negative pulse width to the signal period expressed as a percentage The duty cycle is measured on all the cycles in the waveform or gated region Negative Duty Cycle Negative Width Period x 10096 FREQuency measures all the cycles in the waveform or gated region Frequency is the reciprocal of the period and is measured in hertz Hz where 1 Hz 1 cycle per second Frequency 1 Period POWER MODULATION TYPE NWIDTH sets the modulation type to Negative Width POWER MODULATION TYPE might return POWER MODULATION TYPE PWI indicating that the modulation type is set to Positive Width 804000 and DPO4000 Se
390. fied harmonic for the MIL STD 1399 testing standard POWer HARMonics RESults IEC FUNDamental Returns the IEC fundamental frequency POWer HARMonics RESults IEC Returns the IEC harmonics test result for the HARM3ALTernate 3rd harmonic PASS FAIL or NA POWer HARMonics RESults IEC Returns the IEC harmonics test result for the HARMBALTernate 5th harmonic PASS FAIL or NA POWer HARMonics RESults IEC POHC Returns the IEC POHC measurement 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Table 2 28 Power Commands cont Command Command Groups Description POWer HARMonics RESults IEC POHL Returns the IEC POHL measurement POWer HARMonics RESults IEC POWer Returns the IEC input power measurement POWer HARMonics RESults IEC POWERFactor Returns the IEC power factor measurement POWer HARMonics RESults PASSFail Returns the overall harmonics test result PASS FAIL or NA POWer HARMonics RESults RMS Returns the root mean square value of the source waveform POWer HARMonics RESults SAVe Saves the harmonic results to the specified file in CSV format POWer HARMonics RESults THDF POWer HARMonics RESults THDR Returns the Total Harmonic Distortion THD in percentage measured as a ratio to the RMS value of the fundamental component of the source waveform Returns the Total Harmonic Distortion THD in percentage measured as a ratio to the RMS value of
391. fied file does not exist or is not readable an appropriate error event is posted File System FILESystem WRITEFile file path data FILESystem CWD file path is the quoted string that defines the file name and path If the path is within the current working directory specify the file name only data can be either DEFINITE LENGTH encoding or INDEFINITE LENGTH ARBITRARY BLOCK PROGRAM DATA encoding as described in IEEE488 2 FPAnel PRESS No Query Form Group Syntax 2 178 Simulates the action of pressing a specified front panel button When the front panel is locked the front panel button and multipurpose knob operations are suspended The FPAnel PRESS and the FPAnel TURN commands will also not work You can work around this by using the appropriate programmatic interface commands instead of the front panel commands Miscellaneous FPAnel PRESS button 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order button is the name of a front panel button Most of the argument names associate directly with their front panel buttons For example AUTOSet is for the Autoset button The few commands that do not have obvious associations are listed below Table 2 38 FPAnel PRESS arguments Argument Description ACQuire Acquire button AUTOset Autoset button BMENU lt x gt Screen bo
392. fies the XY readout in X Y format RAT10 specifies the XY readout in X Y format CURSor XY RECTangular X DELta Query Only Returns the cursor X delta value in rectangular coordinates Group Cursor Syntax CURSor xY RECTangular X DELta CURSor XY RECTangular X POSITION x Sets or returns the X rectangular coordinate for cursor 1 or cursor 2 The cursor is specified by x and can be either 1 or 2 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 143 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Cursor Syntax CURSor XY RECTangular X POSITION lt x gt lt NR3 gt CURSor XY RECTangular X POSITION lt x gt Arguments lt NR3 gt is the coordinate in volts CURSor XY RECTangular X UNIts Query Only Returns the cursor X rectangular units Group Cursor Syntax CURSor xY RECTangular X UNIts CURSor XY RECTangular Y DELta Query Only Returns The cursor Y delta value in rectangular coordinates Group Cursor Syntax CURSor xY RECTangular Y DELta CURSor XY RECTangular Y POSITION lt x gt Sets or returns the Y rectangular coordinate for cursor or cursor 2 The cursor is specified by x and be either or 2 Group Cursor Syntax CURSor XY RECTangular Y POSITION x lt NR3 gt CURSor XY RECTangular Y POSITION lt x gt Arguments NR3 is the coordinate in volts 2 144 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CURSor XY RECTangular Y UNIts Q
393. fies which Reference waveform data will be transferred from the oscilloscope to the controller waveforms 1 through 4 00 015 specifies which digital channel data will be transferred from the oscilloscope to the controller channels 0 through 15 MSO models only DIGital specifies that the Digital waveform data will be transferred from the oscilloscope to the controller MSO models only 2 149 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Examples DATa STARt Group Syntax Related Commands DATa STOP 2 150 Arguments Examples DATA SOURCE might return DATA SOURCE REF3 indicating that the source for the waveform data which is transferred using a CURVe query is reference 3 DATA SOURCE CH1 specifies that the CH1 waveform will be transferred in the next CURVe query Sets or returns the starting data point for incoming or outgoing waveform transfer This command allows for the transfer of partial waveforms to and from the oscilloscope Waveform Transfer DATa STARt lt NR1 gt DATa STARt CURVe DATa DATa STOP WFMInpre NR_ Pt WFMOutpre NR Pt lt 1 gt is the first data point that will be transferred which ranges from 1 to the record length Data will be transferred from NR1 to DATa STOP or the record length whichever is less If NR1 is greater than the record length the last data point in the record is transferred DATa STARt and DATa STOP are order independent When DATa STOP is greater t
394. for voltage source or 0 amperes for current source POWer RIPPle RESults AMPLitude Query Only Conditions Group Syntax Examples Returns the peak to peak ripple measurement This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer RIPPle RESults AMPLitude POWER RIPPLE RESULTS AMPLITUDE might return POWER RIPPLE RESULTS AMPLITUDE 1 indicating that the peak to peak amplitude is set to 1 V POWer RIPPle RESults MAX Query Only Conditions Group Syntax Examples Returns the maximum of the peak to peak ripple measurements This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer RIPPle RESults MAX POWER RIPPLE RESULTS MAX might return POWER RIPPLE RESULTS MAX 1 1 indicating that the maximum peak to peak amplitude is set to 1 1 V 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 285 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order POWer RIPPle RESults MEAN Query Only Conditions Group Syntax Examples Returns the mean of the peak to peak ripple measurements This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer RIPPle RESults MEAN POWER RIPPLE RESULTS MEAN might return PONER RIPPLE RESULTS MEAN 1 0 indicating that the mean peak to peak amplitude is set to 1 0 V POWer RIPPle RESults MIN Query Only Conditions Group Syntax Examples Returns the minimum of the peak to peak ripple measurement This command re
395. for a Parallel trigger search SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B x PARallel vALue lt QString gt SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B x PARallel VALue Qstring is the binary data string SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C CONDition Conditions Group Syntax Sets or returns the condition for an RS 232 trigger search SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This command requires a DPO4COMP application module Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C CONDition RXSTArt RXDATA RXENDPacket TXSTArt TXDATA TXENDPacket SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C CONDi tion 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 357 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Arguments RXSTArt specifies a search based on the RX Start Bit RXDATA specifies a search based on RX Data RXENDPacket specifies a search based on the RX End of Packet condition TXSTArt specifies a search base on the TX Start Bit TXDATA specifies a search based on TX Data TXENDPacket specifies a search based on the TX End of Packet condition SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa SiZe Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the length of the data string for an RS 232 trigger search if the trigger condition is RX SEARCH
396. fore the trigger point 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt Query Only Returns all measurement parameters for the specified active measurement lt x gt Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt COUNt Query Only Returns the number of values accumulated for this measurement since the last statistical reset Values may be ignored if they generated an error Measurements are specified by x which ranges from 1 through 4 Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt COUNt Examples MEASUREMENT MEAS3 COUNT might return MEASUREMENT MEAS3 COUNT 3247 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay Query Only Returns the delay measurement parameters for the measurement specified by x which ranges from 1 through 4 Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS x DELay Examples MEASUREMENT MEAS1 might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 DELAY DIRECTION FORWARDS EDGE1 RISE EDGE2 RISE 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 217 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay DIRection Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the starting point and direction that determines the delay to edge when taking a delay measurement Use the MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE2 command to specify the waveform Measurement MEASUremen
397. ge BOX MESSage CLEAR MESSage STATE lt QString gt is the message and can include any of the characters shown in the Character Set Appendix A The maximum length of the message is 1000 characters the instrument ignores longer strings The message box size is set to fit the message You can also set the message area height and width using the MESSage BOX command The length of the message that fits in the message area depends on the contents of the message because the width of characters varies 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 237 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order 2 238 If the message exceeds the limits of the message box either horizontally or vertically the portion of the message that exceeds the limits will not be displayed The message string itself is not altered The entire message can be returned as a query response regardless of what is displayed in the message box The message is left justified and is displayed on a single line starting with the top most line in the window A new line character can be embedded in the string to position the message on multiple lines You can also use white space and tab characters to position the message within a line Text which does not fit within the message box 18 truncated Defining a message box text string erases any previously displayed text within the message box You can send a tab by transmitting a tab character X or x09 followed characters representing the
398. ger if all conditions are false OR specifies to trigger if any of the conditions is true TRIGGER A LOGIC FUNCTION might return TRIGGER A LOGIC FUNCTION NAND which indicates that the oscilloscope will trigger if the AND logic conditions are false TRIGGER A LOGIC FUNCTION AND sets the logical combination of channels to be true when all conditions are true 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 431 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order TRIGger A LOGIc INPut Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the logic input values for all channels If a clock channel is defined it returns the clock source and edge Trigger TRIGger A LOGIC INPut TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT might return TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT HIGH CH2 X CH3 X indicating that a logic high is expected on channel 1 while channel 2 and channel three are don t care TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CH lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the logical input condition for the channel specified by lt x gt Trigger TRIGger A LOGIC INPut CH lt x gt HIGH LOW X TRIGger A LOGIC INPut CH lt x gt HIGH specifies the logic high LOW specifies the logic low X specifies a don t care state TRIGGER A LOGIC 1 might return TRIGGER LOGIC INPUT X indicating that the setting for the A logic trigger input to channel 1 does not matter TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT CH2 HIGH s
399. ges from 0 to 600 in increments of 10 The unit of measure is watt POWER HARMONICS IEC INPUTPOWER 600 sets the class D input power to 600 W POWER HARMONICS IEC INPUTPOWER might return POWER HARMONICS IEC INPUTPOWER 100 indicating that the class D input power is set to 100 W POWer HARMonics IEC LINEFREQuency Conditions Group 2 254 Sets or returns the line frequency for the IEC standard This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order POWer HARMonics IEC LINEFREQuency lt NR3 gt POWer HARMonics LINEFREQuency lt NR3 gt is the line frequency The valid values are 50 and 60 POWER HARMONICS TEC LINEFREQUENCY 50 sets the line frequency to 50 Hz POWER HARMONICS IEC LINEFREQUENCY might return PONER HARMONICS IEC LINEFREQUENCY 60 indicating that the line frequency value is set to 60 Hz POWer HARMonics IEC OBSPERiod Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the IEC observation period This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer HARMOniCs IEC OBSPERiOod lt NR3 gt POWer HARMonics IEC OBSPERiod NR3 is the IEC observation period Valid values ranges from 0 2 to 10 s POWER HARMONICS 3 sets the IEC observation period to 3 0000 s POWER HARMONICS IEC OBSP
400. gger to 50 mV for channel 2 TRIGGER A UPPERTHRESHOLD CH2 might return UPPERTHRESHOLD CH2 1 2000E 01 indicating that the upper limit of the pulse runt trigger is set to 120 mV 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 455 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order TRIGger A VIDeo Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the A trigger video parameters Trigger TRIGger A VIDeo TRIGGER A VIDEO might return TRIGGER A VIDEO POLARITY POSITIVE SOURCE CH1 STANDARD NTSC SYNC ALLLINES HOLDOFF FIELD 0 0000 TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM FORMAT PROGRESSIVE SCANRATE15K TRIGGER A VIDEO LINE 1 HDTV FORMAT HD1080160 TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom F ORMat TYPE Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples 2 456 Sets or returns the video trigger format Use this command only when the video format is set to custom This command requires a DPO4VID application module Trigger TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom FORMat TYPE INTERLAced PROGressive TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom FORMat TYPE INTERLAced argument sets the format for interlaced video lines PROGressive argument sets the format for progressive video lines TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM FORMAT PROGRESSIVE sets the custom format for the A video trigger to progressive lines TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM FORMAT might return TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM FORMAT INTERLACED indicating that interlaced is selected as the custom format for the A v
401. ght return CURVE 61 62 61 60 60 59 59 58 58 59 NOTE Curve data is transferred from the oscilloscope asynchronously depending on the length of the curve record Such transfers may require several seconds to complete During this period the oscilloscope will not respond to the user controls You can interrupt these asynchronous data transfers by sending a device clear message to the oscilloscope or by interrupting the query with another command or query In order to verify that curve data has been completely transferred it is recommended that you follow such queries with an ESR query to verify there are no error bits set You can also check the event queue to determine the cause of the error If the error was caused by an interrupted query then the asynchronous data transfer was not complete when the ESR query was sent such cases it may be necessary to increase the program 5 time out value to ensure that all data is transferred and read Sets or returns the format and location of waveform data transferred with the CURVe query or CURVe command Waveform Transfer DATa INIT SNAp 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Related Commands Arguments Examples DATa DESTination Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples DATa ENCdg Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CURVe DATa STARt DATa STOP DATa ENCdg WFMInpre NR_ Pt WFMOutpre NR_ Pt INIT initializes the waveform
402. gt 12C CONDition Sets or returns the trigger condition for I2C trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C DATa DIRection Sets or returns the 2 trigger condition valid on READ WRITE or either TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa SlZe Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for 2 trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa VALue Sets or returns the binary data string used for 12 triggering TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN CONDition Sets or returns the trigger condition for LIN TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa HIVALue Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for LIN trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa QUALifier Sets or returns the LIN data qualifier TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa SiZe Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for LIN trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa VALue Sets or returns the binary data string TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN ERRTYPE Sets or returns the error type 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 51 Command Groups 2 52 Table 2 31 Trigger Commands cont Command Description TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN Dentifier VALue Sets or returns the binary address string used for LIN trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt PARallel VALue Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for a Parallel trigger TRIGger A BUS B x RS232C CONDi
403. gt SOURCE 1 Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the source for all single source measurements and specifies the source to measure from when taking a delay measurement or phase measurement Measurements are specified by lt x gt which ranges from 1 through 4 Measurement MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE 1 CH x MATH y REF x D x MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE 1 CH x is an input channel waveform where x is the channel number MATH lt y gt is a math waveform where y is 1 REF x is a reference waveform where x is the reference channel number D lt x gt is a digital waveform where x is the digital channel number Digital channels are available only on MSO models MEASUREMENT MEAS2 SOURCE1 1 specifies Math 1 as the measurement 2 source MEASUREMENT MEAS1 SOURCE1 might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 SOURCE 1 1 indicating that Mathl is the measurement 2 source MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE2 2 220 Sets or returns the reference source to measure to when taking a delay measurement or phase measurement Measurements are specified by lt x gt which ranges from 1 through 4 Tip Source2 measurements only apply to phase and delay measurement types which require both a target Sourcel and reference Source2 source 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alpha
404. han DATa STARt the values will be swapped internally for the CURVE query DATA START might return DATA START 214 indicating that data point 214 is the first waveform data point that will be transferred DATA START 10 specifies that the waveform transfer will begin with data point 10 Sets or returns the last data point that will be transferred when using the CURVe query This command allows for the transfer of partial waveforms from the oscilloscope Changes to the record length value are not automatically reflected in the DATa STOP value As record length is varied the DATa STOP value must be explicitly changed to ensure the entire record is transmitted In other words curve results will not automatically and correctly reflect increases in record length if 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples DATE Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order the distance from DATa STARt to DATa STOP stays smaller than the increased record length Waveform Transfer DATa STOP lt NR1 gt DATa STOP CURVe DATa DATa STARt WFMInpre NR_ Pt WFMOutpre NR_ Pt NR1 is the last data point that will be transferred which ranges from 1 to the record length If NR1 is greater than the record length then data will be transferred up to the record length If both DATa STARt and DATa STOP are greater than the record leng
405. hat the maximum value is 1 0 A for the 400th harmonic POWer HARMonics RESults HAR lt 1 400 gt LIMit Query Only The IEC and MIL standards specify a limit for each harmonic magnitude Returns the limit in absolute units or as a percentage of the fundamental as specified by 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 259 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Conditions Group Syntax Examples the standard IEC Class C Table 2 and MIL standards specify the limit as a percentage of the fundamental This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer HARMonics RESults HAR lt 1 400 gt LIMit POWER HARMONICS RESULTS HAR3 LIMIT might return POWER HARMONICS RESULTS HAR3 LIMIT 2 30 indicating that the harmonic magnitude limit for IEC standard for the 3rd harmonic is set to 2 30 A POWer HARMonics RESults HAR lt 1 400 gt PHASe Query Only Conditions Group Syntax Examples Returns the phase of the harmonic in degrees The phase is measured relative to the zero crossing of the reference waveform When there is no reference waveform the phase is relative to the fundamental component This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer HARMonics RESults HAR 1 400 PHASe POWER HARMONICS RESULTS HAR400 PHASE might return POWER HARMONICS RESULTS HARA400 PHASE 0 indicating that the harmonic phase is set to 0 in degrees POWer HARMonics RESults HAR
406. he Event Status Enable Register ESER The ESER prevents events from being reported to the Status Byte Register STB For a detailed discussion on how to use registers see Registers Status and Error ESE NR1 ESE CLS DESE ESR EVENT EVMsg SRE STB NR1 specifies the binary bits of the ESER according to this value which ranges from 0 through 255 The power on default for the ESER 15 0 if PSC is 1 If PSC is 0 the ESER maintains the previous power cycle value through the current power cycle 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order NOTE Setting the DESER and the ESER to the same values allows only those codes to be entered into the Event Queue and summarized on the ESB bit bit 5 of the Status Byte Register Use the DESE command to set the DESER Examples ESE 209 sets the ESER to binary 11010001 which enables the PON URQ EXE and OPC bits ESE might return 186 showing that the ESER contains the binary value 10111010 ESR Query Only Returns the contents of the Standard Event Status Register SESR ESR also clears the SESR reading the SESR clears it For a detailed discussion on how to use registers see Registers Group Status and Error Syntax ESR Related Commands ALLEv CLS DESE ESE EVENT EVMsg SRE STB Examples ESR might return 213 showing that the SESR contains the binary value 11010101 ETHERnet DHCP
407. he TX End of Packet condition TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa SiZe Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the length of the data string in Bytes for an RS 232 Trigger if the trigger condition is RXDATA Applies to bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4COMP application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa SIZe NRI is the length of the data string in bytes TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa VALue Conditions Sets or returns the binary data string for an RS 232 trigger if the trigger condition involves RX Applies to bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4COMP application module 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 421 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa VALue TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa VALue Arguments lt 05 gt is the binary data string to be used for the trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa SiZe Sets or returns the length of the data string for an RS 232 trigger if the trigger condition is TXDATA Applies to bus lt x gt where x is the bus number Conditions This command requires DPO4COMP application module Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt TRIGger A BUS B x RS232
408. he acquisition Turns on or off the math waveform or returns whether the math waveform is on or off SELect REF lt x gt Turns on or off the specified reference waveform or returns whether the specified reference waveform is on or off Waveform Transfer Command Group Use the commands in the Waveform Transfer Command Group to transfer waveform data points to and from the oscilloscope Waveform data points are a collection of values that define a waveform One data value usually represents one data point in the waveform record When working with envelope waveforms each data value is either the minimum or maximum of a min max pair Before you transfer waveform data you must specify the data format record length and waveform source or destination 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 61 Command Groups 2 62 Data Formats All data points for DPO and MSO models are signed integer format only Valid data widths for CH1 CH4 MATH REF1 REF4 and 0 15 are 1 and 2 byte widths The valid data widths for the digital collection is either 4 or 8 byte widths The oscilloscope can transfer waveform data in either ASCII or binary format You specify the format with the DATa ENCdg command ASCII Data ASCII data is represented by signed integer values The range of the values depends on the byte width specified One byte wide data ranges from 128 to 127 Two byte wide data ranges from 32768 to 32767 Each data value
409. he alias named SETUPI ALlas DELEte ALL No Query Form Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Deletes all existing aliases Alias ALIas DELEte ALL ALIas DELEte ALIas DELEte NAMe ALIAS DELETE ALL deletes all existing aliases ALlas DELEte NAMe No Query Form Group Syntax Arguments Examples ALlas STATE Group Syntax 2 76 Removes a specified alias This command is identical to ALIas DELEte Alias ALIas DELEte NAMe lt QString gt lt QString gt is the name of the alias to remove Using ALIas DELEte NAMe without specifying an alias causes an execution error lt QString gt must be an existing alias ALIAS STARTUP deletes the alias named STARTUP Turns aliases on or off This command is identical to the ALIas command Alias ALIas STATE lt NR1 gt OFF ON ALIas STATE 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Examples ALLEv Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order OFF or lt NR1 gt 0 turns alias expansion off If a defined alias is sent when ALlas STATE is OFF a command error 102 is generated ON or lt 1 gt 0 turns alias expansion on When a defined alias is received the specified command sequence is substituted for the alias and executed ALIAS STATE OFF turns the command alias feature off ALIAS STATE returns 0 when the alias featur
410. he associated reference level parameter for all MEASurements IMMed and the four periodic measurements Group Measurement Syntax X MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute HIGH lt NR3 gt MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute HIGH 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 227 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Related Commands Arguments Examples MEASUrement REFLevel METHod MEASUrement IMMed TYPe MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TY Pe lt NR3 gt is the high reference level in volts The default is 0 0 V MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE HIGH 1 71 sets the high reference level to 1 71 V MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE HIGH might return MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE HIGH 1 7100E 00 indicating that the absolute high reference level is set to 1 71 V MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute _LOW Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples 2 228 Sets or returns the low reference level and is the lower reference level when MEASUrement REFLevel METHod is set to Absolute NOTE this command affects the associated reference level parameter for all MEASurements IMMed and the four periodic measurements Measurement MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute LOW NR3 MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute LOW MEASUrement REFLevel METHod MEASUrement IMMed TYPe MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TY Pe lt NR3 gt is the low reference level in volts The default is 0 0 V MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE LOW 0 0 sets
411. he immediate measurement MEASUrement INDICators Returns all measurement indicator parameters MEASUrement INDICators HORZ lt x gt Returns the position of the specified horizontal measurement indicator MEASUrement INDICators NUMHORZ Returns the number of horizontal measurement indicators currently being displayed MEASUrement INDICators NUMVERT Returns the number of vertical measurement indicators currently being displayed MEASUrement INDICators STATE Sets or returns the state of visible measurement indicators MEASUrement INDICators VERT lt x gt Returns the value of the specified vertical measurement indicator MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt Returns all measurement parameters MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt COUNt Returns the number of values accumulated since the last statistical reset MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay Returns the delay measurement parameters for the specified measurement MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay DIRection Sets or returns the search direction to use for delay measurements MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay EDGE lt x gt Sets or returns the slope of the edge to use for delay from and to waveform measurements MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt MAXimum Returns the maximum value found since the last statistical reset MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt MEAN Returns the mean value accumulated since the last statistical reset MEASUremen
412. he scale causes the waveform to be displayed larger Scale affects all waveforms but affects reference and math waveforms differently from channel waveforms B For reference and math waveforms this setting controls the display only graphically scaling these waveforms and having no affect on the acquisition hardware B For channel waveforms this setting controls the vertical size of the acquisition window as well as the display scale The range and resolution of scale values depends on the probe attached and any other external factors you have specified Vertical REF x VERTical SCAle lt NR3 gt REF x VERTical SsCATle CH lt x gt SCAle MATH 1 VERTical SCAle 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 321 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order REM No Query Form RST No Query Form 2 322 Arguments Examples Group Syntax Arguments Examples lt NR3 gt is the gain in user units per division REF4 VERTICAL SCALE 100E 03 sets the Reference 4 scale to 100 mV per division REF4 VERTICAL SCALE might return REF2 VERTICAL SCALE 1 0000e 00 indicating that the current vertical scale setting for Reference 2 is 1 V per division Embeds a comment within programs as a means of internally documenting the programs The oscilloscope ignores these embedded comment lines Miscellaneous REM lt QString gt lt QString gt is a string that can contain a maximum of 80 characters REM This i
413. he specified time delta TRIGGER A PULSE CLASS WIDTH specifies a width pulse for the A trigger TRIGGER A PULSE CLASS might return TRIGGER A PULSE CLASS WIDTH indicating that a pulse was found that is of the specified polarity and width 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A PULSEWIDth Query Only Returns the width parameters for the pulse width trigger Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A PULSEWIDth Examples TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH might return TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH POLARITY POSITIVE WHEN LESSTHAN WIDTH 8 0000E 9 TRIGger A PULSEWidth POLarity Sets or returns the polarity for the width trigger Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A PULSEWidth POLarity NEGative POSitive TRIGger A PULSEWidth POLarity Arguments NEGative specifies a negative pulse POSitive specifies a positive pulse Examples TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH POLARITY NEGATIVE sets the pulse polarity to negative TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH POLARITY might return TRIGGER A WIDTH POLARITY POSITIVE indicating a positive pulse TRIGger A PULSEWidth SOUrce Sets or returns the source for the pulse width trigger Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A PULSEWidth SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 LINE EXT TRIGger A PULSEWidth SOUrce 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 441 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Arguments Examples 1 4 specifies an analog input channel as the A edge trigger
414. he trigger 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 459 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order TRIGger A VIDeo LINE Conditions Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples TRIGGER A VIDEO HOLDOFF FIELD 4 5 sets the oscilloscope to wait 4 5 video fields before rearming the trigger Sets or returns the video line number on which the oscilloscope triggers Use the TRIGger A VIDeo SYNC FIELD command to actually trigger the oscilloscope on the line that you specify with this command This command requires a DPO4VID application module Trigger TRIGger A VIDeo LINE lt NR1 gt TRIGger A VIDeo LINE TRIGger A VIDeo SYNC FIELD lt NR1 gt argument is an integer that sets the video line number on which the oscilloscope triggers The following table lists the valid choices depending on the active video standard Table 2 43 Video Line Numbering Ranges Video Standard Line Number Range 525 NTSC 1 525 625 PAL SECAM 1 625 SECAM 1 625 TRIGGER VIDEO LINE 23 sets the oscilloscope to trigger on the line 23 TRIGGER A VIDEO LINE might return TRIGger A VIDeo LINE 10 indicating that the oscilloscope is set to trigger on line 10 TRIGger A VIDeo POLarity Conditions 2 460 Sets or returns the polarity of the A video trigger This command requires a DPO4VID application module 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Arguments Examples
415. he upper bandwidth limit NOTE Other values may be possible depending on the attached probes CH1 BANDWIDTH TWENTY sets the bandwidth of channel 1 to 20 MHz Sets or returns the input attenuator coupling setting for channel x where x is the channel number Vertical CH x COUPling AC DC GND CH x COUPling AC sets channel x to AC coupling DC sets channel x to DC coupling GND sets channel lt x gt to ground Only a flat ground level waveform will be displayed CH2 COUPLING GND sets channel 2 to ground CH3 COUPling might return CH3 COUPling DC indicating that channel 3 18 set to DC coupling 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 119 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order CH lt x gt DESKew Group Syntax Arguments Examples CH lt x gt INVert 2 120 Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the deskew time for channel lt x gt where x is the channel number You can adjust the deskew time to add an independent channel based delay time to the delay set by the horizontal position control and common to all channels from the common trigger point to first sample taken for each channel This lets you compensate individual channels for different delays introduced by their individual input hook ups Vertical CH lt x gt DESKew lt NR3 gt CH x DESKew NR3 is the deskew time for channel x ranging from 100 ns to 100 ns with a resolution of 1 ps
416. header string used for FLEXRAY trigger 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 349 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Arguments Examples Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS lt gt FLEXray HEADER PAYLength Qstring SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray HEADER PAYLength Qstring is a quoted string representing the payload length portion of the binary header string used for FLEXRAY trigger SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER PAYLENGTH 1001101 sets the payload length portion of the binary header string to 1001101 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER PAYLENGTH might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER PAYLENGTH XXXXXXX indicating the payload length portion of the binary header string is don t cares SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess MODe Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the I2C address mode to 7 or 10 Bit SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess MODe ADDR7 ADDR10 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B x I2C ADDRess MODe ADDR7 specifies 7 bit addresses ADDR10O specifies 10 bit addresses SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C A
417. her edge ever crossing the high threshold NEGative indicates that the falling edge crosses the high threshold and the rising edge recrosses the high threshold without either edge ever crossing the low threshold EITher triggers on a runt of either polarity TRIGGER A RUNT POLARITY NEGATIVE specifies that the polarity of the A pulse runt trigger is negative TRIGGER A RUNT POLARITY might return TRIGGER A RUNT POLARITY POSITIVE indicating that the polarity of the A pulse runt trigger is positive TRIGger A RUNT SOUrce Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the source for the A runt trigger Trigger TRIGger A RUNT SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4j TRIGger A RUNT SOUrce CH1 CH4 specifies the input channel number depending on the model of the oscilloscope TRIGGER A RUNT SOURCE CH4 sets channel 4 as the source for the A pulse trigger TRIGGER SOURCE might return TRIGGER A RUNT SOURCE 2 indicating that channel 2 is the source for the A pulse trigger TRIGger A RUNT WHEn Group Syntax 2 444 Sets or returns the type of pulse width the trigger checks for when it detects a runt Trigger TRIGger A RUNT WHEn LESSthan than EQual UNEQual OCCURS TRIGger A RUNT WHEn 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A RUNT WIDth OCCURS argument specifies a trigger event if a
418. here x is the channel number NOTE Unlike analog channels which use the center baseline as the zero point digital channels use the bottom logic level as the zero point Because of the slot model used to describe digital channel position the oscilloscope rounds off divisions to the nearest slot Vertical D x POSition lt NR3 gt D lt x gt POSition lt NR3 gt is the position of the digital channel in slot units Use the oscilloscope front panel controls to place the channel then query the channel to obtain an exact value for the position 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 163 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order D lt x gt THREshold Group Syntax Arguments Examples ESE Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments 2 164 Sets or returns the logical threshold for digital channel lt x gt where x is the channel number Vertical D lt x gt THREShold ECL TTL lt NR3 gt D x THREshold ECL sets the digital threshold for channel lt x gt to a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TTL sets the digital threshold for channel x to a preset TTL high level of 1 4V lt NR3 gt specifies the digital threshold for channel x in volts D5 THRESHOLD ECL sets the threshold for D5 digital channel to ECL levels D14 threshold might return D14 THRESHOLD 1 2500 indicating that the threshold level for the D14 digital channel is 1 25 volts Sets and queries the bits in t
419. hold for the digital channel selected Each channel can have an independent level Used in runt and slew rate as the lower threshold Used for all other trigger types as the single level threshold Trigger TRIGger A LOWerthreshold D lt x gt lt NR3 gt ECL TTL TRIGger A LOWerthreshold D x NR3 specifies the threshold voltage in volts ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4V 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD D1 0 5 sets the lower threshold to 0 5 volts TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD D1 might return TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD D1 1 3000 indicating the lower threshold is set to 1 3 volts TRIGger A LOWerthreshold EXT AUX Group Syntax Arguments TRIGger A MODe Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the lower threshold for the Auxiliary Input Used for the following trigger types Runt Slew Rate Trigger TRIGger A LOWerthreshold EXT AUX lt NR3 gt ECL TTL TRIGger A LOWerthreshold EXT AUX ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4V lt NR3 gt specifies the threshold level in volts Sets or returns the A trigger mode Trigger TRIGger A MODe AUTO NORMal TRIGger A MODe TRIGger A LEVel AUTO generates a trigger if one is not detected within a
420. iO DATa SIZe NRI specifies the number of bits per word 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order BUS B1 AUDIO DATA SIZE 8 sets the number of bits per word to 8 BUS B1 AUDIO DATA SIZE might return BUS B1 AUDIO DATA SIZE 24 indicating that the number of bits per word is set to 24 BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio DATa SOUrce Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the data source waveform for the AUDIO bus This command requires DPO4AUDIO application module Bus BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUD10 DATa SOUrce CHl CH2 CH3 CH4 DO D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 amp DI D10 D11 D12 101310141015 BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUD10 DATa SOUrce CH1 ch4 or DO D15 specifies the channel to use for data source for the audio bus BUS B1 AUDIO DATA SOURCE D1 sets the data source to D1 BUS B1 AUDIO DATA SOURCE might return BUS B1 AUDIO DATA SOURCE CH3 indicating that the data source is set to CH3 BUS B 1 4 AUDio DISplay FORMat Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the display format for the AUDIO bus This command requires DPO4AUDIO application module Bus BUS B 1 4 AUDiOo DISplay FORMat BINary HEXadecimal STIGNEDDECi mal BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDi0 DISplay FORMat BINary specifies a binary data display HEXadecimal specifies a hexadecimal data display 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 87 Comm
421. ics Symbol Meaning REF lt x gt A reference waveform specifier lt x gt is 1 2 3 or 4 for 4 channel oscilloscopes and 1 or 2 for 2 channel oscilloscopes 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Argument Types Enumeration Numeric Quoted String Command Syntax Commands use arguments such as enumeration numeric quoted string and block Each of these arguments are listed in detail below Enter these arguments as unquoted text words Like key words enumeration arguments follow the same convention where the portion indicated in uppercase is required and that in lowercase is optional For example SAVe WAVEform FILEFormat INTERNal Many oscilloscope commands require numeric arguments The syntax shows the format that the oscilloscope returns in response to a query This is also the preferred format when sending the command to the oscilloscope though any of the formats will be accepted This documentation represents these arguments as described below Table 2 10 Numeric Arguments Symbol Meaning lt NR1 gt Signed integer value lt NR2 gt Floating point value without an exponent lt NR3 gt Floating point value with an exponent lt bin gt Digital data in binary format Most numeric arguments will be automatically forced to a valid setting by either rounding or truncating when an invalid number is input unless otherwise noted in the command description Some commands accept or return
422. ideo trigger 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom LINEPeriod Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or queries the line period for the standard under test Use this command only when the video format 15 set to custom This command requires a DPO4VID application module Trigger TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTOm LINEPeriod NR3 TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTOm LINEPeriod NR3 is the custom video line period TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM LINEPERIOD 50 5E 6 sets the video line period to 50 5 us TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM LINEPERIOD might return TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM LINEPERIOD 63 5600E 6 indicating the video line period is set to 63 56 us TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom SCAN Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the horizontal line scan rate of the A video trigger Use this command only when the video format is set to custom This command requires a DPO4VID application module Trigger TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTOm SCAN 15 RATE20K RATE25K RATE35K 5 TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTOm SCAN 15 sets the range of the video line scan rate to 15 kHz through 20 kHz This is the standard broadcast rate 20 sets the range of the video line scan rate to 20 kHz through 25 kHz RATE25 sets the range of the video line scan rate to 25 kHz through 35 kHz RATE35 sets the range of the video line scan rate to 3
423. ies Programmer Manual Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A VIDeo HDtv FORMat HD1080P24 HD720P60 HD480P60 HD1080150 HD1080P25 HD1080160 HD1080PSF24 TRIGger A VIDeo HDtv FORMat Table 2 42 Available HDTV formats HDTV format Description 1080150 1125 Lines 1080 active 1920 x 1080 pixel interlaced 60 fps 1080160 1125 lines 1080 active 1920 x 1080 pixel interlaced 50 fps 1080p24 1125 lines 1080 active 1920 x 1080 pixel progressive 24 fps 1080p25 1125 lines 1080 active 1920 x 1080 pixel progressive 25 fps 1080sf24 1125 Lines 1080 active 1920 x 1080 pixel progressive sF 24 fps 720p60 750 lines 720 active 1280 x 720 pixel progressive 60 fps 480p60 525 lines 480 active 640 or 704 x 480 pixel progressive 60 1 5 TRIGger A VIDeo HOLDoff FIELD Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the video trigger holdoff in terms of video fields This command requires a DPO4VID application module Trigger TRIGger A VIDeo HOLDoff FIELD lt NR3 gt TRIGger A VIDeo HOLDoff FIELD NR3 argument is a real number from 0 0 to 8 5 in increments of 0 5 The argument sets the number of fields that the oscilloscope waits before rearming the video trigger TRIGGER A VIDEO HOLDOFF FIELD might return TRIGger A VIDeo HOLdoff FIELD 5 indicating that the oscilloscope is set to wait 5 video fields before rearming t
424. igger condition is ID or IDANDDATA Search SEARCH SEARCH X TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray DATa VALue Qstring SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray DATa VALue 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 343 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Arguments Examples lt QString gt is a quoted string that is the low binary data string to be used for FLEXRAY trigger condition if trigger condition is ID or IDANDDATA SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA VALUE 11001010 sets the binary data string to 11001010 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA VALUE might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS FLEXRAY DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX indicates the binary data string is don t cares SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray EOFTYPE Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the end of frame type used for FLEXRAY trigger Search SEARCH SEARCH X TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray EOFTYPE STATic ANY SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger BUS lt gt FLEXray EOFTYPE STATic sets the FLEXRAY end of frame type to STATIC DYNAMi c sets the FLEXRAY end of frame type to DYNAMIC ANY sets the FLEXRAY end of frame type to ANY type SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY EOFTYPE ANY sets the FLEXRAY end of frame type to any type SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY EOFTYPE might retur
425. igger data to either left or right LEFt aligns the trigger data to the left RIGht aligns the trigger data to the right TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN CONDition Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the CAN trigger condition for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number Requires a DPO4AUTO application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B x CAN CONDi tion SOF FRAMEtype IDentifier DATA IDANDDATA EOF 55 TRIGger A BUS B X CAN CONDi tion SOF enables triggering on the start of frame FRAMEtype enables triggering on the type of frame IDentifier enables triggering on a matching identifier DATA enables triggering on matching data IDANDDATA enables triggering on a matching identifier and matching data EOF enables triggering on the end of frame ACKMISS enables triggering on a missing acknowledge 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 397 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Examples TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN CONDITION might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN CONDITION EOF indicating an end of file condition TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN CONDITION DATA enables triggering on matching CAN data TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa DIRection Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the CAN trigger data direction to be valid on a Read Write or Either condition for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This applies only if the trigger condition is
426. igh bit set that is those characters with a decimal value greater than 127 An alternate way to enter certain characters is with a backslash followed by a single character following standard Unix as described in the table below n Newline carriage return and line feed Backslash is required to get a backslash character t Horizontal tab the next 2 characters specify the pixel column to tab to as explained earlier If a backslash is followed by an undefined special character the backslash is ignored and the character following it is accepted as is NOTE The use of any escape codes other than those described above may produce unpredictable results 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 239 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples MESSage STATE Group Syntax Related Commands MESSage SHOW Hello World displays Hello world in the upper left corner of the box you can define the box size with the MESSAGE BOX command MESSage SHOW Hello World hello displays Hello world hello in the upper left corner of the box and the word world is displayed in inverse video In this example stands for the escape character The escape character may appear differently for you depending on your controller program Controls the display of the message box Display MESSage STATE OFF ON lt NR1 gt MESSage STATE MESSage BOX MES
427. iles are named using the csv filename extension Saving waveforms in CSV format enables spreadsheet programs to import the data SAVE WAVEFORM FILEFORMAT INTERNAL specifies that the internal file format is the format used for saving waveforms SAVE WAVEFORM FILEFORMAT might return SAVE WAVEFORM FILEFORMAT INTERNAL indicating that waveforms are saved using the internal format SAVe WAVEform GATIng 2 328 Specifies whether save waveform operations should save the entire waveform or a specified portion of the waveform 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Save and Recall SAVe WAVEform GATIng NONe CURSors SCREEN SAVe WAVEform GATIng CURSors turns on cursors and the gates are the waveform record points at the cursor positions NONe saves the entire waveform SCREEN if zoom is on the gates are the start and end waveform record points of the zoom upper graticule otherwise the gates are the start and end waveform record points of the main graticule SAVE WAVEFORM GATING CURSors specifies that when the waveform gating is set to cursors save waveform operations should save the waveform points between the cursors If cursors are turned off waveform gating automatically reverts to NONE SEARCH Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns all search related settings Search SEARCH SEARCH
428. imit lt NR3 gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn MORELimit lt NR3 gt specifies the minimum amount of time to hold the pattern true TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN MORELIMIT 10 0 00 sets the minimum time that the selected pattern may hold true and generate an A logic pattern trigger to 10 5 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN MORELIMIT might return TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN MORELIMIT 8 0000E 9 indicating that the selected pattern must hold true for at least 8 ns to generate an A logic pattern trigger 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold CH lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Examples This command sets or queries the trigger A logic threshold voltage for the specified channel x Trigger TRIGger A LOGIC THReshold CH x lt NR3 gt ECL TTL TRIGger A LOGIC THReshold CH x NR3 specifies the threshold voltage in volts ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4V TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD CH2 3 0E 3 sets the A logic trigger threshold voltage for Channel 2 to 3 mV TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD CH3 might return TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD CH3 1 2000E 00 indicating that the A logic trigger threshold voltage for Channel 3 is 1 2 V TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold D x Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Sets or returns the trigger A logic threshold level for the specified
429. in bytes to be used for LIN Search if search condition is DATA or IDANDDATA Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS lt gt LIN DATa SIZe NR1 is the length of the data in bytes SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA SIZE 8 sets the LIN data size Is 8 bytes SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA SIZE might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA SIZE 1 indicating that the LIN data size is 1 byte SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa VALue Sets or returns the binary data string used for a LIN search if the search condition is ID or IDANDDATA 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 355 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Arguments Examples Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B Xx LIN DATa VALue lt QString gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS lt gt LIN DATa VALue Qstring is the binary data string for the search SEARCHR SEARCHI TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA VALUE might return SEARCH SEARCHI TRIGGER A BUS BI LIN DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX indicating the data value is don t care SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN ERRTYPE Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the error type used for a LIN Search Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B Xx LIN ERRTYPE SYNC PARi ty
430. independently of cursor 1 INDependent allows independent adjustment of the two cursors CURSOR MODE TRACK specifies that the cursor positions move in unison CURSOR MODE might return CURSOR MODE TRACK indicating that the two cursors move in unison CURSor VBArs Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the current settings for the vertical bar cursors Cursor CURSOr VBArs CURSOR VBARS might return the following vertical bar settings CURSOR VBARS UNITS SECONDS POSITION 1 0000E 06 POSITION2 9 0000E 06 CURSor VBArs ALTERNATE lt x gt Query Only Group Syntax Arguments 2 136 Returns the alternate readout for the waveform Vbar cursors specified by x This alternate readout 1s in effect when the selected waveform is a bus or digital channel Cursor CURSOr VBArS ALTERNATE x I 1 specifies vertical bar cursorl X 2 specifies vertical bar cursor2 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CURSor VBArs DELTa Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Returns Examples Returns the horizontal difference between the two vertical bar cursors The units are specified by the CURSor VBArs UNIts command This is equivalent to watching the cursor readout in the display while using the appropriate cursor mode Cursor CURSor 5 CURSor VBArs UNIts NR3 CURSOR VBARS DELTA might re
431. ion and Diagnostic Command Group 2 17 CH lt x gt AMPSVIAVOLTs ENAble 2 118 CH lt x gt AMPSVIAVOLTs FACtor 2 118 CH lt x gt PRObe AUTOZero 2 123 CH lt x gt PRObe COMMAND 2 123 CH lt x gt PRObe DEGAUss 2 124 CH lt x gt PRObe DEGAUss STATE 2 124 CH lt x gt PRObe FORCEDRange 2 125 CH lt x gt PRObe ID SERnumber 2 126 CH lt x gt PRObe ID TYPE 2 127 CH lt x gt PRObe MODel 2 127 CH lt x gt PRObe PROPDELay 2 127 CH lt x gt PRObe RECDESkew 2 128 CH lt x gt PRObe RESistance 2 128 CH lt x gt PRObe SIGnal 2 128 CH lt x gt PRObe UNIts 2 129 CH lt x gt TERmination 2 130 CH lt x gt 2 117 Index 2 CH lt x gt BANdwidth 2 118 CH lt x gt COUPIling 2 119 CH lt x gt DESKew 2 120 CH lt x gt INVert 2 120 CH lt x gt LABel 2 121 CH lt x gt OFFSet 2 121 CH lt x gt POSition 2 122 CH lt x gt PRObe 2 123 CH lt x gt PRObe GAIN 2 125 CH lt x gt PRObe ID 2 126 CH lt x gt SCAle 2 129 CH lt x gt YUNits 2 131 CLEARMenu 2 131 CLS 2 131 Command Groups 2 11 Cursor Command Group 2 17 CURSor HBArs POSITION lt x gt 2 134 CURSor VBArs ALTERNATE lt x gt 2 136 CURSor VBArs HPOS lt x gt 2 137 CURSor VBArs POSITION lt x gt 2 138 CURSor VBArs VDELTa 2 139 CURSor XY POLar RADIUS DELt2 2 140 CURSor XY POLar RADIUS POSITION lt x gt 2 140 CURSor XY POLar RADIUS UNIts 2 140 CURSor XY POLar THETA DELt2 2 141 CURSor XY POLar THETA POSITION x 2 141 CURSor XY POLar
432. ion of the A pulse will fall within defined high and low limits TRIGGER PULSEWIDTH WHEN might return TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH WHEN THAN indicating the conditions for generating a width trigger 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A PULSEWidth WIDth Sets or returns the width setting for the pulse width trigger Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A PULSEWidth WIDth lt NR3 gt TRIGger A PULSEWi dth WIDth Related Commands TRIGger A PULSEWidth WHEn Arguments NR3 specifies the pulse width in seconds Examples TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH WIDTH 5 0E 6 sets the pulse width to 5 us TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH WIDTH might return TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH WIDTH 2 0000E 9 indicating that the pulse width is set to 2 ns TRIGger A RUNT Query Only Returns the current A runt trigger parameters Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A RUNT Examples TRIGGER A RUNT might return TRIGGER A RUNT SOURCE 1 POLARITY POSITIVE WHEN OCCURS WIDTH 4 0000E 9 TRIGger A RUNT POLarity Sets or returns the polarity for the runt trigger Group Trigger Syntax X TRIGger A RUNT POLarity EITher NEGative POSitive TRIGger A RUNT POLarity 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 443 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Arguments Examples POSitive indicates that the rising edge crosses the low threshold and the falling edge recrosses the low threshold without eit
433. ion value TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall POLarity Sets or returns the polarity for the A pulse transition trigger TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall SOUrce Sets or returns the source for transition trigger TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFall WHEn Sets or returns the relationship of delta time to transitioning signal TRIGger A TYPe Sets or returns the type of A trigger TRIGger A VIDeo Returns the video parameters for the A trigger TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom FORMat TYPE Sets or returns the video trigger format TRIGger A VIDeo CUS Tom LINEPeriod Sets or queries the line period TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom SCAN Sets or returns the horizontal line scan rate of the A video trigger TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom SYNCInterval Sets or queries the sync interval TRIGger A VIDeo HDtv FORMat Sets or returns the HDTV video signal format on which to trigger TRIGger A VIDeo HOLDoff FIELD Sets or returns the video trigger holdoff TRIGger A VIDeo LINE Sets or returns the video line number on which the oscilloscope triggers TRIGger A VIDeo POLarity Sets or returns the polarity of the A video trigger 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Table 2 31 Trigger Commands cont Command Groups Command Description TRIGger A VIDeo SOUrce Sets or returns the polarity of the video trigger TRIGger A VIDeo STANdard Sets or returns the video standard TRI
434. ithin double quotes D MYDIR TEK00001 SET File names follow the non case sensitive MSDOS format DRIVE PATH filename Path separators may be either forward slashes or back slashes 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 21 Command Groups NOTE Using back slash as a path separator may produce some unexpected results depending on how your application treats escaped characters Many applications recognize the sequence of back slash followed by an alphabetic character as an escaped character and as such interpret that alphabetic character as a control character For example the sequence n may be interpreted as a newline character t may be interpreted as a tab character To ensure that this interpretation does not occur you can use double back slashes For example D testfile txt Table 2 20 File System Commands Command Description FILESystem Returns the file system state FILESystem CWD Sets or returns the current working directory for FILESystem commands FILESystem DELEte Deletes a named file or directory FILESystem DIR Returns a list of directory contents FILESystem FORMat Formats a named drive FILESystem FREESpace Returns the number of bytes of free space on the current drive FILESystem MKDir Creates a new directory FILESystem READFile Writes the contents of the specified file to the specified interface FILESystem REName Assigns a
435. ition 2 394 TRIGger A BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio0 DATa HIVALue 2 395 TRIGger A BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio0 DATa OFFSet 2 395 TRIGger A BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio0 DATa QUALifier 2 396 TRIGger A BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio0 DATa VALue 2 396 TRIGger A BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio0 DATa WORD 2 397 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN CONDition 2 397 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa DIRection 2 398 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa QUALifier 2 398 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa SIZe 2 399 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue 2 399 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN FRAMEtype 2 400 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess MODe 2 400 Index 10 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess VALue 2 401 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CONDition 2 401 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CY CLEcount HIVALue 2 402 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CY CLEcount QUALifier 2 403 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CY CLEcount VALue 2 403 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa HIVALue 2 404 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa OFFSet 2 404 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa QUA Lifier 2 405 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa SIZe 2 406 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa VALue 2 406 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray EOFTY PE 2 407 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray ERRTYPE 2 407 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEID HIVA Lue 2 408 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEID QUA Lifier 2 40
436. ity frequency reference source CURRent sets current as the power quality frequency reference source 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order POWER QUALITY FREQREFERENCE CURRent sets current as the power quality frequency reference source POWER QUALITY FREQREFERENCE might return POWER QUALITY FREQREFERENCE VOLTAGE indicating that the power quality frequency reference source is set to Voltage POWer QUALity FREQuency Query Only Conditions Group Syntax Examples Returns the frequency measurement This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer QUALi ty FREQuency POWER QUALITY FREQUENCY might return POWER QUALITY FREQUENCY 60 indicating that the frequency 15 set to 60 Hz POWer QUALity ICRESTfactor Query Only Conditions Group Syntax Examples Returns the current crest factor measurement This command requires DPO4PWR application module Power POWer QUALity ICRESTfactor POWER QUALITY ICRESTFACTOR might return POWER QUALITY ICRESTfactor 1 4 indicating that the current crest factor value is set to 1 4 POWer QUALity IRMS Query Only Returns the RMS current measurement 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 277 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Conditions Group Syntax Examples This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power
437. le only to the analog channels FALL measures the time taken for the falling edge of the first pulse in the waveform or gated region to fall from a high reference value default is 90 to a low reference value default is 10 This measurement is applicable only to the analog channels FREQuency measures the first cycle in the waveform or gated region Frequency is the reciprocal of the period and is measured in hertz Hz where 1 Hz 1 cycle per second HIGH measures the High reference 100 level sometimes called Topline of a waveform This measurement is applicable only to the analog channels LOW measures the Low reference 0 level sometimes called Baseline of a waveform This measurement is applicable only to the analog channels MAXimum finds the maximum amplitude This value is the most positive peak voltage found It is measured over the entire waveform or gated region This measurement is applicable only to the analog channels MEAN amplitude measurement finds the arithmetic mean over the entire waveform or gated region This measurement is applicable only to the analog channels MINImum finds the minimum amplitude This value is typically the most negative peak voltage It is measured over the entire waveform or gated region This measurement is applicable only to the analog channels NDUty negative duty cycle is the ratio of the negative pulse width to the signal period expressed as a percentage The duty cycle is m
438. lects one of the available self test areas DIAg STATE Sets the oscilloscope operating state DIAg SELect Runs self tests on the specified system subsystem Cursor Command Group Use the commands in the Cursor Command Group to control the cursor display and readout You can use these commands to control the setups for cursor 1 and cursor 2 such as cursor position 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 17 Command Groups 2 18 You can also use the commands to select one of the following cursor functions Off Turns off the display of all cursors Waveform Cursors Consists of two cursors Waveform cursors enable you to conveniently measure waveform amplitude and time B Screen Cursors Consists of two pairs of independent horizontal and vertical cursors You can use these cursors to indicate an arbitrary position within the waveform display area Table 2 17 Cursor Commands Command Description CURSor Returns cursor settings CURSor DDT Returns the cursor deltaY deltaT dY dT readout CURSor FUNCtion Sets or returns the cursor type CURSor HBArs Returns hbar cursor settings CURSor HBArs DELTa Returns hbars cursors vertical difference CURSor HBArs POSITION lt x gt Sets or returns the hbar cursor lt x gt vertical position CURSor HBArs UNIts Returns hbar cursor units CURSor HBArs USE Sets the horizontal bar cursor measurement scale for use with ratio cursors CURSor
439. led and present in the SESR 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Status and Events Table 3 2 SBR Bit Functions cont Bit Function 4 MAV Message Available Shows that output is available in the Output Queue 3 Not used 2 Not used 1 0 Not used Enable Registers DESER ESER and SRER allow you to select which events are reported to the Status Registers and the Event Queue Each Enable Register acts as a filter to a Status Register the DESER also acts as a filter to the Event Queue and can prevent information from being recorded in the register or queue Each bit in an Enable Register corresponds to a bit in the Status Register it controls In order for an event to be reported to a bit in the Status Register the corresponding bit in the Enable Register must be set to one If the bit in the Enable Register is set to zero the event 1s not recorded Various commands set the bits in the Enable Registers The Enable Registers and the commands used to set them are described below The Device Event Status Enable Register DESER This register controls which types of events are reported to the SESR and the Event Queue The bits in the DESER correspond to those in the SESR Use the DESE command to enable and disable the bits in the DESER Use the DESE query to read the DESER 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PON URQ EXE DDE QYE OPC Figur
440. left most V Bar cursor and 100 is the current position of the right most V Bar cursor HALFgrat resets the ratio range to the default positions on the screen half of the number of horizontal divisions five on the MSO DPO4000 from 25 to 75 of the screen FIVEdivs sets V Bar measurement scale so that 5 screen major divisions is 100 where 0 is 2 5 divisions and 100 is 2 5 divisions from the center vertical graticule CURSOR VBARS USE CURRENT sets the V Bar measurement scale to use the current cursor positions as 0 and 100 of scale if units are set to CURSor VBArs VDELTa Query Only Group Returns the vertical difference between the two vertical bar cursor ticks Cursor 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 139 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax CURSor VBArs VDELTa Related Commands CURSor HBArs UNIts Returns NR3 indicates the vertical difference between the two vertical bar cursors ticks Examples CURSOR VBARS VDELTA might return CURSOR VBARS VDELTA 1 064E 0 indicating that the vertical difference between the vertical bar cursors ticks is 1 064 units CURSor XY POLar RADIUS DELta Query Only Returns the difference between the cursors X radius and the cursor Y radius AY AX The ratio is calculated as cursor 2 Y cursor 1 Y cursor 2 X cursor 1 X Group Cursor Syntax CURSor XY POLar RADIUS DELta CURSor XY POLar RADIUS POSITION lt x gt Query Only R
441. ll Commands cont Command Description SAVe IMAGe FILEFormat Sets or returns the file format to use for saving screen images The file format is not automatically determined by the file name extension You need to choose a file name with an extension which is consistent with the selected file format SAVe IMAGe INKSaver Sets or returns the current inksaver setting for the SAVe IMAGe command SAVe IMAGe LAYout Sets or returns the layout to use for saved Screen images SAVe SETUp Saves the state of the oscilloscope to a specified memory location or file SAVe WAVEform Saves a waveform to one of the reference memory locations or a file SAVe WAVEform FILEFormat Sets or returns the format for saved waveforms SAVe WAVEform GATIng Specifies whether save waveform operations should save the entire waveform or a specified portion of the waveform SETUP lt x gt DATE Returns the date when the specified oscilloscope setup was saved SETUP lt x gt LABEL Sets or returns the specified oscilloscope setup label SETUP lt x gt TIME Returns the time when the specified Search Command Group oscilloscope setup was saved Use the commands in the Search Commands Group to seek out information in waveform records Search Commands Command Description SEARCH Returns all search related settings SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt COPy Copies the search criteria to the trigger or the trigger criteria
442. ll commands except the first one For example the commands TRIGger MODe NORMal and ACQuire NUMAVg 8 be concatenated into the following single command TRIGger MODe NORMal ACQuire NUMAVg 8 2 Ifconcatenated commands have headers that differ by only the last mnemonic you can abbreviate the second command and eliminate the beginning colon For example you can concatenate the commands ACQuire MODe ENVelope and ACQuire NUMAVg 8 into a single command ACQuire MODe ENVelope NUMAVg 8 The longer version works equally well ACQuire MODe ENVelope ACQuire NUMAVg 8 3 Never precede a star command with a colon ACQuire STATE 1 Any commands that follow will be processed as if the star command was not there so the commands ACQUire MODe ENVelope OPC NUMAVg 8 will set the acquisition mode to envelope and set the number of acquisitions for averaging to 8 4 When you concatenate queries the responses to all the queries are concatenated into a single response message For example if the display graticule is set to Full and the display style is set to dotsonly the concatenated query DISplay GRAticule STYle DOTsonly will return the following If the header is on DISPLAY GRATICULE FULL DISPLAY STYLE DOTSONLY 1 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Command Syntax If the header is off FULL 1 5 Set commands and queries may be concatenated in the same message For example ACQuire MODe SAMple NUMAVg
443. ller 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 1 3 Getting Started Documentation The following documents are available for download on the Manuals Finder Web site at www tektronix com MSO4000 and DPO4000 Series Digital Phosphor Oscilloscopes User Manual Information about installing and operating the oscilloscope Getting Started with Open Choice Solutions Manual Options for getting data from your oscilloscope into any one of several available analysis tools MS04000 and DPO4000 Series Digital Phosphor Oscilloscopes Technical Reference Oscilloscope specifications and a performance verification procedure TekVISA Programmer Manual Description of TekVISA the Tektronix implementation of the VISA Application Programming Interface API Tek VISA 1s industry compliant software for writing interoperable oscilloscope drivers in a variety of Application Development Environments ADEs 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Command Syntax You can control the operations and functions of the oscilloscope through the Ethernet port or the USB 2 0 device port using commands and queries The related topics listed below describe the syntax of these commands and queries The topics also describe the conventions that the oscilloscope uses to process them See the Command Groups topic in the table of contents for a listing of the commands by command group or use the index to locate a specific command Backus Naur Form This
444. lse the current values in the DESER SRER and ESER registers are preserved in nonvolatile memory when power is shut off and are restored at power on Status and Error 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 315 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples PUD Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples 2 316 PSC OFF ON NR1 gt PSC DESE ESE FACtory RST SRE OFF sets the power on status clear flag to false ON sets the power on status clear flag to true lt NR1 gt 0 sets the power on status clear flag to false This disables the power on clear allowing the oscilloscope to possibly assert SRQ after power on any other value sets the power on status clear flag to true enabling the power on status clear preventing any SRQ assertion after power on PSC 0 sets the power on status clear flag to false PSC might return to indicate that the power on status clear flag is set to true Sets or returns a string of Protected User Data This data is protected by the PASSWord command You can modify it only by first entering the correct password This password is not necessary to query the data Status and Error PUD lt Block gt lt QString gt PUD PASS Word lt Block gt is a block containing up to 300 ASCII characters lt QString gt is a string containing up to 300 ASCII characters PUD 229This oscilloscope belongs to m
445. lt 1 400 gt RMS ABSolute Query Only Conditions Group 2 260 Returns the RMS magnitude of the harmonic in absolute units This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order POWer HARMonics RESults HAR 1 400 RMS ABSolute POWER HARMONICS RESULTS HAR400 RMS ABSOLUTE might return POWER HARMONICS RESULTS HAR400 RMS ABSOLUTE 1 0 indicating that the RMS magnitude of the harmonic is set to 1 0 A POWer HARMonics RESults HAR lt 1 400 gt RMS PERCent Query Only Conditions Group Syntax Examples Returns the RMS magnitude of the harmonic expressed as a percentage of the fundamental This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer HARMonics RESults HAR 1 400 5 PERCent POWER HARMONICS RESULTS 400 RMS PERCENT might return POWER HARMONICS RESULTS HAR400 RMS PERCENT 33 indicating that the RMS magnitude of the harmonic is set to 33 POWer HARMonics RESults HAR lt 1 400 gt TEST IEC CLASSALIMit Query Only Conditions Group Syntax Returns Specifies if the IEC Class A higher harmonic limit and conditions are met NOTE The command returns NA if the standard does not specify a limit or the equipment is not class A This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer HARMonics RESults HAR 1 400
446. m the oscilloscope will read the file from the default directory see FILESystem CWD filename stands for a filename the use of wildcard characters in filenames is not supported Filename extensions are not required but highly recommended 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 317 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Examples RECALL SETUP FACTORY recalls and makes current the oscilloscope setup to its factory defaults RECALL SETUP 2 recalls the oscilloscope setup from setup storage location 2 RECALL SETUP TEK00000 SET recalls the setup from the file TEK00000 SET in the current working directory RECAII WAVEform No Query Form Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples This command no query form recalls a stored waveform to a reference location Save and Recall RECA11 wAVEform file path gt REF lt x gt SAVe WAVEform FILESystem CWD FILESystem REF lt x gt specifies a location in internal reference memory Reference memory location values range from 1 through 4 lt file path gt specifies a location for an oscilloscope setup file lt file path gt is a quoted string that defines the file name and path Input the file path using the form lt drive gt lt dir gt lt filename gt lt extension gt and or lt dir gt s optional If you do not specify them the oscilloscope will read the file from the default directory see FILESystem CWD lt filename gt st
447. m the SAVe IMAGe FILEFormat query Save and Recall SAVe IMAGe file path SAVe ASSIgn TYPe file path is a filename including path where the image will be saved If you do not specify a directory the oscilloscope will store the file in the current working directory File name extensions are not required but are highly 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order recommended The path D foo png will save an image to the file foo png on the Compact Flash card SAVe IMAGe FILEFormat Sets or returns the file format to use for saving screen images NOTE The file format is not automatically determined by the file name extension You need to choose a file format with an extension which is consistent with the selected file format Group Save and Recall Syntax SAVe IMAGe FILEFormat PNG BMP TIFf SAVe IMAGe FILEFormat Related Commands SAVe IMAGe Arguments PNG saves the file in Portable Network Graphics format BMP saves the file in Microsoft Windows bitmap format TIFF saves the file in Tagged Image File Format SAVe IMAGe INKSaver Sets or returns the current ink saver setting for the SAVe IMAGe command If set to ON or 1 images will be generated using the ink saver palette If set to OFF or 0 images will be generated using the standard palette Group Save and Recall Syntax SAVe IMAGe INKSaver OFF ON 0 1 SAVe IMAGe INK
448. mands Listed Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments SEARCH SEARCH X TRIGger A SETHOld CLOCk EDGE FALL RISe SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A SETHOld CLOCk EDGE FALL specifies polarity as the clock falling edge RISe specifies polarity as the clock rising edge SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk SOUrce Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Sets or returns the clock source setting for an setup hold trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger SETHold CLOCk SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 REF SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk SOUrce SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold DATa SOUrce 1 4 specifies an input channel as the edge source MATH specifies the math waveform as the search source REF specifies the reference waveform as the search source SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk THReshold Group Syntax Arguments 2 376 Sets or returns the clock threshold setting for an setup hold trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk THReshold lt NR3 gt TTL ECL SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk THReshold TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V NR3 is the clock level in volts
449. mask stop on violation condition This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer SOA MASK STOPOnviol OFF ON 0 1 POWer SOA MASK STOPOnviol OFF or 0 enables mask stop on violations ON or 1 disables mask stop on violations 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples POWER SOA MASK STOPONVIOL 1 disables the state of the mask stop on violation condition POWER SOA MASK STOPONVIOL might return POWER SOA MASK STOPONVIOL 0 indicating that the mask stop 1s enabled POWer SOA PLOTTYPe Sets or returns the Safe Operating Area SOA plot type Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Group Power Syntax POWer SOA PLOTTYPe LOG LINear POWer SOA PLOTTYPe Arguments LOG for logarithmic SOA plot type LINear for linear SOA plot type Examples POWER SOA PLOTTYPE LINear sets the SOA plot type to Linear POWER SOA PLOTTYPE might return PONER SOA PLOTTYPE LOG indicating that the SOA plot type is set to Log POWer SOA RESult FAlLures QTY Query Only Conditions Group Syntax Examples Returns the number of failures in the test This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer SOA RESult FAILures QTY POWER SOA RESULT FAILURES QTY might return POWER SOA RESULT FAILURES O indicating that the number of failures is 0 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 295 Commands
450. mber 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order REF lt x gt deletes the mark on a reference waveform where x is the reference waveform number DIGital deletes all marks on all digital channels COLUMN deletes marks on all waveforms in the current zoom pixel column MARK FREE Query Only Returns how many marks are available for use Group Mark Syntax MARK FREE MARK SELected END Query Only Returns the end of the selected mark 0 to 100 of the waveform Group Mark Syntax MARK SELected END MARK SELected FOCUS Query Only Returns the focus of the selected mark 0 to 100 of the waveform Group Mark Syntax MARK SELected FOCUS MARK SELected MARKSINCOLumn Query Only Returns the number of marks in the current zoom pixel column Group Mark Syntax MARK SELected MARKSINCOLumn 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 195 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MARK SELected OWNer Query Only Returns the owner of the selected mark Group Mark Syntax MARK SELected OwNer Returns lt QString gt is the owner of the mark Examples MARK SELECTED OWNER might return USER SEARCH1 MARK SELected SOURCE Query Only Returns the source waveform for the selected mark Group Mark Syntax MARK SELected SOURCE MARK SELected STARt Query Only Returns the starting point of the selected mark 0 to 10096 of the waveform
451. mean total power switching loss calculation POWer SWLoss TOTal POWER MIN Returns the minimum total power switching loss calculation POWer SWLoss VCEsat Sets or returns VCESAT value for use in switching loss calculations when the conduction calculation method is VCESAT POWer TYPe Sets or returns the power application measurement type POWer VOLTAGESOurce Sets or returns the voltage source for the power application Save and Recall Command Group Use the commands in the Save and Recall Command Group to store and retrieve waveforms and settings When you save a setup you save all the settings of the oscilloscope When you recall a setup the oscilloscope restores itself to the state it was in when you originally saved the setting Table 2 29 Save and Recall Commands Command Description FACtory Resets the oscilloscope to factory default settings RCL Recalls saved oscilloscope settings RECAII SETUp Recalls saved oscilloscope settings RECAII WAVEform Recalls a stored waveform to a reference location SAV Stores the state of the oscilloscope to a specified memory location SAVe ASSIgn TYPe Sets or returns the assignment of the save button SAVe EVENTtable BUS x Saves event table data from bus lt x gt to a specified file SAVe IMAGe Saves a capture of the screen image to the specified file 2 40 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Command Groups Table 2 29 Save and Reca
452. ment C1 specifies Class C Equipment that use Table 1 limits of the IEC standard C2 specifies Class C Equipment that use Table 2 limits of the IEC standard C3 specifies Class C Equipment that use Table 3 limits of the IEC standard D specifies Class D Equipment POWER HARMONICS IEC CLASSB sets Equipment Class B for IEC harmonics POWER HARMONICS ITEC CLASS might return POWER HARMONICS IEC CLASS A indicating that the Equipment Class is A for IEC harmonics POWer HARMonics lEC FiLter Conditions Group Syntax Arguments 2 252 Sets or returns the enabled state for filtering of IEC harmonics This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer HARMonics IEC FILter 03011 5 ON or enables filtering of IEC harmonics OFF or 0 disables filtering of IEC harmonics 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order POWER HARMONICS FILTER OFF disables filtering of IEC harmonics POWER HARMONICS FILTER might return POWER HARMONICS IEC FILTER 1 indicating that the IEC harmonics filtered POWer HARMonics IEC FUNDamental Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the rated fundamental current for IEC harmonics Valid values ranges from 0 to 16 in increments of 0 1 The unit is ampere This command requires a DPO4PWR a
453. mmed type freq gt measu immed value MEASUREMENT IMMED VALUE 9 9100E 37 gt esr 16 7 allev ALLEV 2202 Measurement error No period found gt rem Query out the waveform points for later analysis on your controller computer 7 data encdg ascii gt curve CURVE 7 6 5 5 5 6 6 6 8 gt rem Query out the parameters used for calculating the times and voltages of the waveform points gt wfmpre NR 1 BIT_NR 8 ENCDG ASCIEBN FMT REBYT OR MSB NR PT 10000 D 2 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Index A ACQuire MAXSamplerate 2 70 ACQuire 2 69 ACQuire MAGnivu 2 69 ACQuire MODe 2 70 ACQuire NUMACq 2 71 ACQuire NUMAVg 2 71 ACQuire S TATE 2 72 ACQuire STOPA fter 2 73 Acquisition Command Group 2 11 Alias Command Group 2 12 ALlIas 2 73 ALIas STATE 2 76 ALIas CATalog 2 74 ALIas DEFine 2 74 ALIas DELEte 2 75 ALIas DELEte NAMe 2 76 ALIas DELEte ALL 2 76 ALLEv 2 77 AUTOSet 2 77 AUTOSet ENAble 2 78 AUXin PRObe AUTOZero 2 79 AUXin PRObe DEGA Uss STATE 2 80 AUXin PRObe FORCEDRange 2 80 AUXin PRObe ID SERnumber 2 81 AUXin PRObe ID TYPE 2 81 AUXin PRObe RESistance 2 81 AUXin 2 78 AUXin PRObe 2 78 AUXin PRObe COMMAND 2 79 AUXin PRObe DEGAUss 2 80 AUXin PRObe GAIN 2 81 AUXin PRObe SIGnal 2 82 AUXin PRObe UNIts 2 82 B BUS 2 83 BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio BITDelay 2 83 BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDi0 BITOrder 2
454. mode Average mode 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 493 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Examples WFMOUTPRE WFID might return WFMOUTPRE WFID Chl DC coupling 100 0mvolts div 500 0ps div 1000 points Sample mode WFMOutpre XINcr Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Returns the horizontal point spacing in units of WFMOutpre XUNit for the waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command This value corresponds to the sampling interval The query command will time out and an error will be generated if the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce 15 not turned on Waveform Transfer WFMOUutpre XINCr DATa SOUrce WFMOutpre XUNit WFMOUTPRE XINCR might return WFMOUTPRE XINCR 10 0000E 6 indicating that the horizontal sampling interval is 10 us point WFMOutpre XUNit Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Returns the horizontal units for the waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command The query command will time out and an error will be generated if the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce is not turned on Waveform Transfer wFMOutpre XUNit DATa SOUrce WFMOUTPRE XUNIT might return WFMOUTPRE XUNIT HZ indicating that the horizontal units for the waveform are in Hertz WFMOutpre XZEro Query Only 2 494 Returns the time coordinate of the first point in the outgoing waveform 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group
455. module Power POWer SWLOSS TON POWER MEAN POWER SWLOSS TON POWER MEAN might return POWER SWLOSS TON POWER MEAN 1 indicating that the mean Ton power switching loss calculation is set to 1 W 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order POWer SWLoss TON POWER MIN Query Only Conditions Group Syntax Examples Returns the minimum Ton power for the switching loss calculation This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer SWLOSS TON POWER MIN POWER SWLOSS TON POWER MIN might return POWER SWLOSS TON POWER MIN 1 indicating that the minimum Ton power switching loss calculation is set to 1 W POWer SWLoss TOTal ENERGY MAX Query Only Conditions Group Syntax Examples Returns the maximum total energy for the switching loss calculation This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer SWLOSS TOTal ENERGY MAX POWER SWLOSS TOTAL ENERGY MAX might return POWER SWLOSS TOTAL ENERGY MAX 1 indicating that the maximum conduction energy switching loss calculation is set to 1 J POWer SWLoss TOTal ENERGY MEAN Query Only Conditions Group Syntax Returns the mean total energy for the switching loss calculation This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer SWLOSS TOTal ENERGY MEAN 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 311 Commands
456. module is installed Table 2 28 Power Commands Command Description POWer CURRENTSOurce Sets or returns the current source for the power application POWer DISplay Sets or returns the display state for the power application POWer GATESOurce Sets or returns the gate source for the power application 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Table 2 28 Power Commands cont Command Command Groups Description POWer GATing Sets or returns the power application gating POWer HARMonics DISPlay SELect Sets or returns the harmonics to be displayed when the harmonics standard is None POWer HARMonics DISPlay TYPe Sets or returns the display type for harmonics tests POWer HARMonics FREQRef Sets or returns the frequency reference waveform for harmonics tests POWer HARMonics FREQRef Sets or returns the fixed reference frequency FIXEDFREQValue value for harmonics measurements POWer HARMonics IEC CLAss Sets or returns the filtering class for IEC harmonics POWer HARMonics IEC FILter Sets or returns the enabled state for filtering of IEC harmonics POWer HARMonics IEC FUNDamental Sets or returns the fundamental current for IEC harmonics POWer HARMonics IEC GROUPing Sets or returns the enabled state for grouping of IEC harmonics POWer HARMonics IEC INPUTPOWer Sets of returns the class D input power for IEC harmonics POWer HARMonics IEC LINEFREQuency
457. ms in Delay and Phase measurement operations Specifies a numeric value in optional scientific notation MATH1 DEFINE CH1 CH2 adds the Ch 1 waveform and Ch 2 waveform storing the results in Math 1 MATH DEFINE might return MATH1 DEFINE CH2 REF2 as the expression that defines Math 1 MATH 1 HORizontal POSition Sets or returns the math horizontal display position for FFT or non live math reference waveforms 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 199 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Arguments Examples Math MATH 1 HORizontal POSition lt NR3 gt MATH 1 HORizontal POSition NR3 is the of the math waveform that precedes center screen It can vary from 0 0 to 100 0 MATH HORIZONTAL POSITION 10 sets the horizontal position to 10 pretrigger MATH 1 HORizontal SCAle Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the math horizontal display scale for FFT or for dual math waveforms that have source waveforms that are reference waveforms The horizontal scale of a dual math waveform with a channel source waveform is set through the HORizontal SCAle command Math MATH 1 HORizontal SCAle lt NR3 gt MATH 1 HORizontal SCAle lt NR3 gt is the math horizontal scale in seconds MATH HORIZONTAL SCALE might return MATH HORIZONTAL SCALE 2 0E 4 indicating that the math horizontal scale is 200 u MATH 1 HORizontal UNIts Group S
458. mulates the action of turning a specified front panel control knob When the front panel is locked the front panel button and multipurpose knob operations are suspended The FPAnel PRESS and FPAnel TURN commands will also not work and they will not generate an error You can work around this by using the appropriate programmatic interface commands instead of the front panel commands For example to set the trigger level to 50 you could use TRIGger A SETLevel To force a trigger you could use TRIGger FORCe Miscellaneous FPAnel TURN knob n knob is the name of a rotating control comma separates the control knob argument from the numeric rotation value argument You do not need a white space between the arguments and the comma n represents the rotation direction and magnitude of rotation Negative values represent a counterclockwise knob rotation and positive values represent a clockwise rotation The magnitude of n specifies the amount of the turn where n 1 represents turning the knob one unit lt n gt 2 represents turning the knob two units lt gt 4 represents turning the knob four units and so on The range of units depends on which front panel knob 15 specified Table 2 39 FPAnel TURN arguments Argument Description GPKNOB1 Multipurpose a knob GPKNOB2 Multipurpose b knob HORZPos Horizontal Position knob 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
459. mum Toff power switching loss calculation is set to 1 W POWer SWLoss TOFF POWER MEAN Query Only Conditions Group Syntax Examples Returns the mean Toff power for the switching loss calculation This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer SWLOSS TOFF POWER MEAN POWER SWLOSS TOFF POWER MEAN might return POWER SWLOSS TON POWER MEAN 1 indicating that the mean Toff power switching loss calculation is set to 1 W POWer SWLoss TOFF POWER MIN Query Only Conditions Group Syntax 2 308 Returns the minimum Toff power for the switching loss calculation This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer SWLOSS TOFF POWER MIN 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples POWER SWLOSS TOFF POWER MIN might return POWER SWLOSS TON POWER MIN 1 indicating that the minimum Toff power switching loss calculation is set to 1 W POWer SWLoss TON ENERGY MAX Query Only Returns the maximum Ton energy for the switching loss calculation Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Group Power Syntax POWer SWLOSS TON ENERGY MAX Examples POWER SWLOSS TON ENERGY MAX might return POWER SWLOSS TON ENERGY 1 indicating that the maximum Ton energy switching loss calculation is set to 1 J POWer SWLoss TON ENERGY MEAN Query Only Returns the mean Ton energy
460. n BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio DATa SOUrce Sets or returns the data source waveform for the AUDIO bus BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio DISplay FORMat Sets or returns the display format for the AUDIO bus BUS B 1 4 AUDio FRAME SIZe Sets or returns the number of channels in each frame for the AUDIO bus BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio FRAMESync POLarity Sets or returns the frame sync polarity for the AUDIO bus BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio FRAMESync SOUrce Sets or returns the frame sync source waveform for the AUDIO bus BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio TYPe Sets or returns the audio format type for the AUDIO bus BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio WORDSel POLarity Sets or returns the word select polarity for the AUDIO bus BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio WORDSel SOUrce Sets or returns the word select source waveform for the AUDIO bus BUS B lt x gt CAN BITRate Sets or returns the bit rate for the CAN bus BUS B lt x gt CAN PRObe Sets or returns the probing method used to probe the CAN bus BUS B lt x gt CAN SAMPLEpoint Sets or returns the sample point in to sample during each bit period BUS B lt x gt CAN SOUrce Sets or returns the CAN data source BUS B lt x gt DISplay FORMAt Sets the display format for the numerical information in the specified bus waveform BUS B lt x gt DISplay TYPe Sets the display type for the specified bus BUS B x FLEXray BITRate Sets or returns the bit rate for FLEXRAY BUS B lt x gt FLE
461. n SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY EOFTYPE STATIC indicating the FLEXRAY end of frame type is static SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray ERRTYPE 2 344 Group Syntax Sets or returns the error type be used for FLEXRAY trigger Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray ERRTYPE CRCHeader CRCTrai ler SYNCFrame STARTUpnosync NULLFRStatic NULLFRDynamic SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray ERRTYPE 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments CRCHeader sets the FLEXRAY error type to CRC header CRCTrai ler sets the FLEXRAY error type to CRC trailer SYNCFrame sets the FLEXRAY error type to SYNC frame STARTupnosync sets the FLEXRAY error type to start up with no sync NULLFRStatic sets the FLEXRAY error type to null frame static NULLFRDynamic sets the FLEXRAY error type to null frame dynamic Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY ERRTYPE SYNCFRAME sets the FLEXRAY error type SYNCFRAME SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY ERRTYPE might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY ERRTYPE CRCHEADER indicating the FLEXRAY error type is CRCHEADER SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEID HIVALue Sets or returns the binary data string used for FLEXRAY frame ID high value Group Search Syntax SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEX
462. n EEPROM address USER specifies a user address TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess VALue Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the binary address string used for the DC trigger if the trigger condition is ADDRESS or ADDRANDDATA Applies to bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B x I2C ADDRess VALue lt QString gt TRIGger A BUS B x I2C ADDRess lt QString gt is up to 7 10 611 depending on the address mode that specifies the address The only allowed characters in the QString are 0 1 and X TRIGGER A BUS B1 12C ADDRESS VALUE 1011 sets the I2C address value to XXX1011 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C CONDition Conditions Group Syntax 2 414 Sets or returns the trigger condition for an I2C trigger Applies to bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B x I2C CONDition STARt STOP REPEATstart ACKMISS ADDRess DATA ADDRANDDATA TRIGger A BUS B x I2C CONDi tion 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order STARt specifies a search based on start condition STOP specifies a search based on stop condition REPEATStart specifies a search based on repeat of start condition ACKMISS specifies a search based on missing acknowle
463. n the input pattern is true for a time period greater than or less than not equal to the time period specified in TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN DELTATIME within a 5 tolerance TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN LESSTHAN sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the pattern is true for a time period less than the pattern trigger delta time setting 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 435 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn LESSLimit Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the maximum time that the selected pattern may be true and still generate an A logic pattern trigger Trigger TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern WHEn LESSLimit lt NR3 gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn LESSLimit lt NR3 gt specifies the maximum amount of time to hold the pattern true TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN LESSLIMIT 10 0E 00 sets the maximum time that the selected pattern may hold true and generate an A logic pattern trigger to 10 s TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN LESSLIMIT might return TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN LESSLIMIT 8 0000E 9 indicating that the selected pattern may hold true for up to 8 ns and still generate an A logic pattern trigger TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn MORELimit Group Syntax Arguments Examples 2 436 Sets or returns the minimum time that the selected pattern may be true and still generate an A logic pattern trigger Trigger TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern WHEn MOREL
464. nable Register DESER and the Event Status Enable Register ESER using the DESE and ESE commands When the operation is complete the OPC bit in the Standard Event Status Register SESR will be enabled and the Event Status Bit ESB in the Status Byte Register will be enabled The same command sequence using the OPC command for synchronization with serial polling looks like this Set up conditional acquisition ACQUIRE STATE OFF SELECT CH1 ON HORIZONTAL RECORDLENGTH 1000 ACQUIRE MODE SAMPLE ACQUIRE STOPAFTER SEQUENCE Enable the status registers DESE 1 ESE 1 SRE O Acquire waveform data ACQUIRE STATE ON Set up the measurement parameters MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE AMPLITUDE MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE 1 Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the measurement OPC while serial poll 0 keep looping Take amplitude measurement MEASUREMENT IMMED VALUE This technique requires less bus traffic than did looping on BUSY 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Status and Events Service Request Method Enable the OPC bit in the Device Event Status Enable Register DESER and the Event Status Enable Register ESER using the DESE and ESE commands You can also enable service requests by setting the ESB bit in the Service Request Enable Register SRER using the SRE command When the operation is complete the oscilloscope will generate a Service Reques
465. nce acquisition command is executed depending upon the applied signals and trigger settings it may take a few seconds before the acquisition is complete Rather than remain idle while the operation is in process the oscilloscope will continue processing other commands This means that some operations will not be completed in the order that they were sent Sometimes the result of an operation depends on the result of an earlier operation A first operation must complete before the next one is processed The oscilloscope status and event reporting system is designed to accommodate this process The Operation Complete OPC bit of the Standard Event Status Register SESR can be programmed to indicate when certain oscilloscope operations have completed and by setting the Event Status Enable Register ESER to report OPC in the Event Status Bit ESB of the Status Byte Register SBR and setting the Service Request Enable Register SRER to generate service request upon a positive transition of the ESB a service request SRQ interrupt can be generated when certain operations complete as described in this section The following oscilloscope operations can generate an OPC ACQuire STATE non zero 1 gt only when in single sequence acquisition mode m CALibrate FACtory STARt CALibrate FACtory CONTinue CALibrate FACtory PREVious HARDCopy HARDCopy START DIAg STATE m SAVe IMAGe lt file as quoted stri
466. nded For setups use the extension SET NR1 specifies a location for saving the current front panel setup The front panel setup value ranges from 1 to 10 Using an out of range value causes an execution error Any settings that have been stored previously at this location will be overwritten SAVE SETUP 5 saves the current oscilloscope setup in memory location 5 SAVE SETUP TEK00000 SET saves the current oscilloscope setup in the file 00000 5 in the current working directory 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SAVe WAVEform No Query Form Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples This command saves a specified waveform or all displayed waveforms excluding serial bus waveforms Only individual analog waveforms CH lt x gt MATH and REF lt x gt can be saved to reference memory locations You can save all displayed waveforms excluding serial bus waveforms to a single CSV file when the SAVE WAVEFORM FILEFORMAT is set to SPREADSHEET You can save all displayed waveforms excluding serial bus waveforms and digital channels MSO models to consecutive ISF internal save format files when the SAVE WAVEFORM FILEFORMAT is set to INTERNAL Save and Recall SAVe WAVEform lt wfm gt REF lt x gt lt wfm gt lt QString gt ALL Qstring RECAII WAV Eform SAVe WAVEform FILEFormat lt wfm gt REF x saves the s
467. ndition to data IDANDDATA sets the FLEXRAY trigger condition to ID and data EOF sets the FLEXRAY trigger condition to EOF ERROR sets the FLEXRAY trigger condition to an error SEARCH SEARCHL TRIGGER 1 ERROR sets the FLEXRAY condition to ERROR SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 CONDITION might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CONDITION SOF indicating the FLEXRAY condition is start of frame SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CYCLEcount HIVALue Group Syntax Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for FLEXRAY cycle count high value Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CYCLEcount HIVALue lt QString gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CYCLEcount HIVALue 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 339 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Arguments Examples lt QString gt is a quoted string that is the cycle count high value SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT HIVALUE 110010 sets the cycle count high value to 110010 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT HIVALUE might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT HIVALUE XXXXXX indicating the cycle count high value is set to don t cares SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CYCL
468. ng gt SAVe SETUp file as quoted string gt B RECAII SETUp file as quoted string gt m SAVe WAVEform lt file as quoted string gt RECAII WAVEform lt file as quoted string gt m CH lt x gt PRObe DEGAUss EXECute AUXin PRObe DEGAUSss EXECute m TEKSecure 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 3 7 Status and Events For example a typical application might involve acquiring a single sequence waveform and then taking a measurement on the acquired waveform You could use the following command sequence to do this Set up conditional acquisition ACQUIRE STATE OFF SELECT CH1 ON HORIZONTAL RECORDLENGTH 1000 ACQUIRE MODE SAMPLE ACQUIRE STOPAFTER SEQUENCE Acquire waveform data ACQUIRE STATE ON Set up the measurement parameters MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE AMPLITUDE MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE Take amplitude measurement MEASUREMENT MEAS1 VALUE The acquisition of the waveform requires extended processing time It may not finish before the oscilloscope takes an amplitude measurement see the following figure This can result in an incorrect amplitude value ACQUIRE STATE ON Acquiring Waveform Data MEASUREMENT IMMED VALUE Processing Time Figure 3 7 Command Processing Without Using Synchronization To ensure the oscilloscope completes waveform acquisition before taking the measurement on the acquired data you can synchronize
469. ng the position value causes the waveform to move down Position adjusts only the display position of a waveform The position value determines the vertical graticule coordinate at which signal values are displayed For example if the position for Reference 3 is set to 2 0 the signal represented by that reference will be displayed at 2 0 divisions above the center of the screen 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Vertical REF x VERTical POSition lt NR3 gt REF x VERTical POSition CH lt x gt POSition MATH I J VERTical POSition lt NR3 gt is the desired position in divisions from the center horizontal graticule The range is from 5 0 to 5 0 divisions REF2 VERTICAL POSITION 1 3 00 positions the Reference 2 input signal 1 3 divisions above the center horizontal graticule REF1 VERTICAL POSITION might return REF1 VERTICAL POSITION 1 3000E 00 indicating that the current position of Reference 1 is 1 3 divisions below the center horizontal graticule REF lt x gt VERTical SCAle Group Syntax Related Commands Sets or returns the vertical scale for the reference waveform specified by lt x gt where x is the reference channel number Each waveform has a vertical scale parameter For a signal with constant amplitude increasing the Scale causes the waveform to be displayed smaller Decreasing t
470. nge of the samples taken from a single waveform acquisition The high low range is displayed as a vertical column that extends from the highest to the lowest value sampled during the acquisition interval PEAKdetect mode can reveal the presence of aliasing or narrow spikes HIRes specifies Hi Res mode where the displayed data point value is the average of all the samples taken during the acquisition interval This is a form 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order of averaging where the average comes from a single waveform acquisition The number of samples taken during the acquisition interval determines the number of data values that compose the average AVErage specifies averaging mode in which the resulting waveform shows an average of SAMple data points from several separate waveform acquisitions The oscilloscope processes the number of waveforms you specify into the acquired waveform creating a running exponential average of the input signal The number of waveform acquisitions that go into making up the average waveform is set or queried using the ACQuire NUMAVg command ENVe lope specifies envelope mode where the resulting waveform shows the PEAKdetect range of data points from every waveform acquisition ACQUIRE MODE ENVELOPE sets the acquisition mode to display a waveform that Is an envelope of many individual waveform acquisitions ACQUIRE might re
471. ns the network initialization search for a DHCP BOOTP server ETHERnet DNS IPADDress Sets or returns the network Domain Name Server Dns IP address ETHERnet DOMAINname Sets or returns the network domain name ETHERnet ENET ADDress Returns the Ethernet address value assigned to the oscilloscope 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Command Groups Table 2 19 Ethernet Commands cont Command Description ETHERnet GATEWay IPADDress Sets or returns the remote interface gateway IP address ETHERnet HTTPPort Sets or returns the remote interface HTTP port value ETHERnet IPADDress Sets or returns the IP address assigned to the oscilloscope ETHERnet NAME Sets or returns the network name assigned to the oscilloscope ETHERnet PASSWord Sets or returns the Ethernet access password ETHERnet PING Causes the oscilloscope to ping the gateway IP address ETHERnet PING STATUS Returns the results from pinging the gateway IP address ETHERnet SUBNETMask Sets or returns the remote interface subnet mask value File System Command Group Use the commands in the File System Command Group to help you use CompactFlash and USB media You can use the commands to do the following List the contents of a directory Create and delete directories Create read rename or delete a file Format media When using these commands keep the following points in mind File arguments are always enclosed w
472. nt Command Default value TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D15 X TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D2 X TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D3 X TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D4 X TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D5 X TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D6 X TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D7 X TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D8 X TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D9 X TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN DELTATIME 8 00E 09 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN TRUE TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN LESSLIMIT 8 00E 09 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN MORELIMIT 8 00E 09 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD CH1 0 00E 00 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD CH2 0 00E 00 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD DO 14 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD D1 14 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD D10 1 4 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD D11 1 4 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD D12 1 4 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD D13 1 4 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD D14 1 4 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD D15 1 4 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD D2 1 4 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD D3 1 4 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD D4 1 4 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD D5 1 4 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD D6 1 4 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD D7 1 4 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD D8 1 4 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD D9 1 4 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD CH1 0 00E 00 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD CH2 0 00E 00 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD DO 14 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD D1 14 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD D10 14 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD D11 1 4 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual C 29 Appendix Factory Defaults Table C
473. of samples used for the mean and standard deviation statistical accumulations MEASUREMENT STATISTICS WEIGHTING 4 sets statistical weighting to four samples MEASUREMENT STATISTICS WEIGHTING might return MEASUREMENT STATISTICS WEIGHTING 4 indicating that measurement statistics weighting is currently set to 4 samples 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 235 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order MESSage Group Syntax Examples MESSage BOX 2 236 Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments This command sets or queries message box screen annotation parameters Display MESSage MESSage MESSAGE might return MESSAGE SHOW TP401 BOX 271 82 292 114 STATE 0 indicating the message parameters Sets or returns the co ordinates of the message box This command does not display the message unless MESSage STATE is on and are the screen coordinates of the top left corner of the message box X2 and Y2 are the screen coordinates of the bottom right corner of the message box four coordinates are returned by the query Changing the text in the message box using the MESSAGE SHOW command automatically resizes the message box If you want a custom message box size send the MESSAGE BOX command after changing the text using the MESSAGE SHOW command Message box settings and data are saved and restored in saved setups Display MESSage BOX lt 1 gt lt 1 gt lt 2 g
474. of the first point in the incoming waveform WFMInpre YMUIt Sets or returns the vertical scale factor per digitizing level of the incoming waveform points WFMinpre YOFf Sets or returns the vertical position of the incoming waveform in digitizing levels WFMInpre YUNit Sets or returns the vertical units of the 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual incoming waveform 2 65 Command Groups 2 66 Table 2 34 Waveform Transfer Commands cont Command Description WFMInpre YZEro Sets or returns the vertical offset of the incoming waveform WFMOutpre Returns the waveform formatting data for the waveform specified by the DATA SSOURCE command WFMOutpre BIT_Nr Sets or returns the number of bits per waveform point that outgoing waveforms contain WFMOutpre BN_Fmt Sets or returns the format of binary data for the outgoing waveform WFMOutpre BYT_Nr Sets or returns the data width for the outgoing waveform WFMOutpre BYT_Or Sets or returns the byte order of waveform points for the outgoing waveform WFMOutpre ENCdg Sets or returns the type of encoding for outgoing waveforms WFMOutpre FRACTional This query always returns a 0 if the waveform specified by DATA SOUrce is on or displayed WFMOutpre NR_Pt Returns the number of points for the waveform transmitted in response to a CURVe query WFMOutpre PT_Fmt Returns the point format for the outgoing waveform WFM
475. omatically configures itself To verify that the USB is enabled On the front panel push Utility Push Utility Page Select I O with the Multipurpose knob Push USB and verify that USB is enabled Uu e S x pa If USB is disabled push Connect to computer on the side bezel menu After connection the host with appropriate software can list the oscilloscope as a USB device with the following parameters See Table 1 1 Table 1 1 USB Device Parameters Parameter Value Manufacturer ID 0x0699 decimal 1689 Product ID 0x0401 decimal 1025 Serial number Serial number Manufacturer description Tektronix Interface description USBTMC USB488 To use GPIB start by connecting an appropriate USB cable to the USB 2 0 high speed device port on the rear panel of your oscilloscope Connect the other end to the TEK USB 488 Adapter host port Then connect a GPIB cable from the TEK USB 488 Adapter to your PC Supply power to the Adapter in either of these two ways 1 Use the optional 5 Vpc power adapter connected to the 5 Vpc power input on the Adapter 2 Use an appropriate USB cable connected to a powered USB host port on your PC and the Device port on the TEK USB 488 Adapter 804000 DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Getting Started The oscilloscope has a USB 2 0 High speed device port to control the oscilloscope through USBTMC or GPIB with a TEK USB 488 Adapter The USBTMC protocol allows U
476. ommand requires DPO4AUDIO application module Bus BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUD10 CHANnel SIZe lt NR1 gt BUS lt 1 4 gt 0 1 CHANnel 517 lt NR1 gt specifies number of bits per channel BUS B1 AUDIO CHANNEL SIZE 8 sets the number of bits per channel to 8 BUS B1 AUDIO CHANNEL SIZE might return BUS B1 AUDIO CHANNEL SIZe 24 indicating that the number of bits per channel is 24 BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio CLOCk POLarity 2 84 Sets or returns the clock polarity for the AUDIO bus 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order This command requires DPO4AUDIO application module Bus BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDi0 CLOCk POLarity FALL BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDi0 CLOCk POLarity FALL sets falling edge as the clock polarity RISe sets rising edge as the clock polarity BUS B1 AUDIO CLOCK POLARITY Fall sets the clock polarity to Fall BUS B1 AUDIO CLOCK POLARITY might return BUS B1 AUDIO CLOCK POLARITY RISe indicating that the clock polarity is set to Rise BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio CLOCk SOUrce Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the clock source waveform for the AUDIO bus This command requires DPO4AUDIO application module Bus BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDi0 CLOCk SOUrce 1 2 101102103 04 05 06107108 09 101010111012 10131014 015 BU
477. on CH1 PROBE COMMAND MODE might return CH1 PROBE COMMAND 4 4V1MHZ CH lt x gt PRObe DEGAUss No Query Form Group Syntax Arguments Starts a degauss auto zero cycle on a Tek VPI current probe attached to the input channel specified by x where x is the channel number Vertical CH x PRObe DEGAUss EXECute EXECute initiates the degauss operation CH lt x gt PRObe DEGAUss STATE Query Only Group 2 124 Returns the state of the probe degauss for the channel specified by lt x gt where is x is the channel number NOTE This command will return PASSED for probes that do not support degauss operations Vertical 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax CH lt x gt PRObe DEGAUSS STATE Returns NEEDED indicates the probe should be degaussed before taking measurements RECOMMENDED indicates the measurement accuracy might be improved by degaussing the probe PASSED indicates the probe is degaussed FAILED indicates the degauss operation failed RUNNING indicates the probe degauss operation is currently in progress CH lt x gt PRObe FORCEDRange Sets or returns the range of a Tek VPI probe attached to the channel specified by lt x gt where x is the channel number NOTE This command will return PASSED for probes that do not support degauss operations Group Vertical Syntax CH lt x gt PRObe FORCE
478. on video signals that meet the NTSC 525 60 2 1 standard a line rate of 525 lines per frame and a field rate of 60 Hz PAL sets the oscilloscope to trigger on video signals that meet the NTSC 625 50 2 1 standard a line rate of 625 lines per frame and a field rate of 50 Hz SECAM sets the oscilloscope to trigger on video signals that meet the SECAM standard CUSTom sets the oscilloscope to trigger on video horizontal scan rate parameters defined by TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom SCAN command HDtv sets the oscilloscope to trigger on HDTV video signals that meet standards defined by the TRIGger A VIDeo HDtv FOR Mat command TRIGGER VIDEO STANDARD NTSC sets the oscilloscope to trigger on NTSC standard video signals TRIGGER A VIDEO STANDARD might return TRIGger A VIDeo STANDARD HDTV indicating that the oscilloscope is set to trigger on an HDTV format TRIGger A VIDeo SYNC FIELD 2 462 Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the video field or line that the trigger detects Trigger TRIGger A VIDeo SYNC FIELD ODD EVEN ALLFields ALLLines NUMERic TRIGger A VIDeo SYNC FIELD ODD argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger on interlaced video odd fields EVEN argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger on interlaced video even fields ALLFields argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger on all fields ALLLines argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger on all video lines NUMERic argument sets the oscillo
479. ondition MISOMOSI specifies the Master In Slave Out and Master Out Slave In conditions TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa IN MISO VALue Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for a SPI trigger if the trigger condition is MISO or MISOMOSI Applies to bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa IN MISO VALue lt QString gt TRIGger A BUS B x SPI DATa IN MISO VALue Qstring is the binary data string where the number of bits is 8 times the number of bytes specified The only allowed characters in the string are 0 1 and X 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 423 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa OUT MOSI VALue Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for a SPI trigger if the trigger condition is MOSI or MISOMOSI Applies to bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa OUT MOST VALUe lt QString gt TRIGger A BUS B x SPI DATa OUT MOSI VALUue Qstring is the binary data string with the number of bits specified by the TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa SIZe command The only allowed characters in the Qstring are 0 1 and X TRIGger A
480. opy LAYout Group Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order dark blue because yellow does not show up well and is difficult to see on a white background This option can significantly reduce print time and quantities of ink required compared with WYSIWYG dark background images Hard Copy HARDCopy INKSaver ON or lt NR1 gt 0 sets the ink saver mode on OFF or NRI 0 sets the ink saver mode off HARDCOPY INKSAVER ON will cause subsequent hard copy output to display the screen on a white background Sets or returns the page orientation for hard copy If you set the layout to LANdscape the printer will print hard copies in landscape mode where the long edge of the screen will print to the long edge of the sheet of paper If you set the layout to PORTRait the printer will print hard copies in portrait mode This command is not applicable for PictBridge hardcopies Hard Copy HARDCopy LAYout PORTRait LANdscape HARDCOpy LAYout PORTRait orients the screen image vertically on the printed page LANdscape orients the screen image horizontally on the printed page HARDCOPY LAYOUT LANDSCAPE sets the hard copy page orientation to Landscape HARDCOPY LAYOUT might return HARDCOPY LAYOUT PORTRAIT indicating that the hard copy page orientation is set to portrait 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 183 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order HARDCopy PREVIEW No
481. or a 89 MM Roll paper size ROLL127MM for a 127 MM Roll paper size ROLL10OMM for a 100 MM Roll paper size ROLL210MM for 210 MM Roll paper size Examples PICTBRIDGE PAPERSIZEL sets the paper size to L PICTBRIDGE PAPERSIZE might return PICTBRIDGE PAPERSIZE DEFLT indicating the paper size is set to Default PICTBridge PAPERType Sets or returns the paper type Group PictBridge Syntax PICTBridge PAPERType DEFLT PLAIN PHOTO FASTPHOTO Arguments DEFLT for a default print paper type PLAIN for a plain print paper type PHOTO for a photo print paper type FASTPHOTO for a fastphoto print paper type Examples PICTBRIDGE PAPERTYPE PLAIN sets the paper type to Plain 2 246 PICTBRIDGE PAPERTYPE might return PICTBRIDGE PAPERTYPE DEFLT indicating the default paper type 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order PICTBridge PRINTQual Sets or returns the output print quality Group PictBridge Syntax PICTBridge PRINTQual DEFLT NRMAL FINE DRAFT Arguments for the default quality print NRMAL for a normal quality print FINE for a fine quality print DRAFT for a draft quality print Examples PICTBRIDGE PRINTQUAL FINE sets the print quality to Fine PICTBRIDGE PRINTQUAL might return PICTBRIDGE PRINTQUAL DEFLT indicating the default quality print POWer CURRENTSOurce Sets or returns the current source for the power application Conditions This command requires a
482. ost significant bit in the register is set to 1 the next most significant bit to 1 the next bit to 0 etc The power on default for DESER is all bits set if PSC is 1 If PSC is 0 the DESER maintains the previous power cycle value through the current power cycle NOTE Setting the DESER and ESER to the same value allows only those codes to be entered into the Event Queue and summarized on the ESB bit bit 5 of the Status Byte Register Use the ESE command to set the ESER DESE 209 sets the DESER to binary 11010001 which enables the PON URQ EXE and OPC bits DESE might return DESE 186 showing that the DESER contains the binary value 10111010 DESkew No Query Form Group Syntax Arguments Causes the deskew values for all channels to be set to the recommended values Equivalent to pressing the Set all deskews to recommended values button in the application UI NOTE The actual deskew values for each channel can be set or queried using the CH lt x gt DESKew command Vertical DESkew SETALLtorec lt SETALLtorec gt sets the deskew for all channels to the recommended values 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 153 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DESkew DISPlay Group Syntax Arguments DIAg LOOP OPTion Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the state of the deskew table display Vertical DESkew DISPlay OFF ON 0 1 DESkew DISPlay OFF or
483. ostic tests Commands that are specific to factory calibration are not described in this manual They are described in the Service manual located on the DPO4000 Documentation CD ROM in PDF format You can also order a printed copy Table 2 16 Calibration and Diagnostic Commands Command Description CAL Instructs the oscilloscope to perform self calibration and returns the oscilloscope self calibration status CALibrate FACtory STATus Returns the factory calibration status value saved in nonvolatile memory CALibrate INTERNal Starts a signal path compensation CALibrate INTERNal STARt Starts the internal signal path calibration CALibrate INTERNal STATus CALibrate RESults Returns the current status of the internal signal path calibration Returns the status of all calibration subsystems without performing an SPC operation CALibrate RESults FACtory Returns the status of internal and factory calibration CALibrate RESults SPC Returns the results of the last SPC operation DIAg LOOP OPTion Sets the self test loop option DIAg LOOP OPTion NTIMes Sets the self test loop option to run N times DIAg LOOP STOP Stops the self test at the end of the current loop DIAg RESUIt FLAg Returns the pass fail status from the last self test sequence execution DIAg RESUIt LOG Returns the internal results log from the last self test sequence execution DIAg SELect lt function gt Se
484. out errors CAL starts the internal signal path calibration and might return 0 to indicate that the calibration was successful CALibrate FACtory STATus Query Only Group Syntax 2 114 Returns the factory calibration status value saved in nonvolatile memory Calibration and Diagnostic CALibrate FACtory STATus 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Exam p les CALIBRATE FACTORY STATUS might return CALIBRATE FACTORY STATUS PASS indicating that factory calibration passed CALibrate INTERNal No Query Form This command starts a signal path compensation Group Calibration and Diagnostic Syntax CALibrate INTERNal Arguments None Examples CALIBRATE INTERNAL starts a serial path compensation cycle CALibrate INTERNal STARt No Query Form Starts the internal signal path calibration SPC of the oscilloscope You can use the CALibrate INTERNal STATus query to return the current status of the internal signal path calibration of the oscilloscope Group Calibration and Diagnostic Syntax X CALibrate INTERNal STARt Related Commands CALibrate RESults SPC Examples CALIBRATE INTERNAL START initiates the internal signal path calibration of the oscilloscope CALibrate INTERNal STATus Query Only Returns the current status of the oscilloscope internal signal path calibration for the last SPC operation Group Calibration and Diagnostic 504000 and DPO4000
485. ow value Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CYCLEcount VALue Qstring SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CYCLEcount VALue lt QString gt is a quoted string that is the binary cycle count value SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT VALUE 110010 sets the cycle count value to 110010 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT VALUE might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT VALUE XXXXXX indicating the cycle count value is don t cares SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa HIVALue Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the high binary data string used for FLEXRAY trigger if trigger condition is ID or IDANDDATA Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa HIVALue Qstring SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray DATa HIVALue lt QString gt is a quoted string that is the binary high value SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS BL FLEXRAY DATA HIVALUE 11001010 sets the high value 11001010 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA HIVALUE might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA HIVALUE XXXXXXXX indicating the high value is don t cares 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 341 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGg
486. owing table shows the command error messages generated by improper syntax Check that the command is properly formed and that it follows the rules in the section on command Syntax Table 3 4 Command Error Messages CME Bit 5 Code Message 100 Command error 101 Invalid character 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Status and Events Table 3 4 Command Error Messages CME Bit 5 cont Code Message 102 Syntax error 103 Invalid separator 104 Data type error 105 GET not allowed 108 Parameter not allowed 109 Missing parameter 110 Command header error 112 Program mnemonic too long 113 Undefined header 120 Numeric data error 121 Invalid character in numeric 123 Exponent too large 124 Too many digits 130 Suffix error 131 Invalid suffix 134 Suffix too long 140 Character data error 141 Invalid character data 144 Character data too long 150 String data error 151 Invalid string data 152 String data too long 160 Block data error 161 Invalid block data 170 Command expression error 171 Invalid expression Execution Error following table lists the execution errors that are detected during execution of a command Table 3 5 Execution Error Messages EXE Bit 4 Code 200 Message Execution error 221 Settings conflict 222 224 Data out of range Illegal parameter value 504000 and DPO4000 Serie
487. pecified waveform to the specified reference memory location lt wfm gt can be any live analog channel where x is the channel number the MATHI waveform or another reference waveform such as REF1 lt wfm gt lt QString gt saves the specified waveform to the file specified in the quoted string argument Any live channel such as CH1 the MATHI waveform any reference waveform and for MSO models digital waveforms such as DO be saved to a file Digital waveforms can only be saved when the SAVE WAVEFORM FILEFORMAT is set to SPREADSHEET ALL lt QString gt saves all displayed waveforms excluding serial bus waveforms to a single CSV file specified by the quoted string argument when the SAVE WAVEFORM FILEFORMAT is set to SPREADSHEET or saves all displayed waveforms excluding serial bus waveforms and digital channel waveforms MSO models to individual ISF internal save format files with a file name prefix specified by the argument with an underscore _ and the waveform ID such as CHI REF1 MATH appended to the file name s SAVE WAVEFORM CH1 REF1 saves the waveform in reference memory location 1 SAVE WAVEFORM FILEFORMAT SPREADSHEET SAVE WAVEFORM ALL D test folder testl1 all csv saves all displayed waveforms excluding serial bus waveforms to D test folder testl all csv 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 327 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order SAVe WAVEform FILEFo
488. phabetical Order Related Commands Examples USBTMC PRODUCTID DECimal USBTMC PRODUCTID HEXadecimal USBTMC SERIALnumber USBTMC VENDORID HEXadecimal USBTMC VENDORID DECIMAL might return USBTMC VENDORID DECIMAL 1689 indicating the vendor ID in decimal is 1689 USBTMC VENDORID HEXadecimal Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples VERBose Group Syntax Related Commands 2 476 This query returns the USBTMC vendor ID The Vendor ID for Tektronix is 0x699 or 1689 decimal Miscellaneous USBTMC VENDORID HEXadecimal USBTMC PRODUCTID DECimal USBTMC PRODUCTID HEXadecimal USBTMC SERIALnumber USBTMC VENDORID DECimal USBTMC VENDORID HEXADECIMAL might return USBTMC VENDORID HEXADECIMAL 0x0699 indicating the vendor ID in hexadecimal is 0x0699 Sets or returns the Verbose state that controls the length of keywords on query responses Keywords can be both headers and arguments NOTE This command does not affect IEEE Std 488 2 1987 Common Commands those starting with an asterisk This command does affect the verbose state of both the USBTMC and VXI 11 interfaces Refer to the Introduction for information Miscellaneous VERBose OFF ON lt NR1 gt HEADer LRN SET 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Examples WAI No Query Form Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order OFF sets the
489. point in at which to sample during each bit period Group Bus Syntax BUS B lt x gt LIN SAMPLEpoint lt NR1 gt BUS B lt x gt LIN SAMPLEpoint Arguments lt 1 gt is the sample point in at which to sample during each bit period Examples BUS B1 LIN SAMPLEPOINT 10 sets the sample point is at 10 of the bit period BUS B1 LIN SAMPLEPOINT might return BUS B1 LIN SAMPLEPOINT 50 indicating that the sample point is at 50 of the bit period BUS B lt x gt LIN SOUrce Sets or returns the LIN data source Group Bus Syntax BUS lt gt 00 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 DO D1 D2 03104 D5 06 07108109 0101011 012 013 014 D BUS B Xx LIN SOUrce Arguments CH x specifies the LIN source channel where x is 1 to 4 D lt x gt specifies the LIN source channel where x is 1 to 16 Examples BUS B1 LIN SOURCE sets the LIN source to channel 4 BUS B1 LIN SOURCE might return BUS B1 LIN SOURCE CH1 indicating the LIN source is channel 1 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 99 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order BUS B lt x gt LIN STANDard Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the LIN standard Bus BUS B lt x gt LIN STANDard v1x V2X MIXed BUS B x LIN STANDard V1X sets the LIN standard to V1X V2X sets the LIN standard to V2X MIXed sets the LIN standard to MIXED BUS B1 LIN STANDARD V1X sets the LIN standard is V1X BUS B1
490. ponses You can then use the query response as a command lt NR1 gt 0 sets the Response Header Enable State to false any other value sets this state to true HEADER OFF specifies that the oscilloscope omits headers on query responses so that only the argument is returned HEADER might return HEADER 1 indicating that the oscilloscope is including headers on applicable query responses HORizontal Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns all settings for the horizontal commands Horizontal zontal HORIZONTAL might return the following horizontal settings HORIZONTAL DELAY MODE 1 TIME 0 0000 HORIZONTAL MAIN SCALE 20 0000E 9 SAMPLERATE 5 0000E 9 UNITS S UNITS STRING S HORIZONTAL SAMPLERATE 5 0000E 9 RECORDLENGTH 1000000 HORizontal DELay MODe Group 2 186 Sets or returns the horizontal delay mode Horizontal 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order HORizontal DELay MODe OFF ON lt NR1 gt zontal DELay MODe HORizontal POSition OFF sets the Horizontal Delay Mode to off This causes the HORizontal POSition command to operate like the HORIZONTAL POSITION knob on the front panel ON sets the Horizontal Delay Mode to on This causes the HORizontal DELay TIMe command to operate like the HORIZONTAL POSITION knob on the front panel lt NR1 gt 0 sets the Horizontal Del
491. power to 1 0000E 3 W POWER SOA MASK MAXWATTS might return POWER SOA MASK MAXWATTS 750 0000 indicating that the SOA mask testing maximum power is set to 750 W POWer SOA MASK NR_PT Query Only Conditions Group Syntax Examples Returns the number of mask points defined This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer SOA MASK NR PT POWER SOA MASK NR PT might return POWER SOA MASK NR PT 4 indicating that the number of mask points defined 15 4 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 293 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order POWer SOA MASK STATe Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the state of the mask for SOA calculations This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer SOA MASK STATe OFF LIMITS POINTS POWer SOA MASK STATe OFF disables mask testing LIMITS enables mask testing based on limits specified using POWer SOA MASK MAXAmps POWer SOA MASK MA X Volts and POWer SOA MASK MAX Watts commands POINTS enables mask testing based on masks points defined POWER SOA MASK STATEPOINTS enables mask testing power based on points defined POWER SOA MASK STATE might return POWER SOA MASK STATE LIMITS indicating that the mask testing is enabled based on limits POWer SOA MASK STOPOnviol Conditions Group Syntax Arguments 2 294 Sets or returns the enabled state of the
492. pplication module Power POWer HARMonics IEC FUNDamental lt NR3 gt POWer HARMonics IEC FUNDamental NR3 is the fundamental current in amperes POWER HARMONICS IEC FUNDAMENTAL 1 sets the fundamental current to 1 0000 A POWER HARMONICS IEC FUNDAMENTAL might return POWER HARMONICS IEC FUNDAMENTAL 16 indicating that the fundamental current for IEC harmonics is set to 16 0000 A POWer HARMonics IEC GROUPing Conditions Group Syntax Sets or returns the enabled state for grouping of IEC harmonics This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer HARMonics IEC GROUPing OFF ON 1 0 HARMonics IEC GROUPi ng 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 253 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Arguments Examples ON or enables grouping of IEC harmonics OFF or 0 disables grouping of IEC harmonics POWER HARMONICS GROUPING OFF disables grouping of IEC harmonics POWER HARMONICS IEC GROUPING might return POWER HARMONICS IEC GROUPING 1 indicating that the grouping is enabled for IEC harmonics POWer HARMonics IEC INPUTPOWer Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the class D rated input power for IEC harmonics This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer HARMonics IEC INPUTPOWer lt NR3 gt POWer HARMonics INPUTPOWer NR3 is the class D input power Valid values ran
493. pression If you change these sources the math waveform you previously defined will be affected Math expressions can be simple containing no mathematical computation such as which specifies that a waveform shows the signal source of Channel 1 Math expressions can also be complex consisting of up to 128 characters and comprising many sources functions and operands When a live waveform is updated or a reference waveform is altered math waveforms containing those waveforms as sources are also updated to reflect the changes Remember that sources must exist but do not need to be displayed to be used in and to update math waveforms Table 2 24 Math Commands Command Description MATH 1 Returns the definition of the math waveform MATH 1 DEFine Sets or returns the current math function as a text string MATH 1 HORizontal SCAle Sets or returns the math horizontal display scale for FFT or for Dual Math waveforms MATH 1 HORizontal UNIts Returns the math waveform horizontal unit value MATH MATH1 LABel Sets or queries the waveform label for the math waveform MATH 1 SPECTral MAG Sets or returns the units of spectral magnification in the math string MATH 1 SPECTral WINdow Sets or returns the window function for math waveform spectral input data MATH 1 VERTical POSition Sets or returns the vertical position of the currently selected math type MATH 1 VERTic
494. probes introduce different delays between the probe tip and the 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order oscilloscope Many oscilloscope users do not have to worry about this because they use the same type of probe on all channels Power measurement users however frequently use both a voltage probe and a current probe A current probe typically has a larger delay than a voltage probe so setting deskew values becomes important POWER TYPE 1 cs sets the measurement type to Harmonics POWER TYPE might return POWER TYPE NON indicating that no measurement type is set POWer VOLTAGESOurce PSC Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Group Sets or returns the voltage source for the power application This command requires DPO4PWR application module Power POWer VOLTAGESOurce 1 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 REF1 REF2 REF3 REF4 POWer VOLTAGESOUurce 1 4 or REF1 REF4 sets channel or ref as the voltage source POWER VOLTAGESOURCE 1 sets the voltage source as POWER VOLTAGESOURCE might return POWER VOLTAGESOURCE 1 indicating that the voltage source is set to Sets or returns the power on status flag that controls the automatic power on handling of the DESER SRER and ESER registers When PSC is true the DESER register is set to 255 and the SRER and ESER registers are set to 0 at power on When PSC is fa
495. quires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer RIPPle RESults MIN POWER RIPPLE RESULTS MIN might return POWER RIPPLE RESULTS MIN 0 9 indicating that the minimum peak to peak amplitude 15 set to 0 9 V POWer RIPPle RESults STDdev Query Only Conditions Group Syntax 2 286 Returns the standard deviation of the peak to peak ripple measurements This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer RIPPle RESults STDdev 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples POWER RIPPLE RESULTS STDDEV might return POWER RIPPLE RESULTS STDDEV 0 14 indicating that the standard deviation of the peak to peak amplitude is set to 0 14 POWer RIPPle SOUrce Sets or returns the source waveform for ripple tests The voltage source waveform is specified using the POWer VOLTAGESOurce command and the current waveform is specified using the POWer CURRENTSOurce command Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Group Power Syntax POWer RIPPle SOUrce VOLTage CURRent Arguments specifies voltage source waveform for ripple tests CURRent specifies current source waveform for ripple tests Examples POWER RIPPLE SOURCE CURRent sets the ripple source to Current POWER RIPPLE SOURCE might return POWER RIPPLE SOURCE VOLT indicating that the ripple source is set to Voltage POWer SOA LINear XMAX Sets
496. r POWer SWLoss REFLevel PERCent LOWCurrent lt NR3 gt POWer SWLoss REFLevel PERCent LOWCurrent NR3 is the low voltage reference level percent POWER SWLOSS REFLEVEL PERCENT LOWCURRENT 15 sets the reference low current to 15 POWER SWLOSS REFLEVEL PERCENT LONCURRENT might return POWER 501055 REFLEVEL PERCENT LOWCURRENT 5 0000 indicating that the reference low current is set to 5 POWer SWLoss REFLevel PERCent LOWVoltage Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the low voltage reference level used in switching loss power measurements in percent This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer SWLoss REFLevel PERCent LOWVoltage lt NR3 gt POWer SWLoss REFLevel PERCent LOWVoltage NR3 is the low voltage reference level in percent POWER SWLOSS REFLEVEL PERCENT LOWVOLTAGE 10 sets the reference low voltage to 1096 POWER SWLOSS REFLEVEL PERCENT LONVOLTAGE might return POWER SWLOSS REFLEVEL PERCENT LOWVOLTAGE 5 0000 indicating that the reference low voltage is set to 5 POWer SWLoss TOFF ENERGY MAX Query Only Conditions 2 306 Returns the maximum Toff energy for the switching loss calculation This command requires a DPO4PWR application module 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Power POWer SWLOSS TOFF ENERGY
497. r A BUS B lt x gt CAN CONDition Conditions 2 334 Sets or returns the search condition for a CAN trigger search SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN CONDi tion SOF FRAMEtype IDenti fier IDANDDATA EOF ACKMISS SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B X CAN CONDi tion SOF specifies a search based on the start of frame FRAMEtype specifies a search based on the frame type IDentifier specifies a search based on the frame identifier DATA specifies a search based on the frame data IDANDDATA specifies a search based on the frame identifier and data EOF specifies a search base on the end of frame ACKMISS specifies a search based on the missing ACK field SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa DIRection Conditions Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Sets or returns the CAN search to be valid for Read Write or Either condition if the criteria is IDentifier SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This only applies if the search condition is IDentifier This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN
498. r returns the state of B trigger activity If the B trigger state is on the B trigger is part of the triggering sequence If the B trigger state is off then only the A trigger causes the trigger event Trigger TRIGger B STATE ON OFF lt NR1 gt TRIGger B STATE TRIGger A MODe ON specifies that the B trigger is active and in causes trigger events conjunction with the A trigger OFF specifies that only the A trigger causes trigger events 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 469 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Examples TRIGger B TIMe Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples TRIGger B TYPe Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments 2 470 lt NR1 gt a 0 turns off the B trigger any other value activates the B trigger TRIGGER B STATE ON sets the B trigger to active making it capable of causing trigger events TRIGGER B STATE might return TRIGGER B STATE Oindicating that the B trigger is inactive and that only the A trigger causes trigger events Sets or returns B trigger delay time The B Trigger time applies only if TRIGger B BY is set to TIMe Trigger TRIGger B TIMe lt NR3 gt TRIGger B TIMe TRIGger B BY TRIGger B EVENTS COUNt NR3 is the B trigger delay time in seconds TRIGGER B TIME 4E 6 sets the B trigger delay time to 4 us TRIGGER B TIME might return TRIGGER B TIME 16 0000E 9 indicating that the B trigger time 18 set to 16 ns S
499. rammer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order POWer REFLevel PERCent No Query Form Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets the reference levels to the default percentage values This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer REFLevel PERCent SETTODEFaults SETTODEFaults sets the reference levels to their default percentage values POWer REFLevel PERCent HIGH Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the top reference percent level for power measurements This command requires DPO4PWR application module Power POWer REFLevel PERCent HIGH lt NR3 gt Ranges D 0 0 100 0 POWer REFLevel PERCent HIGH lt NR3 gt is the high value in percent POWER REFLEVEL PERCENT HIGH 95 sets the high reference level to 95 of the signal amplitude POWER REFLEVEL PERCENT HIGH might return POWER REFLEVEL PERCENT HIGH 90 indicating that the percentage high reference level is set to 9096 of the signal amplitude POWer REFLevel PERCent LOW Conditions Sets or returns the low reference percent level for power measurements This command requires a DPO4PWR application module 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 283 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Arguments Examples Power POWer REFLevel PERCent LOW lt NR3 gt Ranges D 0 0 100 0 POWer REFLevel PERCent LOW NR3 is the low value in perc
500. ration without performing any calibration operations Calibration and Diagnostic 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax CALibrate RESults FACtory CALibrate RESults SPC Query Only Returns the status of the SPC operation This query does not initiate a SPC Group Calibration and Diagnostic Syntax CALibrate RESults SPC Related Commands Returns INIT indicates that SPC has never successfully completed PASS indicates that the last SPC operation passed FAIL indicates that the last SPC operation failed RUNNING indicates that the SPC operation 15 running Examples CALIBRATE RESULTS SPC returns the results of the last SPC operation either PASS or FAIL lt gt Query Only Returns the vertical parameters for channel x where x is the channel number Group Vertical Syntax CH lt x gt 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 117 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order CH lt x gt AMPSVIAVOLTs ENAble Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the state of the amps via volts feature for the specified channel This feature supports measuring current via the voltage drop across a resistor Vertical CH lt x gt AMPSVIAVOLTS ENAble lt NR1 gt OFF ON CH x AMPSVIAVOLTS ENAb le OFF sets the amps via volts function for channel lt x gt to off ON sets the amps via volts function for channel lt x gt
501. ray FRAMEID HIVALue Qstring SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS lt gt FLEXray FRAMEID HIVALue Arguments lt QString gt is a quoted string representing the binary data string used for FLEXRAY frame ID high value Examples SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMEID HIVALUE 00101100101 sets the frame id high value to 00101100101 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMEID HIVALUE might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMEID HIVALUE XXXXXXXXXXX indicating the frame id high value is don t cares SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEID QUALIifier Sets or returns the FLEXRAY frame ID qualifier 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 345 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Arguments Examples Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEID QUALi fier LESSThan MOREThan EQUal UNEQual LESSEQual MOREEQual INrange OUTrange SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEID QUALi fier LESSThan sets the frame id qualifier to LESSThan MOREThan sets the frame id qualifier to MOREThan QUa sets the frame id qualifier to QUal UNEQual sets the frame id qualifier to UNEQual LESSEQual sets the frame id qualifier to LESSEQual MOREEQual sets the frame id qualifier to MOREEQual INrange sets the frame id qualifier to INrange OUTrange sets the frame id
502. rement warning Invalid min max 546 Measurement warning Need 3 edges 547 Measurement warning Clipping positive negative 548 549 Measurement warning Clipping positive Measurement warning Clipping negative Internal Warning following table shows internal errors that indicate an internal fault in the oscilloscope Table 3 10 Internal Warning Messages Code Message 630 Internal warning 500 overload 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 3 17 Status and Events 3 18 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Appendix Character Set B5 5 5 B4 B3 B2 B1 CONTROL SYMBOLS 40 Lao 60 LA16 SP 0 B7 B6 0 20 0000 NUL DLE 0 0 10 16 20 32 30 48 1 GTL 21 LLO 41 LA1 61 LA17 0001 SOH DC1 1 1 BEI 17 21 31 49 2 22 42 LA2 62 LA18 0010 STX DC2 Hu 2 2 2 12 18 22 34 32 50 3 23 43 LA3 63 LA19 0011 DC3 3 3 13 19 23 35 33 51 4 spc 24 DCL 44 LA 64 LA20 0100 EOT DC4 4 4 4 14 20 24 36 34 52 5 25 PPU 45 Las 65 1421 0101 ENQ NAK 5 5 5 15 21 25 37 35 53 6 26 46 LA6 6 LA22 01 10 ACK SYN amp 6 6 6 t6 22 26 38 36 54 7 27 47 LA7 67 LA23 0 1 1 1 BEL ETB 7 7 7 17 23 27 39 37 55 10 GET 30 SPE 50 Las 70 LA24 1000 BS CAN 8 8 8 t8 24 28 40 56 11 31 SPD 51 Lag 71 LA25 1001 HT EM 9 9 9 19 25 29 4i 39 57 12 32
503. rence point for the incoming waveform is 50 digitizing levels 2 divisions for 8 bit data above the center of the data range WFMINPRE YOFF might return WFMINPRE YOFF 25 indicating the vertical position of the incoming waveform in digitizing levels Sets or returns the vertical units of the incoming waveform Supported units are Hz A A A A V A W A dB A s AA AW AdB As B Hz IRE S s V V A V V V W V dB V s VV VW VdB Volts Vs W W A W V W W W dB W s WA WV WW WdB Ws dB dB A dB V dB W dB dB dBA dBV dBW dBdB day degrees div hr min ohms percent s Waveform Transfer WFMInpre YUNit Qstring WFMInpre YUNit WFMoOutpre YUNIit Qstring contains a maximum of three alpha characters that represent the vertical unit of measure for the incoming waveform WFMINPRE YUNIT might return WFMINPRE YUNIT V indicating the vertical units for the incoming waveform are volts WFMINPRE YUNIT A specifies that the vertical units for the incoming waveform are Amperes Sets or returns the vertical offset of the incoming waveform in units specified by WFMInpre YUNit Variations in this number are analogous to changing the vertical offset of the waveform YMUIt YOFf and YZEro are used to convert waveform record values to YUNit values using the following formula where dl is the data level curve in dlisa data point in CURVe 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Synt
504. requires two to seven characters This includes one to five characters to represent the value another character if the value is negative to represent a minus sign and a comma to separate the data points An example ASCII waveform data string may look like this lt 5 gt 110 109 110 110 109 107 109 107 106 105 103 100 97 90 84 80 NOTE You can use ASCII to obtain a readable and easier to format output than binary However the oscilloscope may require bytes to send the same values with ASCII than with binary reducing transmission speed The use of ASCII for waveform data transfer is inefficient ASCII formatted Waveform WAVFRM and Curve CURVE queries exceeding 1 M points are not supported Binary Data Binary data is represented by signed integer or positive integer values The range of the values depends on the byte width specified When the byte width is one signed integer data ranges from 128 to 127 and positive integer values range from 0 to 255 When the byte width is two the values range from 32768 to 32767 and positive integer values range from 0 to 65 535 Table 2 33 Binary data ranges Byte width Signed integer range Positive integer range 1 128 to 127 0 to 255 2 32 768 to 32 767 0 to 65 535 The defined binary formats also specify the order in which the bytes are transferred The four binary formats are RIBinary RPBinary SRIbinary and SRPbinary RIBinary is
505. returns the type of coupling for the A edge trigger Trigger TRIGger A EDGE COUPling DC HFRej LFRej NOISErej TRIGger A EDGE COUPling TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce TRIGger A EDGE SLOpe DC specifies DC trigger coupling which passes all input signals to the trigger circuitry HFRe j specifies high frequency rejection coupling which attenuates signals above 50 kHz before passing the signals to the trigger circuitry 2 425 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Examples LFRej specifies low frequency rejection coupling which attenuates signals below 50 kHz before passing the signals to the trigger circuitry NOISErej specifies noise rejection coupling which provides stable triggering by increasing the trigger hysteresis Increased hysteresis reduces the trigger sensitivity to noise but may require greater trigger signal amplitude TRIGGER EDGE COUPLING DC sets the edge trigger coupling to DC TRIGGER A EDGE COUPLING might return TRIGGER A EDGE COUPLING DC indicating that the A edge trigger coupling is set to DC TRIGger A EDGE SLOpe Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the slope for the A edge trigger Trigger TRIGger A EDGE SLOpe RISe FALL TRIGger A EDGE SLOpe TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce TRIGger A EDGE COUPling RISe specifies to trigger on the rising or positive edge of a signal FALL specifies to trigger on the falling or negative edge of a signal
506. ries The default state is 1 autoset enabled Miscellaneous AUTOSet ENAble OFF ON 0 1 AUTOSet ENAble OFF or 0 disables autoset ON or 1 enables autoset AUTOSET ENABLE 1 enables the front panel Autoset button AUTOSET ENABLE might return AUTOSET ENABLE 0 indicating that the autoset feature is disabled Returns all auxiliary input parameters Vertical AUXin Returns all information concerning the probe attached to auxilary input Vertical AUXin PRObe AUXin PRObe 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order AUXIN PROBE might return AUXIN PROBE ID TYPE No Probe Detected SERNUMBER AUXIN PROBE UNITS RESISTANCE 1 0000 6 giving information about the probe attached to the AUX In input AUXin PRObe AUTOZero No Query Form Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets the Tek VPI probe attached to the Aux In input to autozero The oscilloscope will ignore this command if the Auxiliary input does not a Tek VPI probe connected to it Vertical AUXin PRObe AUTOZero EXECute EXECute sets the probe to autozero AUXin PROBE AUTOZERO EXECUTE AUXin PRObe COMMAND No Query Form Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets the state of the probe control specified with the first argument to the state specified with the second argument The commands and states are unique to the attached probe type Only
507. ries Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order POWer QUALity APPpwr Query Only Conditions Group Syntax Examples Returns the apparent power measurement This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer QUAL i ty APPpwr POWER QUALITY APPPWR might return POWER QUALITY APPpwr 100 indicating that the apparent power value is set to 100 VA POWer QUALity DISplay APPpwr Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the display state for the apparent power readout This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer QUALity DISplay APPpwr OFF ON 0 1 POWer QUALity DISplay APPpwr OFF or 0 turns off the apparent power display ON or 1 turns on the apparent power display POWER QUALITY DISPLAY APPPWR 1 turns on the apparent power display POWER QUALITY DISPLAY APPPWR might return POWER QUALITY DISPLAY APPPWR 0 indicating that the apparent power display is off POWer QUALity DISplay FREQuency Conditions Sets or returns the display state for the frequency readout This command requires a DPO4PWR application module 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 271 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Arguments Examples Power POWer QUALity DISplay FREQuency OFF ON 0 1 POWer QUALity DISplay FREQuency OFF or 0 turns off the frequency display ON or 1 turns on the freq
508. ries Programmer Manual 2 433 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the conditions used for generating an A logic pattern trigger with respect to the defined input pattern and identifies the time that the selected pattern may be true and still generate the trigger Trigger TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN might return TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT CH1 HIGH CH2 LOW CH3 X CH4 X TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN LESSTHAN WHEN LESSLIMIT 16 0000E 9 LIMIT 16 0000E 9 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN DELTATIME 16 0000E 9 TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern DELTatime Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the pattern trigger delta time value The time value is used as part of the pattern trigger condition to determine if the duration of a logic pattern meets the specified time constraints Trigger TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern DELTatime lt NR3 gt TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern DELTatime NR3 is a floating point value with exponent that sets the pattern trigger time value This argument has a range of 39 6 9 39 6 ns to 10 0 0 10 s in increments of 13 2 ns Values that are not an increment of 13 2 ns are rounded to the nearest correct value TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN DELTATIME 71 28E 8 sets the pattern trigger delta time value to 712 8 ns TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut D lt x gt 2 434 Sets or returns the A logic trigger input for
509. riteria to the trigger or the trigger criteria to a search lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt COPy SEARCHtotrigger TRIGgertosearch SEARCHtotrigger copies the search criteria to the trigger TRIGgertosearch copies the trigger criteria to the search 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt STATE Group Syntax Arguments Sets the search state to on or off lt x gt is the search number which is always 1 The query form returns the search state Search SEARCH SEARCH lt xX gt STATE lt NR1 gt OFF ON SEARCH lt gt STATE OFF or lt NR1 gt 0 sets the search state to off ON or lt NR1 gt Z 0 sets the search state to on SEARCH SEARCH x TOTAL Query Only Group Syntax Returns Returns the total number of matches for the search The total number of matches may be than the number of marks placed x is the search number which is always 1 Search SEARCH SEARCH x TOTAL lt NR1 gt is the total number of matches SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS Query Only Conditions Group Syntax Returns Returns the serial search type x is the search number which is always 1 There are four serial buses B1 through BA This command requires a DPO4AUTO or DPO4EMBD application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS I2C specifies the Inter
510. rm lt x gt where x is the reference channel number Group Vertical Syntax REF lt x gt HORizontal SCAle lt NR3 gt REF x HORizontal SCAle Arguments NR3 is the horizontal scale in seconds Examples REF1 HORIZONTAL SCALE might return REF1 HORIZONTAL SCALE 4 0E 4 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 319 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order REF lt x gt LABel Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the reference waveform label for the channel specified by lt x gt where x is the reference channel number Vertical REF lt x gt LABel lt Qstring gt REF lt x gt LABel lt Qstring gt is an alphanumeric string of text enclosed in quotes that contains the label text for the reference channel lt x gt waveform The text string is limited to 30 characters REF4 LABEL might return REF4 LABEL Clk wfm 2 lt gt Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the time that reference waveform data was copied into the internal reference memory for reference channel lt x gt where x is the reference channel number Vertical REF lt x gt TIMe REF4 TIME might return 16 54 05 REF lt x gt VERTical POSition 2 320 Sets or returns the vertical position of the reference waveform specified by lt x gt where x is the reference channel number Increasing the position value of a waveform causes the waveform to move up and decreasi
511. rmat INTERNal SAVe wAVEform ALL D test folder test1 saves all displayed waveforms excluding serial bus waveforms and digital channels for MSO models to individual files named D test folder testl wfm isf for example test1 1 15 SAVe WAVEform FILEFormat Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Specifies or returns the file format for saved waveforms Waveform header and timing information is included in the resulting file of non internal formats The oscilloscope saves DPO waveforms as a 500 x 200 matrix with the first row corresponding to the most recently acquired data The values specified by DATa STARt and DATa STOP determine the range of waveform data to output In the event that DATa STOP value is greater than the current record length the current record length determines the last output value Save and Recall SAVe WAVEform FILEFormat INTERNal SPREADSheet SAVe WAVEform FILEFormat CURVe DATa DATa STARt DATa STOP SAVe WAV Eform WFMInpre NR_ Pt WFMOutpre NR Pt specifies that waveforms are saved in an internal format using a isf filename extension These files can be recalled as reference waveforms When this argument is specified the settings specified via the DATa STARt and DATa STOP commands have no meaning as the entire waveform is saved SPREADSheet specifies that waveform data is saved in a format that contains comma delimited values These waveform data f
512. rn TRIGGER B EDGE SOURCE 1 indicating that the current input source for the B trigger is channel 1 TRIGger B EVENTS Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Returns the current B trigger events parameter Trigger TRIGger B EVENTS TRIGger B EVENTS COUNt TRIGGER B EVENTS might return TRIGGER B EVENTS COUNT 2 indicating that 2 events must occur before the B trigger occurs TRIGger B EVENTS COUNt Group Syntax 2 466 Sets or returns the number of events that must occur before the B trigger when TRIG DELay BY is set to EVENTS Trigger TRIGger B EVENTS COUNt lt NR1 gt TRIGger B EVENTS COUNt 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Related Commands Arguments Examples TRIGger B LEVel Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger B EVENTS lt NR1 gt is the number of B trigger events which can range from 1 to 10 000 000 TRIGGER B EVENTS COUNT 4 specifies that the B trigger will occur four trigger events after the A trigger TRIGGER B EVENTS COUNT might return TRIGGER B EVENTS COUNT 2 indicating that two events must occur after the A trigger before the B trigger can occur Sets or returns the level for the B trigger Trigger TRIGger B LEVel lt 3 gt TRIGger B LEVel TRIGger A LEVel TRIGger B TRIGger B EDGE SOUrce TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1
513. rns the switching loss gate polarity This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer SWLoss GATe POLarity FALL RISe POWer SWLOoss GATe POLari ty 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 301 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Arguments Examples FALL sets falling edge as the switching loss gate polarity RISe sets rising edge as the switching loss gate polarity POWER SWLOSS GATE POLARITY FALL sets the gate polarity to Fall POWER SWLOSS GATE POLARITY might return POWER SWLOSS GATE POLARITY RISE indicating that the gate polarity is set to Rise POWer SWLoss GATe TURNON Conditions Group Syntax Examples Sets or returns the gate turn on level for switching loss power measurements This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer SWLOSS GATe TURNON lt NR3 gt POWer SWLOSS GATe TURNON POWER SWLOSS GATE TURNON 3 5 sets the gate turn on level to 3 5000 POWER SWLOSS TURNON might return POWER SWLOSS TURNON 1 5 indicating that the gating turn on level is set to 1 5 POWer SWLoss NUMCYCles Query Only Conditions Group Syntax Examples 2 302 Returns the number of cycles counted for the switching loss calculation This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer SWLoss NUMCYCles NR3 POWER SWLOSS NUMCYCLES might return the number of cycles for switching lo
514. rns the user YMIN value for use in linear SOA calculations POWer SOA LOG XMAX Sets or returns the user XMAX value for use in log SOA calculations POWer SOA LOG XMIN Sets or returns the user XMIN value for use in log SOA calculations POWer SOA LOG YMAX Sets or returns the user YMAX value for use in log SOA calculations POWer SOA LOG YMIN Sets or returns the user YMIN value for use in log SOA calculations POWer SOA MASK DEFine Sets or returns the X Volts and Y Amps coordinates of the current SOA mask POWer SOA MASK MAXAmps Sets or returns the maximum current applied to SOA mask testing POWer SOA MASK MAXVolts Sets or returns the maximum voltage applied to SOA mask testing POWer SOA MASK MAXWatts Sets or returns the maximum power applied to SOA mask testing POWer SOA MASK NR PT Returns the number of mask points defined POWer SOA MASK STATe Sets or returns the state of the mask for SOA calculations POWer SOA MASK STOPOnviol Sets or returns the enabled state of the mask Stop on violation condition POWer SOA PLOTTYPe Sets or returns the SOA plot type POWer SOA RESult FAlLures QTY Returns the number of failures in the test 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 37 Command Groups 2 38 Table 2 28 Power Commands cont Command Description POWer SOA RESult NUMACq Returns the number of acquisitions in the test POWer SOA RESult S TATe Returns the pass fail state of the SOA tes
515. robe attached to channel x where x is the channel number NOTE For Level 0 and 1 probes the serial number will be Vertical CH x PRObe ID SERnumber CH1 PROBE ID SERNUMBER might return CH1 PROBE ID SERNUMBER B010289 indicating that the serial number of the probe attached to channel 1 is B010289 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CH lt x gt PRObe ID TYPE Query Only Returns the type of probe attached to the channel specified by lt x gt where x is the channel number Level 2 or higher probes supply their exact product nomenclature for Level 0 or 1 probes a generic No Probe Detected message is returned Group Vertical Syntax CH lt x gt PRObe ID TYPE Examples CH1 PROBE ID TYPE might return CH1 PROBE ID TYPE P6203 indicating that P6203 type probe is attached to channel 1 CH lt x gt PRObe MODel Sets or returns the probe model for the specified channel If a coded probe is attached or the specified model is not recognized an error event is set The argument must be a supported probe To find the list of supported probes push the front panel channel 1 2 3 or 4 button then push the lower menu More item as many times as needed to select Deskew Push Probe Model on the side menu and turn knob a to help you read from the resulting list Alternatively you can push Test gt Analysis gt Deskew gt Configure gt Probe Model
516. rogrammer Manual 2 281 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer REFLevel HYSTeresis lt NR3 gt POWer REFLevel HYSTeresis lt NR3 gt is the hysteresis value POWER REFLEVEL HYSTERESIS 30 sets the hysteresis value to 30 POWER REFLEVEL HYSTERESIS might return POWER REFLEVEL HYSTERESIS 10 indicating that the hysteresis value is set to 10 POWer REFLevel METHod Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples 2 282 Sets or returns the method used to calculate the 0 and 100 reference level This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer REFLevel METHod ABSolute PERCent POWer REFLevel ABSo lute specifies that the reference levels are set explicitly using MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute commands This method is useful when precise values are required PERCent specifies that the reference levels are calculated as a percent of the signal amplitude The percentages are defined using the MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent commands POWER REFLEVEL METHOD ABSOLUTE specifies that explicit user defined values are used for the reference levels POWER REFLEVEL METHOD might return POWER REFLEVEL METHOD PERCENT indicating that the reference level units used are calculated as a percent relative to HIGH and LOW 804000 DPO4000 Series Prog
517. s CH1 CH4 or D0 D15 specifies the channel to use for the RS 232 RX source Off sets the specified bus input to off BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX SOUrce Sets or returns the RS 232 TX Source for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number Conditions This command requires a DPO4COMP application module Group Bus Syntax BUS B x RS232C TX SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 Off BUS B x RS232C TX SOUrce Arguments 1 4 or D0 D15 specifies the channel to use as the RS 232 TX source sets the specified bus input to off BUS B x SPI BlTOrder Sets or returns the bit order for the specified SPI bus LSB is least significant bit first MSB is most significant bit first 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 105 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Arguments Examples Bus BUS B x SPI BITOrder LSB MSB BUS B x SPI BITOrder LSB sets the bit order to least significant bit first MSB sets the bit order to most significant bit first BUS B1 SPI BITORDER LSB sets the bit order to least significant bit first BUS B1 SPI BITORDER might return BUS B1 SPI BITORDER MSB indicating the SPI bit order is set to most significant bit first BUS B x SPI CLOCK SCLK POLARIty Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the SPI SCLK polarity for bus x where x is the bus number This command requires DPO4
518. s Programmer Manual 3 13 Status and Events Table 3 5 Execution Error Messages EXE Bit 4 cont Code Message 241 Hardware missing 250 Mass storage error 251 Missing mass storage 252 Missing media 253 Corrupt media 254 Media full 255 Directory full 256 File name not found 257 File name error 258 Media protected 259 File name too long 270 Hardcopy error 271 Hardcopy device not responding 272 Hardcopy is busy 273 Hardcopy aborted 274 Hardcopy configuration error 280 Program error 282 Insufficient network printer information 283 Network printer not responding 284 Network printer server not responding 286 Program runtime error 287 Print server not found 2200 Measurement error Measurement system error 2201 Measurement error Zero period 2202 Measurement error No period second waveform 2203 Measurement error No period second waveform 2204 Measurement error Low amplitude second waveform 2205 Measurement error Low amplitude second waveform 2206 Measurement error Invalid gate 2207 Measurement error Measurement overflow 2208 Measurement error No backwards Mid Ref crossing 2209 Measurement error No second Mid Ref crossing 2210 Measurement error No Mid Ref crossing second waveform 2211 Measurement error No backwards Mid Ref crossing 2212 Measurement error No negative crossing 2213 Measurem
519. s a comment is a comment string that the oscilloscope will ignore Resets the oscilloscope to the factory default settings The RST command does not alter the following Calibration data that affect device specifications m Output Queue B The Service Request Enable Register setting Power on status clear flag setting Alias definitions Stored settings The PUD Response Any of the values associated with the DATA command Oscilloscope password 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples SAV No Query Form Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples SAVe ASSIgn TYPe Group Syntax 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Status and Error RST FACtory RECAII SETUp SAVe SETUp PSC RCL SAV None RST resets the oscilloscope settings to factory defaults Stores the state of the oscilloscope to a specified memory location You can use the RCL command to restore the oscilloscope to this saved state at a later time Save and Recall SAV NR1 RCL RECAIL SETUp SAVe SETUp lt NR1 gt specifies a location in which to save the state of the oscilloscope Location values range from 1 through 10 Using an out of range location value causes execution error Any settings that have been stored previously at this location will be overwritten S
520. s or returns the trigger level for the AUXIN port Trigger TRIGger A LEVel AUXin lt NR3 gt ECL TTL TRIGger A LEVel AUXin 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments NR3 specifies the trigger level in volts ECL specifies a preset ECL trigger level of 1 3V TTL specifies a preset TTL trigger level of 1 4V Examples TRIGGER A LEVEL AUXIN ECL sets the auxiliary input trigger level to 1 3 volts TRIGGER A LEVEL AUXIN might return TRIGGER A LEVEL AUXIN 0 0E 0 indicating the auxiliary input trigger level is 0 0 volts TRIGger A LEVel CH lt x gt Sets or returns the trigger level for the specified channel Each channel can have an independent level Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A LEVel CH x lt NR3 gt TTL ECL TRIGger A LEVel CH x Arguments NR3 specifies the trigger level in user units usually volts TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4V ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V Examples TRIGGER A LEVEL CH2 might return TRIGGER A LEVEL CH2 1 3000E 00 indicating that the A edge trigger is set to 1 3 V for channel 2 TRIGGER A LEVEL CH3 TTL sets the A edge trigger to TTL high level for channel 3 TRIGger A LEVel D lt x gt Sets or returns the trigger level for the specified digital channel lt x gt where x is the channel number Each digital channel can have an independent level Group Trigger Syntax TR
521. s the digital channel number Digital channels are available only on MSO models MEASUrement IMMed TYPe 2 210 Group Sets or returns the immediate measurement type Digital channel measurements do not have a user settable midRef threshold If you specify a digital channel measurement that 1s not available on MSO models measurement error 2200 measurement system error occurs and 9 9e37 is returned Measurement 804000 DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax MEASUrement IMMed TYPe 11 tude AREa BURst CARea CMEan CRMs DELay FALL FREQuency HIGH LOW MAX imum MEAN MINImum NDUty NEDGECount NOVershoot NPULSECount NNIdth PEDGECount PDUty PERIod 2 POVershoot PPULSECount PWIdth 15 5 MEASUrement IMMed TYPe Arguments AMPlitude measures the amplitude of the selected waveform In other words it measures the high value less the low value measured over the entire waveform or gated region This measurement is applicable only to the analog channels Amplitude High Low AREa measures the voltage over time The area 1s over the entire waveform or gated region and is measured in volt seconds The area measured above the ground is positive while the area below ground is negative This measurement is applicable only to the analog channels BURst measures the duration of a burst The measurement is made
522. s the number of delay bits for the AUDIO bus NOTE This command is applicable only for TDM audio bus type BUS B x AUDTO TYPe TDM This command requires DPO4AUDIO application module Bus BUS B 1 4 AUDiOo BITDelay lt NR1 gt BUS B 1 4 AUDiO BITDelay lt NR1 gt specifies the number of delay bits BUS B1 AUDIO BITDELAY 2 sets the bit delay to 2 BUS B1 AUDIO BITDELAY might return BUS B1 AUDIO BITDELAY 1 indicating that the number of delay bits 15 1 BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio BlTOrder Conditions Sets or returns the bit order for the AUDIO bus This command requires DPO4AUDIO application module 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 83 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Arguments Examples Bus BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDi0 BITOrder MSB LSB BUS B 1 4 AUDio BITOrder MSB specifies that the most significant bit will be expected first in the order LSB specifies that the least significant bit will be expected first in the order BUS B1 AUDIO BITORDER LSB sets the bit order to LSB BUS B1 AUDIO BITORDER might return BUS B1 AUDIO BITORDER MSB indicating that the MSB is first in the bit order BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio CHANnel SiZe Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the number of bits per channel for the AUDIO bus NOTE This command is applicable only for TDM audio bus type BUS B x AUDiO TYPe TDM This c
523. s the oscilloscope model and serial number print on the print output PICTBRIDGE IDPRINT ON enables the printing of oscilloscope model and serial number on the print output PICTBRIDGE IDPRINT might return PICTBRIDGE IDPRINT OFF indicating that the ID print is disabled on the print output 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 243 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order PICTBridge IMAGESize 2 244 Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the image print size PictBridge PICTBridge IMAGESize DEFLT IN2P5BY3P25 L IN4BY6 L2 IN8BY10 L4 E HAGAKIPCard 6 8 4 LETTER DEFLT for a default image print size IN2P5BY3P25 for a 2_5 3_25 image print size L for a 3_5 5 image print size IN4BY6 for a 4 6 image print size L2 for a 5 7 image print size IN8BY10 for a 8 10 image print size 14 for a 254 MM 178 MM image print size E for a 110 MM 74 MM image print size CARD for a 89 MM 55 MM image print size HAGAKIPcard for a 100 MM 148 MM image print size M6BY8 for a 6 CM 8 CM image print size M7 BY10 for a 7 CM 10 CM image print size M9BY13 for a 9 CM 13 CM image print size M13BY18 or a 13 CM 18 CM image print size C C C 10 15 for a 10 CM 15 CM image print size C CM15BY21 for a 15 CM 21 CM image print size C M18BY24 for a 18 CM 24 CM image print size 4 for a A4 image print size LETTER for a Letter image print size PICTBRIDGE IMAGES
524. scope to trigger on the video signal line specified by the TRIGger A VIDeo LINE command 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual TRIGger B Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples TRIGger B BY Group Syntax Related Commands 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGGER A VIDEO FIELD EVEN sets the video trigger so that it will trigger on even fields TRIGGER A VIDEO FIELD might return VIDEO FIELD ALLFIELDS indicating that the A video will trigger on all video fields Sets the B trigger level to 50 of minimum and maximum The query form of this command returns the B trigger parameters This command is similar to selecting B Event Delayed Trigger Setup from the Trig menu and then viewing the current setups Trigger TRIGger B SETLevel TRIGger B TRIGger A SETLevel sets the B trigger level to 50 of MIN and MAX TRIGGER B SETLEVEL sets the B trigger level to 50 of MIN and MAX TRIGGER B might return the following B trigger parameters TRIGGER B STATE 0 TYPE EDGE LEVEL 220 0000E 3 BY TIME EDGE SOURCE CH1 SLOPE RISE COUPLING DC TRIGGER B TIME 16 0000E 9 EVENTS COUNT 2 Selects or returns whether the B trigger occurs after a specified number of events or a specified period of time after the A trigger Trigger TRIGger B BY EVENTS TIMe TRIGger B BY TRIGger B EVENTS COUNt TRIGger
525. sed for FLEXRAY frame ID high value TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEID QUALIifier Sets or returns the FLEXRAY frame ID qualifier TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray F RAMEID VALue Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for FLEXRAY frame low value TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAME Type Sets or returns the frame type TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER CRC Sets or returns the CRC portion of the binary header string 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Table 2 31 Trigger Commands cont Command Command Groups Description TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER CYCLEcount Sets or returns the cycle count portion of the binary header string TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER FRAMEID Sets or returns the frame id portion of the binary header string TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER INDBits Sets or returns the indicator bits portion of the binary header string TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER PAY Length Sets or returns the payload length portion of the binary header string TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess MODe Sets or returns 12C address mode to 7 or 10 bit TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess TYPe Sets or returns the 2 address type to USER TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess VALue Sets or returns the binary address string used for the 12C trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x
526. sed for linear SOA calculations 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order POWER SOA LINEAR YMAX 700 sets the YMAX value to 700 0000 POWER SOA LINEAR YMAX might return POWER SOA LINear YMAX 50 0000 indicating that the YMAX value for linear plot type is set to 50 0000 POWer SOA LINear YMIN Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the user YMIN value for use in linear SOA calculations This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer SOA LINear YMIN lt NR3 gt POWer SOA LINear YMIN lt NR3 gt is the YMIN value used for linear SOA calculations POWER SOA LINEAR YMIN 2 sets the YMIN value to 2 0000 POWER SOA LINEAR YMIN might return POWER SOA LINear YMIN 0 0 0 indicating that the YMIN value for linear plot type is set to 0 0E 0 POWer SOA LOG XMAX Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the user XMAX value for use in Log SOA calculations This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer SOA LOG XMAX lt NR3 gt POWer SOA LOG XMAX lt NR3 gt is the XMAX value used for log SOA calculations 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 289 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Examples POWER SOA LOG XMAX 1 sets the XMAX value to 1 0000 POWER SOA LOG might return POWER SOA LOG 1 0000 3
527. sets the measurement method to User POWER HARMONICS MIL FUNDAMENTAL CALCMETHOD might return POWER HARMONICS MIL FUNDAMENTAL CALCMETHOD MEAS indicating that the measurement method is set to Meas POWer HARMonics MIL FUNDamental USER CURRent Conditions 2 256 Sets or returns RMS amperes for USER CALCmethod This command requires a DPO4PWR application module 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Power POWer HARMonics MIL FUNDamental USER CURRent lt NR3 gt POWer HARMonics MIL FUNDamental USER CURRent NR3 is the current in amperes for USER CALCmethod POWER HARMONICS MIL FUNDAMENTAL USER CURRENT 2 sets the RMS fundamental current to 2 A in calculating limits POWER HARMONICS MIL FUNDAMENTAL USER CURRENT might return POWER HARMONICS MIL FUNDAMENTAL USER CURRENT 1 0000 indicating that the RMS fundamental current for use in calculating limits 1s 1 0000 A POWer HARMonics MIL LINEFREQuency Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the line frequency for MIL STD 1399 harmonics tests Valid values are 60 or 400 Hz This command requires DPO4PWR application module Power POWer HARMonics MIL LINEFREQuency lt NR3 gt POWer HARMonics MIL LINEFREQuency lt NR3 gt is the line frequency for MIL standard POWER HARMONICS MIL LINEFREQUENCY 60 sets
528. shold to determine where to place a mark This setting is applied to all channel searches that use a lower threshold SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and lt gt is the channel number Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOWerthreshold CH x TTL SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOWerthreshold CH x TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOWerthreshold MATH Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the math waveform lower threshold to determine where to place a mark This setting is applied to all math searches that use a lower threshold x is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOWerthreshold MATH TTL SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOWerthreshold MATH TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 371 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold REF lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the reference waveform lower threshold to determine where to place a mark This setting is applied to all reference searches that use a lower threshold SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and REF lt x gt is the reference channel number Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOWerthreshold REF x TTL SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOWerthreshold REF x TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt T
529. sks like setting up measurements Aliases are similar to macros but do not include the capability to substitute parameters into alias bodies The alias mechanism obeys the following rules The alias name must consist of a valid IEEE488 2 message unit which may not appear in a message preceded by a colon comma or a command or query program header The alias name may not appear in a message followed by a colon comma or question mark An alias name must be distinct from any keyword or keyword short form An alias name cannot be redefined without first being deleted using one of the alias deletion functions Alias names do not appear in response messages Table 2 14 Alias Commands Command Description ALlas Sets or returns the alias state ALlas CATalog Returns a list of the currently defined alias labels ALlas DEFine Assigns a sequence of program messages to an alias label ALlas DELEte Removes a specified alias ALlas DELEte ALL Deletes all existing aliases ALlas DELEte NAMe Removes a specified alias ALlas STATE Sets or returns the alias state 804000 DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Command Groups Bus Command Group Use the Bus commands when working with serial or parallel bus measurements Install the DPOEMBD application module when working with DC or SPI bus signals m Install the DPO4COMP module when working with RS 232 RS 422 RS 485 or UART bus signals Install
530. source EXT specifies an external trigger using the Aux In connector located on the front panel of the oscilloscope LINE specifies AC line voltage TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH SOURCE 1 sets channel 1 as the pulse width source TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH SOURCE might return TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH SOURCE 1 indicating that channel 1 is the pulse width source TRIGger A PULSEWidth WHEn 2 442 Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns whether to trigger on a pulse that meets falls outside or within the specified range of limits Trigger TRIGger A PULSEWidth wHEn LESSthan than EQual UNEQual TRIGger A PULSEWidth WHEn TRIGger A PULSEWidth WIDth LESSthan argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger if a pulse is detected with width less than the time set by the TRIGger A PULSEWidth WIDth command than argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger if a pulse is detected with width than the time set by the TRIGger A PULSEWidth WIDth command EQUal argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger if a pulse is detected with width equal to the time period specified TRIGger A PULSEWidth WIDth within 5 tolerance NOTEQual argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger if a pulse is detected with width greater than or less than but not equal the time period specified in TRIGger A PULSEWidth WIDth within a 5 tolerance TRIGGER PULSEWIDTH WHEN LESSTHAN specifies that the durat
531. specifies the rising edge as the frame sync polarity BUS B1 AUDIO FRAMESYNC POLARITY FALL sets the falling edge for frame sync polarity BUS B1 AUDIO FRAMESYNC POLARITY might return BUS B1 AUDIO FRAMESYNC POLARITY RISe indicating that the polarity is set to Rise BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio FRAMESync SOUrce Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the frame sync source waveform for the AUDIO bus This command requires DPO4AUDIO application module Bus BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDi0 FRAMESync SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDi0 FRAMESync SOUrce CH1 CH4 or 0 015 specifies the channel to use as the frame sync source BUS B1 AUDIO FRAMESYNC SOURCE CH1 sets as the frame sync source BUS B1 AUDIO FRAMESYNC SOURCE might return BUS B1 AUDIO FRAMESYNC SOURCE Ch2 indicating that the source is set to Ch2 BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio TYPe Conditions Group Sets or returns the audio format type for the AUDIO bus This command requires DPO4AUDIO application module Bus 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 89 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments Examples BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUD10 TYPe 125 LJ RJ TDM BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDi10 TYPe I2S specifies I2S audio format LJ specifies left justified audio format RJ specifies right justified audio format TDM specifies tim
532. ss calculation if the POWer TY Pe is set to Switching Loss POWer TYPe SWITCHingLoss If the query times out with the Switching 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Loss power enabled it indicates the possibility of incorrect settings and might return the following ESR 20 ALLEV 2202 Measurement error No period found power swloss numcycles 410 Query INTERRUPTED POWer SWLoss RDSon Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the user RDSON value for use in switching loss calculations when the conduction calculation method is RDSON This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer SWLOSS RDSON lt NR3 gt POWer SWLOoss RDSon NR3 is the RDSON switching loss calculation POWER SWLOSS RDSON 30 sets the RDSon value to 30 0000 POWER SWLOSS RDSON might return POWER SWLOSS RDSon 20 0000E 3 indicating that the RDSon value is set to 20 0000E 3 POWer SWLoss REFLevel ABSolute GATEMid Conditions Group Syntax Sets or returns the mid voltage reference level used in switching loss power measurements in volts This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer SWLOoss REFLevel ABSolute GATEMid lt NR3 gt POWer SWLOoss REFLevel ABSOolute GATEMi d 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 303 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Arguments Examples lt NR3 gt is
533. stores the value 2 43e 5 in the second math variable location 2 might return MATHVAR VAR2 24 3000E 6 for the expression stored in location 2 MEASUrement Query Only Returns all measurement parameters Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement Examples MEASUREMENT might return MEASUREMENT IMMED DELAY DIRECTION FORWARDS EDGE1 RISE EDGE2 RISE MEASUREMENT PERIOD UNITS S SOURCE1 CH1 SOURCE2 2 MEASUREMENT MEAS1 DELAY DIRECTION FORWARDS EDGEL RISE EDGE2 RISE MEASUREMENT MEAS1 STATE 1 TYPE FREQUENCY UNITS Hz SOURCE1 CH1 SOURCE2 CH2 COUNT 0 0 0000 MEAN 0 0000 MINIMUM 0 0 000 STDDEV 0 0000 MEASUREMENT MEAS2 DELAY DIRECTION FORWARDS EDGE1 RISE EDGE2 RISE MEASUREMENT MEAS2 STATE 1 TYPE PERIOD UNITS s SOURCE1 CH1 SOURCE2 CH2 COUNT 0 MAXIMUM 0 0000 MEAN 0 0000 MINIMUM 0 0000 STDDEV 0 0000 MEASUREMENT MEAS3 DELAY DIRECTION FORWARDS EDGE1 RISE EDGE2 RISE MEASUREMENT MEAS3 STATE 1 PK2PK UNITS V SOURCEI CH1 SOURCE2 CH2 COUNT 0 MAXIMUM 0 0000 MEAN 0 0000 MINIMUM 0 0000 STDDEV 0 0000 MEASUREMENT MEAS4 DELAY DIRECTION FORWARDS EDGE1 RISE EDGE2 RISE MEASUREMENT MEAS4 STATE 0 PERIOD UNITS S SOURCE1 CH1 SOURCE2 CH2 COUNT 0 MAXIMUM 0 0000 MEAN 0 0000 MINIMUM 0 0000 STDDEV 0 0000 MEASUREMENT METHOD AUTO REFLEVEL METHOD PERCENT ABSOLUTE HIGH 0 0000 LOW 0 0000 MID1 0 0000 MID2 0 0000 MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT
534. sually volts TRIGger B LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt 2 468 Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the B trigger lower threshold for the channel lt x gt where x is the channel number Each channel can have an independent level Used in runt and slew rate triggers as the lower threshold Used for all other trigger types as the single level threshold Trigger TRIGger B LOWerthreshold CH x ECL TTL lt NR3 gt TRIGger B LOWerthreshold CH x ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4V 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order lt NR3 gt is the threshold level in volts TRIGger B LOWerthreshold D lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Examples TRIGger B STATE Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Sets or queries the lower threshold for the digital channel selected Each channel can have an independent level Used in runt and slew rate as the lower threshold Used for all other trigger types as the single level threshold Trigger TRIGger B LOWerthreshold D x lt NR3 gt ECL TTL TRIGger B LOwerthreshold D lt x gt lt NR3 gt specifies the threshold in volts ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4V TRIGGER LOWERTHRESHOLD D1 might return TRIGGER B LOWERTHRESHOLD D1 1 4000 indicating the threshold is set to 1 4 volts Sets o
535. surement MEASUrement METHod Auto HIStogram MINMax MEASUrement METHod MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent HIGH MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent LOW MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID2 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments Auto selects the best method for each data set HIStogram sets the high and low waveform levels statistically using a histogram algorithm MINMax uses the highest and lowest values of the waveform record This selection is best for examining waveforms with no large flat portions of a common value such as sine waves and triangle waves Examples MEASUREMENT METHOD might return MEASUREMENT METHOD MINMAX indicating that the reference levels are set to MIN and MAX MEASUrement REFLevel Query Only Returns the current reference level parameters Group Measurement Syntax X MEASUrement REFLevel Examples MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL might return these reference level settings MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL METHOD PERCENT ABSOLUTE HIGH 0 0000 LOW 0 0000 MID1 0 0000 MID2 0 0000 MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT HIGH 90 0000 LOW 10 0000 MID1 50 0000 MID2 50 0000 MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute HIGH Sets or returns the high reference level and is the upper reference level when MEASUrement REFLevel METHod is set to Absolute This command affects the results of rise and fall measurements NOTE this command affects t
536. t AUXin PRObe GAIN Sets or returns the gain factor of the probe that is attached to the auxiliary input AUXin PRObe ID SERnumber Returns the serial number of the probe that is attached to the auxiliary input AUXin PRObe ID TYPE Returns the type of probe that is attached to the auxiliary input 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Table 2 32 Vertical Commands cont Command Command Groups Description AUXin PRObe RESistance Returns the resistance of the probe that is attached to the Auxiliary input AUXin PRObe SIGnal Sets or returns the input bypass setting on probes that support input bypass AUXin PRObe UNIts Returns the units of measure of the probe that is attached to the auxiliary input CH lt x gt Returns vertical parameters for the specified channel CH lt x gt AMPSVIAVOLTs ENAble Sets or returns the state of the amps via volts feature for the specified channel CH lt x gt AMPSVIAVOLTs FACtor Sets or returns the amps via volts factor for the specified channel CH lt x gt BANdwidth Sets or returns the bandwidth of the specified channel CH lt x gt COUPling CH lt x gt DESKew Sets or returns the coupling setting for the specified channel Sets or returns the deskew time for the specified channel CH lt x gt INVert Sets or returns the invert function for the specified channel CH lt x gt LABel Sets or r
537. t Command Description TRIGger B UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt Sets or returns the B trigger upper threshold for the channel selected TRIGger EXTernal Returns external trigger parameters TRIGger EXTernal PRObe Sets or returns the attenuation factor value of the external probe connector TRIGger EXTernal YUNIts Returns the external trigger vertical Y units value TRIGger FREQuency Returns the trigger frequency in hertz if available TRIGger STATE Returns the current state of the triggering system Vertical Command Group 2 58 Use the commands in the Vertical Command Group to control the vertical setup of all live channel waveforms for acquisition and display of channel reference and math waveforms Table 2 32 Vertical Commands Command Description AUXin Returns auxiliary input parameters AUXin PRObe Returns all information concerning the probe attached to auxilary input AUXin PRObe AUTOZero Sets the TekVPI probe attached to the auxiliary input to autozero AUXin PRObe COMMAND Sets the state of the specified probe control AUXin PRObe DEGAUss Starts a degauss autozero cycle on a TekVPI current probe attached to the auxiliary input AUXin PRObe DEGAUss S TATE Returns the degauss state of the TekVPI current probe attached to the auxiliary input AUXin PRObe FORCEDRange Sets or returns the range of the TekVPI probe attached to the auxiliary inpu
538. t FILESystem CWD FILESystem DIR lt directory path gt is a quoted string that specifies the directory to create FILESYSTEM MKDIR D NewDirectory creates the directory named NewDirectory at the root of the D drive These two commands create the directory MyNewSubDirectory within the existing directory MyDirectory at the root of the D drive FILESYSTEM CWD D MyDi recto ry FILESYSTEM MKDIR MyNewSubDi rectory This of course assumes that D MyDirectory already existed and was not a read only directory FILESystem READFile No Query Form Group Syntax 2 176 Writes the contents of the specified file to the specified interface If the specified file does not exist or is not readable an appropriate error event is posted File System FILESystem READFile Qstring 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands FILESystem CWD Arguments _ QString is a quoted string that defines the file name and path If the file path is within the current working directory specify only the file name Examples FILESYSTEM READFILE D test_data tek00016CH1 csv reads the content of the specified file if the file exists and is readable and sends the content of the file to the current interface FILESystem REName No Query Form Assigns a new name to an existing file Group File System Syntax FILESystem REName old file path gt lt new file path
539. t The same command sequence using the OPC command for synchronization looks like this Set up conditional acquisition ACQUIRE STATE OFF SELECT CH1 ON HORIZONTAL RECORDLENGTH 1000 ACQUIRE MODE SAMPLE ACQUIRE STOPAFTER SEQUENCE Enable the status registers DESE 1 ESE 1 SRE 32 Acquire waveform data ACQUIRE STATE ON Set up the measurement parameters MEASUREMENT TYPE AMPLITUDE MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE CH1 Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the measurement OPC The program can now do different tasks such as talk to other devices The SRQ when it comes interrupts those tasks and returns control to this task Take amplitude measurement MEASUREMENT IMMED VALUE This technique is efficient but requires sophisticated programming Using the Query OPC query places a 1 in the Output Queue once an operation that generates an OPC message is complete A time out could occur if you try to read the output queue before there is any data in it The same command sequence using the query for synchronization looks like this Set up conditional acquisition ACQUIRE STATE OFF SELECT CH1 ON HORIZONTAL RECORDLENGTH 1000 ACQUIRE MODE SAMPLE ACQUIRE STOPAFTER SEQUENCE 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 3 11 Status and Events Messages No Event Command Error Acquire waveform data ACQUIRE
540. t 0 if the display system is not in the preview state HORizontal RECOrdlength Group Sets the horizontal record length The query form of this command returns the current horizontal record length Horizontal 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 189 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Syntax HORizontal RECOrdlength lt NR1 gt HORizontal RECOrdlength Arguments NRI represents the supported values for horizontal record lengths which are 1000 10000 100000 1000000 or 10000000 Examples HORIZONTAL RECORDLENGTH 10000 specifies that 10000 data points will be acquired for each record HORIZONTAL RECORDLENGTH might return HORIZONTAL RECOrdlength 1000 indicating that the horizontal record length is equal to 1000 data points HORizontal SAMPLERate Sets or returns the current horizontal sample rate Group Horizontal Syntax X HORizontal SAMPLERate lt NR3 gt HORizontal SAMPLERate Arguments NR3 is the rate in samples per second HORizontal SCAle Sets or returns the time base horizontal scale Group Horizontal Syntax HORizontal SCAle lt NR3 gt HORizontal SCAle Arguments NR3 specifies the range from 400 ps to 1000 s depending on the record length Examples HORIZONTAL SCALE 2 6 sets the main scale to 25 per division 2 190 HORIZONTAL SCALE might return HORIZONTAL MAIN SCALE 2 0000E 06 indicating that the main scale is currently set to 2 us per division 804000 and DP
541. t POWer STATIstics Clears all the accumulated statistics of all measurements POWer STATIstics MODE Enables or disables the display of the measurement statistics POWer STATIstics WElghting Sets the number of samples which are included for the statistics computations for mean and the standard deviation POWer SWLoss CONDCALCmethod Sets or returns the power application switching loss conduction calculation method POWer SWLoss CONDuction ENERGY MAX Returns the maximum conduction energy for the switching loss calculation POWer SWLoss CONDuction ENERGY MEAN Returns the mean conduction energy for the switching loss calculation POWer SWLoss CONDuction ENERGY MIN Returns the minimum conduction energy for the switching loss calculation POWer SWLoss CONDuction POWER MAX Returns the maximum conduction power for the switching loss calculation POWer SWLoss CONDuction POWER MEAN Returns the mean conduction power for the switching loss calculation POWer SWLoss CONDuction POWER MIN Returns the minimum conduction power for the switching loss calculation POWer SWLoss DISplay Sets or retums the display selection for switching loss results POWer SWLoss GATe POLarity Sets or returns the switching loss gate polarity POWer SWLoss GATe TURNON Sets or returns the gate turn on level for switching loss power measurements POWer SWLoss NUMCYCIes Returns the number o
542. t lt 2 gt 1 MESSage BOX MESSage STATE MESSage SHOW MESSage CLEAR X1 and X2 0 to 1023 and are pixel positions along the horizontal axis X1 defines the left and X2 defines the right side of the window lt 1 gt and Y2 0 to 767 and are pixel positions along the vertical axis Y1 defines the top and Y2 defines the bottom of the window The reserved height of all characters is 16 pixels so the window must be at least that high to fully display characters X2 and Y2 are optional because the MESSAGE SHOW 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order command automatically sizes the box to fit the message All four values are returned in a query MESSage CLEAR No Query Form Group Syntax Related Commands Examples MESSage SHOW Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Clears the contents of the message box Display MESSage CLEAR MESSage BOX MESSage SHOW MESSage STATE MESSage CLEAR removes the message from the message window Sets or returns the contents of the message box MESSage SHOW lt Qstring gt defines the content of the message box Change in string length causes automatic resize of the message box to fit the text The box may be resized using the MESSage BOX command The MESSage STATE command is used to turn on and off the message box display Display MESSage SHOW lt QString gt MESSage SHOW MESSa
543. t This format is useful when transferring data to PCs Table 2 37 DATa and WFMOutpre Parameter Settings DATa ENCdg WFMOutpre Settings Setting ENCdg Fmt Or NR ASCii ASC N A N A 12 FAStest BIN RI MSB 1 2 MSB 1 2 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual DATa SOUrce Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Table 2 37 DATa and WFMOutpre Parameter Settings cont DATa ENCdg WFMOutpre Settings Setting ENCdg Fmt Or NR RPBinary BIN RP MSB 1 2 SRIbinary BIN RI LSB 1 2 SRPbinary BIN RP LSB 1 2 DATA ENCDG might return DATa ENCDG SRPBINARY for the format of the outgoing waveform data DATA ENCDG RPBinary sets the data encoding format to be a positive integer where the most significant byte is transferred first Sets or returns the location of the waveform data transferred from the oscilloscope by the CURVe query Waveform Transfer DATa SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 1 REF2 REF3 REF4 DO D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 DATa SOUrce CURVe CH1 CH4 specifies which analog channel data will be transferred from the oscilloscope to the controller channels 1 through 4 MATH specifies that the Math waveform data will be transferred from the oscilloscope to the controller REF1 REF4 speci
544. t such as an execution error or message available When an event of a given type occurs the oscilloscope sets the bit that represents that type of event to a value of one You can disable bits so that they ignore events and remain at zero See Enable Registers Reading the status registers tells you what types of events have occurred The Standard Event Status Register SESR The SESR records eight types of events that can occur within the oscilloscope Use the ESR query to read the SESR register Reading the register clears the bits of the register so that the register can accumulate information about new events NOTE TekVISA applications use SESR bit 6 to respond to any of several events including some front panel actions 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE OPC Figure 3 1 The Standard Event Status Register SESR 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 3 1 Status and Events 3 2 Table 3 1 SESR Bit Functions Bit Function 7 MSB PON Power On Shows that the oscilloscope was powered on On completion the diagnostic self tests also set this bit 6 URQ User Request Indicates that an application event has occurred See note 5 CME Command Error Shows that an error occurred while the oscilloscope was parsing a command or query 4 EXE Execution Error Shows that an error executing a command or query 3 DDE Device Error Shows that
545. t MEAS x DELay DIRection BACKwards FORWards MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay DIRection MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE2 BACKwards means the search starts at the end of the waveform and looks for the last rising or falling edge in the waveform Use the MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay EDGE lt x gt command to specify the slope of the edge FORWards means the search starts at the beginning of the waveform and looks for the first rising or falling edge in the waveform Use the MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay EDGE lt x gt command to specify the slope of the edge MEASUREMENT MEAS3 DELAY DIRECTION BACKWARDS starts searching from the end of the waveform record MEASUREMENT MEAS3 DELAY DIRECTION might return MEASUREMENT MEAS3 DELAY DIRECTION BACKWARDS indicating that the current search direction is backwards MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay EDGE lt x gt 2 218 Group Syntax Sets or returns the slope of the edge used for the delay from or to waveform when taking an immediate delay measurement The waveform is specified by MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE 1 Measurement MEASUrement MEAS x DELay EDGE x FALL RISe MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay EDGE lt x gt 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments x specifies which waveform to use where lt x gt 1 is the from waveform and x 2 is the to waveform FALL specifies
546. t MEAS lt x gt MINImum Returns the minimum value found since the last statistical reset MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE 1 Sets or returns the channel from which measurements are taken 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Command Groups Table 2 25 Measurement Commands cont Command Description MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE2 Sets or returns the channel to which measurements are sent MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt STATE MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt STDdev Sets or returns whether the specified measurement slot is computed and displayed Returns the standard deviation of values accumulated since the last statistical reset MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TYPe Sets or returns the measurement lt x gt type MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt UNIts MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt VALue Returns measurement lt x gt units Returns the value of measurement lt x gt MEASUrement METHod Sets or returns the method used for calculating reference levels MEASUrement REFLevel Returns the current reference level parameters MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute HIGH Sets or returns the top reference level for rise time MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute LOW Sets or returns the low reference level for rise time MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID Sets or returns the mid reference level for measurements MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID x Sets or returns the mid reference level in absolut
547. t defines the current working a directory name can be up to 128 characters FILESYSTEM TekScope images sets the current working directory to images FILESYSTEM CWD might return FILESYSTEM CwD D TekScope Waveforms indicating that the current working directory is set to Waveforms FILESystem DELEte No Query Form Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples This command deletes a named file If you specify a directory name it will delete the directory and all of its contents the same as the RMDir command You can also specify the filename as to delete all of the files in the current or specified directory File System FILESystem DELEte file path FILESystem CWD FILESystem RMDir file path is a quoted string that defines the file name and path If the file path is within the current working directory you need only specify the file name The argument will delete all files and subdirectories within the current working directory FILESYSTEM DELETE NOT 5 deletes the file named NOT MINE SET from the current working directory FILESystem DIR Query Only 2 174 Returns a list of quoted strings Each string contains the name of a file or directory in the current working directory 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Returns Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order File System
548. t rate in bits per second You can enter any positive integer and the instrument will coerce the value to the closest supported bit rate 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order BUS B lt x gt RS232C DATABits Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the number of RS 232 data bits for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4COMP application module Bus BUS B lt x gt RS232C DATABits 7 8 BUS B x RS232C DATABits 7 specifies seven bits in the RS 232 data frame 8 specifies eight bits in the RS 232 data frame BUS B lt x gt RS232C DELIMiter Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the RS 232 delimiting value for a packet on bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4COMP application module Bus BUS B lt x gt RS232C DELIMiter NUL1 LF CR SPace XFF BUS B lt x gt RS232C DELIMiter NUL specifies 0x00 LF specifies Ox0A CR specifies 0x0D XFF specifies OxFF BUS B lt x gt RS232C DISplaymode Sets or returns the display mode for the bus lt x gt display and event table where x is the bus number 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 103 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Conditions Group Syntax Arguments This command requires a DPO4COMP application module Bus BUS B lt x gt RS232C DISplaymode PACKET BUS B
549. t traverse from the upper most positive to lower most negative level for transition triggering to occur EITher indicates either positive or negative polarity TRIGGER A TRANSITION POLARITY NEGATIVE sets the transition polarity to negative TRIGGER A TRANSITION POLARITY might return TRIGGER A TRANSITION POLARITY EITHER indicating that the polarity can be either positive or negative TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall SOUrce Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the source for transition trigger Trigger TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFallj SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFallj SOUrce CH1 CH4 specifies one of the input channels TRIGGER A TRANSITION SOURCE CH4 sets channel 4 as the source for the transition trigger TRIGGER TRANSITION SOURCE might return TRIGGER A TRANSITION SOURCE 2 indicating that channel 2 is the source for the A transition trigger 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 453 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall WHEn Group Syntax Arguments Examples TRIGger A TYPe 2 454 Group Syntax Related Commands Sets or returns whether to check for a transitioning signal that is faster or slower than the specified delta time Trigger TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFal1 wHEn SLOwer FASTer EQual UNEQua TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFal1 wHEn FASTer sets the trigger to occ
550. ta qualifier to not equal LESSEQual sets the search trigger data qualifier to less than or equal MOREEQual sets the search trigger data qualifier to greater than or equal INrange sets the search trigger data qualifier to in range OUTrange sets the search trigger data qualifier to out of range 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 333 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio DATa VALue Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the search trigger data lower word for the AUDIO bus This command requires DPO4AUDIO application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B 1 4 AUDio DATa VALue string SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS lt 1 4 gt AUDiO DATa VALue String is the search trigger data lower word SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio DATa WORD Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the search trigger data alignment for the AUDIO bus This command requires DPO4AUDIO application module Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS lt 1 4 gt AUDi0 DATa WORD EITher LEFt RIGht SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDi0 DATa WORD EITher aligns the search trigger data to either left or right LEFt aligns the search trigger data to the left RIGht aligns the search trigger data to the right SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGge
551. th the last data point in the record 15 returned DATa STARt and DATa STOP are order independent When DATa STOP is less than DATa STARt the values will be swapped internally for the CURVE query If you always want to transfer complete waveforms set DATa STARt to 1 and DATa STOP to the maximum record length or larger DATA STOP might return DATA STOP 14900 indicating that 14900 is the last waveform data point that will be transferred DATA STOP 15000 specifies that the waveform transfer will stop at data point 15000 Sets or returns the date the oscilloscope displays Miscellaneous DATE Qstring DATE TIME Qstring is a date in the form yyyy mm dd where yyyy refers to a four digit year number mm refers to a two digit month number from 01 to 12 and dd refers to a two digit day number in the month 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 151 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order DDT Examples Group Syntax Related Commands DESE 2 152 Arguments Examples Group DATE 2006 01 24 specifies that the date is set to January 24 2006 DATE might return DATE 2006 01 24 indicating the current date is set to January 24 2006 Allows you to specify a command or a list of commands that execute when the oscilloscope receives a command or the IEEE488 2 interface message Define Device Trigger DDT is a special alias that the command uses Miscell
552. the center graticule CH1 POSition might return POSITION 1 3000 indicating that the current position of Channel 1 is 1 3 divisions below the center graticule CH lt x gt PRObe Query Only Returns all information concerning the probe attached to channel x where x is the channel number Group Vertical Syntax lt gt PRObe CH lt x gt PRObe AUTOZero No Query Form Sets the TekVPI probe attached to channel x to zero where x is the channel number Group Vertical Syntax CH x PRObe AUTOZero EXECute Arguments Execute auto zeros the probe CH lt x gt PRObe COMMAND No Query Form Sets the state of the probe control specified with the first argument to the state specified with the second argument The commands and states are unique to the 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 123 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Arguments Examples attached probe type Only certain VPI probes support this command See the probe documentation for how to set these string arguments Vertical CH lt x gt PRObe COMMAND lt QString gt lt QString gt lt QString gt are quoted strings specifying the probe command and value to set in the probe attached to the specified channel CH1 PROBE COMMAND MODE 4 4 1 2 sets a Tektronix VPI DPG probe to the 4 4V1MHz mode CH1 PROBE COMMAND OUTPUT ON turns the output of a Tektronix VPI DPG probe
553. the DPO4AUDIO module when working with 125 Left Justified LJ Right Justified RJ or TDM bus signals Install the DPO4AUTO or DPO4AUTOMAX module when working with CAN or LIN bus signals Install the DPO4AUTOMAX module when working with FlexRay bus signals NOTE LIN and FlexRay work on DPO4000s with serial numbers greater than C020000 on all MSO4000s NOTE The parallel bus commands work with MSO4000 Series oscilloscopes only NOTE The Search Command Group and the Trigger Command Group also contain bus related commands Table 2 15 Bus Commands Commands Description BUS Returns the parameters for each bus BUS B 1 4 AUDio BITDelay Sets or returns the number of delay bits for the AUDIO bus BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio BITOrder Sets or returns the bit order for the AUDIO bus BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio CHANnel SIZe Sets or returns the number of bits per channel for the AUDIO bus BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio CLOCk POLarity Sets or returns the clock polarity for the AUDIO bus BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio CLOCk SOUrce Sets or returns the clock source waveform for the AUDIO bus BUS B lt 1 4 gt AUDio DATa POLarity Sets or returns the data polarity for the AUDIO bus BUS B 1 4 AUDio DATa SIZe Sets or returns the number of bits per word for the AUDIO bus 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 13 Command Groups 2 14 Table 2 15 Bus Commands cont Commands Descriptio
554. the MIL line frequency to 60 Hz POWER HARMONICS MIL LINEFREQUENCY might return POWER HARMONICS MIL LINEFREQUENCY 400 indicating that the MIL line frequency is set to 400 Hz POWer HARMonics MIL POWERLEVel Sets or returns the power level for calculating limits for MIL STD 1399 harmonics tests 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 257 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Group Power Syntax POWer HARMonics MIL POWERLEVel LOW HIGH POWer HARMOoni cs MIL POWERLEVe1 Arguments _ LOW specifies low power level for MIL STD 1399 harmonics tests HIGH specifies high power level for MIL STD 1399 harmonics tests Examples POWER HARMONICS MIL POWERLEVEL HIGH sets the MIL power level to High POWER HARMONICS MIL POWERLEVEL might return POWER HARMONICS MIL POWERLEVEL LOW indicating that the MIL power level is set to Low POWer HARMonics NR HARMonics Sets or returns the number of harmonics value ranging from 20 to 400 when the harmonics standard is NONe Conditions This command requires DPO4PWR application module Group Power Syntax X POWer HARMonics NR HARMonics lt NR3 gt POWer HARMoni cs NR HARMOni Cs Arguments NR3 is the number of harmonics Examples POWER HARMONICS NR HARMONICS 100 sets the number of harmonics to 100 POWER HARMONICS NR_HARMONICS might return POWer HARMOn i Cs NR HARMONICS 40 in
555. the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern W HEn LESSLimit command or longer than the specified time set by the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn MORELimit command SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn LESSLimit Sets or returns the maximum time that the selected pattern may be true and still generate an A logic pattern search to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Group Search Syntax SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn LESSLimit lt NR3 gt SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern WHEn LESSL imi t Arguments NR3 specifies the maximum amount of time to hold the pattern true SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn MORELimit Sets or returns the minimum time that the selected pattern may be true and still generate A logic pattern search to place a mark lt x gt is the search number 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 369 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Arguments Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern WHEn MORELimit lt NR3 gt SEARCH SEARCH X LOGIC PATtern WHEn MORELimi t lt NR3 gt specifies the minimum amount of time to hold the pattern true SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold CH lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the channel threshold level for a logic trigger search to determine where to place a mark S
556. the data string in Bytes SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa VALue Conditions Group Syntax Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for an RS 232 trigger search if the condition involves RX SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This command requires a DPO4COMP application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa VALue SEARCH SEARCH Xx TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa VALue SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI CONDition Conditions Group Sets or returns the search condition for a SPI trigger search SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Search 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 359 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Syntax Related Commands Arguments SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI CONDition 55 STARTof frame MISO MISOMOST SEARCH lt gt TRIGger A BUS B x SPI CONDition BUS B lt x gt SPI IDLETime BUS B lt x gt SPI FRAMING SS specifies a search based on the Slave Selection condition STARTOf frame is applicable when BUS B x SPI FRAMING is set to IDLEtime When the trigger condition is set to STARTof frame the instrument triggers on the first SPI clock after an idle time when ther
557. the falling edge RISe specifies the rising edge Examples MEASUREMENT MEAS1 DELAY EDGE1 RISE specifies that the from waveform rising edge be used for the immediate delay measurement MEASUREMENT MEAS1 DELAY EDGE1 returns either RISE FALL MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt MAXimum Query Only Returns the maximum value found for this measurement since the last statistical reset Measurements are specified by x which ranges from 1 through 4 Group Measurement Syntax X MEASUrement MEAS x MAXimum Examples MEASUREMENT MEAS3 MAXIMUM might return MEASUREMENT MEAS3 MAXIMUM 4 18E 9 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt MEAN Query Only Returns the mean value accumulated for this measurement since the last statistical reset Measurements are specified by x which ranges from 1 through 4 Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS x MEAN Examples MEASUREMENT MEAS1 MEAN might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 MEAN 514 71E 09 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt MINImum Query Only Returns the minimum value for this measurement since the last statistical reset Measurements are specified by x which ranges from 1 through 4 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 219 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Examples Measurement MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt MINImum MEASUREMENT MEAS1 MINIMUM might return MEASUREMENT 51 1 75 09 MEASUrement MEAS lt x
558. the previous one Commands at a higher level in the tree may affect those at a lower level The leading colon always returns you to the base of the command tree 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Command Syntax Queries Queries cause the oscilloscope to return status or setting information Queries have the structure E lt Header gt m lt Header gt lt Space gt lt Argument gt lt Comma gt lt Argument gt You can specify a query command at any level within the command tree unless otherwise noted These branch queries return information about all the mnemonics below the specified branch or level Headers Use the HEADer command to control whether the oscilloscope returns headers as part of the query response If header is on the query response returns command headers then formats itself as a valid set command When header is off the response includes only the values This may make it easier to parse and extract the information from the response The table below shows the difference in responses Table 2 3 Comparison of Header Off and Header On Responses Query Header Off Header On TIME 14 30 00 TIME 14 30 00 ACQuire NUMAVg 100 ACQUIRE NUMAVG 100 Command Parts Header Comma go SAVe WAVEform CH1 REF3 Mnemonics Space Arguments Clearing the oscilloscope You can clear the Output Queue and reset the oscilloscope to accept a new command or query by using the selected Device Cl
559. the program ACQUIRE STATE ON Acquiring Waveform Data MEASUREMENT IMMED VALUE re OO Processing Time Figure 3 8 Processing Sequence With Synchronization You can use four commands to synchronize the operation of the oscilloscope with your application program WAI BUSY OPC and OPC Using the WAI Command The WAI command forces completion of previous commands that generate an OPC message No commands after the WAI are processed before the OPC message s are generated 3 8 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Status and Events The same command sequence using the WAI command for synchronization looks like this Set up conditional acquisition ACQUIRE STATE OFF SELECT CH1 ON HORIZONTAL RECORDLENGTH 1000 ACQUIRE MODE SAMPLE ACQUIRE STOPAFTER SEQUENCE Acquire waveform data ACQUIRE STATE ON Set up the measurement parameters MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE AMPLITUDE MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE CH1 Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the measurement WAI Take amplitude measurement MEASUREMENT IMMED VALUE The controller can continue to write commands to the input buffer of the oscilloscope but the commands will not be processed by the oscilloscope until all in process OPC operations are complete If the input buffer becomes full the controller will be unable to write commands to the buffer This can cause a time out
560. the source waveform POWer HARMonics SOURce Sets or returns the source waveform for harmonics tests POWer HARMonics STANDard Sets or returns the standard for harmonics tests POWer INDICators Sets or returns the state of the measurement indicators for the power application POWer MODulation SOUrce Sets or returns the source waveform for modulation tests POWer MODulation TYPe Sets or returns the modulation type POWer QUALity APPpwr Returns the apparent power measurement POWer QUALity DISplay APPpwr Sets or returns the display state for the apparent power readout POWer QUALity DISplay FREQuency Sets or returns the display state for the frequency readout POWer QUALity DISplay IC RES Tfactor Sets or returns the display state for the current crest factor readout POWer QUALity DISplay IRMS Sets or returns the display state for the rms current IRMS readout POWer QUALity DISplay PHASEangle Sets or returns the display state for the phase angle readout POWer QUALity DISplay POWERFACtor Sets or returns the display state for the power factor readout POWer QUALity DISplay REACTpwr Sets or returns the display state for the reactive power readout 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 35 Command Groups 2 36 Table 2 28 Power Commands cont Command Description POWer QUALIity DISplay TRUEpwr Sets or returns the display state for the tru
561. the specified bus to 8 bits per word BUS B1 SPI DATA SIZE might return BUS B1 SPI DATA SIZE 8 indicating the data size for the SPI B1 bus is 8 bits per word 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order BUS B lt x gt SPI FRAMING Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the type of SPI framing Bus BUS B lt x gt SPI FRAMING SS IDLEtime BUS B lt X gt SPI FRAMING SS specifies framing by SS non 2 wire IDLEtime specifies framing by Idle Time 2 wire BUS B1 SPI FRAMING SS sets the SPI framing type to SS BUS B1 SPI FRAMING IDELTIME might return BUS B1 SPI FRAMING IDELTIME indicating the SPI framing type is set to IDLETIME BUS B lt x gt SPI IDLETime Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the SPI bus idle time in seconds for the specified bus Bus BUS B lt x gt SPI IDLETime lt NR3 gt BUS B lt x gt SPI IDLETime NR3 is the SPI bus idle time in seconds 5 1 5 100 0000E 9 sets the idle time to 100 ns BUS B1 SPI IDLETIME might return BUS B1 SPI IDLETIME 100 0000E 9 indicating the idle time 15 set to 100 ns BUS B lt x gt SPI SELect SS POLARity Conditions Sets or returns the SPI SS polarity for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 109 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Ord
562. the specified digital channel lt x gt where x is the channel number This command species the logic value used when the pattern trigger detects the threshold level 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Trigger TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern INPut D lt x gt HIGH LOW X TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut D lt x gt HIGH specifies a logic high LOW specifies a logic low X specifies a do not care state TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the pattern logic condition on which to trigger the oscilloscope Trigger TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern WHEn TRUe FALSe LESSThan MOREThan EQUal UNEQual TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern WHEn TRUE triggers the oscilloscope when the pattern becomes true FALSE triggers the oscilloscope when the pattern becomes false LESSTHAN triggers the oscilloscope when the input pattern 18 true for a time period less than the time period specified in TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN DELTATIME MORETHAN triggers the oscilloscope when the input pattern is true for a time period more greater than the time period specified in TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN DELTATIME EQUAL triggers the oscilloscope when the input pattern is true for a time period equal to the time period specified in TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN DELTATIME within a 5 tolerance UNEQUAL triggers the oscilloscope whe
563. the value specified by SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue LESSEQual searches for bus data less equal to the value specified by SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue EQual searches for bus data equal to the value specified by SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa SiZe 2 336 Conditions Group Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for a CAN search if the search condition is DATA or IDANDDATA SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B x is the bus number This command requires DPO4AUTO application module Search 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH X TRIGger A BUS B X CAN DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS lt gt CAN DATa SIZe NRI is the data string length in bytes SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue Conditions Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for a CAN search if the search condition is ID or IDANDDATA SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and lt gt is the bus number This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B x CAN DATa VALue bin SEARCH SEARCH
564. through a power cycle NOTE enable the PON Power On event to generate a Service Request send PSC 0 use the DESe and ESE commands to enable PON in the DESER and ESER and use the SRE command to enable bit 5 in the SRER Subsequent power on cycles will generate a Service Request The PSC command controls the Enable Registers contents at power on Sending PSC 1 sets the Enable Registers at power on as follows The oscilloscope stores query responses in the Output Queue and empties this queue each time it receives a new command or query message after an EOM The controller must read a query response before it sends the next command or query or it will lose responses to earlier queries CAUTION When a controller sends a query an lt gt and a second query the oscilloscope normally clears the first response and outputs the second while reporting a Query Error QYE bit in the ESER to indicate the lost response A fast controller however may receive a part or all of the first response as well To avoid this situation the controller should always read the response immediately after sending any terminated query message or send a DCL Device Clear before sending the second query 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Status and Events Event Queue Event Queue stores detailed information on up to 33 events If than 32 events stack up in the Event Queue the 32nd event is replaced by event code
565. tical Order TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER CRC might return TRIGGER 1 XXXXXXXXXXX indicating the CRC portion of binary header string is don t care TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER CYCLEcount Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the cycle count portion of the binary header string to be used for FLEXRAY trigger Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER CYCLEcount lt QString gt TRIGger A BUS lt gt FLEXray HEADER CYCLECOount lt QString gt is a quoted string that is the cycle count portion of the binary header string TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER CYCLECOUNT 110010 sets the cycle count to 110010 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER CYCLECOUNT might return TRIGGER A BUS Bl FLEXRAY HEADER CYCLECOUNT XXXXXX indicating the cycle count is don t care TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER FRAMEID Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the frame id portion of the binary header string to be used for FLEXRAY trigger Trigger TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray HEADER FRAMEID lt QString gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER FRAMEID lt QString gt is a quoted string that is the frame id portion of the binary header string TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER FRAMEID 11001100101 5 16 the frame id portion of the binary header string to 11001100101 504000 and DPO4000 Series
566. tion Sets or returns the condition for an RS 232C trigger TRIGger A BUS B x RS232C RX DATa SIZe Sets or returns the length of the data string in Bytes for an RX RS 232 Trigger TRIGger A BUS B x RS232C RX DATa VALue Sets or returns the binary data string for an RX RS 232 trigger TRIGger A BUS B x RS232C TX DATa SIZe Sets or returns the length of the data string for a TX RS 232 trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa VALue Sets or returns the binary data string for an RS 232 trigger if the trigger condition involves TX TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI CONDition Sets or returns the trigger condition for SPI triggering TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa IN MISO VALue Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for SPI trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa OUT MOSI VALue Sets or returns the binary data string used for the SPI trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa SlZe Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for SPI trigger TRIGger A BUS SOUrce Sets or returns the source for a bus trigger TRIGger A EDGE Returns the source coupling and source for the A edge trigger TRIGger A EDGE COUPling Sets or returns the type of coupling for the A edge trigger TRIGger A EDGE SLOpe Sets or returns the slope for the A edge trigger TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce Sets or returns the source for the A edge trigger 80
567. to on lt NR1 gt 0 sets the amps via volts function to off Any other value sets the function to on CH1 AMSVIAVOLTS ENABLE ON turns on the amps via volts feature for channel l CH lt x gt AMPSVIAVOLTs FACtor Group Syntax Arguments Examples CH lt x gt BANdwidth Group 2 118 Sets or returns the amps via volts factor for the specified channel Vertical CH lt x gt AMPSVIAVOLTS FACtor lt NR3 gt CH lt x gt AMPSVIAVOLTS FACtor lt NR3 gt is a double precision ASCII string that represents the amps via volts factor CH1 AMPSVIAVOLTS FACTOR 15 5 sets the amps via volts factor for channel 1 to 15 5 Sets or returns the selectable low pass bandwidth limit filter for channel lt x gt where x is the channel number Vertical 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Arguments Examples CH lt x gt COUPling Group Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CH x BANdwi dth TwEnty TWOf i fty FULT lt NR3 gt CH x BANdwi dth TWEnty sets the upper bandwidth limit of channel x to 20 MHz TWOf i fty sets the upper bandwidth limit of channel x to 250 MHz FULT disables any optional bandwidth limiting The specified channel operates at 15 maximum attainable bandwidth NR3 is a double precision ASCII string The oscilloscope rounds this value to an available bandwidth using geometric rounding and then uses this value to set t
568. trigger circuitry is not looking to generate a trigger event Trigger TRIGger A HOLDoff TRIGger A HOLDoff TIMe TRIGGER A HOLDOFF might return TRIGGER A HOLDOFF TIME 900 0000E 09 BY DEFAULT indicating that the A edge trigger holdoff time by default is 900 ns TRIGger A HOLDoff TIMe Group Sets or returns the A trigger holdoff time Trigger 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 427 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments Examples TRIGger A LEVel Group Syntax Arguments Examples TRIGger A HOLDOoff TIMe lt NR3 gt TRIGger A HOLDoff TIMe lt NR3 gt specifies the holdoff time in seconds The range is from 20 ns through 8 0 s TRIGGER A HOLDOFF TIME might return TRIGGER A HOLDOFFTIME 1 2000E 06 indicating that the A trigger holdoff time is set to 1 2 TRIGGER A HOLDOFF TIME 10 sets the A trigger holdoff time to 10 s Sets or returns the trigger level for the A trigger Trigger TRIGger A LEVel ECL TTL lt NR3 gt TRIGger A LEVel ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4V lt NR3 gt specifies the trigger level in user units usually volts TRIGGER A LEVEL might return TRIGGER A LEVel 1 3000E 00 indicating that the A edge trigger is set to 1 3 V TRIGGER A LEVEL TTL sets the edge trigger to TTL high level which is 1 4 V TRIGger A LEVel AUXin Group Syntax 2 428 Set
569. trigger data value TRIGGER A BUS BI LIN DATA VALUE 11001101 sets the data value to 11001101 TRIGGER A BUS BI1 LIN DATA VALUE might return 1 1 VALUE XXXXXXXX indicating the data value is don t care TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN ERRTYPE Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the error type be used for LIN trigger Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN ERRTYPE SYNC PARI ty CHecksum HEADertime RESPtime FRAMetime TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN ERRTYPE SYNC sets the LIN error type to SYNC PARity sets the LIN error type to parity CHecksum sets the LIN error type to checksum HEADertime sets the LIN error type to header time RESPtime sets the LIN error type to response time FRAMetime sets the LIN error type to frame time TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN ERRTYPE CHECKSUM sets the LIN error type to checksum 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 419 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN ERRTYPE might return TRIGGER A BUS Bl LIN ERRTYPE SYNC indicating the LIN error type 18 SYNC TRIGger A BUS B x LIN IDentifier VALue Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the binary address string used for LIN trigger if the trigger condition is ID or IDANDDATA Trigger TRIGger A BUS B x LIN IDentifier VALue Qstring TRIGger A BUS B x LIN IDentifier VALue Qstring is the binary a
570. trigger vertical Y units value Trigger TRIGger EXTernal YUNIts TRIGGER EXTERNAL YUNITS might return TRIGGER EXTERNAL YUNITS y if the vertical unit is volts Query Only Returns the trigger frequency in hertz if available If the trigger frequency is not currently available the IEEE Not A Number NaN 99 10E 36 value is returned The maximum precision of the returned frequency is 12 digits Trigger TRIGger FREQuency TRIGGER FREQUENCY might return TRIGGER FREQUENCY 99 10 36 indicating that the trigger frequency is not available TRIGger STATE Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Returns 2 472 Returns the current state of the triggering system Trigger TRIGger STATE TRIGger A MODe ARMED indicates that the oscilloscope is acquiring pretrigger information AUTO indicates that the oscilloscope is in the automatic mode and acquires data even in the absence of a trigger 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order READY indicates that all pretrigger information has been acquired and that the oscilloscope is ready to accept a trigger SAVE indicates that the oscilloscope is in save mode and is not acquiring data TRIGGER indicates that the oscilloscope triggered and is acquiring the post trigger information Examples TRIGGER STATE might return TRIGGER STATE ARMED indicating that the pretrigger data is being acquired TST Q
571. ttom menu buttons where lt x gt 1 for the left most bottom menu button and lt x gt 7 for the right most bottom menu button B lt x gt Bus select buttons where x 1 through 4 lt gt Channel select button where lt x gt 1 for channel 1 lt x gt 2 for channel 2 and so on CURsor Cursors button D15D0 00 015 button DEFaultsetup Default Setup button FINe Fine button FORCetrig Force Trig button HARDcopy Hardcopy button INTensity Intensity button MAGnify Magnify zoom button not the zoom pan knob MARK Mark Set Clear button MATh M button MENUOff Menu Off button MEASurement Measure button NEXt Next arrow button PAUse Play pause button PREv Previous arrow button REF R button RMENU lt x gt Screen side menu buttons where lt gt 1 for the top most side menu button and lt gt 5 for the bottom most side menu button RUnstop Run Stop button SAVEBUtton Save button SAVERecall Save Recall Menu button SEArch Search button SELect Select button SETTO50 Set to 50 button 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 179 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Examples Table 2 38 FPAnel PRESS arguments cont Argument Description SINGleseq Single button TESt Test button TRIGger Trigger Menu button UTILity Utility button FPANEL PRESS AUTOSET executes the oscilloscope Autoset function FPAnel TURN No Query Form 2 180 Group Syntax Arguments Si
572. turn CURSOR VBARS DELTa 1 0640E 00 indicating that the time between the vertical bar cursors is 1 064 s CURSor VBArs HPOS lt x gt Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Returns Examples 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Returns the vertical value of the specified vertical bar ticks for cursor lt x gt Cursor CURSor VBArs HPOS x CURSor VBArs UNIts x specifies the cursor Valid values are 1 and 2 NR3 indicates the value of one of the ticks The units are the same as the selected waveform CURSOr VBArs HPOS2 might return CURSOR VBARS HPOS2 100E 3 indicating the waveform value where the cursor intersects it is 0 100 2 137 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order CURSor VBArs POSITION lt x gt Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Returns Examples CURSor VBArs UNIts Group Syntax Arguments 2 138 Sets or returns the horizontal position for the specified vertical bar cursor The cursor is specified by lt x gt which can be or 2 Values are with respect to trigger position or the zero reference point for the designated waveform if horizontal units are not set to time Use the CURSor VBArs UNIts command to specify units Cursor CURSor VBArs POSITION lt x gt lt NR3 gt CURSOr VBArs POSITION lt x gt CURSor VBArs UNIts lt NR3 gt specifies the cursor position A floating point value with an exponent CURSOr VBArs POS
573. turn ACQuire MODe AVERAGE indicating that the displayed waveform is the average of the specified number of waveform acquisitions ACQuire NUMACq Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Returns ACQuire NUMAVg Returns the number of waveform acquisitions that have occurred since starting acquisition with the ACQuire STATE RUN command This value is reset to zero when any acquisition horizontal or vertical arguments that affect the waveform are changed The maximum number of acquisitions that can be counted is 232 1 Acquisition ACQui re NUMACq ACQuire S TATE ACQuire NUMACq might return ACQUIRE NUMACQ 350 indicating that 350 acquisitions have occurred since executing an ACQuire STATE RUN command Sets or returns the number of waveform acquisitions that make up an averaged waveform Use the ACQuire MODe command to enable the Average mode Sending this command is equivalent to turning a multipurpose knob to enter the number of waveform acquisitions to average 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 71 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples ACQuire STATE 2 72 Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Acquisition ACQuire NUMAVg lt NR1 gt ACQui re NUMAVg ACQuire MODe lt NR1 gt is the number of waveform acquisitions to average The range of values is from 2 to 512 in powers of two ACQUIRE NUMAVG 16 specifies that
574. turns the current mark position Group Mark 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 193 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments MARK NEXT PREVious MARK NEXT moves to the next reference mark on the right PREVious moves to the next reference mark on the left MARK CREATE No Query Form Group Syntax Arguments Creates a mark on a specified waveform or all waveforms in a column Mark MARK CREATE lt gt lt gt REF x DIGi tal COLUMN CH x creates the mark on a channel waveform where x is the channel number MATH creates the mark on the math waveform B lt x gt creates the mark on a bus waveform where x is the bus number REF x creates the mark on a reference waveform where x 1s the reference waveform number DIGital creates the mark on a digital waveform An error will result if no digital channel 18 turned on COLUMN creates marks on all waveforms in the current zoom pixel column MARK DELEte No Query Form Group Syntax Arguments 2 194 Deletes a mark on a particular waveform all waveforms in a column the selected mark or all marks Mark MARK DELEte CH x MATH B x REF x DIGi tal COLUMN CH x deletes the mark on a channel waveform where x is the channel number MATH deletes the mark on the math waveform B lt x gt deletes the mark on a bus waveform where x is the bus nu
575. turns the bus for a serial search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A EDGE SLOpe Sets or returns the slope for an edge search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce Sets or returns the source waveform for an edge search 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Search Commands cont Command Command Groups Description SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LEVel Sets or returns the level for an edge search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LEVel lt gt Sets or returns the level for an edge search of the specified channel SEARCH SEARCH lt sx gt TRIGger A LEVel MATH Sets or returns the math waveform level for edge search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel REF lt x gt Sets or returns the reference waveform level for edge search SEARCH SEARCH lt sx gt TRIGger A LOGIc FUNCtion SEARCH SEARCH lt sx gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CH lt x gt Sets or returns the logic operator for the logic search Sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for the logic search SEARCH SEARCH lt sx gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk EDGE Sets or returns whether the clock edge is rise or fall for a logic search SEARCH SEARCH lt sx gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk SOUrce Sets or returns the clock source definition for logic search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut D lt x gt Sets or returns the criteria for a logic search to determine where to pl
576. ual to the qualifier value TRIGGER 1 QUALIFIER LESSTHAN sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the data is less than the qualifier value TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN DATA QUALIFIER might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN DATA QUALIFIER THAN indicating that the oscilloscope is set to trigger when the data is than the qualifier value TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa SiZe Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes for a CAN trigger if the condition is DATA or IDANDDATA Applies to bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa SIZe NRI is the length of the data string in bytes TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue Conditions Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for a CAN trigger if the trigger condition is ID or IDANDDATA Applies to bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 399 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Arguments Examples Trigger TRIGger A BUS B x CAN DATa VALue lt QString gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue lt QString gt is the CAN data value in binary format The only allowed characters in the QString are 0
577. uency display POWER QUALITY DISPLAY FREQUENCY 1 turns on the frequency readout display POWER QUALITY DISPLAY FREQUENCY might return POWER QUALITY DISPLAY FREQUENCY 0 indicating that the frequency readout display is off POWer QUALity DISplay ICRESTfactor Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the display state for the current crest factor readout This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer QUALity DISplay ICRESTfactor OFF ON 0 1 POWer QUALity DISplay ICRESTfactor OFF or 0 turns off the current crest factor display ON or turns on the current crest factor display POWER QUALITY DISPLAY ICRESTFACTOR 1 turns on the current crest factor display POWER QUALITY DISPLAY ICRESTFACTOR might return POWER QUALITY DISPLAY ICRESTFACTOR 0 indicating that the current crest factor display is off POWer QUALity DISplay IRMS 2 272 Sets or returns the display state for the rms current readout 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer QUALity DISplay IRMS OFF ON 0 1 POWer QUALity DISplay IRMS OFF or 0 turns off the rms current display ON or 1 turns on the rms current display POWER QUALITY DISPLAY IRMS 1 turns on the rms current display POWER QUALI
578. uery Only Returns the cursor Y rectangular units Group Cursor Syntax CURSor xY RECTangular Y UNIts CURVe Transfers waveform data to and from the oscilloscope in binary or ASCII format Each waveform transferred includes a waveform preamble which contains the data format scale and associated information For analog waveforms the CURVe query transfers data from the oscilloscope The data source is specified by the DATa SOUrce command The first and last data points are specified by the DATa STARt and DATa STOP commands The oscilloscope returns data from the last acquisition if the source is a channel waveform that 1s being previewed The data does not reflect the acquisition preview parameters The user should always follow acquisition parameter changes with a single sequence OPC command prior to CURVe to ensure the return data reflects the new acquisition parameters The CURVe command transfers waveform data to the oscilloscope The data is stored in the reference memory location specified by DATa DESTination starting with the data point specified by DATa STARt Only one waveform can be transferred at a time The waveform will only be displayed if the reference is displayed NOTE Transferring large volumes of data to or from the oscilloscope takes time ASCII waveform transfer is very inefficient Group Waveform Transfer Syntax CURVe lt Block gt lt asc curve gt DIGtal CURVe Related Commands DATa DESTin
579. uery Only Tests self test the interface and returns a 0 Group Miscellaneous Syntax TST Examples 757 always returns 0 UNLock No Query Form Unlocks the front panel The command is equivalent to LOCk NONe Group X Miscellaneous Syntax UNLock ALL Related Commands Arguments Examples USBDevice CONFigure ALL specifies that all front panel buttons and knobs are unlocked UNLOCK ALL unlocks all front panel buttons and knobs Enables or disables the rear USB port for use with Pictbridge printers 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 473 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Group PictBridge Syntax USBDevice CONFigure DISabled IMAge USBTmc USBDevice CONFigure Arguments DISabled disables the rear USB port IMAge enables the rear USB port as an SIC device USBTmc enables the rear USB port as a USBTMC device Examples USBDEVICE CONFIGURE IMAGE enables the rear USB port as an SIC device USBDEVICE CONFIGURE might return USBDEVICE CONFIGURE USBT indicating a USBTMC device USBTMC Query Only Returns the USBTMC information used by the USB hosts to determine the instrument interfaces Group X Miscellaneous Syntax USBTMC USBTMC PRODUCTID DECimal Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples 2 474 This query to returns the USBTMC product ID The product ID numbers vary for each instrument family and model Miscellaneous USBTMC PRODUCTID DECimal USBTMC
580. uery UNTERMINATED QYE bit 2 set 430 Query DEADLOCKED QYE bit 2 set 440 Query UNTERMINATED after indefinite response QYE bit 2 set 468 Knob Keypad value changed 472 Application variable changed The following table lists warning messages that do not interrupt the flow of command execution They also notify you of a possible unexpected results 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Status and Events Table 3 8 Execution Warning Messages EXE Bit 4 Code Message 528 Parameter out of range 532 Curve data too long Curve truncated 533 Curve error Preamble values are inconsistent 540 Measurement warning Uncertain edge 541 Measurement warning Low signal amplitude 542 Measurement warning Unstable histogram 543 Measurement warning Low resolution 544 Measurement warning Uncertain edge 545 Measurement warning Invalid in minmax 546 Measurement warning Need 3 edges 547 Measurement warning Clipping positive negative 548 Measurement warning Clipping positive 549 Measurement warning Clipping negative Table 3 9 Execution Warning Messages EXE Bit 4 Code Message 540 Measurement warning 541 Measurement warning Low signal amplitude 542 Measurement warning Unstable histogram 543 Measurement warning Low resolution 544 Measurement warning Uncertain edge 545 Measu
581. uestion mark the command is a query The header may begin with a colon character If the command is concatenated with other commands the beginning colon is required Never use the beginning colon with command headers beginning with a star lt Mnemonic gt This is a header subfunction Some command headers have only one mnemonic If a command header has multiple mnemonics a colon character always separates them from each other lt Argument gt This is a quantity quality restriction or limit associated with the header Some commands have no arguments while others have multiple arguments A lt space gt separates arguments from the header A comma separates arguments from each other Comma A single comma is used between arguments of multiple argument commands Optionally there may be white space characters before and after the comma Space A white space character is used between a command header and the related argument Optionally a white space may consist of multiple white space characters Commands cause the oscilloscope to perform a specific function or change one of the settings Commands have the structure Header Space Argument Comma lt Argument gt A command header consists of one or more mnemonics arranged in a hierarchical or tree structure The first mnemonic is the base or root of the tree and each subsequent mnemonic is a level or branch off
582. uments Examples This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer HARMonics SOURce VOLTage CURRent POWer HARMonics SOURCe VOLTage specifies voltage source waveform for harmonic tests CURRent specifies current source waveform for harmonic tests POWER HARMONICS SOURCE VOLTage sets voltage source for harmonic tests POWER HARMONICS SOURCE might return POWer HARMonics SOURCE CURRENT indicating that the harmonic source is set to current POWer HARMonics STANDard Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples POWer INDICators 2 268 Sets or returns the standard for harmonics tests This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer HARMonics STANDard NONe IEC MIL POWer HARMonics STANDard NONe sets no standard for harmonic tests IEC sets IEC 610003 2 standard for harmonic tests MIL sets MIL1399 standard for harmonic tests POWER HARMONICS STANDARD sets IEC standard for harmonic tests POWER HARMONICS STANDARD might return POWer HARMonics STANDard NONe indicating that no standard is set Sets or returns the state of the measurement indicators for the power application 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer INDICators OFF ON 0 1 POWer INDICators OFF or
583. uments Sets or returns the trigger type setting for a search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TYPe iEDGe SETHOld PULSEWidth RUNt TRANsition LOGIC BUS with the appropriate application module installed SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A TYPe RUNt triggers when a pulse crosses the first preset voltage threshold but does not cross the second preset threshold before recrossing the first The thresholds are 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 381 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order set with the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt and SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt commands PULSEWIdth triggers when a pulse is found that has the specified polarity and 15 either inside or outside the limits as specified by SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn LESSLimit and SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn MORELimit The polarity is selected using the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT POLarity command TRANSi tion triggers when a pulse crosses both thresholds in the same direction as the specified polarity and the transition time between the two threshold crossings is greater or less than the specified time delta SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the channel waveform upper threshold to determine
584. up Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the Parallel bus source lt x gt where x is the bus number Bus BUS B x PARallel cLOCK SOUrce 1 2 01102 103 04105 06107 08 09 0101011 012 013 014 015 BUS B lt x gt PARallel CLOCK SOUrce 1 4 or DO D15 specifies the channel to use as the Parallel bit source BUS B lt x gt PARallel WIDth Sets or returns the number of bits used for the width of the Parallel bus lt x gt where x is the bus number 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 101 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Arguments BUS B lt x gt POSition Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Bus BUS B lt x gt PARallel wIDth lt NR1 gt BUS B lt x gt PARal lel WIDth lt NR1 gt is the number of bits Sets or returns the position of the bus lt x gt waveform on the display where x is the bus number 1 through 4 This command requires a DPO4AUTO DPO4EMBD or DPO4COMP application module Bus BUS B lt x gt POSition lt NR3 gt BUS B lt x gt POSition lt NR3 gt specifies the position BUS B lt x gt RS232C BiTRate Conditions Group Syntax Arguments 2 102 Sets or returns the RS 232 bit rate for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4COMP application module Bus BUS B lt x gt RS232C BITRate lt NR1 gt BUS B lt x gt RS232C BITRate lt NR1 gt is the bi
585. up Measurement Syntax MEASUrement SNAPShot MEASUrement STATIstics No Query Form Clears all of the statistics accumulated for all periodic measurements MEASI through MEASA The query form returns statistic settings Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement STATIstics RESET MEASUrement STATIstics Arguments RESET clears the measurements MEASUrement STATIstics MODE Controls the operation and display of management statistics 2 234 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Measurement MEASUrement STATIstics MODE OFF ON MEASUrement STATIstics MODE MEASUrement STATIstics OFF turns all measurements off This is the default value ON turns on statistics and displays all statistics for each measurement MEASUREMENT STATISTICS MODE OFF turns statistic measurements off MEASUREMENT STATISTICS MODE might return MEASUREMENT STATISTICS MODE ON indicating that measurement statistics are turned on and all statistics are being displayed for each measurement MEASUrement STATIstics WElghting Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the time constant for mean and standard deviation statistical accumulations Measurement MEASUrement STATIstics WEIghting lt NR1 gt MEASUrement STATIStics WEIghting MEASUrement STATIstics MODE lt NR1 gt is the number
586. ur when the signal transition time is faster than the time set by TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFal1 DELTatime SLOwer sets the trigger to occur when the signal transition time is slower than the time set by TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFal1 DELTatime EQual sets the trigger to occur when the signal transition time is equal to the time set by TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFal1 DELTatime UNEQual sets the trigger to occur when the signal transition time is not equal to the time set by TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFal1 DELTatime TRIGGER A TRANSITION WHEN SLOWER sets the trigger to occur when the signal transition time is slower than the time set by the TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFallj DELTatime command TRIGGER A TRANSITION WHEN might return TRIGGER A TRANSITION WHEN FASTER Sets or returns the type of trigger Once you have set the trigger type you may also need to identify the associated trigger class For details on selecting Logic and Pulse trigger classes see TRIGger A LOGIc CLAss and TRIGger A PULse CLAss respectively Trigger TRIGger A TYPe EDGe LOGic PULSe BUS VIDeo TRIGger A TYPe TRIGger A EDGE TRIGger A LOGIc CLAss TRIGger A PULse CLAss 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order EDGe is the default trigger A trigger event occurs when a signal passes through a specified voltage level in a specified direction and is controlled by the
587. ure command saving the instrument setup and looking at the instrument or setup file Table C 1 Default values Command Default value ACQUIRE MAGNIVU 0 ACQUIRE MODE SAMPLE ACQUIRE NUMAVG 16 ACQUIRE NUMENV INFINITE ACQUIRE SAMPLINGMODE RT ACQUIRE STATE 1 ACQUIRE STOPAFTER RUNSTOP ALIAS STATE 0 AUXIN PROBE FORCEDRANGE 0 00E 00 AUXIN PROBE GAIN 1 BUS B1 CAN BITRATE 500000 BUS B1 CAN PROBE CANH BUS B1 CAN SAMPLEPOINT 50 BUS B1 CAN SOURCE CH1 BUS B1 DISPLAY FORMAT HEXADECIMAL BUS B1 DISPLAY TYPE BUS BUS B1 FLEXRAY BITRATE 10000000 BUS B1 FLEXRAY CHANNEL A BUS B1 FLEXRAY SIGNAL BDIFFBP BUS B1 FLEXRAY SOURCE CH1 BUS B1 12C ADDRESS RWINCLUDE 0 BUS B1 12C CLOCK SOURCE CH1 BUS B1 I2C DATA SOURCE CH2 BUS B1 LABEL Parallel BUS B1 LIN BITRATE 19200 BUS B1 LIN IDFORMAT NOPARITY BUS B1 LIN MAXBYTEDELIM 14 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual C 1 Appendix Factory Defaults Table C 1 Default values cont Command Default value BUS B1 LIN POLARITY NORMAL BUS B1 LIN SAMPLEPOINT 50 BUS B1 LIN SOURCE CH1 BUS B1 LIN STANDARD V2X BUS B1 PARALLEL BIT0 SOURCE DO BUS B1 PARALLEL BIT1 SOURCE D1 BUS B1 PARALLEL BIT10 SOURCE D10 BUS B1 PARALLEL BIT11 SOURCE D11 BUS B1 PARALLEL BIT12 SOURCE D12 BUS B1 PARALLEL BIT13 SOURCE D13 BUS B1 PARALLEL BIT14 S
588. urns alias expansion on When a defined alias 15 received the specified command sequence is substituted for the alias and executed lt NR1 gt 0 disables alias mode any other value enables alias mode ALIAS ON turns the alias feature on When a defined alias 15 received the specified command sequence is substituted for the alias and executed ALIAS might return ALIAS 1 indicating that the alias feature is on ALlas CATalog Query Only Group Syntax Examples ALlas DEFine 2 74 Returns a list of the currently defined alias labels separated by commas If no aliases are defined the query returns the string Alias ALIas CATalog ALIAS CATALOG might return the string ALIAS CATALOG SETUPT TESTMENUT DEFAULT showing that there are three aliases named SETUP1 TESTMENUI and DEFAULT Assigns a sequence of program messages to an alias label These messages are then substituted for the alias whenever it is received as a command or query provided that ALIas S TATE has been turned on The query form of this command returns the definitions of a selected alias NOTE Attempting to give two aliases the same name causes an error To give new alias the name of an existing alias the existing alias must first be deleted 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Alias ALIas DEFine lt QString
589. urns the selected waveform display controlled by the front panel on or off Group Vertical Syntax X SELect ON OFF Arguments turns the selected waveform display on OFF turns the selected waveform display off Examples SELECT might return the following SELECT BUSI1 0 BUS2 0 CH1 1 CH2 0 CH3 0 CH4 0 O REFL 0 2 0 0 0 CONTROL CH1 SELect BUS lt x gt This command turns on and off the display of the waveform for lt x gt where x is the bus number The query returns whether the channel is on or off but does not indicate whether it is the selected waveform Group Vertical 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 383 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Syntax SELect CH lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Examples SELect CONTROI 2 384 Group Syntax Arguments SELect BUS x lt NR1 gt OFF ON SELect BUS x Turns the display of the channel x waveform on or off where x gt is the channel number This command also resets the acquisition The query returns whether the channel is on or off but does not indicate whether it is the selected waveform Vertical SELect CH x ON OFF lt NR1 gt SELect CH x ON turns on the display of the specified waveform This waveform also becomes the selected waveform OFF turns off the display of the specified waveform lt NR1 gt 0 turns off the display of the specified waveform any other
590. ut bypass setting of a TekVPI probe attached to channel lt x gt where x is the channel number The probe must support input bypass for example TCP0001 This command is ignored if sent to an unsupported probe Group Vertical 2 128 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CH lt x gt PRObe SIGnal BYPass PASS CH lt x gt PRObe SIGnal BYPass sets the probe to Bypass mode PASS sets the probe to Pass mode CH lt x gt PRObe UNIts Query Only Group Syntax Examples CH lt x gt SCAle Group Returns a string describing the units of measure for the probe attached to channel lt x gt where x is the channel number Vertical CH lt x gt PRObe UNIts CH4 PROBE UNITS might return CHA PROBE UNITS V indicating that the units of measure for the probe attached to channel 4 are volts Sets or returns the vertical scale for the channel specified by x where x 1s the channel number Each waveform has a vertical scale parameter For a signal with constant amplitude increasing the Scale causes the waveform to be displayed smaller Decreasing the scale causes the waveform to be displayed larger Scale affects all waveforms but affects channel waveforms differently from other waveforms B For channel waveforms this setting controls the vertical size of the acquisition window as well as the display scale The range and resolution of scale v
591. w to generate an SRQ when TEKSECURE completes Bit 0 of the DESE Device Event Status Enable Register enables OPC to be reported to the SESR Standard Event Status Register DESE 255 Bit O of the ESER Event Status Enable Register enables OPC to be summarized in the ESB Event Status Bit of the SBR Status Byte Register ESE 255 Bit 5 of the SRE Service Request Enable Register enables the generation of SRQ when the ESB bit of the SBR becomes TRUE SRE 32 TEKSECURE When the TEKSECURE operation has completed the OPC bit of the SESR will be TRUE and SRQ will have been generated Sets or returns the time that the oscilloscope displays Miscellaneous TIME Qstring TIME DATE Qstring is a time in the form hh mm ss where hh refers to a two digit hour number mm refers to a two digit minute number from 00 to 59 and ss refers to a two digit second number from 00 to 59 TIME 14 00 00 sets the time to exactly 2 00 p m TIME might return TIME 14 05 17 indicating the current time is set to 2 05 p m and 17 seconds 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 391 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order TOTaluptime Query Only This command returns the total number of hours that the oscilloscope has been powered on since the nonvolatile memory was last programmed usually since the initial manufacturing process Group Miscellaneous Syntax ToTaluptime
592. wer switching loss calculation is set to 1 W POWer SWLoss CONDuction POWER MIN Query Only Returns the minimum conduction power for the switching loss calculation Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Group Power Syntax X POWer SWLoss CONDuction POWER MIN 2 300 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order POWER SWLOSS CONDUCTION POWER MIN might return POWER SWLOSS CONDUCTION POWER MIN 1 indicating that the minimum conduction power switching loss calculation is set to 1 W POWer SWLoss DISplay Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the display selection for switching loss results All measurements energy loss measurements or power loss measurements This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer SWLoss DISplay ALL ENERGYLosS POWERLOoSS POWer SWLoss DISp lay ALL displays both energy and power loss measurements in the results ENERGYLOss displays only energy loss measurements in the results 055 displays only power loss measurements in the results POWER SWLOSS DISPLAY ENERGYLOSS displays only energy loss measurements in the results POWER SWLOSS DISPLAY might return POWER SWLOSS DISPLAY ALL indicating that the results displays both energy and power loss measurements POWer SWLoss GATe POLarity Conditions Group Syntax Sets or retu
593. width measurement is the distance time between the middle reference default 50 amplitude points of a negative pulse The measurement is made on the first pulse in the waveform or gated region PDUty positive duty cycle is the ratio of the positive pulse width to the signal period expressed as a percentage It is measured on the first cycle in the waveform or gated region Positive Duty Cycle Positive Width Period x 100 PEDGECount is the count of rising edges PERIOd is the time required to complete the first cycle in a waveform or gated region Period is the reciprocal of frequency and is measured in seconds PHAse measures the phase difference amount of time a waveform leads or lags the reference waveform between two waveforms The measurement is made between the middle reference points of the two waveforms and is expressed in degrees where 360 represents one waveform cycle PK2Pk peak to peak finds the absolute difference between the maximum and minimum amplitude in the entire waveform or gated region This measurement is applicable only to the analog channels POVershoot is the positive overshoot value over the entire waveform or gated region This measurement is applicable only to the analog channels Positive Overshoot Maximum High Amplitude x100 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order PPULSECount is the count of positive pulses PwIdth positive wi
594. witching loss calculation is set to 1 W POWer SWLoss TOTal POWER MIN Query Only Conditions Group Syntax Examples Returns the minimum total power loss This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer SWLOSS TOTal POWER MIN POWER SWLOSS TOTAL POWER MIN might return POWER SWLOSS TOTAL POWER MIN 1 indicating that the minimum total power switching loss calculation is set to 1 W POWer SWLoss VCEsat Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns VCESAT value for use in switching loss calculations when the conduction calculation method is VCESAT This command requires DPO4PWR application module Power POWer SWLOSS VCESat lt NR3 gt POWer SWLOSS VCESat lt NR3 gt is the VCEsat switching loss calculation 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 313 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Examples POWer TYPe 2 314 Conditions Group Syntax Arguments POWER SWLOSS VCESAT 5 sets the VCEsat value to 5 0000 POWER SWLOSS VCESAT might return POWER SWLOSS VCEsat 2 0000 indicating that the VCEsat value is set to 2 0000 Sets or returns the power application measurement type This command requires a DPO4PWR application module Power POWer TYPe NONe QUALity SWITCHingloss SOA HARMonics RIPPle MODULationanalysis DESKew POWer TYPe NONe Use to set the measurement type to None QUAL i ty Use the power quality fun
595. x RS232C DISplaymode FRAme displays each frame as a single entity PACKET displays a group of frames terminated with a single frame defined by the BUS B lt x gt RS232C DELImiter command or the front panel BUS B lt x gt RS232C PARity Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the RS 232C parity for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4COMP application module Bus BUS B lt x gt RS232C PARity NONe EVEN ODD BUS B lt x gt RS232C PARity NONE specifies no parity EVEN specifies even parity ODD specifies odd parity BUS B lt x gt RS232C POLarity Conditions Group Syntax 2 104 Sets or returns the RS 232C polarity for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4COMP application module Bus BUS B lt x gt RS232C POLarity NORMal INVERTed BUS B lt x gt RS232C POLarity 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments NORMal sets the RS 232C bus polarity to positive INVERTed sets the RS 232C bus polarity to negative BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX SOUrce Sets or returns the RS 232 RX source for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number Conditions This command requires a DPO4COMP application module Group Bus Syntax BUS B x RS232C RX SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 Off BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX SOUrce Argument
596. x SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHOId DATa THReshold lt NR3 gt TTL SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A SETHold DATa THReshold 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 377 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Arguments TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V lt NR3 gt is the clock level in volts SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold HOLDTime Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the hold time setting for an setup hold trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A SETHOld HOLDTime lt NR3 gt SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A SETHOold HOLDTime lt NR3 gt specifies the hold time setting in seconds Positive values for hold time occur after the clock edge Negative values occur before the clock edge SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A SETHold SETTime Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the setup time setting for an setup hold trigger search to determine where to place a mark x is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A SETHOld SETTime lt NR3 gt SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A SETHold SETTime NR3 specifies the setup time for setup and hold violation triggering SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A SETHold THReshold CH x Conditions Group 2 378 Sets or returns the trigger search setup and hold lower threshold for the selected channel This helps determine where to plac
597. x gt STDdev Query Only 2 222 Group Syntax Returns the standard deviation of values accumulated for this measurement since the last statistical reset Measurements are specified by lt x gt the measurement slots from through 4 Measurement MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt STDdev 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples MEASUREMENT MEAS1 STDDEV might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 STDDEV 21 0E 12 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TYPe Sets or returns the measurement type defined for the specified measurement slot The measurement slot is specified by lt gt which ranges from 1 through 4 Digital channel measurements do not have a user settable midRef threshold If you specify a digital channel measurement that is not available on MSO models measurement error 2200 measurement system error occurs and 9 9e37 is returned Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TYPe AMP1itude AREa BURSt CARea CMEan CRMs DELay FALL FREQuency HIGH LOW MAX imum MEAN MINImum NDUty NEDGECount NOVershoot NPULSECount NwIdth PDUty PEDGECount PERIod PK2Pk POVershoot PPULSECount PwIdth RISe RMS MEASUrement MEAS x TYPe Arguments _ AMPlitude measures the amplitude of the selected waveform In other words it measures the high value less the low value measured over the entire waveform or gated region This measurement is
598. xtended addressing mode TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess VALue Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the binary address string used for a CAN trigger if the trigger condition is ID or IDANDDATA Applies to bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess VALue lt QString gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess VALue lt QString gt is up to 29 bits specifying the binary CAN identifier value The only allowed characters in the QString are 0 1 and X TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN IDENTIFIER VALUE 1011 sets the CAN trigger identifier value to 1011 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CONDition Group Sets or returns the trigger condition for FLEXRAY Trigger 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 401 Commands Listed Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments Examples TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CONDition SOF FRAMEType IDenti fier CYCLEcount HEADer DATA IDANDDATA EOF ERROR TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray CONDi tion SOF sets the FLEXRAY trigger condition to start of frame FRAMEType sets the FLEXRAY trigger condition to frame type IDentifier sets the FLEXRAY trigger condition to identifier CYCLEcount sets the FLEXRAY trigger condition to cycle count HEADer sets the FLEXRAY trigger condition to header DATA sets the FL
599. yed If the waveform 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments WFMOutpre NR_Pt Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order is not displayed the query form generates an error and returns event code 2244 This command is for compatibility with other Tektronix oscilloscopes Waveform Transfer wFMOutpre FRACTional DATa SOUrce Arguments are ignored Query Only Returns the number of points for the DATa SOUrce waveform that will be transmitted in response to a CURVe query The query command will time out and an error will be generated if the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce is not turned on Waveform Transfer WFMOutpre NR Pt CURVe DATa DATa STARt DATa STOP SAVe WAV Eform SAVe WAV Eform FILEFormat WFMInpre NR Pt WFMOUTPRE NR PT might return WFMOUTPRE NR PT 10000 indicating that there are 10000 data points to be sent WFMOutpre PT_Fmt Query Only Group Returns the point format for the outgoing waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command Returned values are either ENV which indicates envelope mode format in which the data 1s returned as a series of min max pairs or Y which indicates normal waveform points The query command will time out and an error will be generated if the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce is not turned on Waveform Transfer 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 49
600. yntax 2 200 Returns the math waveform horizontal measurement unit value Math MATH 1 HORizontal UNIts 804000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MATH HORIZONTAL UNITS might return MATH HORIZONTAL UNITS indicating that the math horizontal unit label for unknown values is the default question mark unit MATH 1 SPECTral MAG Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the units of the Spectral Magnification function in the math string Math MATH 1 SPECTral MAG LINEAr DB 1 SPECTral MAG LINEAR sets the SpectralMag units to linear DB sets the SpectralMag units to decibels 1 SPECTRAL DB sets the SpectralMag units for Math to decibels MATH1 SPECTRAL MAG might return MATH1 SPECTRAL MAG DB indicating that the SpectralMag units for Math are set to decibels MATH 1 SPECTral WINdow Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the window function for the spectral analyzer input data for the specified math waveform spectral window determines what the filter shape of the spectral analyzer will be in the frequency domain It can be described by a mathematical function that is multiplied point by point times the input data to the spectral analyzer Math MATH 1 SPECTral wrNdow RECTangu lar HAMming HANning BLAckmanharris MATH 1 SPECTral WINdow RECTangu lar window function
601. yntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Trigger TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray DATa OFFSet lt NR1 gt TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray DATa OFFSet lt NR1 gt is the offset of the data string in bytes A byte offset of 1 signifies don t care and no byte offset is used The instrument will trigger or match any byte value that fits TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA OFFSET might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA OFFSET 0 indicating that a data offset of 0 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA OFFSET might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA OFFSET 0 indicating that a data offset of 0 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa QUALIifier Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the FLEXRAY data qualifier Trigger TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray DATa QUAL i fier iLESSThan MOREThan EQUal UNEQual LESSEQual MOREEQual INrange OUTrange TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray DATa QUAL if ier LESSThan sets the FLEXRAY data qualifier to less than MOREThan sets the FLEXRAY data qualifier to greater than 1 sets the FLEXRAY data qualifier to eqaual UNEQual sets the FLEXRAY data qualifier to not equal LESSEQual sets the FLEXRAY data qualifier to less than or equal MOREEQual sets the FLEXRAY data qualifier to greater than or equal INrange sets the FLEXRAY data qualifier to in range ourrange sets the FLEXRAY data qualifier to out of range 504000 and DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 40

Tektronix DPO4000 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents